■ 

■ 



<*■ 






^M 




m 






■ 

* . i 



1 



■ 



i - 1 Hi 
Pi 



K 



[^ I BHH 



® 
fl 





■H r,. 






1 


Rgarcffl 

■ 




■HE 




■ 




WW WlHWW 



o.^ 1 ' l^H 



HHnBIHIIni 




'fllA^ 



VA 




4' 



i 



dV^ 



THALEIA: 

WOMAN: 
HER PHYSIOLOGY AND PATHOLOGY, 

IN CONNECTION WITH MATEENITY ; 

WITH 

HYGIENIC AND MEDICAL DIRECTIONS. 

ALSO, 

THE EFFECTS UPON OFFSPRING OF 

TEMPERAMENTAL INCOMPATIBILITY BETWEEN PARENTS ; 

WITH THE 

LAWS OF TRUE PHYSIOLOGICAL RE-PRODUCTION, 

AND 

DIRECTIONS POR THE SUBSEQUENT MANAGEMENT OF CHILDREN. 

WITH AN APPENDIX CONTAINING 

MEDICAL AND DIETARY FORMULAS, 

AND 

A CHAPTER ON THE CEREBELLUM. 



By MRS. T. H. KECKELER, M. D. 



CINCINNATI: 

PUBLISHED BY A. T. & T. H. KECKELER, 

No. 152 Broadway. 

1869. 



X 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1869, by 

Mrs. T. H. Keckeleb, 

In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States, for the Southern 
District of Ohio. 

STEREOTYPED AT THE FRANKLIN TYPE FOUNDRY, CINCINNATI. 



jEMirHforg 

TO 

j^ARRIOT K. j^UNT, M, D 



BOSTON, MASS. 



■ j 



oX*o 



The modest record which you have given to the world, of the preju- 
dice and obstacles which you encountered in the commencement of 
your medical studies and practice, of the energy and love which 
overcame them, and of the patience and faith which sustained you in 
the struggle, has drawn out my warmest sympathy and admiration, 
and strengthened the feelings of sisterly affection toward the one 
from whose example a large share of my early encouragement was 
derived. 

But, most of all, do I recognize the high value of your labors 
in that practical assertion and employment of the natural right of 
woman to use her gifts in the field of public usefulness, and for the 
common interests of humanity. 

In the earnest wish that others of our sex may be prompted by your 
example to follow in the path you have done so much to make less dif- 
ficult, because now proven to be possible, and with the warmest feel- 
ings of personal friendship and professional fellowship, I dedicate to 

you these pages. 

T. H. KECKELER. 



THALEIA. 



Thaleia is a Greek word, meaning femininity— womanhood— or, in a 
general sense, whatever pertains to woman. 



PREFACE. 



Ix the following pages the authoress has endeavored to present 
valuable and important information. Observing that the sources 
of physiological and medical knowledge are not open to those who 
have the most need of them, she has been prompted to give such 
a synopsis of the results of her own study, observation, and profes- 
sional experience, as she feels is needed and will be appreciated by 
the wives and mothers of the land. 

She holds fully to the right of women to receive such teachings, 
and to have full access to such knowledge, as will best fit them 
for the duties and responsibilities they must necessarily assume upon 
becoming wives and mothers — rights which, if not altogether denied 
them in the past, have rarely been tendered to them. She holds 
that the knowledge which is daily needed should not be kept from 
her who has the charge of a family, and remain in the hands of 
those who make its possession a source of professional profit. The 
avenues to information of such vital importance should be open to 
women as freely as they are to men. 

Her object has been to render the book a valuable one to the 

family, especially to the wife and mother, and incidentally to the 

'physician. Professional technicalities have been avoided as far as 

consistent, and it is hoped that some things, new and useful, have 

(in) 



iy PKEFACE. 

been given. The authoress believes that the medical treatment 
recommended will be found safe and efficient, her professional ex- 
perience fully justifying her confidence in it. 

She asks the special attention of mothers and teachers of the 
young to the chapter on the Cerebellum, in the belief that it pre- 
sents several facts and ideas in physiology which have a highly 
important bearing on the physical education of children, and which 
have not heretofore been made accessible to those who stand most 
in need of them. 

The work is confided to the public in the belief that its plain- 
ness of diction will not oifend any true man or woman, and in the 
hope that it will prove of benefit to many. She can not conscien- 
tiously withhold, nor is she disposed to regret, any thing she has 
herein written ; on the contrary, she only wishes that more freedom 
were permitted in delivering the truths that need utterance. 



BIOGRAPHICAL. 



Knowing that the readers of a hook generally have a desire to 
learn somewhat of the one who has written it, I take pleasure in 
presenting a brief outline of the pupilage and professional life of 
the authoress of Thaleia, derived from a personal knowledge and 
friendly intimacy of over twenty years. 

She was born near the city of Terre Haute, Indiana ; was left an 
orphan at an early age, and passed her childhood and girlhood in 
Butler County, Ohio, under the adoption and care of a family whose 
members were particular friends of her father. Her first marriage 
was to Edward Kinsey, Esq., of Cincinnati, who was at that time, 
and for many years after, the only extensive manufacturer of silver- 
ware in the West. 

In passing through the usual experiences of maternity, she real- 
ized how little she was prepared, by education, to protect the health 
of herself and family. With the desire and necessity for knowledge 
that would enable her to do this, came the determination to possess 
it. Though progress was slow and uncertain at first, for want of 
teachers and proper books, yet, by continuous effort and close ob- 
servation, she succeeded in acquiring, in a few years, a very useful 
stock of physiological and medical knowledge, which she applied 
with benefit to her family, and to many others. 

A most desirable, but unexpected opportunity presented itself in 
1850, and, with the cordial approval, encouragement, and aid of her 
husband, but against the wishes and advice of every other relative, 
and with very little sympathy from most of her acquaintances, she 
commenced a regular course of medical study, her name having been 
enrolled as that of the first Western woman in the first Western col- 
lege that had the liberality to acknowledge the right of woman to 
receive a full medical education, and, at the same time, to afford 
her an opportunity to obtain it. She pursued her studies in all the 
requisite branches, during five years, and graduated with honor in 
the Medical Department of the Cincinnati Literary and Scientific 
Institute. 

She gave evidence of the practical nature of her character by 
attending to minor medical practice while she was pursuing her 

00 



VI BIOGRAPHICAL. 

studies, and by not unfrequently assuming a physician's responsi- 
bility in important and critical cases of sickness — in all of which 
her success was such as would have been creditable to a fully ex- 
perienced physician. 

She has not been content with the knowledge of medicine alone, 
but has made very considerable advances in many of the branches 
of natural science. She pursued the study of botany with more 
than usual ardor. Her collection of preserved plants, gathered and 
prepared by herself, is probably far superior to that of any other 
botanist in this section of the country. 

She formed the acquaintance of the late Prof. Powell in 1851, 
and soon became deeply interested in his teachings of physiology, 
phrenology, the human temperaments, and kindred sciences. The 
Professor speaks of her in his book on the Human Temperaments, 
published in 1856, thus: u She is essentially feminine in all the out- 
lines of her person and feelings, and yet her intellect has a mas- 
culine grasp. She has been a student upon this subject for several 
years, under our guidance. She is now familiarly and practically 
acquainted with it. She designates temperaments readily, and those 
who may desire information upon the very important subject of mar- 
riage compatability of constitution may safely obtain it from her. In 
this department of the subject she is, and has been, deeply inter- 
ested, and, with reference to it, she has rendered us important serv- 
ice in procuring the illustrations of this work. We have a very fa- 
vorable opinion of her abilities as a medical practitioner. She has 
labored to make herself useful, and has succeeded; but will succeed 
in a more eminent degree, if industry can effect it." Time has fully 
proven his prediction of her future success to have been a true one. 

The Professor selected her from among all his numerous pupils as 
the one most capable and worthy of wearing his mantle, and gave 
evidence of his confidence by bequeathing to her his entire scien- 
tifical collection. From the use she has thus far made of the be- 
quest, no one can doubt that she is entirely worthy to receive it. 

My position, for many years, as the head of an institution for the 
education of young ladies (at Walnut Hills, and at College Hill), has 
given me extensive opportunity of observing the great need of such 
information as is contained in Thaleia, and it is eminently proper 
that it should come from one of our own sex, who is competent, from 
education, experience, and observation, to render it, for only a woman 
can appreciate a woman's needs and a woman's rights in regard to 
her own physical organization. They who decide that a woman's 
sphere is in the domestic circle, in the rearing and education of those 
who will soon take our places in the busy concerns of life, should cer- 
tainly be willing that she should have every facility for properly per- 
forming these duties. They who are to be the guides in the future 
should first learn the proper path; and they who have traveled it and 
mapped it out, are best qualified to teach concerning it. 

Mrs. CATHARINE M. VAIL. 
Cincinnati, O., March, 1869. 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER I. 

MATERIAL SUBSTANCES AND MOTIVE POWERS. 

Page 13-17. 

1. Matter — its properties and qualities. 2. Elements. 3. Atoms. 
4. Compounds. 5. Motive powers. 6. Gravity. 7. Chemical 
affinity. 8. Magnetism. 9. Attractive forces. 10. Caloric. 
11. Electricity. 12. Light. 13. Diffusive forces. 



CHAPTER II. 

VITAL FORCES. 

Page 18-27. 

1. Recapitulation. 2. Vital forces — two classes — subdivisions. 
3. Organic bodies denned. 4. Inorganic bodies denned. 5. Com- 
position of organic bodies. 6. Human vital force. 7. Voluntary 
and involuntary action. 8. Effects — waste and repair. 9. Office 
of the vegetable world. 10. Analysis — proximates, ultimates. 
11. Ultimate elements of food. 12. Connection and dependence. 
13. Vital and chemical action compared. 14-20. Inorganic forces 
— their uses. 21. Uses of vital forces. 



CHAPTER III. 

INTELLECTUAL FACULTIES. 

Page 28—30. 

Three classes. 2. Intellect of animals. 3. Order of development. 
4. Requisites for correct reasoning. 5. Nature the proper guide 
in education. 

(™) 



Vlll CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER IV. 

BE-PRODUCTION. 

Page 31—33. 

1. Progeny like the parents. 2. Modes of re-production. 3. Sex uni- 
versal. 4. Sex in plants. 5. Crossings — hybrids. 6. Parental 
conditions affect progeny. 



CHAPTER V. 

HEALTH, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 
Page 34—40. 

First requisites for health. 2. Defective organizations. 3. Har- 
mony in development and in action. 4. Illustrative incident. 
5. Definition of health. 6. Repairs — why needed — how affected. 
7. Mixed diet best for man. 8. Exercise — defined. 9. House- 
keeping — its practical knowledge indispensable. 10. Clothing — 
its quantity and proper distribution. 11. Excess injurious. 
12. Moderation in all things. 



CHAPTER VI. 

DISEASE. 
Page 41—46. 

Definition. 2. Causes of disease— classification. 3. Effects pro- 
duced. 4. Confusion of ideas on the subject. 5. A slight cold. 
6. Fever and inflammation not disease. 7. Local effects of a 
"cold." 8. General effects — fever. 9. Other effects — congestion, 
etc. 10. Principles of treatment. 



CHAPTER VII. 

PHYSIOLOGY. 
Page 47—52. 

Secretory and excretory organs, and their offices. 2. Digestion. 
3. The heart — circulation of blood. 4. Assimilation of food. 
5. Perfect circulation, action, and repose. 6. Portal circulation 
— function of the liver. 7. Bile — its offices. 8. Functions of 
liver in foetal life. 9. Foetal circulation. 



CONTENTS. IX 

CHAPTER VIII. 

PHYSIOLOGY— Continued. 
Page 53—61. 

The lungs — their functions. 2. Interesting experiment. 3. What 
we exhale. 4. Air cells. 5. Importance of full respiration. 
6. Cause of nightmare. 7. Special importance of full breathing 
during gestation. 8. Ventilation. 9. Tight dressing. 10. Ani- 
mal heat. 11. Food— normal appetite a proper guide. 12. How 
to reduce fat. 13. Fat — lymph. 14. Sleep. 15. Duration of life. 
16. Vigor, and tenacity of life. 



CHAPTER IX. 

TEMPERAMENTAL COMPATIBILITY. 

Page 62—68. 

1. Healthy parentage not a perfect guarantee for healthy progeny. 
2. Grades of incompatibility. 3. Results of incompatibility. 
4. Ability or inability of children to resist or recover from dis- 
ease. 5. Interesting experiments on canary birds. 



CHAPTER X. 

PREPARATIONS FOR PARENTAGE. 

Page 69—74. 

1. What a child is at birth. 2. Organic peculiarities are fixed. 
3. Parents accountable. 4. What we cultivate, and why — what 
we neglect. 5. Defective offspring the result of violation of nat- 
ural law by parents. 6. Conditions requisite for favorable re- 
sults. 7. Results of obedience of natural law. 8. Illustrations. 
9. Organic and temporary conditions transmissible. 10. Pater- 
nal conditions and effects. 11. Maternal conditions and effects. 
12. Indirect paternal influence. 



CHAPTER XI. 

WOMAN'S NATURAL RIGHTS RELATIVE TO MATERNITY. 
Page 75—82. 
1 Introductory. 2. Woman's rights regarding maternity. 3. Restraint 
necessary. 4. Effects of excess on the husband. 5. Effects on 
the wife. 6. Effects on progeny. 7. Effects upon progeny of 



CONTENTS. 

excessive amative endowment in parents. 8. Results of full 
endowment and activity. 9. Three classes of abnormality. 
10. What parents confer upon offspring. 11. Means of control 
and restraint. 



CHAPTER XII. 

TOBACCO. 
Page 83—87. 
1. Chemical analysis. 2. Effects on the uninitiated. 3. Its effects 
on habitual users. 4. Its filthiness and annoyance. 5. Specific 
effects. 6. Effects on married females and progeny. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

MENSTRUATION. 
Page 88—94. 

Introductory. 2. First appearance. 3. Its nature. 4. Importance 
of regularity. 5. Premonitory symptoms. 6. Special care re- 
quired at this period. 7. Danger of neglect. 8. Danger of 
taking cold. 9. Other effects. 



CHAPTER XIY. 

DERANGEMENTS AND IRREGULARITIES OF MENSTRUATION. 
Page 95—103. 

1. Amenorrhoea — definition. 2. Its causes and symptoms. 3. Treat- 
ment. 4. Suppressed menstruation. 5. Causes and results. 6. Ef- 
fects of a sea voyage. 7. Dysmenorrhoea — definition and symp- 
toms. 8. Treatment. 9. Menorrhagia — definition. 10. Symptoms. 
11. Effects. 12. Treatment. 13. Green sickness. 14. Treatment. 
15. Vicarious menstruation. 16. Change of life. 17, 18. General 
and special directions. 



CHAPTER XV. 

LEUCORRHGEA, PROLAPSUS UTERI, AND RETROVERSION. 
Page 104—109. 

1. Leucorrhoea, or whites — symptoms. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Causes. 7. Pre- 
vention. 8. Treatment. 9. Falling of the womb. 10. Symptoms. 
11. Treatment. 12. Dry cupping. 13. Retroversion during preg- 
nancy. 14. Treatment. 



CONTENTS. XI 

CHAPTER XVI. 

PREGNANCY. 
Page 110-114. 

The signs of pregnancy. 2. Interesting cases of supposed preg- 
nancy. 3. The general symptoms which accompany pregnancy. 
4. Variations and absence of these. 5. Health during pregnancy. 
6. Natural involuntary selfishness, and its effects. 7. Effects of 
pregnancy upon different organizations. 8. Diseased females 
should avoid pregnancy — results to mother and offspring. 
9. Mother's marks. 



CHAPTER XVII. 

TREATMENT DURING PREGNANCY. 
Page 115-118. 

1. Indigestion, and treatment. 2. Morning sickness — causes, and 
treatment. 3. Special causes of same. 4. Symptoms in later 
stages of pregnancy — treatment. 5. Constipation and diarrhea. 
6. Headache. 7. Heartburn. 8. Piles. 9. Neuralgia — toothache. 
10. General remarks. 11. Acute disease during pregnancy — 
effects on mother and child. 12. Effect of pregnancy on acute 
disease. 13. Effect of pregnancy on chronic disease. 



CHAPTER XVIII. 

MISCARRIAGE-ABORTION-PREMATURE BIRTHS. 

Page 119-121. 

1. Definition of these terms. 2. Injurious effects to mother. 3. Pre- 
monitory signs. 4. Preventive treatment. 5. Incompatibility a 
frequent cause. 6. Certainty of miscarriage in such cases. 
7. Seven-months' births. 



CHAPTER XIX. 

NATURAL LABOR. 
Page 122-132. 
1. The duration of pregnancy. 2. Short-term children — probability 
of living. 3. Of prolonged gestation. 4. Premonitory signs of 



Xll CONTENTS. 

labor. 5. Preparations for labor. 6, 7. The duty of attendants 
at this period. 8. Meddlesome midwifery. 9. Arrangement of 
the bed. 10. Position during delivery. 11. The bed after deliv- 
ery. 12. False pains — cause, and treatment. 13. Real labor 
pains — cause, and progress. 14. Presentations — varieties. 15. A 
natural presentation. 16. Irregular presentations. 17. Natural 
position of foetus. 18. Varieties of head presentations. 19. Face 
presentations. 20. Breech presentations. 21. Danger of irregu- 
lar presentation. 22. How to turn the child. 



CHAPTER XX. 

NATURAL LABOR— Continued. 

Page 133-140. 

Placentae praevia — description, danger, and treatment. 2. Report 
of a case of placentae praevia. 3. How placentae praevia may be 
known. 4. Can labor be painless? 5. A slow labor gives a 
rapid recovery — gestation in diseased females. 6. The prog- 
ress of natural labor. 7. Directions for attendants. 8. Atten- 
tions to newly-born child. 9. Attentions to mother. 10. Re- 
moval of placentae. 11. Hemorrhage — natural amount. 12. Band- 
age to mother. 13. Bandage to child. 14. Washing the child. 
15. Other attentions to child. 16. Protect the child from cold. 



CHAPTER XXI. 

VARIATIONS FROM NATURAL LABOR. 

Page 141-150. 

Hasty labor — directions. 2. Protracted labor — directions. 3. Con- 
cealed hemorrhage — flooding. 4. Treatment. 5. Case illustrat- 
ing. 6. Recapitulation. 7. Retained placentae. 8. Rupture of 
perineum. 9. Inversion of uterus. 10. Danger of removal of 
placentae by force. 11. A case of "professional murder." 12. Its 
effects upon the authoress. 13. "The after-birth grown fast" — 
explanation. 14. Puerperal convulsions, and treatment. 15. Case 
in illustration — results of different treatment. 16. Treatment. 
17. Prolapsus of cord. 



> 



CONTEXTS. xill 



CHAPTER XXII. 

30NDITION AND TREATMENT OF MOTHER AFTER CHILDBIRTH. 
Page 151-162. 

L. General and special directions. 2. The pulse — what it indicates. 
3. Neryous derangements. 4. After-pains — treatment. 5. The 
lochia, or after-flow. 6. Conditions of the special organs — "Linear 
albicantes" — healthy progress, and recovery. 7. Milk fever- 
puerperal fever. 8. Attention to the breasts. 9. Corded nipples. 
10. Sore nipples — causes. 11. Prevention. 12. Undeveloped 
nipples. 13. Treatment of sore nipples. 14. Retarded secretion 
of milk. 15. To prevent secretion of milk. 16. To "dry up" the 
milk. 17. Abscesses — caked breasts — causes. 18. Prevention. 
19. Treatment. 20. Oiling the breasts. 21. Attention to the 
bowels. 22. Leaving the bed. 23. Diet after parturition. 24. Pu- 
erperal, or child-bed fever — treatment. 



CHAPTER XXIII. 

ATTENTION TO CHILD. 
Page 163—171. 

1. Nursing — general and special directions. 2. Deformities from im- 
proper nursing. 3. Frequency of nursing. 4. Over-nursing — bad 
effects. 5. Why children cry so much. 6. Artificial food — cow's 
milk. 7. Milk and barley — Note — quality of milk. 8. The infant's 
sleeping. 9. Formation of habits. 10. Exercise for infants. 
11. Clothing. 12. Evacuations. 13. Habits of cleanliness. 
14. Bathing and washing. 15. Air — light — breathing — the bed — 
exercise. 16. Weaning. 17. Tongue-tie. 



CHAPTER XXIV. 



I 

INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 
Page 172-190. 
1. Sore mouth. 2. Colic. — " Three-months' colic." 3. Wind colic. 
4. Constipation. 5. Diarrhea — summer complaint — cholera in- 
fantum — dysentery. 6. Worms. 7. Hernia — rupture. 8. Urin- 
ary difficulties. 9. Teething — order of appearance. 10. Lancing 
the gums. 11. Ophthalmia — sore eyes. 12. Fever. 13. Measles 
— chicken-pox — varioloid — small-pox. 14. Scarlet fever. 15. Hoop- 
ing-cough. 16. Croup — the mild form. 17. Membraneous croup. 
18. Treatment. 19. Diphtheria, 20. Convulsions— fits — spasms. 
2 

t 



XIV CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER XXV. 

INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE— Continued. 
Page 191—204:. 

1. Inflammation of brain. 2. Tubercular meningitis— inflammation 
of coverings of brain, with tubercles. 3. Acute congestion 
of brain. 4. Passive congestion of brain- 5. Inflammation of 
lungs, bowels, etc. 6. Mumps. 7. Eruptions of the skin. 8. R-ose- 

| r ash — roseola. 9. Nettle-rash — urticaria. 10. Blush — erythema. 
II. Red-gum— strophulus. 12. Prickly heat— lichen. 13. Itch- 
scabies. 14. Hives. 15. Boils, pimples, etc. 16. Eruptions of 
the face. 17. Tetter — ringworm. 18. Scalled or scald-head. 
Or Accidents. — 19. Burns and scalds. 20. Cuts. 21. Sprains 
and bruises. 22. Inflamed wounds. 23. Blows and cuts upon 
the head. 24. Fainting. 25. Spasms from injuries. 26. To re- 
move insects, etc., from the ear. 27. For sudden pain internally. 
28. For frights. 29. Frozen limbs. 



CHAPTER XXVI. 

EMETICS. 

Page 207-227. 

Influence of emetics. 2. Their "modus operandi." 3. Effects upon 
fever and inflammation. 4, 5. Various forms of disease in which 
emetics are beneficial. 6. Purposes for which emetics are given. 

7. Mustard and salt as emetics ; other articles for prompt emesis. 

8. Lobelia inflata for emetic purposes — its properties and action. 

9. 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15. Cases in illustration. 16. Asarum cana- 
densis, capsicum, and other articles, as adjuncts — their properties 
and uses. 17. Lobelia not poisonous. 18. Medicinal preparations 
of lobelia. 19. Directions for preparing an emetic. 20. How to 
administer it. 21. Special directions — in headaches. 22. Spe- 
cial directions — in cold conditions. 23. Special directions — in 
fever. 24. When weak and debilitated. 25. Rules for compound- 
ing. 26. Treatment after an emetic. 27. Emetics for feeble and 
prostrated cases. 28. How to proceed in cramps and colic. 29. In 
bilious colic. 30. Case in illustration. 31. Length of time. 32. Ef- 
fects of lobelia in different cases — alarming symptoms. 33. Quan- 
tity of fluid to be used. 34. Stimulants — when to be used. 35. The 
principle involved in the use of lobelia. 36. Lobelia by enema. 



CONTENTS. XV 

37. Case in illustration. 38. Lobelia previous to surgical opera- 
tions, etc. 39. Lobelia to sores, wounds, etc. 40. Lobelia to burns, 
etc. 41. In delirium and insanity. 42. Asarum canadensis as an 
emetic. 48. Eupatorium perfoliatum (boneset). 44. Lobelia in hy- 
drophobia. 45. Lobelia in poisoning. 46. To relieve retching 
after an emetic. 47. Lobelia, in small doses, after an emetic. 



CHAPTER XXVII. 

BATHING— ENEMAS-POULTICES. 

Page 228—24=6. 

Section I Bathing. — 1. Importance of bathing. 2. Temperature of 
the water. 3. Kinds of baths. 4. When to use the cold-bath. 

5. The vapor-bath. 6. Benefits of vapor. 7. Temperature of the 
vapor. 8. Other directions. 9. Medicated vapor-baths. 10. The 
tepid sitz-bath. 11. The salt sitz-bath. 12. The sponge-bath. 
13. The wet-sheet pack. 14, 15. Special directions. 16. Cautions. 
17. Pickled towels. 

Section II. Enemas — Injections. — 1. Benefits from their use. 2. Quan- 
tity to be used. 3. Formula for common use, with directions. 
4. For constipation. 5. For dysentery. 6. For colic. 7. For 
inflammation of bowels, etc. 8. In rheumatism. 9. In nervous 
irritation and pain. 10. In cramps, spasms, etc. 11. In fevers. 
12. In prostration. 13. In insensibility, etc. 14. General remarks. 
j Section III. Poultices. — 1. General uses. 2. Uses in recent injuries. 
3. In inflammation. 4. In mortification, etc. 5. In ulcers, etc. 

6. For general effects. 7. How to make a poultice. 8. Simple 
poultices. 9. For inflamed sores. 10, 11. Special directions. 
12. Astringent poultices. 13. Antiseptic poultice— washing of 



CHAPTER XXVIII. 

MATERIA MEDICA. 
Page 247-279. 

1-6. Introductory and special remarks. 7, 8. Cathartics. — 9. Their 
use in constipation. 10. Esculent laxatives. 11. Bitter Laxa- 
tives. — 12. Yellow parilla. 13. Bitter-root. 14. Dandelion and 
boneset. 15. Common Cathartics. — 16. Bhubarb. 17. Castor- 
oil. 18. Butternut. 19. Cholagogues. — 20. Blackroot. 21. Man- 
drake. 22. Jalap and senna. Diuretics. — 23, 24. Introductory 
remarks. 25. Hemp-seed. 26. Onions. 27. Lobelia and asarum. 



XVI CONTENTS. 

28. Parsley. 29. Stimulating Diuretics. — 30. Queen of the 
meadow. 31. Juniper. 32. Indian hemp. 33, 34. Diaphoret- 
ics. — Introductory. 35. Classification. 36. How to select. 
37. Pleurisy-root. 38. Crawley. 39. Lobelia. 40. Asarum. 
41. Boneset. 42. Prickly-ash and ginger. 43. Spearmint, etc. 
44. Adjuncts. Expectorants. — 45. Introductory. 46. Lobelia, ip- 
ecac, bloodroot, etc. Antispasmodics. — 47. Introductory. 48. As- 
afetida. 49. Skull-cap. 50. Gelseminum. Stimulants. — 51, 52, 
53. General remarks. 54-59. Capsicum — its properties and uses. 
60. Ginger. 61. Prickly-ash. 62. Spicy Stimulants. — 63. Cam- 
phor. 64. Calamus. 65. Gum myrrh. 66. Balm of Gilead buds. 
Astringents. — 67. General remarks. 68. Crane's-bill. 69. Witch- 
hazel. 70. New Jersey Tea. 71. Bay berry. 72. Oak-bark. 73. Galls. 
74. Tannin. 75. Alum. Tonics. — 76. Definition, etc. 77. Simple 
tonics. 78. Directions. 79. When to use them. Quinine. 80. Treat- 
ment of fever and ague. 81. Its causes. 82. Its phenomena ex- 
plained. 83. Fever and ague districts — how to avoid it, etc. 
84. Classification of remedies. 85. Stimulants. 86. Relaxants. 
87. Nervines. 88. Astringents. 89. Diaphoretics. 90. Diuret- 
ics. 91. Emenagogues. 92. For burns. 



CHAPTER XXIX. 

MEDICAL FORMULAS AND DIRECTIONS. 

Page 280—297. 

Antispasmodic tincture. 2. Cough syrup, No. 1. 3. Cough syrup, 
No. 2. 4. Cough syrup, No. 3. 5. Compound lobelia syrup. 6. Ar- 
omatic syrup of rhubarb. 7. Bayberry and ginger infusion, for 
diarrhea. 8. Cinnamon syrup, for diarrhea. 9. For constipation 
of infants. 10. Alterative syrup. 11. Compound cathartic pow- 
der. 12. Emenagogue pills. 13. Emenagogue tincture. 14. Lin- 
iment for dysmenorrhcea. 15. Vinegar tincture of capsicum. 
16. Alterative pills. 17. Tonic infusion. 18. Laxative tonic. 
19. Spice bitters. 20. Fever and ague powders. 21, 22, 23. For 
menorrhagia. 24, 25. Pile ointment. 26. Parsley salve. 27. Eye 
lotion. 28. Tar plaster. 29. Tetter wash. 30. For jaundice. 
31. Cathartic pills. 32. Nervine pills. 33. Fever powders. 
34. Hollyhock conserve. 35. Sumach berries, in fever. 36. For 
chilblains. 37. To hasten suppuration. 38. Alterative syrup, 
for scrofula. 39. Rennet wine. 40. Gargle mixtures. 41. For 
gravel or stone in the bladder. 42. Syrup for consumption. 
43. Consumption beer. Advice to consumptives. 



CONTENTS. XV11 

CHAPTER XXX. 

DIRECTIONS FOR PREPARING SUITABLE DRINKS AND FOOD 
FOR THE SICK AND CONVALESCENT. 

Page 298—310. 

Page 298. Barley water — Toast water. Page 299. Gum-arabic water — 
Almond water — Apple water — Tamarind water — Cream of tartar 
water. Page 300. Oatmeal gruel — Corn gruel — Rice gruel — Rice 
jelly — Panada. Page 301. Sago — Salep — Arrowroot — Oatmeal 
flummery. Page 302. Potato flummery — Rice flummery — Tapioca 
jelly — Tapioca pudding. Page 303. Apple jelly — Rice jelly — Slip- 
pery-elm jelly — Iceland moss jelly. Page 304. Irish moss jelly — 
Gloucester jelly — Calves'-feet jelly, No. 1, No. 2. Page 305. Rye- 
meal mush — Vegetable soup — Chicken broth, No. 1. Page 306. 
Chicken broth, No. 2 — Mutton tea, No. 1 and No. 2 — Beef-tea. 
Page 307. Essence of beef, No. 1, No. 2 — Flaxseed tea — Slippery- 
elm tea — Lemonade. Page 308. Orangeade — Corn starch pud- 
ding — Veal tea — Blanc mange from corn starch. Page 309. Chicken 
jelly — Isinglass blanc mange — Gems — Minced beef. Page 310. 
Beef essence, to prepare rapidly — Sweet curd or junket. 



CHAPTER XXXI. 

THE CEREBELLUM. 

Page 311-352. 

The Cerebellum : its organs, their functions, the importance of their 
harmonious development, and the effects of their unbalanced con- 
dition; its influence in connection with physical culture, and the 
relations it sustains to the balance of the organization — Sugges- 
tions as to proper modes of education and correction of children. 



GLOSSARY. 

Page 353—357. 



THALEIA-WOMANHOOD. 



CHAPTER I. 

MATERIAL SUBSTANCES AND MOTIVE POWERS. 

1. The universe consists of matter, and of certain forces 
termed motive powers, which operate upon material sub- 
stances. Beyond these, we have no conception of the ex- 
istence of any thing. We recognize material substances, 
and their properties or qualities by our senses. We can 
see, touch, taste, smell, and hear them. We use or reject 
them according as their qualities or properties are useful 
or otherwise, and by these qualities and properties we dis- 
tinguish one substance from another. 

2. Chemists, and natural philosophers have examined 
the various material substances of which the world we in- 
habit is composed, and have found that they are made of, 
or compounded from, less than seventy simple or element- 
ary substances. It is thought by some, that a part of 
those now considered to be simple will hereafter be found 
to be composed of two or more elements. 

3. Atoms. A particle of matter, so minute that it is 
incapable of being further divided by any means, is termed 
an atom. Singly, an atom is invisible ; but when brought 
together in large numbers they form visible and tangible 
bodies. 

(13) 



14 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 1. 

4. There is a constant tendency, among the elements of 
matter, in atoms and masses, to form compounds with 
each other, to separate, to change places, to reunite in 
different proportions and relations. New forms are con- 
tinually appearing and old forms disappearing. These 
changes arise, not from any capacity inherent in the sub- 
stances or their atoms, but through the action of the mo- 
tive powers upon them. 

5. The motive powers are known to exist, not because 
we can recognize them by any of our senses, but because 
we can perceive the effects which they produce when they 
are in action. We can not detect, by any of our senses, 
the essential power that brings an apple to the earth after 
we have thrown it upward, but we can perceive that there 
is some cause which arrests its upward motion, and brings 
it downward until it is stopped by the ground. We term 
this force — 

6. Gravity. Its tendency is to bring bodies together, 
without producing any change in their structure. 

7. Chemical affinity. We observe, when certain sub- 
stances are brought into very close contact, as an alkali 
with an acid, or an acid with a metal — one of the sub- 
stances usually requiring to be in a melted, liquid, or gas- 
eous condition — that the atoms of each substance separate 
from those with which they have been associated, and 
unite with the atoms of the other substance, in definite 
proportions. In this change the original substances dis- 
appear, and their elements re-appear in a new and different 
compound, with properties unlike either of the former. 
The power which produces these effects we term chemical 
affinity. Its sphere of action is among the atoms of sub- 
stances, and the compounds which it forms are always dis- 
tinctly definite in the proportions of the elements of which 
they are composed. 



MATEEIAL SUBSTANCES AND MOTIVE POWEES. 15 

Illustrations. The atmosphere is a mere mixture of two 
invisible gases — oxygen and nitrogen. When these two 
gases are chemically united, one atom of nitrogen to five 
of oxygen, the resulting compound is nitric acid, or aqua 
fortis, a colorless liquid like water, of an intensely acrid 
and corrosive character. This acid decomposes pure sil- 
ver, uniting with it, forming nitrate of silver, or lunar 
caustic. This new compound is decomposed by common 
salt, and another, viz. : chloride of silver, is one of the 
results, which appears in the form of a fine white powder, 
insoluble in water. Put this powder in a solution of 
cyanide of potassium, and from their chemical union with 
each other is formed cyanide of silver. Pass a current of 
galvanism through a solution of this, and it is decom- 
posed thereby and pure silver will re-appear. During 
these changes the silver has been associated with com- 
pounds containing oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, chlorine, 
sodium, potassium, and carbon, either of which we could 
have preserved as completely as the silver, of which not 
an atom has been lost by reason of the chemical changes. 
In the last process another force superior to chemical af- 
finity was employed. This was galvanism. It broke up 
the chemical union between the cyanogen and the silver, 
and rendered the latter back to us in a pure state. Silver 
is prepared for electro-plating by a process similar to that 
which we have here described. 

Hydrogen and oxygen, two invisible gases, mechanically 
mixed in any proportions, retain their separate identities. 
Chemically united, they form water. 

8. Magnetism. A third motive power is known to ex- 
ist by its influence on some of the compounds of iron. 
Nickel, another metal, manifests its presence, but not so 
powerfully as iron. These two metals are the principal 
mediums for its operations, though it is supposed that all 



16 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 1. 

bodies are subject to its influence, at least in a minor de- 
gree. The influence of the magnet is so familiarly known 
as hardly to need any explanation. Magnetism attracts 
and also gives polarity. Balance a magnetized rod of steel 
on its center, so that it can turn freely, and one end will 
invariably point to the north. It is this property of mag- 
netism that gives value to the mariner's compass. 

9. We find the three motive powers, just examined, to 
act differently from each other upon the same substances. 
Gravity has no other influence upon silver than to bring 
it to the earth, and fix it there. We have shown how 
chemical affinity can act upon it. Magnetism has no 
known effect upon it. Gravity acts upon iron precisely 
as it does upon silver. Chemical affinity will act as vari- 
ously in compounding iron with other elements as we have 
seen it do with silver. Magnetism attracts iron to iron 
and nickel, in masses, and also gives polarity. These 
various effects upon the same substance prove the powers 
causing them to be essentially different. They agree, 
however, in respect to being attractive, and hence we term 
them the attractive forces. 

10. Caloric or heat expands air, vaporizes water, ex- 
pands and melts metals. Cease to apply the heat, and 
that which you may have already used soon passes off, and 
the substances cool and contract to their former conditions. 
The power which produces these effects we term caloric. 
Its tendency is to expand bodies by removing the par- 
ticles of matter from each other. 

11. Electricity. Some of the characteristics and effects 
of this motive power are familiar to all. It seems to be 
almost universally influencing matter, and when its force 
is concentrated, it is nearly irresistible. It decomposes 
almost every compound. 

12. Light. Another power is know r n by its effects 



MATERIAL SUBSTANCES AND MOTIVE POWERS. 17 

upon the eye, by its photographic effects on certain chemi- 
cal compounds, by its capability of being decomposed into 
the colors of the rainbow, by its motions always in straight 
lines, by its property of being turned from its course or 
entirely obstructed, etc. 

13. These last three forces approach very closely the 
character of material substances. Caloric expands bodies, 
and occupies the space between their particles. Elec- 
tricity has power to split trees. It would seem to require 
a material body to do this. Light may be decomposed, 
concentrated (by a lens), or turned from its course in a 

( manner similar to other substances. Caloric, electricity, 
and light are termed diffusive forces from their constant 
' tendencies to separate the elements and atoms of matter. 

14. We term these six forces the motive powers of the 
inorganic world. If not essentially material, they have 
evidently always existed in connection with matter, and 
to their action upon matter we refer all the inorganic 

I changes and phenomena of the known universe. They 
are not life, nor the cause of life, though, like many of the 
distinctly material elements and compounds, they are use- 
ful or necessary for the purposes of living things. 



18 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 2. 



CHAPTER II. 

VITAL FORCES. 

1. Our aim in the previous chapter has been to demon- 
strate, very briefly, the existence of certain motive powers 
from the effects which they produce upon material sub- 
stances, and the different characters of these powers from 
their various effects. 

We find the diffusive forces ever engaged in breaking 
up the compounds upon which they operate. We observe 
that gravitation only brings matter together into irregu- 
lar and heterogeneous masses ; that chemical affinity pro- 
duces regular, definite, and homogeneous compounds, but 
always devoid of life ; and that magnetism prefers iron 
to any other known substance. Under no circumstances 
can we find living organizations to result from the action 
of any or all of these forces. 

2. Yet living bodies are continually being produced, 
and we are obliged to attribute their existence to other 
causes. These we term living principles or vital forces. 
Of these there are two classes — those which produce veg- 
etable bodies, and those which produce animal bodies. At 
the head of the latter class we place the human vital 
force. That the vegetable vital force is distinct from that 
of the animal, is manifest from the difference of the organ- 
izations produced by each, and it is equally apparent that 
there are as many subdivisions of the general class of 



VITAL FOKCES. 19 

animal vital forces as there are classes of animals, and as 
many individual vital forces as there are individuals in 
| Existence. Each individual vital force possesses the ehar- 
I acteristics common to its class. There may be consider- 
able variations in degree, but they will agree in kind. 

3. Each organized body is produced and maintained by 
the action within it of a living principle, or vital force, 
which builds it up, sustains it, repairs its injuries when 
possible, and continues to manifest its power until the 
body dies. Each organization possesses peculiar struct- 
ures, called " organs" which are adapted for the per- 
formance of especial functions. In vegetables we find 
large roots which serve to maintain their position on the 
i earth's surface, and smaller roots and rootlets which branch 
off and serve to take in fluids which are carried by small 
I tubes to the remotest branches. There are other tubes to 
5 return the sap downward. They have wood, bark, leaves, 
blossoms, and fruit, each with its peculiar structure and 
function. Animal organizations are still more peculiar 
and complex. Each class of organization differs from all 
others, and each individual living body has a greater 
or less variety of different organs. Each organization 
grows in size by reason of food which is taken by some 
means into its interior and there appropriated to form its 
different parts. The food of plants enters through the 
1 roots and the pores of the leaves. The food of animals 
< is conveyed to their stomachs by way of their mouths, and 

- in both instances is changed by digestion before it is fitted 
i for use. Each organization comes into existence by birth, 

at first is small in size and gradually increases, if supplied 
with food, until it reaches the dimensions peculiar to its 

- kind. It has its parents, its periods of infancy, youth, 
} maturity, old age, decay, and death, and during a portion 

of its life it has the instinct or capacity for propagating 



20 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 2. 

its species, which it does under laws peculiar to its organ- 
ization. Organized bodies have parents, are born, have 
life, grow, and can reproduce their kind. They live an 
allotted period and die. 

4. The peculiarities above mentioned in nowise pertain 
to inorganic bodies. They have no capacity for change. 
They remain perfectly stationary, except when operated 
upon by forces from without. Chemical affinity, operating 
upon the necessary elements, would produce the entire ma- 
terial for a mountain of limestone, and the attractive forces 
of cohesion and gravitation might give it shape and per- 
manent position, but, of itself, it could never increase or 
diminish its bulk a single atom. Gravity, operating 
through it, might draw other materials to its surface ; 
magnetism would have little known effect on it; chemical 
affinity might change it and re-form its elements into other 
compounds; electricity might rend it, caloric might ex- 
pand, separate, and decompose it, or human labor and 
skill might level it to the earth's surface, but unless some 
external power should change it, it would eternally stand 
unaltered, and no operation of any or all of the inorganic 
powers could ever impart to it, or to any portion of it, the 
least degree of vitality. 

5. Chemists recognize from sixty-five to seventy ele- 
mentary substances as existing, either singly or combined, 
in inorganic matter. Very few of them are required to 
form organized bodies. " Carbon, with oxygen, hydro- 
gen, and nitrogen form all the combinations peculiar to 
organic substances." (Silliman's Chemistry, No. 637.) 
It is upon these four elements that every organized body 
is founded. "By far the greater number of that almost 
bewildering variety of substances, which we meet with as 
the products of vegetable and animal life, are constituted of 
three or four only of the at present recognized elements." 



VITAL FOBCES. 21 

(Noad's Cliem. An., page 438.) The above remarks 
show that vitality needs little except these four elements 
from which to construct its innumerable forms of life, 
beauty, and use, and three of these are invisible gases. 

6. The human vital force. We recognize within 
each human body the existence of a specific individual 
vital force, by the action of which the body, with all its 
organs and various parts, is constructed, developed, per- 
fected, maintained, and, when injured, repaired. Each 
organization is a mechanism in and through which the 
vital force operates, and its manifestations will be perfect 
and harmonious in proportion to the harmony and per- 
fection of the organization. 

7. The human vital force manifests itself in two gen- 
eral directions, viz. : First, through the voluntary system, 
which is under the control of the will. Second, through 
those organs over which the will has no direct control. 
Any action which we can suspend or renew at pleasure, 
as walking or talking, is of the first class. Actions which 
go on while we are asleep or awake, as breathing, the 
beating of the heart, the digestion of food, are of the sec- 
ond class. 

8. Every voluntary action tends to impair or wear out 
some portion of the system. None can be performed but 
by the expenditure of power, and w^ear of vital machinery. 
The involuntary vital processes are continually going on 
to build up, sustain, and purify the body and to repair its 
losses and injuries. During repose and quiet sleep they 
are best performed. During infancy the formative and 
developing processes greatly preponderate over all others, 
and they continue active up to maturity. So long as the 
losses by voluntary mental and physical action can be re- 
supplied through the medium of the involuntary powers, the 
body will remain healthy and vigorous up to the meridian 



22 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 2. 

of life, beyond which period there is a gradual decline in 
power, and by degrees the infirmities and debilities of age 
render the body unserviceable as a medium for vital man- 
ifestations; and worn out by a life-time service, it yields 
to death, and chemical affinity asserts its right to dissipate 
its elements. 

9. The materials for the growth and support of the 
body are derived from food. We have seen that the in- 
organic forces never produce organic bodies. Animal life 
can not be supported directly from inorganic material. 
An intermediate process is required. This is performed by 
the vital forces of the vegetable world, which take up 
elementary matter and organize it into compounds fitted 
to sustain animal life. 

10. The chemist takes an article of food — for instance, 
wheaten flour — and subjects it to what he terms a proximate 
analysis. He finds it to contain starch, gluten, sugar, 
gum, bran, and water. To these compounds, which he 
finds ready formed in the flour, he gives the name of 
proximate elements. He then subjects these compounds to 
what he terms an ultimate analysis, and finds the starch 
to be composed of oxygen, hydrogen, and carbon, and he 
terms these ultimate elements. His analysis can go no 
further. The ultimate elements of wheaten flour are car- 
bon, oxygen, hydrogen, lime, sulphur, and phosphorus, 
the latter three in very small proportions. Plants feed 
upon these ultimate elements and form them into proxi- 
mate compounds, in which condition they serve for food 
for animals and man. Aside from air and water, they 
furnish the entire materials of our bodies. 

11. The animals and vegetables which serve for our 
food, have bodies, substantial, like our own, and we fre- 
quently say "a man can not live upon air." Let us 
apply science to this remark and see if it be a true 



IH VITAL FOKCES. 23 

1 one. The chemist analyzes our food into its ultimate ele- 
1 ments, and finds that it is composed almost entirely of 
' oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen, three gases, and carbon, 
> a peculiar element which abounds in all the three king- 
doms of nature. Charcoal, mineral coal, and plumbago, or 
black lead, are familiar forms of it. The diamond is pure 
carbon, crystallized. When combined with oxygen, an in- 
visible gas is formed, viz., carbonic acid gas. When an 
animal or vegetable body undergoes decomposition, nearly 
every portion of it passes off in a gaseous form. If we wish 
to observe the result more speedily, we have only to burn 
I the body, and we will find that only a mere handful of 
I ashes will remain ; the rest will vanish even while we are 
looking on. 

Dry a few pounds of rich earth, weigh it accurately, 
put it into a pot, and plant a seed in it. Give it nothing 
i but water, air, light, and warmth. A plant will spring up 
which may grow to considerable size. Remove it, and 
dry and weigh the earth. You can hardly appreciate any 
loss ; perhaps not more than a few grains. Yet your plant 
may weigh many ounces or even pounds. You may an- 
alyze your plant and you will find it to consist of oxygen, 
hydrogen, nitrogen, and carbon, with a trifle of mineral 
matter. 

Water is composed of two gases — oxygen and hydrogen. 
Our atmosphere is a mixture of the two gases, oxygen and 
nitrogen, with one part in two thousand of carbonic acid 
gas, and a very small amount of ammonia, a gas formed of 
hydrogen and nitrogen. The water which is taken up by 
the roots contains a little mineral matter in solution. 
Water absorbed by the roots, and air absorbed by the 
pores of the leaves and bark, constitute the entire mate- 
rials of the food of the plants, and out of these the myste- 
rious vital force within builds the bodies and forms those 



24 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 2. 

wonderful and superabundant products of the vegetable 
kingdom, whereby all animal life is sustained. 

Mysterious and wonderful as are the operations of the 
vital forces of vegetation, they sink into insignificance 
when compared with the vital operations within the 
human body, for the uses and necessities of which they 
exist. 

12. Between man and the lifeless atoms of elementary 
matter, there is an intimate chain of connection and de- 
pendence. The primary atoms, in themselves incapable 
of change, are moved and operated upon by the inorganic 
forces until, from chaos and crudity, they are so arranged, 
refined, and compounded that they become fitted to support 
vegetable life. Out of vegetable food, or from animals 
which feed upon vegetables, the human vital force con- 
structs its body, within and through which it manifests 
itself; and in its highest order of development, its capaci- 
ties for physical and intellectual power are almost beyond 
conception. 

13. There are those whose materialistic minds can dis- 
card the idea of a vital force, and attempt to account for 
the construction of the human body, its organs and tis- 
sues, upon chemical principles, and affirm " that life and 
all that life performs are the results of organization." 
Every thing, to our mind, shows that organization is the 
result of the action of a living principle. One author 
says : u Precisely the same operations are carried on in the 
stomach that the chemist performs in his laboratory/' and 
this in direct opposition to the fact that no chemist has 
succeeded in making in his laboratory a single vital pro- 
duct. Vitality uses chemical and, in fact, all other forces 
for its own purposes, but it holds them subservient; 
whenever they obtain possession of the domain of vital- 
ity, unless they be soon controlled or driven out, they de- 



VITAL FOECES. 25 

stroy it. Food may ferment, become sour, or decompose 
in the stomach, but these are not vital results; they are 
the effects of chemical affinity. We admit that chemical 
affinity does sometimes operate within the body, but not, 
that it ever operates, when uncontrolled, to organize, but 
to destroy what vitality seeks to organize and preserve. 
The chemist can not even separate from milk that portion 
which makes cheese. The rennet used for that purpose 
is of vital origin — a portion of a calf 's stomach. Its prop- 
erty for curding milk depends on the presence of gastric 
fluid within its cells, an element which the chemist has 
tried in vain to make. He can analyze it, but he can not 
reunite the elements, or make % even a tolerable imita- 
tion. Chemical affinity is always ready to seize upon the 
elementary atoms of bodies, as well as upon vital com- 
pounds, and to operate with and upon them. It is only 
when vitality is prevented from preserving the structures 
and compounds it has made, or has no longer any use 
for their elements, that chemical power can seize upon 
them. The dead body is entirely, and the diseased body 
partially, under chemical control. In the latter case 
chemical affinity is at war with vitality. The chemist, 
by means of his science, is enabled to subject vital bodies 
to an analysis, and to separate them into proximate ele- 
ments, and these again into their ultimate elements, but 
every step he takes is in the direction of decomposition. 
He may separate the grain into starch, gluten, and its 
other compounds; from the starch make sugar, and from 
the sugar form alcohol or vinegar ; but he never has been 
able to reverse any of these processes, for instance, to form 
starch from sugar. Vitality begins with the primary ele- 
ments, and finishes with a complete organization. Chemis- 
try begins where vitality ends, and, reversing the order, 
ends where vitality began. 



26 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 2. 

14. The inorganic forces, the elements which they oper- 
ate upon, and the compounds they form, are all subserv- 
ient to the higher orders of nature, to vegetables, animals, 
and especially to man. It is his privilege to receive ben- 
efit from all below him, if he properly employs his reason 
and experience in the selection and use. 

15. Use of gravity to man. Gravity is useful to man 
to give him firm footing on the ground. When he con- 
trols it he makes it turn wheels, drive piles, determine 
weights. He could strike no blow without it. If rocks 
fall on him, or if he fall to the ground with violence, he is 
injured or killed. 

16. Uses of chemical t affinity. The services of the 
chemist who manages this force for the uses of man are 
of the highest importance. The useful compounds which 
he can make are almost innumerable. Alcohol, gun-cot- 
ton, chloroform, the photographic picture, the raising of a 
loaf of bread, soap, dyes, the preservation of meats, and 
illuminating gas are each chemical results. The most cor- 
rosive acids and destructive poisons are also of chemical 
origin. 

17. Uses of caloric. Warmth is absolutely necessary 
to man's comfort and life. Man uses it to convert water 
into steam, to melt metals. He measures it with the ther- 
mometer. Fire is a good servant, but a bad master. 

18. Uses of electricity and galvanism. These powers 
are serviceable in telegraphing, electro-plating, for remedial 
purposes, and many others. A stroke of lightning may 
prove terribly destructive. 

19. Uses of magnetism. The magnetic needle is the 
mariner's guide over the trackless ocean, and a most useful 
servant to the surveyor. 

20. Uses of light. Light enables us to distinguish ob- 
jects at a distance. By its aid the hours of darkness can 



VITAL FOECES. 27 

be profitably employed, and the treasures of the mines 
procured. 

21. Uses of vital forces. The services of the vital 
forces of vegetation and animals, through the bodies and 
products they originate, are too well known to need par- 
ticularization. Man has need only to recognize their qual- 
ities so as to appropriate all that is useful, and avoid what 
is hurtful. Man directs and employs the vital forces of 
many animals, through their bodies, for various purposes. 
He employs the vital force of the horse, through his body, 
to draw loads ; cows yield him their milk ; dogs guard his 
property. When the vital forces of animals operate to 
man's injury, he destroys the bodies through which they 
act, as wolves, tigers, and snakes. When he can use the 
whole or any portion of their bodies, for food or other 
purposes, he deprives them of life. 

Countless benefits result to man from material sub- 
stances, but they can produce much injury if ignorantly 
employed. Antimony makes good types, but it poisons 
the body. Water is serviceable, but it may drown a per- 
son or sweep away his property. Man may, and often 
does, abuse the best things, and he may find good use for 
almost every thing. 



28 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 3. 



CHAPTER III. 

INTELLECTUAL FACULTIES. 

1. The human mind has three classes of intellectual 
powers. 1st. The perceptive. 2. The relative perceptive, 
and, 3d. The reflective. The first perceives things and their 
properties or qualities ; the second perceives the relations 
which these bear to each other and the uses to which they 
may be applied ; and the third enables us to investigate 
causes, and to draw inferences. The first observes things 
and facts; the second observes the relations which things 
and facts universally bear toward each other ; the third draws 
inferences and conclusions from what the first two have ob- 
served. The first enabled Newton to notice the fall of the 
apple; the second gave him ability to perceive the natural 
relations between the apple, the earth, and the circumstance 
of falling ; and the third reasoned upon these things, facts, 
and relations, and discovered the cause of the descent of the 
apple to be the motive power of gravity. 

2. All animals have powers of perception ; but in the 
lower orders only to a very limited extent. Dogs, horses, 
elephants, and many others have quite an endowment of 
the perceptives and relative perceptives. Man alone pos- 
sesses the reasoning powers. The instincts, propensities, 
and passions are not sources of knowledge. All knowledge 
comes through the action of the perceptive, relative per- 
ceptive, and reflective organs. 



INTELLECTUAL FACULTIES. 29 

3. Order of development. These three classes of in- 
tellectual powers are not developed simultaneously, but 
gradually, and in the order we have placed them. In the 
human infant, the perceptive faculties are active, but 
feebly developed and uneducated, at birth. He may per- 
ceive a lighted candle, a sunbeam, or the moon, and w T ill 
reach for them, but he does not know that the first will 
burn him, that he can not grasp the second, nor reach the 
third. His perceptions of these things, their qualities and 
distances, are incorrect. Experience can alone teach him 
these and thousands of other things. 

Before his ability to perceive the relations of things 
becomes developed, he can appreciate the existence and 
qualities of a stick of candy. It tastes sweet. He can 
also use a penny to play with, but can perceive no rela- 
tion between them. In time he comes to know that he 
can buy the candy w T ith the penny. He now compre- 
hends the relation between the penny and the candy as 
property, and himself and the confectioner as traders, and 
eventually he w r ill come to reason on the nature of money, 
property, and the laws of political economy. 

These simple illustrations show the order of develop- 
ment, and the nature of these three classes of intellectual 
powers. 

4. Our perceptions of things and their properties, of 
facts, and of the relations that exist between all these, 
must be correct and extensive before we can reason cor- 
rectly or deeply. To this end we should observe with 
every faculty, and in every direction ; our experiments 
should be varied and numerous; we should reflect much, 
and our inferences and deductions should not be hurried, 
nor in opposition to any known fact, but in harmony 
with all. 

5. Nature, in her plan of gradual and progressive de- 



30 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 3. 

velopment of the intellectual faculties, plainly indicates 
the order which should be observed in the routine of a 
child's education. The first is to educate it into a knowl- 
edge of things and their properties, through the medium 
of the perceptive faculties, these being capable of action 
even in early infancy. Next in the order of development 
come the relative perceptive faculties, feeble at first, but 
yearly gaining strength. With adult age, the reasoning 
faculties will have become capable of correct action, pro- 
vided the mind has been stored with abundant and cor- 
rect knowledge of things, their properties, and their rela- 
tions. After middle life the powers of perception begin 
to fail, but the reasoning powers will have hardly reached 
their height. Hence, the first half of a person's life 
should be spent in observation and activity, the latter half 
in reflecting and reasoning upon the acquirements of 
youth and manhood. 



RF-PRODUCTION. 31 



CHAPTER IV. 

RE-PRODUCTION. 

1. We can not arrive at any understanding of the origin 
of causes, nor of their essential character, further than is 
manifested by the effects which they produce. We can 
only know of the human vital force from its actions with 
and upon material substances. Our reason only contem- 
plates it in connection with something material, and act- 
ing in and through its own body. In speaking of the 
origin of life, we can only say that each being originates 
from parents of its own kind, from whom its vital and 
material germ is derived, and that each being is endowed 
at proper age, under normal conditions, with the like 
power possessed by its parents, of reproducing its own 
kind, according to the laws peculiar to its own species. 
Thus corn is produced from corn, and will reproduce 
corn. We expect always to get a product like the seed 
we plant. From animals of the lower orders we expect 

. others like them, and we look for human beings from 
human parents. We have no example ichere any species 
of vegetables or animals has departed from its natural type, 
and assumed permanently the type of a higher, lower, or 
different species, nor is there any scientific or truthful found- 

' ationfor a belief in spontaneous generation. The parents 
supply the vitality and body to their progeny, not fully 
4 



32 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 4. 

matured and developed, but only as much so as seems 
necessary for it to maintain a separate existence. 

2. Animal organizations come into the world, and com- 
mence their separate, individual existence in two general 
modes: 1. Oviparous, from eggs; and, 2. Viviparous, 
born alive. The egg requires only a proper degree of 
warmth to develop into the chick, from which point it 
has the same requirements as the animal or human infant 
at birth, viz. : food, drink, and protection from injury and 
extremes of heat and cold, and these may be provided by 
others than the parents. 

3. As far as our powers of sight or inference can de- 
termine, sex prevails among all organized existences. With 
man and the higher animals the two sexes are manifestly 
in separate individuals. With vegetables we find organs 
analogous to the sexual organs of animals, in some cases 
separate, and in other cases united in one plant. The 
progeny follows the law that regulated the sex of the 
parents. With man and the higher animals, where sepa- 
rated sex is the law, no case of hermaphroditism has ever 
been authenticated. The progeny are either male or 
female, but never both in one individual. 

4. In plants, the staminate and pistillate organs which 
represent the male and female, are found united in one 
flower, as in the apple; in two separate flowers on the 
same plant, as in the melon or Indian corn ; or staminate 
on one tree and pistillate on another, as with the ailan- 
thus and mulberry. The staminate organs furnish pol- 
len, which impregnates the pistillate organs. The former 
are barren, the latter only producing seed or fruit. The 
seeds of the classes to which the apple and the melon be- 
long, as expressed above, are evidently bisexual, for the 
separate plants which they produce bear both stamens and 
pistils. The class represented by the ailanthus bear seeds 



RE-PKODUCTION. 33 

which are manifestly separately sexed, for each single 
seed will produce either a male or a female tree. 

5. Varieties are frequently produced among vegetables 
by crossing the plants, as also among animals by crossing 
their breeds. The pollen furnished by the staminate or 
male flowers (the tassel) of red corn, conveyed to the pis- 
tillate or female flowers (the silk) of white corn, will pro- 
duce a mixture. The varieties are limited and can not be 
produced between plants or animals of different classes. 
Corn and melons will not mix; wheat and corn will not 
produce with each other. Hybrids, which are the pro- 
geny between species nearly allied, as the horse and the 
ass, do not possess reproductive capacity to continue the 
hybrid. Nature has fixed the limits, and thus prevents 

; commingling to the extent that would, if permitted, soon 
destroy every distinct species. 

6. The vitality and the mental and physical organization 
of the human infant, proceed directly from its parents. 
There will be great variations in these elements, in quality, 
quantity, and proportions, depending upon the differences 
of the same elements in parents, as a class, and also in the 
same parents at different times, owing to their varying 
states of vitality, and mental and physical health, vigor, 
and harmony. Man is more subject to variations in these 
respects than are the lower animals, for their conditions 
are more definitely fixed, and their organizations less com- 
plex, while man is subject, or liable, to great variations of 
health, state of mind, and external natural and artificial 
conditions. 



34 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 5. 



CHAPTER V. 

HEALTH, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 

1. We recognize the human vital force as the builder, 
occupier, controller, and repairer of the body in and 
through which it acts. A sufficient time, favorable con- 
ditions, and adequate materials are required for the con- 
struction of a perfect and harmonious body, and if these 
are wanting, the body, at birth, will be defective in some 
way, and the consequences will remain through life. Tem- 
peramental incompatibility between healthy parents is a 
cause of imperfect organizations in children; and parents 
may be strictly compatible, and yet, by reason of ill health, 
or defective organizations, be unable to impart perfect and 
viable constitutions to offspring. 

2. Life may be often sustained in a very imperfect body, 
provided those organs which are essential to mere physi- 
cal existence, as lungs, heart, stomach, and bowels are 
capable of proper action. The arms, legs, or organs of 
special sense may be wanting at birth, and yet health and 
long life may continue. Idiots and imbeciles often reach 
an advanced age. All such are defects or deprivations, 
and the absence of any organ necessarily prevents its 
functions from being performed. The vital force can not 
manifest its various capabilities except through a complete 
organization. 

3. The harmonious development of every portion of 



HEALTH, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 35 

the system, at proper time, and the legitimate exercise of 
every organ and faculty, are necessary to the health, har- 
mony, and happiness of the individual. No one power 
or class of powers should exercise a monopoly. The in- 
tellect should not be cultivated to the neglect of the phys- 
ical, nor the latter so exclusively worked as to dull the 
former. The student must perform some physical labor 
if he would keep his mind permanently vigorous, and the 
laborer must cultivate and exercise his intellect, or he will 
remain inferior, and subject to those who keep their intel- 
lects active. 

4. The brain must be exercised in various directions, or 
it will lead to monomania or insanity. This is well illus- 
trated by an example that has just come to our knowledge. 
A very fine mechanic had undertaken to construct a ma- 
chine that would run, of itself, perpetually. His plan 
was in the direction of a revolving wheel. He con- 
structed a trial machine, and sat for hours watching and 
studying over it, putting it in motion with his hand. 
When he arose from his study and went into the yard, 
every thing seemed to be whirling in small circles — stones, 
trees, etc., all turning rapidly, but not changing places. 
His brain was on the verge of insanity, but he still had 
control enough of his reason and memory to be aware that 
these appearances were illusions; and, by grasping small 
objects and looking steadily at them, he could feel that 
they were stationary. When he laid them down they 
seemed to move again. Fortunately for his sanity, he 
relinquished his pursuit, turned his mind in other direc- 
tions, and in three or four days, his brain became normal 
in its action. Few are fortunate enough to recognize their 
own insanity in time to escape it by a change of condi- 
tions. 

The man whose intellect is directed solely by acquisi- 



36 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 5. 

tiveness will be apt to lose the ability to direct it other- 
wise, and his whole life will be devoted to money-making. 
There must be a balance of mental action to insure men- 
tal health. 

5. When every organ and tissue of the body is in such 
a condition that the vital force has complete control, we 
term it health, or the physiological state. In this state 
there is a perfect equilibrium of action throughout the 
whole system — the blood circulates freely in and through 
every part, the digestive organs prepare the food which 
is to nourish the body, and the absorbents take it up into 
the circulation. The secretory organs prepare from it their 
various elements, and the excretory organs cast out what 
is worn out or useless. The muscles can act freely, and 
every sense is perfect. Power of normal action, volun- 
tary and involuntary, to do and to think, is present, and 
all moves on in harmony. If such a balance could be 
maintained, life would continue until the vital machinery 
were worn out. 

6. The continued action of the various organs implies 
friction and consequent wear, and necessity for repair. 
Wherever any two surfaces move upon each other, as at 
the joints, and among the muscles, glands and mem- 
branes are provided, which secrete from the blood, a fluid 
that serves, like oil upon machinery, to prevent friction 
and wear. As soon as this fluid becomes unfitted for its 
proper purpose, absorbent vessels remove it. Saliva and 
gastric juice are required for digestion, and appropriate 
glands supply these fluids. Food affords the materials 
for these and various other similar purposes, as well as for 
the construction and repair of the permanent parts and 
organs of the body — bones, muscles, and all other tissues. 

7. The system is so constituted that it may be supported 
from an almost endless variety and quality of food. Some 



HEALTH, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 37 

classes of people, in some countries, live almost entirely 
upon vegetable food; others, in other countries, depend 
altogether upon animal food. It would seem that a mixed 
diet is most favorable to the highest physical and intel- 
lectual attainment, though some contend that both can be 
achieved upon a purely vegetable diet. What may be best 
for general consumption may not be best for some indi- 
viduals, and individual experience must alone determine 
this. That which will enable us to live long and act 
well, is proper to be used. We know of no race of peo- 
ple who have ever reached a high point of civilization 
upon purely animal food. That country which peaceably 
supports the greatest number of inhabitants upon a given 
area of ground, may be considered as the most highly civ- 
ilized, no reference being had to enlightenment. Such a 
condition is possible with the complete cultivation of the 
ground and the use of its products for food, but never 
where the ground is left untilled, and given up to the 
uses of wild animals, or even to the grazing of domestic 
stock. 

8. Exercise. The duties of life usually require labor 
concentrated in some particular direction and through a 
limited number of organs. Very few are so situated that 
their daily duties give employment to even a majority of 
their powers, and with many, a large majority are left 
almost entirely unused. To preserve health, the inactive 
powers must be brought into use, and the others allowed 
some time for repose. The mere resting of a tired organ 
during sleep is not sufficient. It requires rest while the 
unused powers are employed. True exercise consists in 
diversion of action. The student should suspend intel- 
lectual labor and take exercise, that is, bring into action 
his physical powers. 

The restless activity of children and young animals is 



88 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 5. 

nature's mode of developing all their powers. Animals 
naturally continue to employ all their powers during life, 
and man should do the same. Society does not favor 
this, for it runs generally to extremes of physical or in- 
tellectual employment. The intellectual man shirks phys- 
ical labor, while the laborer is too often required to ex- 
pend his power upon his muscles. 

9. The idea generally entertained in what is called fash- 
ionable, or conventionalized society, that a girl who is 
obliged to sustain herself by her own exertions must not 
do general housework if she would be considered respect- 
able, is egregiously wrong, not only in regard to the girl, 
but to humanity. On the contrary, it is the most indis- 
pensable part of her education — the health, happiness, and 
harmony of the family largely depending upon it. She 
whose domestic education is what it should be, will be apt 
to have a well-balanced organization, and we know of noth- 
ing better adapted to develop the physical and mental system 
of a girl than the practical details of housekeeping. It is 
indispensable in the formation of habits of industry, energy, 
self-reliance, neatness, order, and economy, and the display 
of taste and judgment. No matter what her station in life 
is, or may be in the future, her education is lamentably 
deficient if it does not comprise a thorough knowledge of 
every department of domestic matters. No girl is fitted 
to assume the responsible position of mistress of a house 
unless she can keep it in order ; and, in addition, is qual- 
ified to select and economically purchase proper articles 
of food for the family, and prepare them for the table in 
such a manner that while they will please the palate they 
will not derange the stomach and cause dyspepsia. 

The position of many may not require of them the 
actual labor, but no station in life can or ought to excuse 
the want of a practical knowledge of how to do it, nor is it 



HEALTH, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 39 

in any way incompatible with the highest degree of refine- 
ment. The girl thus. practically educated will .have greater 
powers of endurance, and capacities for enjoyment, and, 
other things being equal, will be best fitted for the high 
position of wife and sacred relation of mother. 

10. Clothing. As a means of preserving the body from 
the extremes and sudden changes of temperature that 
might impair its health, clothing is required. It should 
be suited to the general temperature of the season — warm 
and abundant in cold weather — light and cool in sum- 
mer, and so distributed as to give protection to all parts 
of the body. In winter and in rainy weather, it should 
be warmest and thickest at the extremities. Shawls and 
furs around the neck and chest, and thin stockings and 
shoes are the reverse of what should be. Thousands of 
children are yearly lost by being improperly clothed. We 
have seen mothers, with their children on the streets on a 
wintry day, fashionably dressed, with loads of thick furs 
and woolens about the upper parts of the body, but neither, 
from the waists to the feet, with clothing enough, or so 
distributed, as to prevent actual suffering. Those females 
who suffer from uterine derangements, and children espe- 
cially who are never free from bowel complaints, often 
derive much of their difficulties from their mode of dress. 
AVere we governed by our feelings, independent of fashion, 
a better state of health would prevail; but fashion, and 
ignorance of what is physiological in this respect, have 
ruined the health of thousands. 

The clothing should be loose over all parts of the body, 
and never so tight as to interrupt the free circulation of the 
blood, the full expansion of the lungs, and entire freedom 
of muscular movements. Never wear skirts suspended 
from the hips. The best and most comfortable way is to 
have an under-waist, which fits loosely to the shoulders 



40 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 5. 

and chest, to which the skirts can be attached by buttons. 
It is unsafe to permit the body, when overheated, to cool 
down suddenly, or in one portion sooner than others. The 
sudden and unequal cooling may be prevented by proper 
increase or distribution of the clothing. In sleep, more 
clothing is required to keep a person warm than when 
awake. Cold and wet feet, and damp clothing should be 
avoided. Sudden changes from cold to heat are not as 
productive of mischief as those from heat to cold. 

11. Excess in any direction interferes with general 
health, and frequently is directly injurious to some partic- 
ular portions of the body. Excessive lifting may over- 
strain a muscle, rupture blood-vessels, or cause hernia. 
Excessive eating may indirectly cause death by apoplexy. 
Excessive mental application may cause insanity, or con- 
gestion of the brain. A person is never well after a vio- 
lent manifestation of passion or emotion. 

12. The great conservators of health are temperance in 
eating and drinking, the proper exercise of all the powers 
and faculties, proper dress, freedom from violent passion 
or excitement, excess in nothing. 



DISEASE. 41 



CHAPTER VI. 



DISEASE. 



1. "When any organ or tissue of the body is in such a 
condition that it can not perform its normal function, we 
term it diseased. 

Disease is that state or condition of any portion of the 
body which prevents the full and complete action of the 
vital force upon or through it. 

2. The causes of disease are very numerous, and they 
may attack the body in every direction, from without and 
from within. Among the causes are the following named 
classes : 

1st. Congenital — Direct conditions of disease inherited 
from parents; also, inherited deficiencies and weaknesses 
which render children more than commonly liable to cer- 
tain forms of disease. Temperamental incompatibility 
, between the parents is the great cause of the latter. Di- 
rect disease in the parents is the cause of the former. 

2d. Physiological — Excessive action of any secretory 

| organ, or deficient action of any excretory organ, the ex- 

! cess of what the former produces being useless, and liable 

to become depraved; that which the latter fails to remove 

being directly injurious if long retained. 

3d. Sudden and violent changes of temperature, and of 
bodily or mental action, or action too long or excessively 
continued in any one direction ; or neglect to exercise, for 



42 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 6. 

too long a time, certain organs and parts. In brief, great 
excess or deficiency of action. 

4th. Mental — Excessive mental action, or sudden and 
violent passion or emotion. 

5th. Alimentary — Improper food, or excess of proper 
food. 

6th. Chemical — Poisons received into the system by the 
stomach, breathed in by the lungs, absorbed by the surface 
generally, or from poisoned wounds. 

7th. Mechanical — Shocks and injuries to any part from 
accident, as blows, cuts, bruises, or falls; by compression, 
improper dressing, tight lacing, etc. 

8th. Medicinal-from the improper or excessive use of a 
proper article of medicine. 

9th. Certain unknown but specific causes, such as produce 
small-pox, measles, and other contagions and infections. 

These and many other causes are liable to produce dis- 
ease whenever the system is exposed to their influences. 

3. Effects produced — The effects which these causes may 
produce are — 

1st. On the circulation — Obstructions to the passage of 
the blood and other fluids, by 1st, contraction of the vessels 
themselves ; 2d, by contraction of the surrounding tissues 
upon the vessels; 3d, by the presence of foreign matter 
within the vessels. 

2d. On the muscular system — Irritation, permanent or 
excessive contraction or relaxation of muscular fiber. 

3d. On the nervous system — Pain, irritation ; irregularity, 
excess or deficiency of action ; numbness, loss of feeling ; 
loss of functional ability of an organ without injury to its 
structure, as in paralysis, blindness, deafness; destruction 
of tissue, as in wounds, abscesses or mortification. 

4. There is often much confusion of ideas, even among 
the medical profession, as to the causes of disease, the 



DISEASE. 43 

modes of attack, the results they produce, and that actual 
condition termed disease, and the symptoms which accom- 
pany it. An apparently small cause may, and often does, 
lead to nearly all the conditions we have enumerated. 

5. A slight cold, causing contraction of the surface of 
the body, obstructing perspiration, and sending the waste 
material inwardly, where it accumulates and causes irrita- 
tion of some internal organ, may prove the primary cause 
of a serious or even fatal illness. The impurities which 
perspiration should remove may irritate the bowels and 
cause diarrhea; or, more generally distributed and re- 
tained, may cause general irritation and fever; or, being 
thrown upon some one organ, as the brain, or lungs, may 
lead to inflammation, congestion, or entire stoppage of 
circulation; or, by provoking some excretory organ to 
overwork, may cause its debility and consequent disease; 
or, may obstruct the action of the absorbents, and lead to 
local or general dropsy ; or, by irritating the sensory nerv- 
ous centers or tract, may cause severe pain and neuralgias; 
or, by influencing the motory nervous system, may lead to 
spasm, muscular contractions; or, by obstructing the ca- 
pillaries, may terminate in boils, abscesses, carbuncles, or 
general eruptions. If the obstructions are centered on 
the serous sheaths of the muscles, there will be acute or 
chronic rheumatism. These are but a portion of the ef- 
fects that may follow from what is so lightly spoken of 
as " only a slight cold." 

6. Fever and inflammation are not diseases, nor are 
they causes of disease. They are the increased action of 
the vital force to remove diseases to overcome obstruc- 
tions, to remove impurities, to repair injuries, to prevent 
destruction. Their tendency invariably is to preserve, 
to protect, to repair. They are physiological, not patho- 
logical. 



44 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 6. 

In health, vital action is unobstructed; but if, by any 
cause, it is obstructed or confined, it seeks to remove the 
obstacles and to relieve the system of any injurious mate- 
rials, by an increased action called fever, when general, 
and inflammation when local, or confined to only a portion 
of the body. We, therefore, never view fever or inflam- 
mation as enemies, but as friends, coming to warn us of 
danger, to aid in repelling the attacks of the numerous 
causes of disease, and to assist in repairing the injuries 
which the system may have sustained. 

7. The skin performs, in health, the perspiratory func- 
tion, by means of which certain impurities of the body are 
continually removed. If through cold, which causes con- 
traction of the surface, the perspiration is prevented from 
escaping by the pores of the skin, the impurities must be 
either cast out by some other channel, or they will accu- 
mulate and become causes of disease. The mucous mem- 
brane, which lines the entire interior of the body, com- 
mencing at the nose and mouth, extending into the lungs, 
lining the stomach and the entire bowels, usually at- 
tempts to perform the duty when the skin is obstructed. 
"A cold in the nose, throat, lungs, or bowels/' is simply 
the effort of the mucous membrane of any of these organs 
to perform the duty for the obstructed skin. If of the 
nose or throat, the increased flow of mucus is readily dis- 
posed of; if of the lungs, it must be coughed up ; if of the 
stomach, it must be passed downward through the bowels, 
or may be thrown off by vomiting; if of the bowels, it 
assumes the form of mucus diarrhea. In either of these 
cases, the excess of action required of the mucous membrane 
may result in its debility and consequent disease. The 
means of cure of such " colds" should be directed to the 
skin as the primary cause, by the use of diaphoretics, and 
when its action is restored, the other organs will be relieved 



DISEASE. 45 

of double duty, and if not seriously debilitated or impaired, 
will soon resume their normal condition. The mucous 
linings of the bladder, urethra, uterus, and vagina are very 
liable to be similarly affected. 

8. When the skin is obstructed, the accumulations may 
be distributed generally, and the efforts of the vital force 
will be general, in the form of a fever. It will frequently 
result directly in restoring the skin to its normal condi- 
tion, which, with the other excretory organs, will soon re- 
lieve the system, and the fever will subside, because it has 
done its work and removed the obstructions to free vital 
action. The common idea of " working off a cold," in- 
stead of doctoring it, is practical sense, in accordance with 
the laws of physiology, learned from experience. It con- 
sists simply of such voluntary action as is needed to in- 
crease the circulation to an extent sufficient to cause per- 
spiration. 

9. The effect of cold on the surface may be so exten- 
sive as not only to cause stoppage of perspiration, but also 
to obstruct greatly the normal circulation of the blood 
through the surface and extremities of the body. In such 
case there must be an increased quantity thrown upon the 
internal organs, causing congestion or partial stoppage, re- 
quiring increase of vital action, or inflammation and fever, 
to remove it. If the obstruction be too great, the organs 
become injured by excess of action, and morbific materials 
accumulate, and perhaps entire stoppage will occur in 
some organs, and unless soon relieved, permanent disease 
or actual destruction will follow. 

10. The indications for treatment are plain in such 
cases. If the circulation is unequal, it should be pro- 
moted where it is deficient, and it will cease to be excessive 
in other parts. If portions of the system are contracted, 
they require relaxation. If any are inactive, they should 



46 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 6. 

be stimulated to action ; if relaxed and feeble, they require 
contraction and toning. If morbific materials are present 
they should be removed, through the excretory organs, as 
soon as possible. 

For instance, a person in health, sits in a cold and damp 
room, engaged in study for a considerable time; the feet 
will become cold, as also the whole body. The brain, 
being active, will receive an unusual quantity of blood, 
which is thrown inwardly from the cold surface and ex- 
tremities. Pressure on the brain and headache are the 
results. Cease to study, exercise the body vigorously for 
awhile, the blood returns to the surface and extremities, 
and the headache is gone. A hot foot-bath will expand 
the blood-vessels of the feet and ankles, and will aid in 
relieving the head by inviting the blood downward. But 
if the unbalanced condition of circulation and action be 
continued for some time, it becomes more permanent, 
the inactive parts become debilitated for want of full 
supply of blood; the portion unduly exercised becomes 
enfeebled by overwork, and ceasing to send forward the 
increased flow of blood, congestion takes place, which 
can only be relieved by an energetic and vigorous course 
of treatment. Most cases of congestion of the brain, 
lungs, liver, and bowels, are the result of the action of 
cold on the surface, and they may be relieved, if taken 
in time, by bringing the circulation outwardly, and keep- 
ing: it there. 



PHYSIOLOGY. 47 



CHAPTER VII. 

PHYSIOLOGY. 

1. The general office of the secretory organs is to se- 
crete or take from the blood certain elements to be used 
for special purposes in some part of the system. Thus, 
the glands at the joints secrete a fluid which serves, like 
oil on machinery, to prevent friction and wearing. The 
salivary glands of the mouth secrete saliva, to moisten 
food, and to assist in digestion. The liver secretes bile. 
All these, and many others, are for use in the body. 

The excretory organs perform the office of excreting or 
removing from the blood and casting out from the body 
materials which are no longer needed, or which prove in- 
jurious if retained. The skin is one very important ex- 
cretory organ; the others are the lungs, the liver, the 
bowels, and the kidneys. 

Upon the proper action of the excretory organs depends 
the removal of the impurities of the body. These impu- 
rities are either such as may have been taken into the 
body, through food, drink, or air, or absorbed by the 
skin; or else they are the worn-out and vitiated materi- 
als of the body. 

Upon the proper action of the secretory organs depends 
the proper working of the entire machinery. 

Upon the proper action of the digestive organs the sys- 
tem is dependent for the preparation of the food which is 



48 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 7. 

taken in, to render it fitted to build up the various parts, 
to repair injuries, and to supply waste. 

Digestion, assimilation, secretion, and excretion, are 
four very essential processes. Through digestion the food 
becomes fitted for use in the system ; through assimila- 
tion it enters into and becomes part and parcel of the sys- 
tem; through secretion various needed compounds are 
formed from the blood; and through excretion the body 
is continually purified. These processes must be harmo- 
niously performed in order that the body may be sus- 
tained in health. 

2. Food, to be properly prepared for digestion, should 
be thoroughly masticated and insalivated. The mere 
grinding or chopping of food outside of the mouth, and 
washing it into the stomach with drink, will not answer 
the purpose. Food should be well chewed. The act of 
mastication causes an increased flow of saliva from the 
appropriate glands, which mixes with the food before it 
passes into the stomach. Here the food is continually 
kept in motion and mixed with the gastric juice, which is 
secreted by the stomach, and, by its action upon it, is con- 
verted into a pasty mass, termed chyme. The chyme 
now passes from the stomach into the duodenum, where it 
meets with the secretions of the liver and pancreas, by 
which it is converted into chyle, a milky fluid which con- 
tains the nourishing elements of the food. That portion 
of the food which is unfit for nourishment is finally cast 
out by the bowels. The chyle is taken up by numerous 
minute vessels, called lacteals or absorbents, which unite 
to form one large vessel, the thoracic duct, which conveys 
the fluid to the ascending vena cava, or great vein of 
the body, in which it mixes with the venous blood and 
is conveyed directly to the heart. Another vein brings 
venous blood from the upper regions of the body, and the 



PHYSIOLOGY. 49 

two veins discharge their streams into the right auricle of 
the heart. 

3. The heart is a compound or dbuble organ. It is 
said, anatomically, to contain four cavities, two in each 
side, termed right auricle and ventricle, and left auricle 
and ventricle. The venous blood mixed with the chyle, 
enters the right auricle, passes through into the right 
ventricle, from whence it is thrown into the lungs through 
the pulmonary artery and its branches. In the lungs this 
venous blood is so distributed as to come into very close 
contact with the air we have inhaled, by which it be- 
comes changed from its dark venous color to the bright 
red of arterial blood. The pulmonary veins now take up 
the blood and convey it back to the left auricle of the 
heart, from thence into the left ventricle, from which it 
passes into the great artery, which, dividing and sub- 
dividing as it passes onward, conveys the blood into the 
remotest and minutest portions of the entire system. 

The terminations of the arterial system are connected 
with the commencement of the venous svstem, by means 
of very minute and numerous vessels, called capillaries. 
The veins increase in size and lessen in number, and 
finally terminate at the heart, as we have before stated. 
The venous blood is the impure blood of the system, and 
it goes through the heart to the lungs to be there puri- 
fied, and returns to the heart to be sent with its supply 
of nourishment, through and into every part of the sys- 
tem, depositing it wherever needed to build up and re- 
pair. A portion goes to each secretory organ, and thus 
furnishes the materials for the various secretions, as saliva, 
serum, and mucus. On its return it takes up such ma- 
terials as have become worn out by use, and sends them 
to the excretory organs to be cast out. 

4. From the food which thus passes into the body is 



50 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 7. 

manufactured the entire organism, bones, muscles, nerves, 
every thing. A portion of the food is supposed to be di- 
rectly consumed, as in a furnace, to keep up the natural 
warmth of the body. 

5. A natural supply of blood to, and its free circula- 
tion within and through any organ, is indispensable to its 
health and functional action. The exercise of any volun- 
tary organ brings an increased flow of blood to it, and 
the organ is strengthened thereby, if it be not over- 
worked and debilitated. Any organ in action requires 
more blood than when at rest. Too long continued or 
violent action of any organ is liable to injure it, and every 
organ requires repose or cessation from its highest point 
of action. This is most noticeable in the voluntary sys- 
tem. The brain, or the muscles, should not be too long 
or too severely worked at any one period. The heart and 
lungs act more quietly during repose. The stomach needs 
rest, and should not be continually crowded, unless you 
prefer dyspepsia to health. 

6. The portal circulation. We have said that the veins 
convey the blood toward and into the heart. In what is 
called the portal circulation, there is a variation from the 
general rule. The veins from the stomach, pancreas, 
spleen, mesentory, and rectum, are all united -finally into 
one vein, and send their blood directly into the liver, within 
which organ they branch in every direction. From this 
blood the liver takes certain elements to form bile, which 
is conveyed, a portion immediately to the duodenum, and 
another portion to the gall-bladder, to be stored there for 
future use. The blood, deprived of bile, is then carried 
by another set of vessels to the vena cava, and thence to 
the heart. 

7. Bile performs several important offices. A large 
portion of it is devoted to the direct purposes of diges- 



PHYSIOLOGY. 51 

tion, in acting npon the fatty matter of the chyme in the 
duodenum, dissolving it, and rendering it more fluid, and 
aiding thereby its transformation into chyle. A part of it 
appears to be of the nature of an excretion, and combines 
with the excrementitious matter, and is cast out. It stim- 
ulates the mucous membrane of the bowels, and promotes 
their peristaltic action, by means of which their contents 
are moved forward and downward. 

8. In foetal life, the liver acts as the exclusive organ 
by which the hydro-carbon of the blood is removed, thus 
performing, at that stage of existence, the office which the 
lungs afterward perform, and it continues through life to 
separate large quantities of hydro-carbon from the blood, 
combining that element with others to form bile. 

9. Foetal circulation. The circulation of the blood of 
the infant, during its foetal life, or before its birth, differs 
materially from that of its atmospheric life, after it is born. 
We have already described the latter. In foetal life the 
blood is furnished by the uterine arteries of the mother, 
received into the placenta ; sent from thence, through the 
vein of the umbilical cord, entering the body of the child 
at its umbilicus or navel. A portion goes through the 
ductus venosus into the ascending vena cava, the balance 
goes to the liver, from whence it finds its way, as venous 
blood, into the vena cava. Thus the vena cava contains 
arterialized blood from the placenta, venous blood from 
the liver, and also more venous blood which is poured 
into it by the veins from the body and lower limbs. This 
mixed current now passes onward into the right auricle of 
the heart, from thence into the left auricle through the 
foramen ovale, an opening which spontaneously closes as 
soon as the child draws its first breath. From thence it 
goes into the left ventricle, the contractions of which send 
it through the ascending aorta, into the head and upper 



52 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 7. 

extremities. This blood returns to the heart through the de- 
scending vena cava, enters the right auricle, then the right 
ventricle, then the pulmonary artery. In breathing life 
it would go to the lungs for purification, but now, instead 
of this course, it passes through the ductus arteriosus, a 
temporary duct which closes at birth, into the descending 
aorta, and from thence into the lower portions of the body, 
where the greater part finds an exit, through the umbilical 
arteries, into the placenta, and from thence into the circu- 
lation of the mother, the balance returning to the vena 
cava as above mentioned. 

By this it will be seen that the liver, a large and im- 
portant organ in foetal life, receives a large share of arterial 
blood from the placenta, and that the head and upper ex- 
tremities also receive nearly pure arterial blood, while that 
which supplies the lower extremities has already passed 
from the arterial to the venous condition by circulation 
through the upper portions of the system. Hence, we find 
at birth the liver to be developed in excess above the rest 
of the system, the head and trunk next in order, and the 
lower extremities, being least required for the simple pur- 
poses of animal life, least developed of all. 



PHYSIOLOGY. 53 



CHAPTER VIII. 



PHYSIOLOGY— Continued. 



1. Lungs— Breathing. The lungs, right and left, are 
two bodies, within which the venous blood of the body is 
brought into close proximity to air for purification. The 
lungs are composed of blood-vessels, air tubes and cells, 
nerves and lymphatics, held together by cellular tissue. 
The air tubes extend into every portion, and are subdi- 
vided into very numerous and minute branches, which 
terminate in very small cells, with extremely thin walls. 
The blood-vessels are of two sorts, one set to nourish the 
substance of the organs, and the other set to bring into the 
lungs the entire blood of the body for purification, and 
afterward to remove it. Of this latter set, the pulmonary 
artery brings the venous blood from the heart, and by its 
numerous and minute branches spreads it out over and 
into the walls of the minute air-cells. At this point, by a 
process not understood, the carbon of the blood passes out 
into the air-cells and is expelled with the air from the 
lungs, and, at the same time, the air in the cells parts with 
its oxygen, which is taken up by the blood. The pulmo- 
nary veins now take up this arterialized blood and con- 
vey it to the heart, which sends it out all through the 
system. 

2. You may demonstrate the escape of carbon from the 
lungs by breathing through a tube into freshly prepared 



54 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 8. 

lime-water, made by pouring water upon quicklime. The 
clear lime-water will instantly become turbid and milky. 
The cause is the union of the carbonic acid in the breath, 
with the lime in the water, forming a carbonate of lime, 
which will settle to the bottom of the vessel which con- 
tains it. 

3. The process of breathing is indispensable to life. 
By it a large portion of the carbon, which the venous 
blood contains, is removed. This carbonic acid is a dele- 
terious element of the venous blood, and is derived in the 
body from the continual wearing away of the tissues, and 
from that chemico-vital process by which animal heat is 
generated, in the course of which process the oily and 
sugary portions of our food are combined with oxygen, 
forming carbonic acid. 

The quantity of this element exhaled in twenty-four 
hours is averaged at 17.856 cubic feet, amounting to about 
5J ounces of solid carbon. Active labor, rich, oily, or 
sugary food, and a cold atmosphere increase the quantity; 
inactivity, low diet, and warmth diminish it. 

4. The number of air-cells in the lungs is estimated at 
no less than 600,000,000. They vary in diameter from 
2^0 *° 7 J o of an inch, which would give as many as 
8,000,000 of the smaller and 343,000 of the larger to a 
cubic inch of lung structure. It is into these minute cells 
that the air is. required to pass, and upon their walls the 
blood to circulate, and here, where air and blood are so 
closely in contact, the decarbonization and oxygenation or 
arterialization of the blood are performed. 

5. From the nature of the office which the lungs per- 
form, it will be readily understood how important to 
health must be the abundant supply of fresh air, and per- 
fect freedom for expansion of the lungs, so that the breath- 
ing may be full and deep. Every operation of the body 



PHYSIOLOGY. 55 

requires healthy blood, and the lungs are so constructed 
that they can keep the blood in that condition, if they are 
allowed full freedom for natural action. If we breathe 
impure air, or if the lungs are compressed or confined so 
that only a limited quantity of pure air can enter, their 
function can not be well performed, and the system must 
suffer, the lungs in common with the other parts. Arteri- 
alized blood is a stimulus to every part of the system, and 
no function can be well performed without it. 

The more active the system is, the more rapidly does 
the blood become vitiated, and the more is breathing re- 
quired to purify it. No active exertion can be made with- 
out increasing the action of the heart and lungs, for these 
organs act in concert. The average of respiration is about 
eighteen times per minute, and the pulsations average from 
four to five times that number, and the increase of one 
requires an increase of the other. If by exercise you in- 
crease the pulse, you will find the breathing becomes more 
rapid ; and if you forcibly and rapidly draw in and expel 
the air from the lungs, you will, by so doing, increase the 
heart's action. 

6. After a hearty meal the pulse is quickened, and 
breathing should be increased in rapidity to correspond. 
If, immediately after a full meal, a person lies down to 
sleep, the breathing does not go on at a rate proportioned 
to the requirements of the system. The blood is sent 
rapidly to the lungs, but does not meet with a full supply 
of air to purify it, the retained carbonic acid acts as a 
stupefier to the brain, the sleep is heavy and unrefresh- 
ing ; and if the person is of full habit, apoplexy or con- 
gestion of the brain may result, or if not, disturbed sleep, 
unpleasant dreams, and nightmare. Digestion requires a 
concentration and expenditure of vital action, and it is 
6 



56 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 8. 

unphysiological to force such labor upon the system during 
sleep. 

7. Full, deep, and abundant breathing is necessary to 
the full enjoyment of health, to any one, in ordinary con- 
ditions, and it becomes especially necessary to a female 
during gestation. At this period there is an extra demand 
upon her, to supply not only her own system, but also 
that of her infant, with healthy blood. She is required to 
breathe for herself and for her unborn child, and any 
neglect of the mother in this respect, will be unfavorable 
to the development of the infant in utero. During 
gestation, an important quantity of the mother's blood 
is diverted from its usual channels, sent through the 
uterine arteries into the placenta, from thence into the 
foetal body, and back again into the ordinary circulation of 
the mother, in a condition unfitted for use until reno- 
vated in the mother's lungs. This is an unceasing re- 
quirement, during the whole period. Every moment 
there is an abstraction of pure, arterial blood, from the 
mother's circulation, for the use of the child, and equally 
constant is its return to her system loaded with carbon. 
"We would look with horror upon a mother who know- 
ingly fed her infant upon impure or poisonous food. From 
the blood of the mother the child, in utero y derives its entire 
support, and the infant can get no pure food from impure 
blood. For all vital uses venous blood is impure and 
poisonous. 

8. Exercise in the open air, in proper weather, is best 
to promote full respiration. In very cold or unpleasant 
weather, the exercise should be in-doors and in well venti- 
lated rooms. The sleeping rooms should be well venti- 
lated. A window opened at the top, an open transom, or 
an open fire-place, are good ventilators; but if the window 
or the transom open into a hall or apartment with closed 



PHYSIOLOGY. 57 

windows, it will be of very little sendee. What your sleep- 
ing room requires is a continual supply of pure fresh air. 
Take an early walk in the morning, and then return to 
your sleeping room, and if you find it close, oppressive, 
and unpleasant, be sure that it did not have sufficient 
ventilation during the night. The body is continually 
giving off impurities by insensible perspiration, as well as 
by that which is visible, which are absorbed or retained 
by the day's clothing, and during the night by the bed 
clothing. The lungs are continually exhausting the air of 
its oxygen, and vitiating it with carbonic acid, and all 
these and other impurities and excretions of the body are 
in your bedroom at night. They must not be permitted 
to accumulate and remain if you expect health. They 
taint the atmosphere, and nothing but a constant and full 
supply of fresh air suffices to remove them. Air that has 
been once breathed is totally unfit for a second breathing. 
Air contaminated with the emanations and excretions of 
the body is very unhealthy. You can not have too much 
pure air in your bedrooms, but you can very easily have 
too little. Let it come into your rooms freely, only be 
careful that it does not blow directly upon you when you 
are sleeping. Don't be afraid to breathe the night air. 
It is just as full of health as the air of the day-time. 
Avoid being chilled by it, but breathe all you can of it. 
It will do you good. Open your windows and doors in 
the morning. Air your bed-clothing perfectly; let in 
sunlight and keep your bedrooms scrupulously clean. 

9. The clothing should be so loose upon the entire body 
and limbs that it will in no manner compress the lungs, 
or prevent perfect freedom of muscular movement. In 
spite of tchat fashion may dictate , every female should wear 
her clothing so loose that when she stands erect she can com- 
pldely fill her lungs, and by elevating her shoulders, move 



58 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 8. 

her entire clothing up and down. If she* can not do this. 
Iter clothing is worn too tight 

10. The oxygen received from the air in the lungs, by 
the blood, during respiration, is carried by the circulation 
into every part of the body, and is combined with the 
carbonaceous (oily, starchy, and sugary) portions of our 
food. It is supposed that this change occurs in the cap- 
illary system. By it, carbonic acid is formed and heat is 
evolved. This carbonic acid is then carried to the lungs 
to be expelled. Carbon and hydrogen are the fuel to feed 
the fires on the hearth of organic life, and oxygen is the 
supporter of the combustion. This process is a good il- 
lustration of chemical action controlled by vitality, and 
rendered subservient to it. The carbon and hydrogen of 
our food are the fuel, the entire body is the furnace, the 
hydro-carbonic acid represents the ashes, the lungs are the 
grate through which the draft goes and the ashes pass out. 
To keep warm in w T inter, we need abundant food and abun- 
dant oxygen ; we get the latter by full breathing of pure 
air. 

11. Food is required for the construction of the body; 
for its various secretions, for repairs, and for animal heat. 
The food must contain the elements for these various pur- 
poses. During the winter, we need more oily food to keep 
us warm. In summer, we require less, and our appetites 
crave less oil and more nitrogenous vegetables and acid 
fruits ; and if we are in health, the appetite is a very sure 
guide to what is proper to be eaten. The needs of the sys- 
tem for some particular element are indicated by a desire 
for some article of food containing that element. For in- 
stance, there will be a strong desire for acids at one time, 
and a repugnance to any thing sour at another ; and, when 
acids are craved, it is proper to use them. Let no one 
quote us as sanctioning the use of tobacco and liquor, be- 



PHYSIOLOGY. 59 

cause they may have a desire for them. Any appetite for 
such springs not from a physiological condition. 

12. Persons whose lives are spent in outdoor active 
employments can manage coarser and stronger food than 
they who lead sedentary lives. The former, by an active 
circulation, consumes the carbon, and by active respiration, 
casts it out by the lungs. The latter, if they live high, will 
either become diseased by the presence of impurities in the 
system, or they may store up the carbon in the form of 
fat — in itself a condition of disease, for it subserves no use- 
ful purpose, and is a burden at best; or they may make 
some amends for lack of breathing, bv the use of acids, in 
food and drink. These depend on oxygen for their acidity, 
and by their use, they introduce oxygen into the system, 
where it may combine with the carbon, and the product 
find its way out of the body by the various excretions. 
The presence of much fat is usually inconsistent with high 
physical or mental activity. Fat people are generally 
easy and lazy. 

13. Fat must not be confounded with lymph, for the 
presence of the latter in large proportion is entirely com- 
patible with great achievements. The briefest distinction 
we can here give between the two is, that the merely fat 
person will have a large body, with a head small in propor- 
tion to it, while a lymphatic person will have a head cor- 
responding in size with a large body. Lymph is a purely 
physiological element, and is found in every part of the 
system. Much fat is a surplus — frequently directly the 
result or cause of disease — is found principally in the 
cellular tissue, and never in the brain. People who are 
largely lymphatic may keep it down by avoiding the use 
of fluids. Those who wish to keep down their fat must 
avoid fat meats, oily, sugary, and starchy food, and use 
acids, eat moderately, and exercise freely. 



60 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 8. 

14. The active labors of the day tend to more or less 
waste and fatigue. Night is the natural time for repair and 
recuperation, and these are best accomplished during sleep. 
The number of hours of sleep required varies with different 
persons, and also with conditions. Five hours may be 
enough for some ; others may require eight or nine. Very 
young infants need two-thirds of every twenty-four hours; 
and up to five years, they require a full night's sleep, with 
a short nap in day-time. Up to ten or twelve years, they 
require full ten hours; and they should be allowed more 
than the average amount of sleep until they stop growing. 
Women who have young children and family cares seldom 
get as much sleep as they require, and hence they grow old 
and wear out sooner than men. They generally work more 
hours, and they seldom have an uninterrupted night's sleep. 
Children should go to bed about dark, or very soon after, 
and every person should, if possible, have at least two 
hour's sleep before midnight, and as many hours after that 
as the system needs. Persons who have enough of regular 
sleep can get along with less food, and retain health and 
vigor much longer than those whose hours of sleep are 
limited and irregular. 

15. Duration of life. The number of years allotted to 
each individual is governed by a fixed law within his or 
her organization, and is not the mere sport of external cir- 
cumstances. Every child born into the world receives 
from its parents an organization capable of a greater or 
lesser length of life, yet nearly definite in each case. Some 
children can not, by any physiological possibility, live but 
a few hours, or days, after birth. Others have no power 
of constitution to last them over a year, and others die of 
old age in early childhood. On the other hand, others 
come into the world with the ability, under ordinary con- 
ditions, for a century's life. These extremes, and all be- 



PHYSIOLOGY. 61 

tween them, are governed by fixed organic law. No power 
can prevent the death of the former in infancy and child- 
hood, and, under ordinary conditions, the latter will live 
to an advanced age. Each will live, accidents aside, the 
term permitted by his organization, and no longer. Many 
children appear vigorous at birth, but have no power of 
endurance, and they soon pass away; others appear very 
feeble when born, but live to an advanced age. 

16. Vigor and tenacity of life. Many persons, strong and 
vigorous, suddenly die while apparently in perfect health. 
To-day they may be at their usual business, and to-morrow 
will be reported as dead. Others, who seem ready to drop 
into the grave, still hang on to life with the most won- 
derful tenacity. The first is an example of vital vigor, or 
capacity for present action of a powerful character, but 
with small power of endurance. The latter is an illustra- 
tion of vital tenacity, or capacity for long continued action, 
but of moderate or even feeble character. Both vigor and 
tenacity may be possessed by the same person, and such 
will be able to live long and perform much, either for good 
or evil. Those who may desire to learn the principles and 
rules by which the duration of life, its vigor and tenacity 
are scientifically determined, can find them in the new 
edition of Prof. Powell's work on the Human Tempera- 
ments. 



62 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 9. 



CHAPTER IX. 

TEMPERAMENTAL COMPATIBILITY. 

1. At first glance it would seem in opposition to com- 
mon sense to deny the generally received statement of 
physiologists, that perfectly healthy parents are, per se, 
capable of producing healthy and viable offspring. We 
fully realize the importance of a healthy parentage, but 
this alone is not a guarantee of healthy progeny. The 
two parties to a marriage may be absolutely healthy, each 
separately considered, and yet they may be so temperament- 
ally unfitted, relative to each other, as to be entirely incapa- 
ble of producing offspring between themselves. This 
physiological unfitness, or temperamental incompatibility, 
may occur in varying degrees between parents, and will 
be followed by varying results. Where there is complete 
compatibility of temperaments in the parents, and they 
live in obedience to natural law, the best results in prog- 
eny are obtained. The children of such parents rarely die 
early, except from accident or positive neglect, or as a 
consequence of the violation of some important physiolog- 
ical law by the parents prior to or after the birth of such 
children. Where there is full temperamental incompati- 
bility, there will be no offspring. Where the incompati- 
bility is not so great, there will be miscarriages, abortions, 
still-births, or a few hours' or days' life to the children; 



TEMPERAMENTAL COMPATIBILITY. 63 

and among such it is very rare that a child lives to reach 
adult age. 

2. Between these extremes there is an indefinite num- 
ber of grades of incompatibility, which will produce a 
corresponding variety of results, the evil consequences to 
progeny depending upon the amount and kind of depart- 
ure from the requirements of the physiological law of 
compatibility. 

3. Temperamental incompatibility between parents is 
the direct and positive cause of at least two-thirds of the 
scrofula, consumption, deformity, insanity, blindness, deaf- 
ness, idiocy, and imbecility in society; of premature and 
still- births; of death in infancy, childhood, youth, and early 
manhood, and the feeble and sickly constitutions w^hich 
abound among us. If nature's laws in relation to par- 
entage were fully understood and obeyed, as far as we now 
know them, a large share of these evils would be prevented. 

To familiarly illustrate our meaning, we say, take any 
healthy individual of either sex — the one thus selected 
will be compatible with many others of the opposite sex, 
and if married to any one of these, would be capable of 
producing and rearing a numerous and healthy progeny; 
or would be incompatible with many others, and if married 
to any one of these, would not, under the most favorable 
circumstances, be capable of realizing favorable results in 
offspring. These would be instances of complete compat- 
ibility in the first case, or of full incompatibility in the 
other, and the progenital results would be positively good 
or positively bad. 

Between these two extremes there are many cases where 
the results on progeny are neither positively good nor 
positively bad. Such cases are numerous enough among 
society, and they are successful in raising to adult age 
about half their children, and these only at the expense 



64 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 9. 

of much care, anxiety, sorrow, and labor. Nor does the 
misfortune end here, for many of such children are en- 
dowed with such feeble or imperfect constitutions as to be 
but partially fitted to perform the active duties of life, 
generally suffering from disease, and dying at a period 
short of that allotted to man. And further, as such chil- 
dren will, when the proper age arrives, frequently assume 
the responsibilities of parentage, they will convey to their 
offspring feeble or diseased organizations. 

4. We are positive in our conviction, that if the rising 
generation of young men and women would learn and 
observe the laws of nature in regard to temperamental 
compatibility, and be governed by them in the selection 
of their marriage companions, a most marked and happy 
change would occur in the next generation of children, and 
an immense amount of misery, sickness, and premature 
death would thereby be prevented. Children from compat- 
ible parents are rarely afflicted with the forms of disease 

Note. — In our lectures and teachings, and in our edition of Prof. 
Powell's work on the Human Temperaments, these important truths 
are discussed, illustrated, and explained so fully that any careful 
student and accurate observer can readily learn to distinguish the 
different temperaments as they exist, and also to determine the degree 
of temperamental compatibility or incompatibility that may exist be- 
tween any two persons of the opposite sexes. 

We are not exaggerating when we say that we are able to tell, 
on seeing a married couple, what has been or what will be, to a 
great degree of certainty, the results as regards their offspring — 
whether they have had or will have children; whether they will be 
healthy or otherwise; the ages at which they probably have died or 
will die, and the forms of disease to which they are liable. We 
prefer a personal interview, but are willing to risk our reputation 
for candor and knowledge of the science on the opinion we will 
give from well-defined photographs of a married couple, and we in- 
vite any test that is prompted by honest and sincere motives. 

A. T. & T. H. K. 



TEMPERAMENTAL COMPATIBILITY. 65 

previously mentioned, and are very capable of resisting 
the attacks of the common causes of disease, and also of re- 
covering from any ordinary illness that may affect them. 

The children of incompatible parents are more liable 
than others to be injuriously affected by the common 
causes of disease — their powers of resistance and recovery 
being less. The common complaints of infancy make sad 
inroads among them, and scrofula and consumption select 
them for favorite and easy victims. 

Incompatibility of temperament is most productive of 
mischief in a highly civilized and artificial state of soci- 
ety; more in large cities than in the country; more 
among the rich than among the poor. "With the latter, 
there is usually but one motive to matrimony, the nat- 
ural and mutual personal attraction, governed by in- 
stinct. In the higher walks of society, pecuniary, ambi- 
tional, and selfish motives often rule, and alliances are 
founded on these without regard, and often in direct op- 
position to the natural instincts and attractions; and the 
forced conditions of the higher circles have brought out 
and occasioned such an increase of the adjunctive temper- 
aments, that among them a temperamentally compatible 
marriage is the exception, where it should be the rule. 

5. In the early part of our study and investigation of 
the human temperaments, we formed the opinion that the 
lower animals were under the control of laws similar to 
those which governed the human family in this relation, 
and that we might cause similar results by imposing forced 
and unnatural conditions upon them. With a view to 
demonstrate our position, we selected the canary bird as 
being one that could be most easily and extensively con- 
trolled. Our experiments were carried on through ten 
consecutive years, mating them according to our best ideas 
of compatibility and incompatibility. A strongly-marked 



66 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 9. 

4 

temperamental dissimilitude between a male and female 
was considered evidence of compatibility, and from a 
couple which possessed such a difference we always obtained 
favorable results. Where there was strong dissimilitude 
the birds were almost ahvays harmonious, and where there 
was strong similitude, they were usually quarrelsome, and 
would refuse to mate, except when placed together in a 
very small cage, covered so as to nearly exclude the light, 
and fed on highly stimulating food. Where we could ob- 
tain dissimilitude, we mated brother and sister, father 
and daughter, mother and son, cousins, and every other 
close-blood relation, and invariably obtained fine young 
birds, good singers, viable, perfect, and easily raised. 
Where we had close similitude, though no blood relation- 
ship, we never found a good progenital result. From 
seventy-five to one hundred eggs were laid each season 
by our birds. Of the eggs from incompatible couples one 
season, fifty-five in number, twenty did not hatch at all; 
of the thirty-five which did hatch, only five lived over 
the season, and not over half lived to leave the nest. 
While of full as many eggs from the compatible couples 
of the same season, nine-tenths were hatched, and but a 
very small percentage failed to live to maturity. Equal 
and similar care was bestowed upon all. 

From the incompatible couples, many entire or partial 
broods did not hatch, and examination showed partial de- 
velopment, but death ensued before completion. When 
hatched, many had not vitality enough to cast the shell ; 
others died in an hour or two, and others at all periods 
after hatching. Of such as lived, many were deformed in 
the toes, feet, legs, and wings, unable to sit on the perch or 
to fly when of proper age. Of such as were not deformed, 
many died after fledging, and nearly full growth, of swell- 
ings about the neck and throat, strongly similar to those 



TEMPEKAMEXTAL COMPATIBILITY. 67 

scrofulous affections of the same regions in the human 
body. From first to last, we were continually reminded 
of the results of incompatibility in the human race. The 
deformed in limb generally had the most vitality, in some 
cases living to become parents. The apparently perfect ones 
showed early feebleness, and usually died before, or just 
after they were able to feed themselves. Such as lived 
over the season were of little value. 

Among the progeny of the incompatibles, we mated a 
few couples as compatibly as possible, and from them ob- 
tained a fair number of average young birds, which were 
easily raised. Incompatible matings from the same pro- 
duced nothing desirable, often nothing at all. The mating 
of a young bird from incompatible parents, with a compat- 
ible partner from compatible stock, was followed by satis- 
factory results in progeny. We separated compatible 
couples that had produced numerous and fine young when 
together, and mated the individuals incompatibly, and in- 
variably obtained poor results; and, vice versa, we sepa- 
rated an incompatible pair that had fully proved their in- 
capacity, and, by mating each with a compatible compan- 
ion, obtained fine and viable offspring. 

We are informed by dealers in these birds, that the Ger- 
man bird-breeders place their whole stock of canary birds 
in a large room fitted for the purpose, and give them per- 
fect liberty of selecting their mates. In this respect, as 
well as in the abundant room for exercise, they approach 
the natural conditions, and have freedom to act out their 
instincts in mating, and producing and rearing their 
young. Few incompatible matings will occur under such 
circumstances — as few as among the savage and lower 
walks of human life. In our experiments, we aimed to 
place our birds in conditions analogous to the higher life 
of civilized society, in which ease, luxury, idleness, and 



68 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 9. 

neglect of physical development so largely prevail. 
Wealth springs from civilization, never from savage life. 
"Wealth affords opportunities for ease, luxury, and dissi- 
pation, which tend to develop the lymphatic temperament. 
Wealth also affords facilities for intellectual labor, which, 
carried to extremes, produces the encephalic temperament, 
both of which are disinclined to active physical exertion. 
Wealth rarely goes out of its own circle for marriage com- 
panions, but generally aims to increase itself by marrying 
its kind, regardless of other and higher considerations. 
We made our birds wealthy by giving them all they 
needed, without requiring of them any exertions. We 
prevented them from natural exercise, and forced them to 
mate with otliers in like conditions, and provoked their 
appetites and passions by stimulating and abundant food, 
and we obtained the same character of results among them 
that spring from similar conditions in human civilization. 

We gave the incompatibles large, roomy cages in some 
instances, and found that they succeeded somewhat better 
than in very small ones, but in no case did they do well. 



PREPARATIONS FOR PARENTAGE. 69 






CHAPTER X. 

PREPARATIONS FOR PARENTAGE. 

1. They who assume the responsibility of parentage, 
do not often consider, in advance, the magnitude of the 
position. It is the introduction into the world of human- 
ity, of one who may be happy or miserable, healthy or 
diseased, of a long or only a short life, perfect or deformed 
mentally and physically, of use or injury to its race, a 
law-abider or a criminal, among the best and wisest or the 
worst and most ignorant, and these not the result of edu- 
cation and training merely, but organically predetermined 
in its physical, intellectual, and moral organization, derived 
and inherited from and through its parents. The child, 
at birth, can only have what it receives from its parents — 
no more, no less — and though it may receive the best care, 
education, and influences, yet these can do but little to- 
ward changing its inheritance from bad to good. At best 
they can only modify and direct. They can never make 
a Xewton out of an idiot's organization, a philanthropist 
out of an organic homicide, an honest man out of an or- 
ganic thief, nor put full health and vigor into the feeble 
and scrofulous frame. 

2. The infant mind is not that "sheet of pure white 
paper," passively to receive and indelibly to retain what- 
ever educational marks may be made upon it. What it 
is to be is as positively fixed in its organization as the 



70 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 10. 

oak-tree is in the acorn, and time and natural growth will 
as certainly develop the organic peculiarities of the one as 
of the other. You may write " apple " on the acorn, but 
it will only grow into an oak. You may write " health 
and morality " on the scrofulous and immoral infant or- 
ganization, but they will only be words and never realized 
facts. 

3. We admit the benefit of education, training, and ex- 
ample, but the world has had too much experience not to 
realize that these fail in many instances, and but partially 
succeed in many others. The fault lies not in society at 
large, but in individuals. It springs primarily from 
parents, who, regardless of consequences, without fore- 
thought or previous preparation, become the means of 
bringing into the world any and every sort of children 
whose advent, in most cases, is neither designed nor 
desired. 

4. Horses, cattle, sheep, all domestic animals, whose 
owners breed them for profit, receive abundant care — care 
in the selection of progenitors, with reference to desired 
qualities, and equal care in rearing and training. Our 
farmers, fruit-growers, and florists, all recognize the neces- 
sity of selecting the best seed, of the best soil and careful 
cultivation. There is money in all these. The same per- 
sons bestow little thought upon themselves, in their rela- 
tion as parents, and they have a reward corresponding to 
their actions. 

5. Our chapter on temperamental compatibility affords 
a brief insight into one of the great causes of disease and 
early death, viz., incompatibility of temperaments between 
parents. The defects in organization derived from incom- 
patible parentage — the parents being in many cases the 
offspring of incompatibility through several generations — 
is not alone of a physical nature, but may be also of an 



PREPARATIONS FOR PARENTAGE. 71 

intellectual or moral character. Abnormalities of intellect 
and morality are as directly transmissible to progeny as 
are physical defects and liability to disease. 

There is not a vice or a virtue, a defect or perfection, 
whether physical or mental, in parents, which may not be 
transmitted to progeny, either as an organic condition or 
an organic liability, and these conditions and liabilities 
are the sum of a child's inheritance when it commences 
its earthly life. Xo idiotic, imbecile, deformed, feeble, or 
sickly child ever came into existence except through an 
adequate parental cause, and the responsibility for such un- 
fortunate results is directly traceable to the parents. " By 
their fruits ye shall know them," applies to the physical 
nature as well as to the moral, and such poor fruits as 
society sometimes and so abundantly gathers, demonstrates 
something radically wrong in the progenitors. " As ye 
sow, so shall ye reap;" and those parents who reap, 
through progeny, only disease, deformity, ingratitude, sin, 
and early death, should take the injunction home to them- 
selves, and not loosely charge the results upon God and 
accident. 

6. We wish that those who propose the act by virtue 
of which an immortal being may be brought, in due time, 
upon its first stage of existence, could fully appreciate the 
necessity in themselves for that previous physical health and 
training, which can only be obtained by abstinence from 
whatever depraves, intoxicates, and depresses, from every 
injurious habit and from every controlling appetite or pas- 
sion ; for that equilibrium of action of every organ of the 
body which constitutes health; for that calm exercise of 
the intellect and firm control of the propensities ; for that 
purity of thought and action ; for that harmony and love 
toward each other which they would desire to see rep^o 
duced in the natures and actions of their offspring. 



72 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 10. 

7. If parents have the primary elements of tempera- 
mental compatibility, and will originate and bring prog- 
eny into existence, under these favorable conditions, they 
will insure to them health, longevity, and goodness; the 
world will find in such its saviors and benefactors. Such 
a result is a thousand-fold worthy of the preparation, self- 
denial, and self-control that are required. They whose 
old age is rendered miserable by the faults and follies of 
their children, and they who are fated to survive a numer- 
ous progeny, can rarely attribute their misfortunes, with 
justice, to any source outside of themselves. The natural 
laws which bring happiness, through obedience, equally 
bring suffering to the disobedient, and there is no escape. 

8. By way of illustration we will suppose — two highly 
moral and religious parents, who conscientiously observe 
every known law of God and man, but are possessed of 
diseased and feeble bodies. They can not bring into the 
world children with healthy organizations. Two parents, 
who are models of health, intellect, and morality, sepa- 
rately considered, but highly incompatible in temperaments, 
as related to each other, can have no good results in prog- 
eny in the physical sense; disease and early death will 
surely follow. Suppose compatibility and sound health 
in a married couple, but mental inharmony, domestic dis- 
cord, and strife; or suppose a concentration of mental 
action upon acquisitiveness or any other propensity — what 
right could they have to expect aught but a re-production 
of their own mental conditions in their progeny ? Our 
readers can supply illustrations as forcible to almost any 
extent. 

9. Any appetite or passion, long indulged, becomes a 
" second nature," and is liable to be transmitted. Drunk- 
ards, liars, and thieves are often such through inherited 
liability. Constitutions depraved by tobacco, liquor, or 



PREPARATIONS FOR PARENTAGE. 73 

immoral practices, will transmit the appetites and liabilities 
to similar practices. Insanity and monomania, are trans- 
missible, and are often found in several generations of the 
same family. A temporary intoxication, stupefaction, or 
delirium may be permanently re-produced in a child. The 
most secret actions and conditions of parents are thus 
brought to light in their children, and in time the world 
will come to hold parents morally responsible for what 
their children may be; and in justice to such children we 
are compelled to say that they can not be held morally 
responsible for a defective intellect or organic lack of 
moral and restraining power, any more than for a diseased 
or feeble constitution derived from parentage. We do yet 
look upon them as legally responsible for any offense they 
may commit. It will be considered just, when the world 
becomes wiser, to treat them as diseased and unfortunate 
from necessity of organization, instead of willfully criminal 
from choice; and restraint, education, and guidance will 
take the place of punishment.* 

10. The direct progenital influences of the father upon 
the child are accomplished the moment the life impress is 
given. It is of the utmost importance that he should 
have, at that time, the best possible conditions of body and 
mind, for what he has and what he is then, he will be 
liable to impart. The child will probably inherit the 
father's general characteristics, but the special activity or 
inactivity of any organ or faculty of the father, at that 
time, will be represented permanently in the child. It is 
his actual condition for the time being, which he confers. 

11. The same remarks apply with equal pertinency to 

* For a full elucidation of this subject we refer our readers to 
the "Essay on the Protection of Society from Crime," in Professor 
Powell's work on Human Temperaments ;" edited and published by 
A. T. & T. H. Keckeler. 



74 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 10. 

the mother, but her direct influence is continued through- 
out the period of gestation. The entire conditions and 
materials for growth and development of the child are to 
be supplied by her. Whatever influences the mother, di- 
rectly or indirectly, may and usually does influence the 
child. It is almost, if not quite correct, to say that the 
education of the child goes on in connection with its physi- 
cal development before its birth, for the mental states of 
the mother, during gestation, are often found to be repeated 
in her offspring, and she may thus educate her child into 
good or bad habits, dependent upon her own practices. 
The child's best interests are consulted when the mother 
keeps her own system in the best possible conditions of 
health and harmony. 

12. The father may have a very important although 
indirect influence upon the child previous to its birth, 
through his influence upon the mother. A child whose 
gestation is accomplished in an atmosphere of domestic 
strife and discord, will not fail to receive a mentally un- 
harmonious disposition. Fathers are often more respon- 
sible in this relation than they are apt to imagine. 

We saw, in the alms-house of Butler County, Ohio, in 
1863, an illustration of paternal influence in the person of 
an imbecile boy, about twenty years of age. His whole 
appearance and manner was that of nearly helpless intox- 
ication. He had to be waited upon in every respect like a 
young infant, and his mother had given twenty years of 
her life to that miserable task. She told us that the boy 
was a representation of what his father was at the time 
she became pregnant. 

We saw a somewhat similar case in a neighboring city, 
within a few months. 



woman's rights relative to maternity. 75 



CHAPTER XI. 

WOMAN'S NATURAL RIGHTS RELATIVE TO MATERNITY. 

1. The subject of the physical relations of the two 
sexes in the re-production of the species, is one of great 
importance. In regard to those actions which spring di- 
rectly from the sex-nature, there is less general and cor- 
rect knowledge and proper feeling than upon almost any 
other manifestation of human nature in a physical direc- 
tion. This subject, which should be properly understood 
by every young man and woman previous to matrimony, 
has been considered too delicate in its nature to be made 
in any way a matter of general instruction, and young 
people are left to commence married life almost in total 
ignorance of it, and are left to the guidance of passion. 
The home and school education is more neglected in this 
most important direction, than in almost any other, while 
there is no lack of an undercurrent of incorrect influ- 
ences to which every child has ready access. 

In instituting the two sexes, nature provided the means 
for the perpetuation of the species, and the legitimate ex- 
ercise of the human capacities in this direction, is strictly 
in accordance with physiology and morality; but when 
carried beyond its proper limits, it becomes a source of 
direct evil. Left to their instincts, the animals confine 
themselves within the proper bounds, for with them the 
female is recognized as having the right to accept or re- 



76 THALETA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 11. 

ject, according to the demands of her organization. With 
female animals, immediate capacity for procreation, and 
desire for the male, are present at the same time, and con- 
ception quenches desire. At all times when desire is not 
present, she is unmolested by the male. Such, we affirm, 
is the boundary fixed by nature, and such should be the 
rule of action with the human family. 

2. Wives have not been permitted to speak their views 
of their rights on this subject, and have universally been 
required to do violence to their higher instincts and feel- 
ings, to gratify the passions of their husbands. It should 
never be considered the duty of the wife to accommodate 
herself to the desires of the husband, irrespective of the 
results which are likely to follow. She has a natural 
right to determine when and how often she shall become a 
mother, and as the sexual act may prove a procreative one, 
it should be left to her control and decision as to the time 
and frequency. In no other way can the wives of our 
land avoid becoming unwilling mothers, and in no other 
way can they avoid the immensity of suffering and disease 
that results from the excessive demands of their hus- 
bands. 

3. Even in view of its legitimate result, which is pro- 
creation, restraint is demanded, for no man or woman is 
at all times in fit condition for parentage, and the act 
should only be consummated when both parties to it are 
in the best possible condition to impress upon their off- 
spring such an organization as will render its life a happy 
and useful one. The duties of parents toward progeny 
are imperative, and they are binding even before they ap- 
proach each other in their sexual capacities. The act 
should be contemplated in advance of its completion, and 
both husband and wife should come to it with physical 
health, mental harmony, and a desire and willingness to 



woman's rights relative to maternity. 77 

perform all the subsequent duties that devolve upon them 
as parents. Children born under such conditions, of par- 
ents temperamentally compatible, would prove worthy of 
the utmost care and love of their parents. 

4. In view of the immediate consequences of excess in 
the amatory direction, restraint is demanded. It is ex- 
tremely exhausting in its effects, particularly to nervous 
energy; and when exercised for mere pleasure, is often a 
wanton waste of energy and vitality. It is directly inju- 
rious, by reason of the debility it occasions, and indirectly , 
because it unfits for the performance of higher duties. 
Excess in this relation is a direct cause of paralysis, blind- 
ness, loss of memory, and many other forms of disease in 
the nervous system. These are not generally immediately 
noticed, but many a wrecked constitution is directly owing 
to it. 

5. Nine times out of ten the prime mover in this ex- 
cess is the husband, and the wife is an unwilling or passive 
participator. In our capacity of physician, we are obliged 
to listen to the statements of wives, who come to us for 
medical aid and counsel, and we know that more of those 
forms of disease, to which married women are specially 
liable, are caused by excess of amatory desire and indul- 
gence on the part of their husbands, than by all other 
causes combined. Married women are, in many instances, 
absolutely forced to submit, when every instinct and feel- 
ing revolt ; when the act brings with it pain, and indes- 
cribable disgust, often aggravating the disease already 
previously occasioned. With every element of happiness, 
the lives of many of the wives of our land are deprived 
of comfort and made unspeakably miserable from this sole 
cause. If husbands desire their wives to love them, they 
must act in this respect so as to deserve love. There are 
but few forms of disease peculiar to married females, or to 



78 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 11. 

which they are specially liable, that are not directly pro- 
duced, or aggravated, by sexual excess; and, furthermore, 
there is scarcely a married female who is free from some 
form of disease thus induced, and many a woman passes 
from a happy and healthy girlhood, through matrimony, 
into the condition of diseased and debilitated wife and 
motherhood, to find relief only in the grave, and this mis- 
erable sequel to a life of healthy and happy promise, is 
occasioned by the unrestrained and excessive demand of 
the amatory passion of her husband. Wives are so de- 
pendent upon and subject to the control of their husbands, 
that often they dare not murmur, much less boldly insist 
on their natural rights to be let alone in this relation. 

6. In view of its effects upon progeny, restraint of 
amatory indulgence is most positively needed. An un- 
willing maternity can not be a happy one; nor can a 
child, born of such, receive from its mother those genial 
mental influences that surround the domestic hearth, where 
harmony and love preside. The unhappy mental state of 
the mother descends to the child, to permanently over- 
shadow its life. " The child, accepted as a necessity, nursed 
and tended grudgingly, has one birthright. But the 
child, loved and cared for in embryo, and received in the 
fullness of conjugal, paternal, and maternal love, has quite 
another birthright. . . . You can see the disregard 
of that truth in the sorrowful perversions all around us." 
(Harriot K. Hunt, M. D.) 

7. Other and more serious consequences to progeny fre- 
quently result. It is a law in human physiology, that 
where a mental organ, or class of organs, is excessively 
developed and active in both parents, a deficiency of the 
same will be produced in the child. It appears to be a 
wise provision of nature, to prevent monstrosities of de- 
velopment and departures from her normal types of be- 



io 



woman's eights relative to maternity. 79 



gs. An illustration will explain our meaning : Suppose 
the organ of amativeness to be unusually developed and 
active in both parents, and its double size and power to 
be transmitted to a child, who in turn meets with a mate 
similarly organized, and their doubled strength in respect 
to amativeness could be transmitted. The progeny of the 
latter would prove amative monsters. Nature prevents 
such an occurrence, by cutting off nearly, and sometimes 
entirely, in the child the organ which was possessed in 
excess by the parents. 

8. Under the above-mentioned law of physiology, there 
will occasionally be found a positive deficiency of the 
organ of amativeness, and a consequent incapacity for func- 
tional performance, in the children of parents who have 
been extreme in endowment, activity, and exercise of that 
capacity. Such children are lacking in amatory feeling, 
and have a natural aversion to the opposite sex. Fortu- 
nately, such extreme examples are rare, but there are many 
who approach this defect in organization to a greater or 
lesser degree. They are never happy members of society, 
but incline toward solitude and abstraction of thought, and 
frequently become insane. Physically, they are feeble, 
and rarely accomplish much. 

9. A full development of amativeness in both parents, 
with great activity and unrestrained exercise, is of fre- 
quent occurrence, and is productive of much injury, in two 
general directions, upon progeny. While the parents re- 
tain their vigor, children from them will frequently in- 
herit, to a degree beyond the parents, the development and 
activity of the amative organ, combined with inability to 
keep its manifestation within bounds. They can only sus- 
tain a moral character in a country where polygamy is 
legalized. They are more frequently of sanguine-lym- 
phatic, sanguine-bilious-lymphatic, and bilious-lymphatic 

8 



80 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 11. 

temperaments. The bilious and sanguine-bilious are next 
in numbers * 

"When continued excess in amativeness has reduced the 
parental vigor to a low ebb, the progeny come into exist- 
ence with a full and active endowment of amativeness, but 
with constitutions lacking in health, vigor, and capacity 
for endurance. Amative passion controls, but the physi- 
cal system can not bear the depletion, and soon yields to 
the overmastering power of the tyrant, and the constitu- 
tion becomes a wreck. From an extensive investigation 
of the cases of young people who have become insane from 
the pernicious and prevalent practice of self-abuse, we 
have generally found them to possess full and active am- 
ativeness with feeble endowment of the motory and sen- 
sory centers, and, as far as we have been able to ascer- 
tain, the majority of them came from parents who had a 
high amatory endowment and strong physical organiza- 
tions. 

These three classes of abnormality, viz., deficiency of 
amative endowment, with feeble organization; excessive 
amative endowment in a vigorous organization, and ex- 
cessive endowment of the same, with feeble constitutions, 
are each organic, each derived from parents, each resulting 
from their failure to control the amative propensity. We 
have noticed many cases in which the latter two grades of 
results are to be found in the same family, the first oc- 
curring before, and the latter after the parents had ex- 
hausted their vigor by excessive amative indulgence. 

10. The will and judgment control best in normal and 
well-balanced organizations. The greater the strength 
of those organs of the brain through which the passions 
raid propensities are manifested, the less is their possessor 
able to control them. Parents who yield temporarily to 
* See Powell's work on the Human Temperaments. 



woman's rights relative to maternity. 81 

passion and propensity at the time the life impress is given 
to progeny, are liable to confer their temporary conditions, 
which become to their offspring permanent endowments, 
from the influence of which they can never be wholly 
freed. Just those conditions of body, intellect, and feel- 
ing which parents bring with them to the performance 
of the procreative act, they can and do give to their off- 
spring — not what they leave behind, unactive or unem- 
ployed — not what they may lack at the time and afterward 
possess. Their temporary conditions are liable, therefore, 
to become the permanent conditions of the progeny. Their 
temporary excess and lack of control are liable to so influ- 
ence their progeny that its actions in life will be perma- 
nently of like character, and the evil will be perpetuated . 
through such progeny, when they come to be parents. 

We should feel that we had accomplished much if we 
could fasten it upon the understandings of parents, that 
if they come to the procreative act, goverened even tem- 
porarily only, by passion and propensity, they are ex- 
tremely liable to have progeny whose organizations will 
be permanently under like evil control. The interests 
of humanity are seriously involved, and the responsibility 
of parents is far greater than they generally apprehend. 
Children are obliged to accept such organizations as their 
parents furnish them, and their actions in life ivitt be such 
as legitimately proceed from their organizations. Correct 
actions spring from correct feelings and impulses, from 
sound judgment and controlling will. Many organizations 
have neither kind feelings, genial impulses, ability for 
correct reasoning, nor power of ic Ming to do what is right; 
passion and propensity govern • they can only will to do 
wrong, in strict accordance with their organizations, and 
their parents, and not they, are responsible for what they 
are. Nevertheless, good influences, judicious training, and 



82 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 11. 

correct methods of education are competent to modify 
constitutional tendencies, yet not wholly obviate the evils. 
11. Means of control and restraint. Among these are 
a correct appreciation of the evil and its results, with 
proper feelings in relation to it; the avoidance of personal 
temptation; purity of thought; temperance in food and 
drink; avoidance of stimulants; the direction and em- 
ployment of the various powers of the system in legitimate 
channels; a recognition of individual and personal natural 
right of each person to be unmolested in this relation; a 
due regard for the best interests of progeny and of humanity 
in general. In a mere selfish view, restraint promotes 
personal health and happiness, and domestic enjoyment; 
prevents disease and debility in parents and their offspring, 
and prevents unwilling maternity. 



TOBACCO. 83 



CHAPTER XII. 



TOBACCO. 



1. Tobacco. In tobacco, as prepared for sale, the chem- 
ist finds two intense poisons, and a third is produced by 
the process of smoking. They are called nicotine, nico- 
tianine, and the empyreumatic oil. Chewers of the weed 
get most of the first two, smokers receive the effects of the 
last named. Nicotine is a colorless volatile liquid alkali, 
of an intense acrid, burning taste, and possessing narcotic 
and very poisonous qualities — in this respect scarcely in- 
ferior to prussic acid, a single drop being sufficient to kill 
a dog. Its odor is so irritating that it is almost impos- 
sible to breathe in a room in which a single drop has 
been evaporated. The second poisonous element, nico- 
tianine, is a concrete oil, volatile, and of a bitter taste. 
Taken internally it produces giddiness, nausea, and vom- 
iting. Both nicotine and nicotianine have the odor and 
taste of tobacco. They are both found in the dried leaf, 
but it is supposed the oil is somehow formed in the process 
of curing the leaves, as it is not found in the green leaf. 
This is of little importance, for the green leaves are never 
used for smoking or chewing. The empyreumatic oil, 
which seems to be produced during the burning of the 
leaves, is equally poisonous with the nicotine. One drop 
of it applied to the tongue of a cat brought on convulsions 
immediately, and death in two minutes. 



84 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 12. 

The smoker has no advantage over the chewer, for if 
he avoids the elements which the chewer obtains, he has 
one fully as deadly, which the chewer avoids. At best, 
it is only a choice between two serious evils, and it seems 
so hard for many to choose, that they persevere in the use 
of both. The smoke of tobacco contains both the volatile 
alkali and the oil, and these necessarily pass with the 
smoke into the mouth, throat, and lungs, and are absorbed 
through the mucous membrane. 

2. A mild cigar, or a moderate sized quid of chewing 
tobacco, will produce upon a strong adult, who has never 
used tobacco in any form, the following symptoms : nausea, 
vomiting, purging, languor, feebleness, relaxation of mus- 
cles, tremors, faintness, dimness of sight, labored breath- 
ing, confusion of ideas, feeble pulse, cold and clammy 
surface, or cold sweats. If the dose be excessive, these 
symptoms will be increased, and soon followed by convul- 
sions, paralysis, torpor, and death. To persons who have 
by degrees become accustomed to tobacco, these effects are 
superseded by others not less injurious because longer de- 
layed. 

3. Habitual users are liable to giddiness, nausea, vom- 
iting, dyspepsia, diarrhea, piles, nervousness, amaurosis, 
deafness, congestion of brain, loss of memory and intel- 
lectual vigor, paralysis, apoplexy, atrophy, mania, disease 
of brain and spinal cord, incurable ulcerations and cancers 
of the lips, tongue, and mouth, a general loss of physical 
and mental power, and to cowardice and indecision of 
character. These effects are not found to exist in every 
case, but they are so intimately connected with the use of 
the weed, that no physiologist or candid observer will at- 
tempt to deny that tobacco will cause them all, and many 
others. Its influence on the nervous system of habitual 
indulgers is at first stimulating, and afterward depress- 



TOBACCO. 85 

ing — requiring its continued use. Tobacco weakens the 
digestive organs, causes an excessive waste of saliva, and 
dryness of the mouth. The food is not moistened with 
saliva, but water is required to wash it dow T n into the 
stomach ; the gastric fluid is, by this, too much diluted, 
and digestion can not be well performed. Hence the re- 
sults are, in young people, arrest of the growth of the 
body, feebleness of vitality, low stature, an insufficient 
supply and bad quality of blood. Smoking, in particular, 
more than chewing, causes thirst and vital depression, and 
stimulating liquors are resorted to, to an extent always 
injurious and often fatal. There is no moral doubt of the 
fact that the use of tobacco is a chief cause of intemper- 
ance, through the thirst and feebleness it produces. 

It weakens the nervous power, produces indolence and 
incapacity for manly, concentrated, and continuous exer- 
tion, and favors a dreamy, imaginative, and imbecile state 
of existence. 

These are only a portion of its evil effects on the indi- 
vidual. The strong and healthy are able to withstand, in 
a measure, its attacks for years; the young, and those of 
delicate constitutions, are more immediately and seriously 
affected. 

4. The filthiness of the habit and the annoyance it causes 
to those who do not use it, especially to the wives of its 
votaries, ought to be reason enough for its abandonment ; 
but such is the tyranny of the habit, that it overrides 
every consideration of politeness, and regard for the com- 
fort of others, and fosters a complete selfishness, so much 
so, that hardly any time or place is sacred from its pres- 
ence. Its fumes assail us in nearly every public convey- 
ance, and ladies are only protected from it by the ominous 
notice, "No smoking allowed." Nothing but that imper- 
ative order, to be enforced by a police officer, will suffice. 



86 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 12. 

Innate politeness is crushed and smothered, and gentlemen 
who would scorn to annoy a lady in any other way, are 
unblushing and disregardful, as far as tobacco is concerned. 
The drawing-room, the church, the public hall, teem with 
the odors of tobacco from clothes and breaths, and it has 
become necessary for special receptacles to be placed at all 
points, to save carpets and floors from the flood of saliva 
from chewers' mouths. There is no place sacred from its 
villainous defilement. 

5. Its primary effect upon the strong and vigorous, is 
to stimulate and excite the sexual propensity, and thereby 
it is a provoking cause of excess in amatory practices. 
Upon the young or feeble its effect is the same, and by 
thus increasing sexual desire, and prompting excessive ac- 
tion, it leads to debility and early impotency, by the ex- 
haustion produced. Its tendency is to eventually produce 
similar results upon all who use it. 

6. Its effects, primarily and secondarily, upon married 
females, has never, as far as we have been able to learn, 
appeared in public print. Our attention has been directly 
given to it for many years, and our additional charge 
against tobacco is a serious one. To it we attribute a large 
amount of disease of the sexual organs of the wives of to- 
bacco-users, produced, partly indirectly, from excessive 
indulgence, required by the inordinate desire of their hus- 
bands, which is attributable to the effects of tobacco on 
their systems ; and directly from the vitiated character of 
the seminal secretion, which from tobacco-saturated hus- 
bands is absolutely poisonous to the mucous surfaces of 
the female sexual organs. A system so completely per- 
meated with tobacco that it escapes from every pore of 
the body, can not, by any physiological possibility, furnish 
pure and healthy secretions. " The seminal fluid from to- 
bacco-users, is more than usually copious, of strong, un- 



TOBACCO. 87 

pleasant odor, and positively poisonous." — (Prof. "W. Byrd 
Powell, M. D.) Leucorrhoea, ulcerations, inflammations, 
cancers, tumors, prolapsus, irritations, intolerable itching 
and burning are among the physical results; and disgust 
and loathing are not always the least of the mental effects; 
for the continued repetition of an occurrence which is to 
be dreaded for the present suffering and disgust it pro- 
duces, added to the aggravation of the disease already pro- 
duced by similar former occurrences, is not likely to prove 
an incentive to continued affection. We can not recall an 
instance in our medical practice, where the wife of an in- 
veterate tobacco slave did not suffer from some form of 
complaint positively traceable to the practice of the hus- 
band. The children of tobacco-users are very liable to 
have weak eyes, and scrofulous affections of the eyes, and 
very frequently general scrofulous constitutions. 

" Medical statistics tell us that one-half of the persons 
who die in Germany between the ages of twenty and forty- 
five years, die from the effects of the use of tobacco ; and 
that in this country ten thousand die annually from the 
effects of the same cause." 
9 






88 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 13. 






CHAPTEE XIII. 



MENSTRUATION. 



1. By reason of her peculiar sexual organization and 
her maternal duties and offices, woman is liable to many- 
forms of disease and to much pain and suffering from 
which her brother man is exempt. The causes of disease 
to which both sexes are, in common, liable, frequently pro- 
duce very different effects upon the female from what they 
do upon the male, and she is often doomed to bear a full 
share of the pernicious consequences of man's vices and 
intemperance; thus innocently suffering for wrongs, in the 
committal of which she takes neither an active nor passive 
part, and against which her whole life and actions are a 
continual protest. Many of the wives of our land have 
no higher hold upon their husbands than that which 
springs from their ability to minister to man's pleasures, 
passions, and selfishness. If any intelligent female will 
read what our book contains upon this subject, ana com- 
pare it with her experience and observation, we are confi- 
dent that she will coincide with our view. 

The female is liable to any form of disease which may 
locate itself upon any organ or tissue which is possessed 
in common by both sexes, and is influenced by the same 
causes of disease, alike with the male. Of these we do not 
propose to say much, either in the way of cause, descrip- 
tion, or treatment. Our aim is to benefit females espe- 



MENSTRUATION. 89 

cially, and to give them some of the results of our personal 
and professional research, observation, and experience. 

As a general rule, the early years of a girl's life do not 
require her to be treated in a manner specially different 
from a boy. Her more delicate organization, and the dif- 
ferent sphere of life to which she is destined, may require 
a modification of education and training, but the same 
general principles apply to both girls and boys. 

2. About the age of fourteen, in temperate climates, an 
important change occurs in the progress of the develop- 
ment of the female — in consequence of which she becomes 
capable of maternity. This change occurs at an earlier 
age in the tropical climates, and in the extreme northern 
latitudes it is postponed for a few years. In our own 
latitude it appears in cities generally sooner than in the 
country. We refer to the commencement of menstruation, 
or the monthly discharges. Where the girl is healthy, its 
appearance may be looked for with regularity at intervals 
of every three to four weeks, and unless sickness or preg- 
nancy occurs, it may be regularly expected up to the age 
of forty to forty-five years, about which time it naturally 
ceases. 

3. Concerning the function of menstruation in the 
healthy female, it seems hardly necessary to say more than 
that it is strictly physiological, and does not in any w r ay 
partake of the nature of disease, but its natural manifesta- 
tion may be interfered with by a variety of causes. 

When we consider that the female is capable, during a 
considerable period of her life, of child-bearing and nursing, 
and that the material for the growth of the child's body up 
to the time of its birth, and also its natural nourishment 
during its period of nursing, must come directly from and 
through the mother's organization, we can readily com- 
prehend the necessity, to the female, of a supply beyond 



90 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 13. 

the immediate wants of her own system. The capacity to 
furnish this surplus is evidence of capacity for maternity. 
The female physiology is so endowed that it appropriates 
to its own uses this surplus, until about the age of four- 
teen, and thereby causes an earlier maturity than is the 
case with males. As soon as this period arrives, the sys- 
tem, when in health, casts out this surplus at regular men- 
strual periods, or if pregnancy occur, it devotes it to the 
growth of the infant organization until birth, and after 
that to the production of milk. Menstruation is not to 
be expected during pregnancy or the early months of 
nursing, though this will sometimes be the case. 

The escape of the menstrual flow is merely the natural 
throwing off of a surplus of the system, which, if re- 
tained, would prove either a burden or a source of disease. 
Hence we find that females are never more healthy than 
when they are " regular." Irregularity and suppression 
are either causes or consequences of disease. If they are 
the mere consequent attendant of some form of disease 
common to both sexes, we may look for a return of men- 
struation when health returns. If they are the causes of 
disease peculiar to females only, they demand special at- 
tention. 

4. It is of the utmost importance to a young girl that 
the function of menstruation should be physiologically es- 
tablished, and at the proper time. Unless this be done, 
her coming years will bring neither health nor happiness. 
She should be correctly instructed concerning the change 
that is to occur, its necessity and its import. This instruc- 
tion should come from some competent female, and it is 
only false modesty or inexcusable neglect that would pre- 
vent a mother from performing this duty toward her 
daughter. The girl should not be left in ignorance, nor 
to have the revelation from some incompetent or gossiping 



MENSTRUATION. 91 

person, or an ignorant domestic, or inexperienced girl, 
scarcely older than herself. 

5. Among the signs which indicate the near approach 
of the first menstruation, are lassitude, fullness of the 
head, irregular appetite, general uneasiness, pains in the 
back and limbs. There may be constipation, nausea, and 
headache. There is frequently irritability of temper and 
despondency, soreness of the breasts, a feeling of weight in 
the pelvic region, and secretion of mucus from the vagina. 
About the commencement of the discharge there is fre- 
quently pain in the ovaries and uterus. In health, the 
whole of the symptoms may not amount to more than a 
mild annoyance. The symptoms enumerated may not 
always appear in full, nor be immediately followed by the 
appearance of the menses. Menstruation may not ensue 
for days, weeks, or even months. In the latter case the 
symptoms are quite likely to be felt at indefinite inter- 
vals, and the girl may be hardly free from a portion of 
them until the menses appear, following which there is 
usually a complete relief from all of the symptoms. 
Where there is much delay, bleeding from the nose may 
frequently occur. The symptoms will be likely to return, 
to some extent, just before the next period, which may 
happen at any time short of two or three months, or even 
longer. Frequently the first few periods are irregular as 
to time of return, differing from each other in duration of 
interval several days or weeks. Other cases are definite 
from the very first time. Under ordinary healthy condi- 
tions, the menses soon settle down to regular periods of 
about three to four weeks apart, and the girl is then lost 
in the woman capable of maternity — though it would be 
almost, if not quite, a sin to require it of her until sev- 
eral years have elapsed and her physical system and men- 
tal character have become more fully developed. 



92 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 13. 

6. It should be clearly comprehended by those who have 
the charge of young girls at the time the menses are about 
to appear, that menstruation is not a disease, but a purely 
physiological function, and that its appearance is an evi- 
dence of health and natural progress of development. 
Temperament, vigor, habits of life, and general health are 
conditions which influence its early or late appearance, 
and, under ordinary conditions, nature provides all the 
necessities for its establishment in the regular progress of 
the development of each individual. Except under un- 
usual circumstances, we should leave nature to do her own 
work. The habits of the girl who is expecting this change 
should be such as tend to promote general health. She 
should not be required to study hard, should have abun- 
dant exercise in the open air, and regular and sufficient 
sleep. Her diet should be simple and nourishing. What- 
ever tends to physical or mental excitement should be 
avoided. If the bowels are constipated, mild aperient 
medicines only should be used. Bathing is a prime neces- 
sity for health at this, as well as at all other periods, but 
cold baths should be interdicted. All medicines that have 
a real or supposed tendency to force menstruation should 
be scrupulously avoided. It is only when we are con- 
vinced that nature has failed, after a due effort, that we 
are authorized to use specific means to induce its appear- 
ance. If the girl remain healthy, we should wait, even 
if several years elapse without any signs. 

As soon as the premonitory signs appear, the health of 
the girl should be carefully noticed, and if it does not 
suffer, even if the menses do not appear, we should adopt 
such treatment as will tend to promote the general health 
and give tone and vigor to the system, and these should 
be in the line of hygiene and habits, rather than in direct 



MENSTRUATION. 93 

administration of medicine. Remember, we oppose any 
force work under these or any other conditions. 

7. The girl should have it fully impressed upon her 
niind, that when the discharge appears, she should not do 
any thing to interrupt or check its natural progress. It 
is just at this period that many girls lay the foundation 
for ruined health and a life of suffering. There is great 
danger, indeed almost a certainty, of a serious result, if 
the first menstrual discharge is checked or interrupted. 
The few days of the first menstrual flow are indeed a criti- 
cal period in a girVs life. If there has been no interrup- 
tion to the natural progress, from beginning to end, she 
may expect its re-appearance in from three to four weeks. 
If, by sad fortune, neglect, or intention, the first discharge 
has been seriously interrupted or checked, it will not be 
likely to return painless and with regularity. On the 
contrary, the girl will soon come to dread her monthly 
periods on account of the pain and sickness which will 
invariably accompany their visits. 

8. The greatest danger of interruption, or entire check, 
arises from " taking cold," to which the system is partic- 
ularly susceptible at this precise period. From motives of 
delicacy, girls are very likely, unless previously instructed 
and warned, to endeavor to conceal their condition, and to 
hide or remove every thing by which it might become 
known. Hence, they may resort to the use of cold water 
to wash themselves and their clothing, perhaps wearing it 
while damp or wet, particularly if they should be away 
from home at the time. Or they may, through ignorance, 
or disregard of the consequences, permit their feet to be- 
come and remain wet and cold; and we have known of 
one instance where cold water was resorted to for the ex- 
press purpose of stopping it during its first appearance. 
The girl had been informed by some one who was prob- 



94 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 13. 

ably ignorant of the clanger, that cold water would have 
that effect. Her life was rendered miserable, for she never 
had health or freedom from intense suffering during her 
after periods. 

9. In rare instances cold produces a very different effect. 
By contracting the surface and sending the blood inwardly, 
it causes the discharge to become very excessive, and in- 
stead of ceasing in a few days, a continuous hemorrhage 
results, causing great debility, and frequently lasting from 
ten days to two weeks. This condition is very likely to 
become a permanent one, unless properly managed at the 
very first. The treatment should be the same as for ex- 
cessive menstruation or flooding. 



IRREGULARITIES OF MENSTRUATION. 95 



CHAPTER XIV. 

DERANGEMENTS AND IRREGULARITIES OF MENSTRUATION. 

1. Amenorrhcea. Retarded Menstruation. This term 
is used when girls have passed the usual age, without the 
appearance of the menses. As there are many who natu- 
rally develop slowly, and others w r hose development is 
retarded by sickness, feeble constitution, or other causes, 
the non-appearance of menstruation, at the average age, or 
even considerably beyond, is no cause for apprehension, so 
long as the premonitory signs before mentioned are absent 
and there is no evidence of declining health. 

2. If the premonitory symptoms have appeared, and 
are followed by or joined to, impaired digestion, consti- 
pated bowels, constant headache and back-ache, depressed 
spirits, lethargy, pale or sallow complexion and hysterical 
paroxysms, we may be sure that the system requires aid 
to accomplish the work. Every thing that tends to pro- 
mote the general health and vigor of the constitution 
should be used, and, in addition, certain means and pro- 
cesses known to specially influence the menstrual func- 
tion. We are in favor of the simple vegetable remedies, 
and at all times are opposed to such medicines as act with 
harshness or violence. Such remedies as we shall advise 
have been found, by our actual practice and observation, 
to prove efficient for all ordinary cases. 



96 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 14. 

Formulas No. 12 and No. 13, in the Appendix, will, we 
think, be found of special benefit. 

3. The common smart-weed (polygonum hydropiper) 
is very serviceable. It may be prepared by taking any 
quantity of the plant, and covering it with alcohol and 
water, in equal quantities. It will be ready for use in two 
or three days. Give of this tincture a tea-spoonful three 
times a day. It may be continued for any length of time 
without injury. 

The common pennyroyal — the asarum canadensis, or 
wild ginger — rosemary or tansy, may either of them be 
used in moderately strong infusion to any desired extent, 
and will answer a very good purpose. 

The buds or bark of the root of thepopulustremuloides 
(quaking aspen), or the buds of any of the poplars, tinc- 
tured in alcohol, will be of benefit, in debilitated cases. 
The infusions above mentioned should be used cold if the 
system is feverish. If there is debility, feeble circulation, 
and cold surface and extremities, they should be used hot. 
A hot foot-bath, and warming teas, to get up perspiration 
and warmth, are indispensable. 

4. Suppressed menstruation. When the menses have 
appeared and do not return after usual intervals, or are 
very brief in continuance and scanty in quantity, we rec- 
ommend the foregoing treatment, if the case is not one 
of long continuance. Even where as much as a year has 
passed without any re-appearance, the means directed will 
usually prove sufficient. Irregularities of menstruation 
are much more frequent than total suppression. 

5. The principal causes of complete suppression are 
cold, mental emotion, and acute disease. Girls sometimes 
effect a suppression, designedly, by the use of cold water ; 
but they are certain to pay dearly for such an infringe- 
ment of physiological law. A sudden suppression may be 



IRREGULARITIES OF MENSTRUATION. 97 

followed by immediate serious consequences, as inflamma- 
tion of uterus or ovaries, or fever, inflammation of brain, 
lungs, or bowels, hysteria, apoplexy, epilepsy, and a vari- 
ety of other difficulties. 

6. A long sea voyage is very apt to cause suppression. 
It is not uncommon to find this condition among female 
domestics, emigrants from Europe. In the treatment of 
such, give spirits of turpentine thirty drops, on a little sugar 
every night at bed-time, with an occasional hot foot-bath. 
Continue this for two or three w r eeks, then give it every 
other night for two w T eeks, and after that every third night. 
"With the appearance of menstruation, stop the remedy and 
renew it a few days before the next expected period. 

7. Dysmenorrhcea, or painful menstruation. This is a 
quite common difficulty, and w T hen severe, is accomj>anied 
w T ith a degree of suffering known only to those who have 
experienced it. It is very frequently the consequence of 
a check of the very first menstrual discharge, and may 
continue for years, or even until the final cessation of the 
menses. The usual symptoms of menstruation are ex- 
ceedingly aggravated in dysmenorrhcea. There is dis- 
tressing headache, as if confined by an iron band. The 
pain in the extreme lower portion of the back is agoniz- 
ing, and extends to the thighs and pubes. An intense 
cutting pain in the perineum, extending upwardly, is 
common. These usually come on in paroxysms, and are 
at times severe enough to cause convulsions, or fainting. 
After some time, the pain becomes "bearing down," and 
the discharge ensues, generally small in quantity, mixed 
with membranes, or shreds. The w r hole symptoms are 
very similar to those which accompany abortion. The 
pain diminishes with the increase of the discharge, which 
is not usually as much as the normal quantity. Such 
severity of suffering can not fail to produce debility, from 



98 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 14. 

which the patient may not fully recover before the next 
return of the menses. And it is not uncommon that the 
system sinks under the repeated attacks, and general ex- 
haustion or consumption ensues. 

8. The treatment, during the intervals, should be directed 
toward improving the general health and power of the 
system. On the approach of the paroxysm, resort should 
be had to such means and processes as tend to relax and 
soothe the system. The relaxing and nauseating remedies 
are called for, and, as lobelia inflata ranks superior to all 
others known to us, we recommend it. It should be given 
to the production of full vomiting, in severe cases, and 
afterward continued in quantity sufficient to keep up a 
slight nausea. Full directions for its use will be found 
under the head of Emetics. The vapor bath, the warm 
sitz bath, or hip bath, hot water bath for the feet and 
ankles, cloths dipped in hot water applied to the back, 
hips, and abdomen, and steaming bricks are each valuable 
means of relief, and may be used in the painful stages. 
With these should be combined warm drinks, to bring on 
perspiration, such as spearmint and ginger, or any of the 
herbs mentioned in directions for amenorrhoea. A tea of 
German camomile flowers, drank hot and plentifully, 
will be serviceable. Enemas of lobelia and asarum, per 
rectum, retained, are particularly beneficial, and, if prop- 
erly used, will, in most cases, do away with the necessity 
of other means. See directions for the use of enemas in 
appendix. 

Externally, it is well to use liniments. Formula No. 14 
will be found of much benefit. 

9. Menorrhagia, excessive menstruation. Menorrhagia 
is profuse, prolonged, or too frequent menstruation. These 
conditions may exist separately, or be combined at one time. 

10. The character, quantity, frequency, and duration 



IRREGULARITIES OF MENSTRUATION. 99 

of each menstrual discharge vary very greatly with differ- 
ent individuals. With some, it is a mere light-colored 
stain ; with most, it is sanguineous. It generally is deep- 
est in color at commencement, and about the termination 
changes into a white mucous discharge. It varies in 
quantity, with different persons, from an ounce to six or 
eight, or more ounces — four to five ounces is an average. 
Its duration is from a few hours to a week or ten days. 
The average is from four to five days. It is usually more 
abundant in summer than in winter — in hot climates than 
in cold. That quantity which is sufficient to keep the 
female healthy, be it more or less, is in accordance with 
physiological laws. If she becomes pale or debilitated, it 
is excessive. It may occur every three weeks, or every 
five to six weeks apart, and at any period between these 
extremes, and be entirely normal. 

11. Menorrhagia, or excessive menstruation, is patho- 
logical, and is debilitating by reason of loss of blood. 
Where it is dependent upon serious local disease, it should 
be under the treatment of a competent physician. Where 
it is the result of cold or debility, the treatment recom- 
mended will rarely fail to cure. It is claimed by some 
that inflammation, or ulceration of the neck of the uterus, 
is an accompaniment of nearly every case of menorrhagia. 
Be that as it may, it is rarely necessary to use the speculum, 
or to apply caustics, or other surgical torments. 

12. Where there is general debility, the system should 
be well warmed, and kept so, by the use of w T arm baths, 
hot foot baths, and internal stimulants, (Formula No. 1 is 
good) ; in cold weather, use vinegar and capsicum to the 
surface, (Formula No. 15). 

To check or arrest the hemorrhage, use Formula Nos. 
21, 22, or 23. Avoid much work, and walk and stand 
as little as possible. Keep the whole system warm and 



100 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 14. 

well clothed. Wear nothing tight about the waist and hips. 
In severe cases, the patient should lie down until relieved. 
Injections, per rectum, of strong witch-hazel tea, to be re- 
tained, and vaginal enemas of tannin dissolved in water, 
or a strong decoction of oak bark, are very serviceable. 

Aristolochia (Virginia snakeroot) and red raspberry- 
leaves, equal quantities, in mild infusion, drank hot and 
freely, is an excellent remedy. 

If the surface and extremities are "always kept warm, 
menorrhagia will rarely occur. Chronic cases may require 
watching, and sometimes attention, at every monthly pe- 
riod, until after the " change of life." 

13. Chlorosis, green sickness. The confirmed or chronic 
condition of amenorrhoea is termed chlorosis, or green 
sickness. It is accompanied by the symptoms detailed 
under the head of amenorrhoea, but in a more aggravated 
and distressing form. These are listlessness, languor, de- 
bility, constipation, pain in the side and back, headache, 
and palpitation. All sprightliness and healthy vigor dis- 
appear, and give place to feverishness, irritability, or total 
dejection and passiveness, and the poor sufferer must en- 
dure the wearisome months, or years of affliction with a 
blanched, green, yellow, or spotted face, staring eyes, 
swollen lids, enlarged abdomen, dropsical limbs; perhaps 
with hectic fever, night sweats, emaciation, and insupport- 
able prostration. The blood is thin, watery, and deficient 
in red corpuscles, and the general functions of secretion 
and excretion are poorly performed. 

14. The remedy consists in removing every cause of 
depression, in invigorating and toning up the system, and 
unless the habit is confirmed a cure may be accomplished. 
There should be an abundance of pure air, and the food 
should be nourishing. The hot salt bath (see directions 
for its use in appendix) is very serviceable. There is need 



IRREGULARITIES OF MENSTRUATION. 101 

of warm clothing, exercise, in brief whatever will aid in 
restoring health. If there are signs of menstruation, it 
should be aided by the means directed heretofore. For- 
mula No. 13 will be serviceable. 

15. Vicarious menstruation. In some cases, w T here sup- 
pression of the menses exists, the system relieves itself, 
at the usual periods for menstruation, by a hemorrhage 
from some organ or portion other than the uterus. Bleed- 
ing from the nose, lungs, stomach, bladder, arm-pits ; 
from ulcers or wounds, or from any part of the skin or 
mucous membrane. AVe know one case where the bleed- 
ing was from the top of the head, and another where it 
was from the calf of the leg. It is not a dangerous con- 
dition. The use of Formula No. 12 will probably be all 
that is required in the commencement of such cases. A 
suppression of the hemorrhage by the use of strong astrin- 
gents would likely be injudicious. The restoration of 
menstruation will relieve any liability of a vicarious hem- 
orrhage. If the hemorrhage be from the nose, lungs, 
stomach, or bladder, use erigeron, witch-hazel, or mitchela, 
as for excessive menses. One case in our practice w T as of 
a married woman, the mother of four children. When 
we first saw her she had not menstruated, per uterine 
organs, for four years. Each month she experienced a 
tingling sensation about the base of the tongue, extending 
down into the throat. The tongue would swell and be- 
come stiff. Her throat would swell; swallowing was dif- 
ficult, and speech impossible at times. Faintness and 
nausea would then occur, followed by vomiting of blood, 
and relief for perhaps twenty-four hours. These symp- 
toms would be repeated daily for two or three days, and 
then cease, to be renewed in about four weeks. Under 
our treatment she was relieved, became regular, and gave 
birth to four more children. 



102 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 14. 

16. Change of life — Critical period. About the age of 
forty-two to forty-live, though sometimes as early as thirty- 
five or as late as fifty, menstruation naturally ceases. Usu- 
ally there has been a gradual lengthening of the intervals, 
a decrease of the quantity discharged, and a shortening of 
the time of the flow, showing a gradual decline of the 
powers of life. Under normal conditions, though it may 
interrupt the health for a time, it can not be considered 
any more dangerous than the commencement of the same 
function in the earlier stage of life. Fewer women than 
men die between the ages of forty and fifty. But so many 
are the causes which operate unfavorably to her health, as 
the overtaxing of her maternal capacities, injudicious and 
injurious medical treatment, and maltreatment, overtask- 
ing, and neglect of her special sexual organs, that expe- 
rience proves the "turn of life" to be a "critical period." 
When this change is about to occur, the weak places in 
her system are very apt to show signs of special debility, 
any latent disease is liable to be developed, any concealed 
deficiency may be brought to light, and the woman passes 
this change either triumphantly and with improved health 
and power for usefulness, or yields to the shock, and either 
dies before the change is completed, or lingers a miserable 
invalid. It is a period to be viewed with apprehension 
by the diseased and weakly, and not to be treated with in- 
difference by the fortunately healthy. 

17. When the process of the change has fairly com- 
menced there will frequently be a series of symptoms very 
similar to those which accompany the commencement of 
menstruation, with the addition of occasional flashes of 
heat. 

The change occurs suddenly in some cases. A men- 
strual period of the usual character will occur, and with- 
out any special warning or disturbance the function ceases 



IRREGULARITIES OF MENSTRUATION. 103 

never to return, and health goes on uninterrupted. In 
other cases there may be a cessation for two or three periods 
and then a sudden outbreak with excessive hemorrhage, 
not easily checked. Reaction from the exhaustion may 
produce fever, unless care is taken. The same process 
may be repeated in a month or two. From the debility 
produced, recovery may be very slow, and if the lungs are 
weak, consumption may rapidly follow. Cancers, dropsy , 
uterine and ovarian disease of the most severe forms, and 
general debility are among the consequences of misman- 
agement and neglect, and occasionally may be unavoidable 
under the best management. 

18. We advised that no attempt be made to force men- 
struation in the girl. Here we advise that no attempt be 
made to stop it. In both cases the best possible conditions 
for health should be provided, giving nature her own time 
to perform her own work. As soon as the signs of the 
approaching change appear, the means used to favor natu- 
ral and healthy menstruation should be employed, so that 
it may continue as long as is natural in each system, thus 
permitting the change to take place more gradually, and 
with no sudden check. We are as much inclined to favor 
normal menstruation at this period as at any other. If 
the system is healthy, the cessation will be normally per- 
formed and with no injury. 

When the discharge is excessive, there is usually gen- 
eral debility or weakness of the special organs, and either 
may precede and cause the other. In such cases stimu- 
lants and tonics are required for the general health, and 
the excessive discharge requires the same treatment given 
under the head of excessive menstruation. The use of 
Formula No. 23 will prove of great service. It should 
be used freely at the time of the flowing, and in smaller 
quantities daily between the periods. 
10 



104 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. CHAP. 15. 



CHAPTER XV. 

LEUCORRHCEA, PROLAPSUS UTERI, AND RETROVERSION. 

1. Leucorrhcea. — This form of disease is a catarrhal 
affection of the uterus and vagina, often accompanied with 
irritation, congestion, inflammation, or ulceration of the 
neck of the uterus. 

The symptoms are itching, heat, a sense of fullness, pain 
in urination, and a bearing down sensation when walking 
or standing. A thin, acrid discharge ensues, which soon 
becomes thicker and less irritating, but the sense of weight 
or bearing down increases. 

2. The principal causes are cold, amatory indulgence, 
local injury from any cause, piles, constipated bowels, and 
general or local debility. It is more common in scrofu- 
lous and weakly constitutions than in healthy and vigor- 
ous ones. Among girls who are clerks in stores, where 
they are obliged to stand or walk nearly all the day, it is 
quite frequent, and difficult of entire relief, for the reason 
that the cause is continually present and active. Girls 
who work constantly with sewing, are very liable to have 
this difficulty. An in-door life, in hot rooms, with little 
exercise, and the use of highly-seasoned food, will fre- 
quently produce it. Uncleanliness and neglect are also 
causes. 

3. It may occur in all degrees, frpm those where the 
discharge is but little, painless, and simply annoying, to 



LEUCORRHCEA, OR WHITES. 105 

those where it is excessive, degenerate, excoriating, and 
of extremely unpleasant odor, accompanied with pain, 
burning, itching, and debility. Females are liable to it 
at any period of life, from infancy to extreme age. 

4. It should be noticed that excessive amatory indul- 
gence is almost certain to cause leucorrhoea, and that a 
single act of that nature may produce it in a debilitated 
female; also, that the secretion is from the same locality as 
that of gonorrhea, and that it can not be distinguished 
from the latter by its appearance. The character of the 
individual affected by leucorrhoea may be sometimes en- 
dangered on this account, for the leucorrhoeal discharge 
will, at times, cause urethral irritation similar to that 
caused by gonorrhea. 

5. The use of tobacco and stimulants, on the part of the 
husband, will often so vitiate his own secretion as to render 
it irritating and excoriating to the mucous surfaces of the 
female organs, thereby producing leucorrhoea in the wife; 
and the husband may, in turn, be affected by the leucor- 
rhoeal discharge in manner similar to gonorrhea. In such 
cases, if a married couple are not properly informed, there 
may arise a mutual suspicion, or charge of unfaithfulness 
to marital obligations, involving reputation to a seri- 
ous extent. Mild medical treatment, cleanliness, and re- 
straint will speedily relieve the difficulty, and an expla- 
nation of the causes from the physician, should remove all 
suspicion. 

6. Leucorrhoea is very frequently caused by a " common 
cold," and like a cold in the nose or throat, it may be 
followed by local inflammation and ulceration. 

7. The means of prevention are, to keep the body well 
clothed, the feet always warm and dry, and the whole 
skin clean and active by bathing and friction. Wear no 
skirts suspended from the hips, but from the shoulders. 



106 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 15. 

Avoid fatigue and irregular hours, and also any cause of 
local irritation, and keep the general system healthy. 
These directions must be observed, if a cure is expected. 
The longer leucorrhea continues, the more it produces local 
debility, and general debility is sure to follow. 

8. In mild cases, a cure can generally be accomplished 
by the local use of an injection of tepid Castile soap-suds, 
followed by one of tincture of myrrh, a tea-spoonful to a 
half gill of water, both to be repeated daily, until a cure 
is effected. The soap-suds should be used freely, to in- 
sure thorough cleanliness, and the myrrh should be re- 
tained for half an hour, the patient meanwhile remaining 
on her back, with the hips a little elevated. 

In severe cases use the same treatment three times a 
day. A half tea-spoonful of tincture of rhatany, or of 
catechu, or a few grains of tannin, may be added with 
the myrrh. When accompanied by prolapsus uteri (fall- 
ing of the womb), use a strong decoction of oak bark 
alternately with the myrrh injection. The general health 
should receive close attention, the skin be kept active, 
and the bowels regular, and tonics given to aid diges- 
tion. The salt sitz-bath will be found particularly bene- 
ficial. 

Where there is inflammation or ulceration, use alum- 
water, or tannin and water, in place of the myrrh. If 
there is any unpleasant odor, add to the injection, to be re- 
tained, a drop or two of creosote, or use an injection of ten 
to fifteen grains of sulphate of zinc to a gill of water. 
Sweet-oil and slippery-elm mucilage, thin starch and water, 
or a little flour in water, well boiled, may be used by in- 
jection to soothe the excoriated parts. 

At times the secretion is of an acrid, corrosive character. 
In such cases, use from five to twenty drops of aqua am- 
monia, in an ounce of water. Enough should be used to 



PROLAPSUS UTERI. 107 

cause a slight smarting. Repeat two or three times a day, 
until relieved. 

For swelling and itching, use a few drops of aqua am- 
monia, in cold water. If the parts are cold and not sensi- 
tive, use the water tepid, or quite warm. 

In the absence of the remedies recommended, the use of 
decoctions of the simple vegetable astringents will be found 
beneficial. (See list of astringents.) 

9. Prolapsus uteri, misplacement, falling of the womb. 
The uterus is a pear-shaped body, vertically situated with- 
in the pelvis, with its larger extremity upward, and sup- 
ported in its natural position by ligaments. When these 
become debilitated, they relax, and permit the uterus to 
descend of its own weight ; or its upper portion may fall 
forward, backward, or to either side. Misplacement is the 
common term for any of these conditions. 

10. The symptoms of misplacement are a feeling of weight 
or bearing down; pain in the back or either side; neural- 
gic pain in the loins, hip, and thighs, sometimes extend- 
ing into the feet; constipation; obstruction or entire sup- 
pression of urine. The entire pelvic organs, and often the 
whole system, sympathize with the debility. Many of the 
symptoms are aggravated by standing or walking. 

11. Treatment. We are entirely opposed to the use of 
pessaries or other mechanical support. They generally 
do more harm than good. The general treatment should 
be such as is recommended for leucorrhoea, paragraph 5, 
this chapter. For special local treatment, use enemas of 
mild astringents and stimulants, as indicated in paragraph 
6, same chapter; also, the salt sitz-bath, and dry cupping 
of the spine, particularly upon the " small of the back," 
and over the entire pelvic organs. 

12. Dry cupping. We consider dry cupping, properly 
performed, to be almost a specific in many of the irregu- 



108 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 15. 

larities of menstruation and derangements of the female 
organs. Applied directly over the seat of the pain, it 
usually affords prompt and lasting relief. To be of real 
service, it should be extensively performed. A small air 
pump, a rubber tube, and properly-shaped tin-cups, are 
required.* The cups should be used once or twice a day. 
They will cause a powerful increase of circulation and ac- 
tion in the blood-vessels and nerves which supply the 
pelvic organs, conditions necessary for the restoration of 
any debilitated portion of the system. 

13. Retroversion during pregnancy. About the begin- 
ning of the third month of pregnancy, the uterus is liable 
to retroversion. Its fundus, or body, falls backward and 
downward, and its lower portion is thrown upward and 
forward, so that the organ lies in a nearly horizontal 
position, and somewhat doubled. The fundus sometimes 
becomes fixed against the sacrum, from which it may be 
difficult to raise it. Unless soon relieved, abortion and 
much suffering are nearly certain to result. The fundus 
presses against the rectum, causing constipation; and the 
cervix presses against the bladder, causing suppression of 
urine. Retroversion is accompanied by the symptoms 
previously detailed, by intense pain in the back, and, at 
times, by nausea and vomiting. 

14. Treatment Before any effort is made to restore the 
uterus to its normal position, the accumulations in the 
bowels should be relieved by enemas, and the bladder 
emptied by the use of a catheter. The patient can gen- 
erally do the latter as well, and perhaps better, than another 

* The necessary appliances for the above-mentioned purposes can 
be purchased in this city. If any of our lady readers from a dis- 
tance should desire to obtain a set, and will write to us, we will take 
pleasure in giving them all the necessary information as to price, 
manner of using, etc. 



RETROVERSION. 109 

person. The patient may then He on either side, with the 
knees drawn up, while the physician introduces one or two 
fingers into the vagina, and carefully pushes the fundus 
upward. It may be necessary to introduce a finger of the 
other hand into the rectum, to aid the pressure. Some- 
times it may be best accomplished while the patient lies 
on her back, with her knees drawn up, or she may rest 
upon her knees and hands. 

If there is rigidity and contraction, first give an enema 
of lobelia and asarum, to be retained until the parts become 
quite relaxed. 

After restoration, rest and a recumbent position are re- 
quired. Much walking or standing should be avoided for 
several weeks. The other treatment should be the same as 
directed for misplacements. Retroversion may happen just 
after parturition. 



110 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 16. 



CHAPTER XVI. 

PREGNANCY— ITS EVIDENCES AND EFFECTS. 

1. It has been asserted that there are no absolutely 
positive evidences of pregnancy, except the actual appear- 
ance of the infant. There are, however, many symptoms 
which commonly attend pregnancy, and which, combined, 
amount to almost a certainty. 

The first one to be noticed in the usual order of appear- 
ance is the cessation of menstruation. The menses some- 
times continue through the whole period of pregnancy ; in 
such cases, a second pregnancy may be possible. Other 
causes than pregnancy may have interfered with a woman's 
regularity. If the menses continue while pregnancy exists, 
the female may not know or suspect her condition for some 
time. If the menses cease, and pregnancy is not present, 
she may soon become " regular." 

2. We have observed one case, of a married lady, thirty- 
two years of age, who had borne several children, who 
supposed herself pregnant for nearly a full period of nine 
months, and was only undeceived after passing through a 
series of symptoms resembling those of labor, with severe 
hemorrhage, but no appearance of child or membranes. 
All enlargement soon disappeared, and she gradually recov- 
ered. She afterward had a slight show of menstruation 
two or three times, at considerable intervals. Her 
daughter, in her thirty-sixth year, had a very similar 






PREGNANCY — ITS EVIDENCES AND EFFECTS. Ill 

experience, and expelled some shreddy membranes. She 
had previously borne children. In a third case, a lady, 
married at the age of thirty-four, supposed herself preg- 
nant about two years after marriage, and continued so for 
fifteen months, with a termination very similar to the cases 
just mentioned. There was nothing in the termination 
of either of these cases to indicate an actual pregnancy. 

3. About the third week " morning sickness " is very 
common. It generally ceases about the fourth month, but 
may continue the whole term. Irritation of the neck of 
the bladder is a frequent early symptom. Enlargement 
of the breasts from the second week to the third month, 
with prickling, shooting pains and tenderness, and secre- 
tion of milk about the fifth or sixth month, are very 
common ; change in the color of the areola, or circle sur- 
rounding the nipple, is very noticeable in first pregnancy, 
commencLug about the second month, and gradually grow- 
ing darker. The abdomen is generally flattened in the 
first and second month, and begins to enlarge about the 
third or fourth month; the umbilicus or navel sinks 
during the first two months, is effaced about the sixth 
month, and protrudes after the seventh month. The 
ascent of the uterus from its usual position into the ab- 
domen, termed quickening, occurs about the end of the 
fourth month; at this time motion is first perceived, a 
feeble fluttering, or pulsation, often with nausea or fainting. 
About the fifth or sixth month, the motions of the foetus 
are generally distinctly felt by the mother, or may be per- 
ceived externally if the hand, wet with cold water, is ap- 
plied to the abdomen, or by gradually pressing the sides. 
An experienced observer may detect the beating of the 
foetal heart and the placental murmur. If these are de- 
tected, they afford positive proof. 

The progressive changes of the uterus, in position, size, 
11 



112 THAL.EIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 16. 

and proportions, are worthy of notice. " Ballotement," 
even when carefully performed, affords no positive 
proof. 

4. These are the principal evidences which have any 
claim to reliability, but they are subject to so many vari- 
ations, or so liable to be absent or unnoticed, or to be pro- 
duced by other conditions than pregnancy, that they can 
not afford a certainty. They are only presumptive evi- 
dence when present, and pregnancy may exist without 
them. 

5. Many women pass the whole period of pregnancy 
with but little if any interference to their health and com- 
fort, except such as arises from their increased size and 
burden, and without a day's interruption to their regula: 
duties; others, and they are by far the more numerous 
have hardly a comfortable day from first to last. Mud 
of the sickness usually experienced may be avoided b; 
proper care, or relieved by proper means. Some women 
have better health when pregnant than when not. 
Asthma is frequently relieved by pregnancy, but returns 
afterward. 

6. That voluntary selfishness which seeks to appropriate 
the good things of the world, and to deny them to others 
is well enough understood. There is in the organization 
of some females an involuntary selfishness, not under the 
control of the will, which gives very little to the infant 
during gestation, but takes very good care of the mother. 
Every intelligent female has observed this. Many women 
of full, vigorous development, portly appearance, and 
hearty eaters, give birth to very feeble and puny children 
Of such it is common to say "they feed themselves, but 
starve their infants before they are born." On the other 
hand, many women are involuntarily liberal, for they give 
of themselves largely to their infants in utero, even to 






PREGNANCY — ITS EVIDENCES AND EFFECTS. 113 

their own great deprivation. " They starve themselves to 
feed their unborn children." Between these extremes 
there are many grades. They who starve their children 
in utero generally furnish but little milk. They who feed 
well their unborn children, are equally liberal in the secre- 
tion of milk for them after birth. It would be interesting 
to observe how far voluntary and involuntary selfishness 
may be combined in the same organization. 

7. The intimate relation of mother and child during 
gestation may lead to pathological results unfavorable to 
either or to both. A young woman, of stinted develop- 
ment and feeble power, may expend every element of 
vitality upon her infant, and lose her life in the effort 
of giving it birth, and the child may have received a 
viable organization, though in all probability quite a 
feeble one. Another mother may arise from child-bed 
with an improved condition of health, having, as it were, 
made her infant the medium to carry off her disease. 
Another mother may, during gestation, involuntarily pro- 
tect her child from disease she may possess, giving to it a 
very fair constitution, but only through suffering. and in- 
creased disease to herself. 

8. It appears to be a law of nature, looking to the pres- 
ervation of a species, that its female individuals, in failing 
health, shall have a special capacity to expend their vital- 
ity in re-production. It is often noticeable that trees 
which have been severely injured, become suddenly pro- 
lific bearers, and perhaps exhaust themselves and die in 
producing a single crop, or even before it is matured. 
Consumptive women have generally better health while 
pregnant ; they are proverbially prolific, and never more 
so than in the advanced stages of that malady. They 
fail rapidly after child-birth, and frequently terminate 
their lives in a final effort at parturition. Such materni- 



114 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 16. 

ties, whether with or without the consent of the mother, 
are lamentable wrongs, directly to herself and to her off- 
spring, and indirectly to humanity, for the children of 
such can subserve no valuable purposes in society. Their 
inheritance is only disease and early death. 

9. Mothers' Marks. — Mothers are generally able to 
assign a cause, satisfactory to their own minds, for the 
existence on their children of what are termed " Mothers' 
Marks/' such as discolored spots, with real or fancied re- 
semblance to something the mother has longed for, but 
could not obtain; or deformities in the child like some- 
thing that has frightened the mother, etc.* There are so 
many facts in this relation that we have ceased to have 
any doubts of the influence of such causes in producing 
the results, though we are unable to understand the law 
by which they are produced. 

*As an illustration of a mental "mark," we give the following: 
Some years since, we had employed a mechanic to make some re- 
pairs on our house. He brought his two sons* as assistants. We 
noticed that he never spoke to one of them, but always gave direc- 
tions after this manner: "George, tell Calvin to do this;" "Ask Cal- 
vin to bring me that; " etc. This attracted our attention as being quite 
peculiar, as the boys conversed freely together. The father noticed 
our apparent interest, and said, in substance: "As you are a young 
mother, I will tell you something that may benefit you : Never allow 
your feelings to be hurt during gestation, especially by your husband. 
About five months before that boy Calvin was born, I got in a pet one 
morning, and said unpleasant things that hurt my wife's feelings very- 
much. I went to my work, and my wife brought me my dinner, as 
customary. I had then gotten over my pet, but she was so grieved 
that she could not speak. I tried to soothe and reconcile her, but 
it was some time before she could command her feelings enough to 
speak to me. When this boy became old enough to talk, he would 
not speak to me — and never has, though he talks readily with any 
body else. He would always cry, when a baby, if I took him up, 
or touched him. It has always been a source of grief to me, for I 
think it was my fault entirely, and I can not blame either the mother 
or child." 



TREATMENT DURING PREGNANCY. 115 



CHAPTER XVII. 

TREATMENT DURING PREGNANCY. 

1. Perhaps the most common and annoying attendant 
of pregnancy is indigestion, with nausea, vomiting, and 
frequently constipation. Some women are not free from 
these symptoms at any time during gestation. In our 
mode of practice, we treat these conditions exactly as if 
pregnancy were not present. It is vain to expect to cure 
them by opiates or stimulants. The only successful way 
is to put the system in proper physiological condition. 

2. Morning sickness. This usually comes on about the 
third or fourth week. There may be nausea, with or 
without vomiting, immediately after rising; or vomiting 
may come on without previous nausea, as soon as food is 
taken, with desire for more food immediately after. The 
sickness is liable to extreme variations as to character, 
symptoms, time of occurrence, duration, and severity. It 
may generally be relieved by emetics to cleanse the stom- 
ach, enemas and alteratives to relieve constipation, tonics 
to aid digestion, and proper attention to the condition of 
the skin. The diet should be of food that does not read- 
ily sour. If the stomach is acid, soda, in small doses, will 
afford a temporary relief. If the vomiting is merely the 
result of what is termed "the sympathy of the stomach 
with the uterus," nervines and quiet are indicated; ene- 
mas of asarum and spearmint infusion, to be retained, and 



116 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [ClIAP. 17. 

German camomile tea to drink, are good remedies — the 
latter to be used nearly or quite cold, and in small quan- 
tities. 

3. A very common cause, and generally overlooked by 
physicians, and not always appreciated by wives, is sex- 
ual intercourse. Such an act during the period of preg- 
nancy is a positive violation of physiological law. There 
is no normal demand in the pregnant female for such a 
proceeding. Its effects are manifested in irritation and 
disease of the sexual system of the wife, in many of the so- 
called " diseases of pregnancy," and abortions and mis- 
carriages. Wives who are unmolested in this respect, and 
whose husbands exercise restraint, and are kind and sym- 
pathetic at these times, will have much less sickness during 
their periods of gestation ; and the offspring, other things 
being equal, will manifest the benefits of such observances. 

4. The nausea, vomiting, pain in the right side, and 
some other symptoms of the later stages of pregnancy are 
caused by the crowding of the distended uterus upon the 
abdominal viscera. Constipation and frequent urination 
are caused by the direct pressure of the uterus upon the 
colon, rectum, and urinary organs. Swelling of the limbs, 
and varicose veins are caused by pressure upon the in- 
ternal blood-vessels, that return the blood from the lower 
extremities. Much standing and walking aggravate the 
latter ; a horizontal position of the body and lower limbs 
will do much to relieve. Constipation may be relieved 
by enemas, mild alteratives, and the drinking of cold 
water at bed-time. Tight dressing is always injurious, 
but at this time is positively pernicious to both mother and 
child. Very much of the later annoyances of pregnancy 
may be avoided by keeping the system in a healthy con- 
dition; but patience is required until time can cure some 
of them. 



TREATMENT DURING PKEGNAXCY. 117 

5. As a tonic to aid digestion, use Formula Nos. 17, 18, 
or 39; for constipation, use Formula Xos. 16 or 18. 

If diarrhea is present, it should be treated exactly as if 
pregnancy were absent; it sometimes alternates with con- 
stipation. See Formula No. 6. 

6. Headache, a very common attendant, is generally 
symptomatic of constipation or other dyspeptic conditions, 
or of mental or physical overtaxation. Remove the cause 
and the effect will soon cease. 

7. Heartburn is a symptom of dyspepsia. Soda, or 
other alkalies, or sometimes acids, may temporarily relieve, 
but the cure consists in emetics, mild tonics, and alteratives. 

8. Hemorrhoids — Piles. The pressure of the uterus upon 
the rectum and blood-vessels, in the early and later months 
of gestation, frequently occasions piles. The difficulty oc- 
casionally returns after delivery. Constipation, and drastic 
purgatives cause and add to the difficulty. A relaxed 
condition of the bowels is also a producing cause. When 
protruded, swollen, and painful, poultice with elm and lo- 
belia; relieve constipation; return by gentle, steady press- 
ure when possible. (Formula for ointment in appendix.) 
Permit no surgical operations. Keep the bowels gently 
open with alteratives. 

9. Toothache, of a neuralgic character, is very common 
during pregnancy. It is unwise, and, at times, danger- 
ous to extract. An emetic will generally relieve. Con- 
stipation may be a cause. 

10. It is impossible to give a complete list of all the 
derangements of the various organs that may accompany 
pregnancy, nor is it necessary. They require no differ- 
ent treatment at this time than at any other time. Most 
of them may be avoided by proper attention to health, 
and most of them may be relieved and cured by very 
simple treatment. 



118 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 17. 

11. It is generally considered that females are less lia- 
ble, during pregnancy, to epidemic forms of disease. The 
existence of acute disease during pregnancy is more or less 
unfavorable, because the foetus is liable to be affected, and 
abortion may follow under unfavorable circumstances. 
An attack of measles is almost sure to bring on abortion. 
This form of disease, occurring with a girl who has com- 
menced menstruation, is very liable to bring on uterine 
hemorrhage and bloody urination. 

12. As to the influence of pregnancy upon acute forms 
of disease, our experience in practice leads us to believe 
that they are not necessarily aggravated, nor necessarily 
harder to cure, nor do they require a different principle 
of treatment than if pregnancy were absent. The mother 
may suffer much more inconvenience on account of her 
increased size and weight. We should treat any fever 
or inflammation without reference to the existing con- 
dition of pregnancy. The treatment we use for cases 
of fever and inflammation will have no influence in pro- 
ducing abortion; on the contrary, it will often prevent 
the latter when it is threatened. 

Where the intensity of acute disease is not sufficient to 
cause miscarriage, the patient is in as favorable a condi- 
tion for treatment as if she were not pregnant. Miscar- 
riage during acute disease, followed by death, is more an 
evidence or measure of the violence of the disease than 
an active cause of the fatal result. 

13. As to the influence of pregnancy upon chronic con- 
ditions of disease, we are satisfied that it is often unfa- 
vorable. A feeble, debilitated, failing organization will 
be still more enfeebled by the drain during gestation and 
parturition. Heart disease, aneurisms, and ruptures are 
likely to be made worse. Consumptives hasten their 
deaths by child-bearing. 






ABORTIONS, MISCARRIAGE, PREMATURE BIRTH. 119 



CHAPTEE XVIII. 

ABORTIONS, MISCARRIAGE, PREMATURE BIRTH. 

1. From accidents, sickness, or other causes, females 
are liable, at any time during pregnancy, to a premature 
expulsion of the foetus. Abortion is the term used to ex- 
press expulsion of foetus at any time before it is capable 
of living. After the seventh month it is termed prema- 
ture delivery. Miscarriage is the popular term for pre- 
mature expulsion at any period. When not caused by 
accident or design, it may properly be said to be 
spontaneous, for it occurs from no assignable accidental 
cause. 

2. Xo female can miscarry without liability to injury. 
The shock to the system is severe ; there is danger of seri- 
ous hemorrhage or flooding, and consequent debility ; the 
sexual system rarely recovers its full health and vigor. In 
some cases, the pains are more intolerable than those of 
full-time labor. 

3. When miscarriage occurs in the advanced stages of 
gestation, the premonitory symptoms, as well as those of 
progress, will be similar to those of natural labor. When 
caused by violence, accidental or designed, the symptoms 
and results are most severe. The symptoms which gen- 
erally precede, are sudden nausea and vomiting after any 
accident, shock, or other probable cause, coldness of feet, 
hands, or whole body, chills, feeling of prostration, a sense 



120 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 18. 

of dread or apprehension of danger, severe and protracted 
pains in the back, and, at times, in the lower limbs, bear- 
ing-down > pains, and hemorrhage from uterus. Unless 
there is a reaction of the system from this state, the bear- 
ing-down pains become more severe, flooding commences, 
and may continue until the system is nearly or quite 
exhausted ; or the uterine contents may be expelled and 
the flooding soon subside, if proper means are used. The 
best efforts should be made to prevent the miscarriage. 
The means we recommend will render the premature de- 
livery less dangerous, if they should fail to prevent it. 

4. Preventive treatment. Place the patient immedi- 
ately in a warm bath, and give her warming teas to drink, 
as ginger and spearmint, or catnip, asarum, pennyroyal, or 
prickly-ash. If a bath can not be had, place her in bed, 
remove all tight clothing, and get her warm and in a per- 
spiration as soon as* possible, by the use of hot teas, as 
above mentioned, hot irons, steaming bricks, etc. If much 
excited and nervous, add lobelia to the tea ; if stomach is 
irritable, give lobelia and asarum, by enema, in small 
quantity, to retain; enjoin perfect quiet. If this treat- 
ment, persevered in, does not succeed in preventing mis- 
carriage, treat the case as one of ordinary child-birth, 
with a watchful eye to any signs of excessive hemorrhage. 

5. There are many women, healthy and married to 
healthy husbands, who, from temperamental incompatibil- 
ity, can not pass successfully through more than one out 
of a half dozen gestations. They are almost certain to 
miscarry; and, if perchance a child is born alive, its 
chances for surviving are very precarious. Women who 
are aware of this incompatibility, can do no wiser thing 
than to avoid the necessity of trouble by keeping clear of 
the cause. Of what imaginable use are such abortive at- 
tempts at maternity ? They only bring suffering and ex- 



ABORTIONS, MISCARRIAGE, PREMATURE BIRTH. 121 

pense, and help to fill grave-yards, but they rarely send 
into the world a useful individual. No child should come 
info existence unless desired and intended by the parents, 
and for whose advent -preparations have been made long 
time in advance ; and when once the vital spark has been 
kindled, no denial is too great, no care and caution too 
much, on the part of the parents, for its protection. It 
should be nourished, cherished, protected, and defended to 
maturity, for from such children come the men and women 
who are the blessings of humanity, the saviors of the 
race. 

6. Of conceptions that occur between parents whose 
temperaments are highly incompatible, there is little pros- 
pect of saving a threatened miscarriage. They occur spon- 
taneously, and will go on in spite of our best efforts at 
prevention, as the death of the child will as surely soon 
follow if it should be born alive. Such miscarriages are 
usually preceded by the death of the foetus in utero. 

7. There are births at the end of seven months, where 
the child is possessed of vitality enough to live, if great 
care is taken. Such cases can hardly occur except the 
parents are temperamentally compatible ; and such pre- 
mature births are generally the result of some accident or 
shock to the mother. They can frequently be prevented, 
even when apparently too late. Sickness and general ob- 
struction of the system may threaten a premature delivery ; 
and we have often been called to women with every ap- 
pearance of immediate labor, and, by pursuing the course 
previously mentioned, have caused a rapid subsidence of 
the urgent symptoms, and with after-treatment and care 
on the part of the mother, her full time has been com- 
pleted, and a speedy and easy delivery accomplished. 



122 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 19. 



CHAPTEE XIX. 

NATURAL LABOR. 

1. The duration of pregnancy is usually calculated from 
the last menstrual period; from which, nine months, or 
forty weeks, or two hundred and eighty days, are allowed. 
This period may be shortened or prolonged considerably. 
Young, healthy, and vigorous females generally fall short 
several days of the average. A birth earlier than thirty- 
seven weeks may be considered premature. How far the 
period of gestation may be extended beyond the average, 
is a matter of uncertainty ; forty-o^e and forty-two weeks 
are quite common, and as long as forty-five weeks are 
sometimes authenticated; fifty-nine and sixty weeks are 
deemed possible by high medical authority. We are per- 
sonally well satisfied of three births from one lady, of 
eleven, twelve, and thirteen months. 

2. If the birth is much premature, the child is below 
an average size, and in every way immature. Seven- 
months' children may live, with great care. It is barely 
possible that a six-months' child might be reared. 

3. When the time is extended much beyond the aver- 
age, the mother being healthy and vigorous, the child 
usually gives evidence of a fuller maturity, being stronger, 
larger, and apparently older than most new-born children. 
Such births are usually tedious, on account of the increased 
size of the infant. 



NATURAL LABOR. 123 

4. The premonitory symptoms of approaching labor 
are, 1st. The subsidence of the abdomen, which generally 
occurs gradually for nearly two weeks, caused by the de- 
scent of the uterus. It is said to occur sometimes very sud- 
denly. The feeling of relief from the previous fullness is 
so great that a woman may be tempted to work too hard, 
or to take long walks from home, and may be overtaken 
by actual labor in a very uncomfortable or unpleasant 
place. This change of position of the uterus, causes ad- 
ditional pressure on the bladder, diminishing its capacity, 
and requiring very frequent urination. 

2d. Progressive and nearly painless contractions of the 
uterus, occurring for one or two weeks previous to de- 
livery. They occur at intervals, are sudden, like squeezing, 
sometimes accompanied with sharp, short pains, and the 
uterus becomes smaller and harder. These signs are more 
noticeable with first child. 

3d. " The show" an increased secretion of mucus, often 
mixed with blood, generally begins within twenty-four 
hours before labor ; it is variable in quantity ; its object is 
to lubricate the passages. When healthy, it is of the con- 
sistency of the white of an egg; it is the best evidence of 
the near approach of labor. 

4th. Labor-pains, caused by contractions of the uterus. 
They are first felt in the loins, then extending around the 
abdomen and down the thighs ; they occur with consider- 
able regularity, becoming more frequent as labor advances. 
At first, the sensation is compared to " sawing, grinding, 
or cutting," afterward they become " bearing down." The 
pains are subject to much variation as to duration, fre- 
quency, and severity, but generally may be distinguished 
from what are called "false pains," which commence in 
the body of the uterus, are limited in extent, and irreg- 
ular. Real labor pains are generally felt most severely in 



124 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 19. 

the small of the back and downward. In the natural 
progress of true labor, the vagina and external parts re- 
lax, soften, and expand. 

5. Preparations for Labor. The various articles 
needed for the lying-in room should be provided in ad- 
vance. The physician and nurse are frequently summoned 
in haste, oftener in the night than in day-time, and 
should not be compelled to hunt for things in strange 
places. We mention only such articles as we deem of 
real importance. Bed-clothing and personal clothing for 
mother and infant, old linen and cotton cloths, pins and 
needles and thread, a large and small pitcher, cups, saucers, 
tumblers, spoons, soda, starch, sugar, wash-basin, soap, 
towels, sweet-oil. These should be within immediate 
reach, for the doctor is sometimes obliged to act as nurse; 
we have often found it so. In cold weather, a stove or 
open grate in the room ; in warm weather, a fire in an 
adjoining room, with a supply of fuel, for boiling and hot 
water are often indispensable. If* we can find these 
within reach, we need only the assistance of some matron 
of common sense and experience for ordinary cases, or two 
or three in the most troublesome. 

Visiting at this period may be kindly meant, but is 
never desirable, and often injurious. The circumstances 
of the occasion present a strong temptation to gossip upon 
all the rumors of accidents in parturition, and they are 
unfit for the hearing of the prospective mother. There 
should be no useless or unemployed company. All should 
be calm, business-like, and cheerful. The woman will sel- 
dom feel alarmed if she is told there is no danger, and 
can see no signs of fear or incompetency on the part of 
her assistants. 

6. The medicines we carry on such occasions are lobe- 
lia, asarum, ginger, capsicum, bayberry, and slippery-elm, 



NATURAL LABOR. 125 

all powdered ; camphor, aqua ammonia, tincture of myrrh, 
tannin, alum, and spearmint herb. We also carry a syr- 
inge and catheter, cotton cord and scissors. We rarely 
use more than two or three of these, and sometimes do not 
open our medicine case; but emergencies may arise in 
which even more than these may be required. 

7. If the mother's system has been properly prepared, 
we have hardly more to do than to see that the mother 
is made as comfortable as possible during her labor, by 
attending to her many little needs, by encouraging her 
with cheerful words and assurances. It should be borne 
in mind by every accoucheur that the summons is not to 
a case of disease, but to watch over the performance of a 
natural function, and that all "meddlesome midwifery" 
is bad. When no previous preparation has been made, 
we have sometime been kept busy enough for a few hours. 
It is no idle task when one assumes the responsibility in 
a case of hurried labor, in a strange house, with no fire, 
and every thing to hunt up. Make your preparations in 
time. 

8. Giving birth to children is not, in itself, a danger- 
ous matter; it may be made so by the ignorance, haste, 
meddlesome interference, or improper proceedings of those 
who attend ; or in consequence of a diseased or enfee- 
bled condition of the mother. We have had a good share 
of practice in this department, and have never lost mother 
or child, either directly during parturition, or indirectly 
from any cause or circumstance connected with partu- 
rition. 

9. Arrangement of Bed. The necessary clothing 
for comfort should be provided ; in addition, there should 
be an oil or rubber cloth, at least a yard square, an old 
comfortable, and two or three old sheets. The oil or rub- 
ber cloth should be spread on top of the under-sheet, the 



126 



THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 19. 



old comfort, doubled, over this, to receive any fluids. One 
of the old sheets should be doubled lengthwise, then cross- 
wise, with a tape through the last folding, and tied loosely 
around the waist, falling down like a skirt ; tie near the 
right side, lift the left part from the tape and slip it over 
the right, thus forming a complete skirt to protect the 
mother from cold and exposure, and affording a great 
convenience to the accoucheur. When labor is fully com- 
pleted, this skirt and the old comfortable should be re- 
moved. An old sheet doubled, warmed, and placed upon 
the oil-cloth, which latter may remain for several days, if 
required for the protection of the bed. All day clothing 
should be removed in the early part of labor ; short night- 
dresses are preferable to long ones on these occasions. 
These should be drawn up under the arms to prevent be- 
ing soiled or wetted. 

10. Position during Delivery. The woman may 
stand, walk, sit, or lie down, just as may seem best to her, 
during the early portion of labor. Near the termination 
and during actual delivery the better positions are, on the 
left side, with the back near the edge of the bed, where 
the accoucheur officiates; or on the back, with the knees 
drawn up in either case. We prefer that she lie in the 
first position, with a hard pillow between the knees. A 
box, one to two feet square, may be placed under the bed- 
clothes, against the foot-board of the bed, for the patient's 
feet to push against, and a heavy sheet, tied at two oppo- 
site corners and thrown over the bed-post, may be placed 
in her hands for her to pull upon. This will be found 
of much service at the latter portion of the labor. If 
there is no foot-board, place a common board against the 
posts as a substitute. 

11. After the birth of the child, and expulsion of pla- 
centae, the soiled cloths are to be removed, a dry, warm, 



NATURAL LABOR. 127 

doubled sheet laid over the oil-cloth, the parts lubricated 
with sweet-oil, and protected by a soft, warm napkin, the 
abdomen bandaged, the clothing drawn down from under 
the arms, and the mother allowed to remain quiet. 

12. False Alarms: False Pains. If the patient 
has given proper attention to herself previously, she will 
be spared much of the usual sufferings of labor, and her 
recovery will be much more speedy. Where the system 
is unobstructed, there will be generally full warning of 
what is to come, some days in advance (see Premonitory 
Symptoms). There are generally, even under entirely 
physiological conditions, pains, more or less severe, for 
some little time previous to labor, but real labor may 
come on very suddenly and unexpectedly. In obstructed 
conditions, when fatigued, from cold, and many other 
causes, what are termed "false alarms" or "false pains" 
are quite common. These may continue for several 
hours, or, at intervals, during several days, and may then 
subside; or by the irritation they produce, may bring on 
real labor-pains. Experienced females and accoucheurs 
are at times deceived by these false pains into a belief that 
labor is fast approaching. When called to a case in which 
we are uncertain whether or not it is real labor, we simply 
direct a hot foot-bath, and the drinking of hot ginger 
and spearmint tea. As soon as the patient becomes well 
warmed by these means, we can usually form an opinion, 
for if the pains are " false," they subside; if true labor 
has commenced, they continue with natural regularity. 
In some cases w T here there is fever, or pain in other por- 
tions of the system, we give a thorough emetic, and if 
needed an enema. A woman should never be permitted 
to enter upon labor with constipated boivels or retained 
urine. 

13. Real Labor-pains occur with a considerable de- 

12 



128 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 19. 

gree of regularity. They usually last from fifteen to forty 
seconds each. They are shortest at the commencement 
of labor, and the intervals between them are longer. 
The intervals shorten, and the pains are longer, and more 
severe and bearing down as labor advances. Toward the 
very last, the pains, though the most severe, are borne 
with more fortitude. In the first stage of labor the pains 
are "cutting or grinding," and are caused by the forcible 
dilatation of the os uteri (mouth of the womb), through 
which the membranes are beginning to protrude during 
the pains, the fundus or body of the uterus at the same 
time contracting upon its contents from above. The first 
stage is considered to end when the membranes rupture 
and the waters escape, but it is not a definite guide, for 
this may occur very early in labor, or be much delayed. 
The proper division is: First stage terminates when the 
mouth of the womb is sufficiently dilated to allow the 
passage of the head of the child. The second stage is the 
expulsion of the infant. In this stage the pains are mostly 
of the " bearing-down " character. The third stage is the 
expulsion of the placental body and membranes (the after- 
birth). The pains are similar to those of the second stage, 
but less severe. 

14. Presentations. The child may present different 
parts of the body at the commencement of labor, as the 
crown, the face, the breech, the inferior extremities (feet 
or knees), the superior extremities (hands, elbow, shoul- 
der). Other parts of the body may present; or the pla- 
centae or umbilical cord may be in advance of the child. 

15. The natural presentation is of the head. It occurs 
thirty-nine times out of every forty. Our own experience 
gives not more than one in a hundred where parts other 
ihan the head have first emerged into the world, though 
we have presided over several cases where it has been 



NATURAL LABOR. 129 

necessary to delay labor, and to manipulate to obviate ir- 
regular presentations. Face presentations are said, by au- 
thorities, to occur about once in two hundred and fifty 
births. They are best left to the natural expulsive efforts, 
for the records show that what is termed " assistance," is 
productive of injury. 

16. Of the irregular presentations, those of the breech 
are recorded as occurring once in about fifty-five cases; 
of the knees, once in about thirty-five hundred; of the 
feet, once in about one hundred ; of the placentae, one in 
about five hundred (see placentae praevia) ; of the umbil- 
ical cord, one in about two hundred and eighty; of twin 
births, once in about seventy-eight; of triplets, one in 
nearly six thousand. 

17. The most natural position of the foetus in utero, at 
time of labor, is with the head downward. "Whatever has 
been its position at the various stages of gestation, we feel 
assured that nature intends that the head shall precede in 
birth, and, under normal conditions, provides that it shall 
thus advance. Other presentations result from forced 
conditions, and may be mainly prevented by a proper ob- 
servance of physiological laws, and by avoiding any cause 
that can excite labor in advance of its proper time. Cold, 
excitement, mental depression, anxiety, fatigue, heavy lift- 
ing, straining, much standing or walking, shocks, fright, 
and improper medicines are among the numerous causes 
that may excite labor a few days, or even a few hours, 
prematurely, and such cases are the ones among w T hich ir- 
regular presentations are most abundant. Hence we make 
it an invariable rule, on being called to a case of apparent 
labor, to give remedies to equalize circulation and nervous 
action ; to warm the extremities and promote perspiration, 
and thus prevent any hurry in the performance of the 
parturient process. All symptoms of labor will frequently 



130 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 19. 

vanish, and not return under many hours, or even days 
or weeks. 

18. Of head presentations, the most frequent is that 
where the child, in passing downward in labor, has its 
chin flexed, or resting upon its breast, and the face turned 
toward the mother's back, and partially toward her right 
side. There are three variations from this position : one 
where the face turns toward the mother's left side instead 
of the right ; the other two are 1st, where the face is to- 
ward the mother's abdomen, and turned to the right; 2d, 
where the face is the same, but turned to the left. 

19. Of face presentations there are four. These are 
where the face appears first, and is directed forward, 
backward, to the right, or to the left. These cases require 
no special assistance ; if left to nature they terminate favor- 
ably. We give lobelia and asarum, until the soft parts . 
are fully relaxed; then give stimulants, as ginger, capsi- 
cum, and Myberry, in gruel. 

20. In breech presentations there is no necessary danger 
to the mother; but the child may be still-born, from the 
tediousness of the labor, and pressure upon the cord, which 
may entirely stop circulation between the child and the 
placente. We thoroughly relax at first, and thus delay 
or suspend labor until every thing is ready and yielding; 
then give stimulants. 

21. In the several other irregular presentations, as of the 
hand, feet, or other parts of the body, the rules and prac- 
tice we have adopted have always proved sufficient to en- 
sure safe delivery to both mother and child. Even under 
the many disturbing causes and accidents, irregular pre- 
sentations are not common, and there is less probability 
of their occurrence, and less to be feared from their results, 
than is generally supposed. Only live properly, and be 
properly prepared for parturition, and there is but little 



NATURAL LABOR. 131 

danger — scarcely enough to give cause for fear to any 
ordinarily healthy woman. 

22. For the sake of those who are fearful beyond rea- 
son, we add directions for removing even the remote fear 
of presentations other than we have described. When the 
pains become frequent and severe, examine the abdomen, 
and you can readily tell whether or not the head of the 
child is directly over the pubic bone. If it is so, all will be 
well, unless there should be great contraction or deformity 
of the pelvis. If you ascertain that the head is lying to 
either the right or left side of the mother, there are two 
ways of procedure. 

The first is to give enemas of lobelia and asarum, in 
small quantities, per rectum, to retain, often repeated, until 
you have thoroughly relaxed the system, and labor will 
entirely stop. You may also give her mild spearmint and 
ginger tea, with small additions of lobelia and asarum. 
She will probably vomit freely. Her movements and 
efforts during vomiting will, nine times in ten, cause the 
child to shift its position, with the head downward. The 
mother may be allowed to rest until the contractions re- 
turn ; or a little stimulating tea will arouse the system im- 
mediately, and labor will go on with every prospect of a 
favorable termination. If bowels are obstructed, first re- 
lieve them by enemas. 

The second plan we adopt is to ascertain which side of 
the mother the child's head is, and have her lie on the 
opposite side, with her hips a little elevated; place the 
hand on the abdomen against the child's head ; then raise 
the mother into a sitting position, keeping firm pressure 
upon the head at the same time. This may have to be 
repeated several times. It is simple, easy, and generally 
successful. We should adopt the latter plan, if the exter- 
nal parts were well relaxed, cool, and soft. If we found 



132 



THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 19. 



them rigid, dry, and hot, we should adopt the former. It 
will be best for one inexperienced in midwifery to give 
the enemas fully before commencing to turn or shift the 
child, and if vomiting is produced, there will generally be 
no need of the manipulations. 



NATUKAL LABOE. 133 



CHAPTEE XX. 

NATURAL LABOR— Continued. 

1. Placenta Previa. This term is applied to a 
case where the placenta, or after-birth, appears first. It 
is caused by the placenta being attached to the walls of 
the uterus over its mouth instead of its natural and usual 
position. This places the placenta in front of the child. 
"When the neck of the uterus begins to expand, during the 
growth of foetus, the placenta becomes partially detached, 
and a slight hemorrhage is caused. This is usually noticed 
about the fifth or sixth month. Little can be done in the 
way of stopping this flow, except to keep the woman quiet, 
and give general nervine and relaxing treatment. Ene- 
mas of witch-hazel tea, per vagina, will sometimes arrest 
this early hemorrhage. AVitch-hazel and mitchela tea 
should be used every day, and small enemas, per rectum, 
retained, of asarum and lobelia, three times per day. 

In delivery, the mother is liable to lose considerable 
blood, and the life of the child is in danger if the labor be 
not speedy. While the placenta remains attached, the 
child is not endangered. "When it becomes detached, the 
circulation of the child can not go on ; its blood will 
escape through the placenta, and it can not long remain 
alive. The proper proceeding at the time of parturition, 
is to delay labor until the internal parts are fully ready. 

2. Our experience is limited to a single case. There 



134 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 20. 

had been slight hemorrhage for some time previous to 
confinement. We had directed the use of enemas of witch- 
hazel, mitchela, asarum, and a little lobelia, hot foot-baths, 
and nervine teas. When called to the labor, we found the 
external parts well prepared, and placenta presenting. As 
labor progressed, one side of the placenta became entirely 
detached, and protruded into the vagina, permitting the 
passage of the child. The appearance and pulse of the 
mother gave evidence of internal hemorrhage. Gave freely 
of tincture of capsicum and lobelia, in witch-hazel infu- 
sion, and made friction over the abdomen with the hand. 
Labor was quite rapid, and child was soon expelled, fol- 
lowed by a very abundant gush of blood. Continued med- 
icine and friction, and placenta soon came away, no force 
being used to detach it. Friction and compression of the 
uterus with one hand were kept up, and hemorrhage en- 
tirely ceased in half an hour. 

The placenta was of unusual form. A pendulous, gela- 
tinous body, the size of a pint cup, attached by a small 
pedicle, appeared just in advance of the child's head. Its 
attachment was beyond reach, but gave way on slight 
pulling. 

The child required artificial respiration, was very pale 
and quiet from loss of blood, but recovered in a few days. 
The mother was more than usually exhausted, but recov- 
ered her strength very rapidly. 

3. A presenting placenta can be readily known by the 
peculiar feeling it imparts to the finger, and can not be 
mistaken for any thing else that may be present. The feel- 
ing has been very justly compared to that of a bag of shot. 

4. It is claimed by some " reformers," that, when the 
laws of health are observed, labor is a nearly or quite 
painless operation. We have not arrived at this belief. 
We know of one lady, who gives birth to children with 



NATITRAL LABOR. 135 

really no suffering, and usually with one single and con- 
tinuous contraction of the uterus. She is not healthy ; 
nor does she observe the laws of health, and her children 
are not equal in health to the average. We know another 
lady, whose fourth child was born rapidly and with no 
appreciable suffering. Her next child came with usual 
suffering and tediousness. Her health was good the sec- 
ond time, but quite poor at the first. These, and one 
other instance, are the only three cases of painless labor 
within our observation, and they are not in consequence of 
perfect health. Neither water-cure nor any other reformed 
practice has ever enabled us to promise painless labor to 
our patients. We, however, can promise safe labors to 
mother and child, and speedy recovery. 

5. We are convinced that previous preparation of the 
system, and the retarding of the first stage of labor by re- 
laxation of the system, in the way we have frequently men- 
tioned, will insure less pain and more speed for the rest of 
the labor. " A slow labor gives a rapid recovery," if it be 
physiologically slow. Under healthy conditions, nature 
protects and develops the child within the uterus, until 
it is completely ready for the external world, but parts with 
it readily when matured. Gestation and parturition have 
no pathological character, no more than has digestion. 
Either may be interrupted by disease; either may go on 
in a diseased system, but in such case they are very apt 
to be imperfectly accomplished. The nearer the approach 
to perfect health, the more perfectly will gestation be per- 
formed. It is a matter of surprise that gestation and par- 
turition can go on as well as they do in the diseased and 
enfeebled bodies of many of our women. 

6. The progress of a natural labor. We have 
previously detailed the signs of approaching labor; the 
subsiding of the abdomen, the " show," the softening of 

x3 



136 THALEIA— WOMANHOOD. [CHAP, 20. 

the external parts, and shrinking of the uterus. Follow- 
ing these may be slight, irregular pains. The immediate 
symptoms of labor are the commencement of the " cutting, 
sawing, grinding" pains. During these, the neck and 
mouth of the uterus relax and dilate, while the fundus or 
body of the uterus hardens and contracts. The next pains 
are of a bearing-down character; the entire abdominal 
muscles contract, the uterus enlarges still more at its open- 
ing, and the child is gradually pushed forward more and 
more with each pain, receding somewhat between each. 
The head may now be readily felt with the finger, covered 
by the placental membranes, within which is inclosed the 
child, as in a sack filled with fluid. This sack, or "bag 
of waters," finally breaks, and its fluid contents escape, 
giving a momentary feeling of relief from pressure ; the 
uterus continues its contractions, and, more or less rap- 
idly, the head of the child descends and passes the pelvic 
bones, and is only separated from the outer world by the 
soft, external parts. At this part of the labor it is neces- 
sary for the attendant to support the perineum, to prevent 
its sudden overstraining or rupture. This is done by 
placing the hand against it, pressing moderately during 
the pain, and lifting the head a little toward the abdo- 
men. The mother should be cautioned to avoid bearing 
down too hard. The head is now so far advanced that 
the external parts form a mere ring, through which an- 
other contraction causes it to emerge. This external ring 
contracts somewhat about the neck, and, after a usually 
short interval, the body is pushed forward and the child 
is born. As the head emerges, the attendant should re- 
ceive it in the hand, rapidly pass the fingers over the face, 
to clear it of any of the membranes or fluids that may be 
there, that might interfere with breathing, for the child is 
now to draw its first breath and to give its first cry. Im- 



NATURAL LABOR. 137 

mediate examination should be made to ascertain if the 
umbilical cord is twisted around the neck ; if so, it should 
be slipped down over one shoulder, if possible. 

7. During the bearing-down pains the mother seems 
desirous of having a firm support to her feet, and some- 
thing to pull upon with her hands. These should be 
afforded her. (See section 10, chapter 19.) Firm press- 
ure against the small of the back is a great aid during 
the pains. A small, thick book between the hand and the 
back is much better than the hand alone. 

8. As soon as born, the child should be laid upon its 
right side. This favors the closing of the " foramen 
ovale," an opening between the two auricles of the heart, 
through which the blood has heretofore passed, but which 
must now be closed, so that the blood may take another 
course and pass into the lungs. As soon as the child 
breathes and cries freely, the cord should be tied two 
inches from the child's abdomen, and another tie an inch 
and a half from that, then sever the cord between the two 
ligatures. The string for tying should be fine and strong, 
and should be passed two or three times tightly around 
the cord and securely knotted. Always see, when you cut 
the cord, so as to make no mistake. The child should now 
be placed in a warm, soft flannel blanket, and handed over 
to the nurse. 

9. The mother should be examined to determine if there 
are twins. If there has been considerable diminution of 
abdomen and uterus, probably there are none. If there 
should be, the second labor will be usually more easy than 
the first. "A breech presentation is considered as most 
favorable." The mother should be bandaged after birth 
of first child. The second birth may occur in from a half 
hour to thirty-six hours; usually the interval is quite 
short. The sooner the better for mother and child. En- 



138 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 20. 

courage contractions by abdominal friction, and stimulants 
by enema and stomach. Make no efforts to remove pla- 
centa after first birth, for though each child has its sepa- 
rate membraneous envelopes, the bodies of the placentas 
may be united. Labor, with twins, is generally slow. 
Examinations, per vagina, will decide if a second child is 
in utero — its membranes can sometimes be felt. A very 
large placenta, an enlarged ovary, accumulation of blood 
behind a clot or retained placenta, enlarged kidney or 
spleen, or flatus, may deceive into belief of twins. 

10. Removal of placenta. Usually the last con- 
traction of the uterus, in expelling the child, detaches the 
placenta, and examination will find it either entirely within 
the vagina, or partly retained within the uterus. Place 
one hand on abdomen, over uterus, draw gently upon the 
cord ; if it causes motion to the uterus, as felt by the hand, 
cease any efforts to remove placenta. Give stimulants to 
mother, grasp uterus moderately with the hand, or apply 
friction to the abdomen, and contractions will return. No 
force should at any time be used in removing the placenta. 
"When, by tracing up the cord you can feel its union with 
the placenta, reach the edge, and, with the other hand 
upon the uterus, gently draw the edge toward the outlet; 
if it yields readily, it is entirely free and may be removed; 
if it causes any motion to the uterus, cease to draw and 
wait for its detachment by uterine contraction, which may 
be induced by brisk friction over the abdomen. 

11. Usually the removal of the placenta is immediately 
accompanied by a greater or less quantity of blood. This, 
in normal births, is principally what was contained within 
the placenta and uterine blood-vessels, and has been driven 
into the cavity of the uterus by its contraction, and re- 
tained there by the placenta. More than a pint is con- 
sidered excessive; less than a pint is entirely natural. 



NATUKAL LABOR. 139 

Friction to the abdomen, and gentle or even harder press- 
ure upon the uterus, are advisable, to cause its more speedy 
and complete contraction. It prevents loss of blood, and 
after-pains will be less severe. 

12. Bandaging the mother. After the soiled and 
wet clothes have been replaced by warm and dry ones, the 
bandage should be placed on the mother. Fold a large 
napkin or other cloth eight times doubled ; it should then 
be eight inches square; place this, well warmed, directly 
over the uterus ; apply over this a bandage large enough 
to cover the entire abdomen; pin moderately tight; it will 
need tightening from time to time as the internal organs 
shrink to their natural positions. Sometimes a thicker 
compress should be added, to increase the direct pressure 
on the uterus. It is needed in cases where the uterus 
contracts slowly. 

13. To bandage the child. Take a piece of old 
linen, four doubled, two or three inches square; cut a 
hole in its center large enough to admit the cord; wrap 
a well-oiled fold of linen around the cord ; lay the end 
of the cord upward along the abdomen, and cover with a 
double fold of linen the size of the under fold ; put band- 
age on over this. Do not bind so tight as to cause pain. 
If the child cries much, look always to its bandage ; it 
may be too tight, and a little loosening will bring relief. 
The bandage should be of soft linen, doubled for summer, 
and soft flannel, or canton flannel, in winter. Once around 
the child is enough. Make a dart in the bandage from its 
lower edge to the umbilicus, so that it will fit uniformly. 
Sow a tag to this, and use it to pin the bandage to the 
napkin. 

14. Washing the child. After the nurse receives 
the child from the attendant, she should, at first conven- 
ient moment, rub it all over with sweet-oil or lard. Cover 



140 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [ClIAP. 20. 

it warmly for awhile, and then wash it with fine soap and 
warm water. Use no soap-suds about its eyes. Carefully 
wipe dry ; then apply the bandage. 

15. "When both mother and child have had a little time 
to rest, the child may be placed to the mother's breast. It 
may find little or no milk. The first milk is of a laxative 
nature, and will do away with the commonly supposed 
necessity of giving physic to the child. It is really too 
bad that babies should begin to take medicine before they 
do food. Yet there may be tardiness in the action of the 
bowels or kidneys. A little tea of parsley leaves, hemp 
seed, watermelon seed, or pumpkin seed is the most active 
diuretic we have ever found to be necessary; and a little 
molasses answers to move the bowels. No uneasiness need 
be felt if the child's bowels are not moved before the be- 
ginning of the second day. If not moved by that time, 
give a tea-spoonful of molasses and linseed-oil, half and 
half. Sweet-oil answers as well as linseed. We have 
known both bowels and bladder to act before the cord was 
divided. 

16. Keep the child warm. It should be borne in 
mind that an infant has but little capacity to resist the in- 
fluence of cold. It is an error to suppose that an infant 
is strengthened or "toughened" by exposure to cold. It 
should always be kept warm. If its surface and extrem- 
ities become cold, its blood is thrown inward, crowding 
the internal organs, causing colic, diarrhea, indigestion, 
flatulence, and other troubles. A little ginger and catnip 
tea is as good a remedy as any in such cases. Keep the 
infant warm, clothe and feed it properly, and it will es- 
cape much sickness. 



VARIATIONS FROM NATURAL LABOR. 141 



CHAPTER XXI, 

VARIATIONS FROM NATURAL LABOR. 

We have thus far traced the progress of an ordinary 
natural labor, and such as nearly all will prove to be, 
excepting the occasional variations in presentation. We 
will now consider such departures from ordinary condi- 
tions as are most frequent, with directions for proceeding 
when they occur. 

1. Hasty labor. When there is an appearance of 
haste in the labor, and sufficient relaxation of the external 
parts, with head, face, breech, or feet presentations, we do 
not interfere, but watch that nothing goes wrong. The 
most that we should do would be to give lobelia and asa- 
rum enemas, per rectum, to moderate the severity of the 
pains, and to give time for more gradual yielding of the 
soft parts. If we knew, or suspected there was a nar- 
row pelvis, or a large child, we should not wait a mo- 
ment before giving the enemas, for the purpose above in- 
dicated. We would advise the same if it were a first child. 
Should there be heat, dryness, and rigidity of the external 
parts, we should use the enemas, with lobelia and other 
relaxants by the stomach, and sometimes a lobelia and elm 
poultice, externally, until the necessary relaxation and 
softening ensued. If the same conditions were present, 
and labor were slow or moderate, we would proceed in 
the same manner. 



142 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 21. 

2. Protracted labor. If the labor had been long 
and tedious, and the pains had ceased, or were insufficient 
toward progress, we should quiet the system in the same 
manner, to give the mother time for rest and recovery 
from fatigue; then give her powdered capsicum, in gruel, 
as a stimulant and nourishment combined, and should 
expect very soon a renewal of effective labor-pains. A 
cold or chilly condition should be relieved by the use of 
hot bricks, hot foot-baths, and warming drinks. 

3. Concealed hemorrhage — flooding. We have 
previously given directions for placentae previa. Con- 
nected with this, and at times with other labors, there may 
be concealed hemorrhage, where the bleeding goes on within 
the uterine cavity, but is prevented from appearing out- 
wardly. It may occur after the placenta has been ex- 
pelled. Its symptoms are paleness, faintness, nausea, 
vomiting, blindness, and ringing in the ears; a feeble, 
thready, rapid, and fluttering pulse; quick respiration; 
desire for fresh air; great restlessness, and sense of fear 
and oppression, and shrunken hands and pinched features. 
Such a condition is not likely to occur where the patient 
has been kept warm through the whole period. 

4. The indications for treatment are stimulation of the 
most positive character, with warmth to bring the blood 
to the surface and extremities, and to relieve internal 
crowding. If it occurs after the placenta has been ex- 
pelled, the uterus will be found to be nearly as large as 
before delivery. Pressure will cause flow of blood from 
vagina. Grasp the uterus firmly with both hands, to 
expel the blood. Give injections of tannin and bayberry 
infusion to vagina, and also to uterus, if labor has ended ; 
capsicum, carbonate of ammonia, and brandy, in frequent 
doses; external warmth in every possible manner, and 
friction to abdomen. Mere pressure from bandage can 



VARIATIONS FROM NATURAL LABOR. 143 

not be relied upon. The hands should be kept firmly 
grasping the uterus until it contracts. So long as your 
patient remains cold, she is not out of danger. When she 
becomes warm, she is safe, if she can be kept so. Watch 
the feet and hands; they become cold first. 

5. The most serious case of this character in our prac- 
tice resulted entirely from the imprudence of the mother. 
She had just moved into the city, in the winter; no stove 
up; bed-room cold. She was taken with labor-pains about 
midnight. Kept up and about, trying to arrange her 
house, and to prepare for confinement. We were called at 
eight o'clock in the morning; found her completely chilled ; 
labor was rapid; child born within a half hour. Hem- 
orrhage was profuse internally — very little external. As 
soon as the cord was cut, we applied pressure and friction 
to abdomen; roused the neighbors to bring hot irons, hot 
water — any thing hot that could be had on the moment. 
These were placed all around her, under the bed covering. 
Placenta was expelled in about fifteen minutes; gave her 
capsicum and lobelia tincture, in witch-hazel tea, as much 
and as hot as she could take. She became warm and in a 
perspiration in half an hour ; hemorrhage entirely ceased. 
She had no after-pains — no after-hemorrhage, nor trouble 
of any character. In a confinement two years previous, 
she had flooded very seriously. Her physician applied 
cold, plugging the vagina with a silk handkerchief filled 
with snow, and cloths saturated with iced alum-water. 
He subdued the hemorrhage by these means in five days. 
The different results of these two modes of treatment are 
very apparent. 

6. The principles which we apply to every case of flood- 
ing are embraced in what we have just said. They are 
the complete icarming of the system, compression of the 
uterus, and friction to the abdomen, stimulus internally, 



144 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 21. 

and astringents locally. The friction is to be given with 
the warm hand. 

7. Retained placenta. This is a great terror with 
many. Generally the placenta follows the child within a 
half hour. An exhausting labor may leave the uterus in 
a condition of inertia, from which it may almost invariably 
be roused, after a half hour of rest, by an enema, per rec- 
tum, of ginger and slippery-elm, and a few spoonfuls 
of gruel with capsicum per stomach. Friction to the 
abdomen, pressing or grasping the uterus, coughing, 
" blowing hard in the closed hand," a pinch of bayberry 
to excite sneezing, tickling the fauces to excite retching, 
may each, or all, be resorted to. If these do not suc- 
ceed, and there are no signs of hemorrhage, let matters 
rest for a few hours, and then repeat enema, with the 
other means. So long as there is no hemorrhage, there 
is.no danger, no matter how long the placenta remains, 
and there is no danger of hemorrhage if the patient is kept 
warm. The placenta may be entirely within the vagina, 
retained there by external contraction ; or entirely within 
the uterus, partially adherent or entirely loose; or partly 
within the uterus and partly within the vagina, retained 
by partial adhesion or by contraction of the os uteri upon 
it. In the first case, reach its edge with the fingers and 
remove it; in the second place, excite contractions as di- 
rected, or wait awhile for rest and return of contractile 
power; in the third case (and also in the first case, if 
the rigidity is too great to admit its removal), give an 
enema of lobelia and asarum, per rectum, with a steaming 
brick to the external parts, and relaxation will soon fol- 
low; then remove from vagina, or wait for or induce uter- 
ine contractions. Keep the circulation outwardly and hem- 
orrhage need not be feared. Be sure the feet are warm. 

8. Laceration or rupture of perineum. This 



VARIATIONS FROM NATURAL LABOR. 145 

may occur in a hurried labor, with unrelaxcd soft parts. 
It might be unavoidable in some very rare cases, in conse- 
quence of the adhesions or contractions from former inju- 
ries. Slight lacerations, of no real importance, are very 
likely to occur in first birth. Proper attention to secure 
relaxation, will almost invariably prevent any injury of 
this character. If there should be a hardened or con- 
tracted cicatrix, from old iu juries, the utmost relaxation 
possible should be produced, and the best support given 
while the head is in the soft parts. If the head emerges 
without causing any laceration, little fear need be felt for 
the balance of the labor. A slight laceration appears at 
first to be quite extensive. 

If the injury is a severe one, it should be attended to 
by a competent surgeon. If slight, keep the injured part 
well cleaned, by frequent washing with warm water and 
fine soap, and oil well after each washing. Apply a poul- 
tice externally if there is dryness and inflammation. 

If proper care and caution are used in advance, there is 
no probability of any serious injury to the perineum, or to 
any of the soft parts. 

9. Inversion of uterus. If any one should be so 
indiscreet as to remove an adhered placenta with violence, 
instead of waiting for its removal by the natural contrac- 
tions of the uterus, a portion might remain adhered after 
the main body had come away. This would prevent com- 
plete contraction of the uterus, and might cause continual 
flooding. Astringent injections would be required. 

Cases have occurred, in which the sudden and violent 
efforts to disengage the placenta have caused the complete 
inversion, or turning inside out, of the uterus. If any 
considerable time has elapsed after such an accident, the 
chances for remedy would be very few. If recent, try to 
restore by grasping the uterus with a cloth wet with cold 



146 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 21. 

water, and gently and steadily pushing upward. Inver- 
sion could only happen to an expanded and relaxed ute- 
rus; if contraction occurs while inverted, there would be 
little prospect of relief. 

Partial and complete inversion, occurring gradually and 
spontaneously, are recorded as having been noticed after 
labor. The books say it is very rare. In the Dublin 
Lying-in Hospital not one case had occurred in seventy- 
one thousand labors. 

10. But the almost murderous practice of removing the 
placenta by force — either because the attendant physician 
can not afford to wait for the natural progress of detach- 
ment, or because he has adopted the erroneous idea that 
the woman is in danger if the placenta is not brought 
away within a short time after the child is born — has 
sometimes resulted in the complete inversion of the ute- 
rus. We may be excused for giving a brief outline of a 
case. 

11. A particular friend of the authoress — married at the 
age of eighteen, with ordinarily healthy and vigorous con- 
stitution — was safely and readily delivered of her first 
child. The placenta not coming away immediately, her 
physician did not wait for, or induce, natural uterine con- 
traction, but with much force pulled it away, and in so 
doing completely inverted the uterus, but immediately re- 
turned it. Our friend said the worst delivery pains were 
as nothing compared with the agony of this proceeding. 
The hemorrhage was alarmingly excessive, and ice was 
applied internally and externally, for several hours; the 
hemorrhage soon subsided ; natural warmth did not return 
for more than thirty-six hours after the removal of the 
ice. Fever, soreness, and swelling of the abdomen came 
on the third day. No appearance of lochia, and turpen- 
tine was given to induce it. Swelling and pain increased. 



VARIATIONS FROM NATURAL LABOR. 147 

The whole abdomen was blistered. When it filled, it was 
punctured and poulticed for several hours. No improve- 
ment followed. Another physician was called, and both 
agreed that it was a very critical case. They applied 
mercurial ointment to the blistered region. Her stomach 
became very irritable, and could retain no medicine. Two 
old and experienced physicians were called as counsel. The 
case was pronounced hopeless. She died in a few hours 
in convulsions. 

Post-mortem examination revealed an uncontracted 
uterus, with two large ruptures in its walls, through which 
blood had freely escaped into the abdominal cavity. The 
doctors told her husband that her labor had been so severe 
and tedious that it had worn through the walls of the 
uterus. We have never forgotten the circumstances, and 
can not now recur to them with reconciled feelings. It 
was a case of unwarranted malpractice. Her child lived. 

12. The circumstances of this sad event gave us a par- 
tial insight into the way some physicians endeavor to im- 
pose upon the ignorance and credulity of their patients. 
Nothing is too gross nonsense or untruth for them to 
utter. Having heard that our friend's mother had died 
in confinement, the physician said that " death, during 
parturition, was hereditary in the family, and that the 
other sisters would most likely die in the same way, if they 
ever should marry." They did marry, and have passed 
through the perils of several childbirths, with as much 
ease as the generality of women. Their mother had died 
from an injury, received by being thrown from a runaway 
horse, surviving it only a few hours. Being pregnant at 
the time, she naturally miscarried before she died. 

13. It is not alone the country physician who tells his 
patients that " the after-birth has grown fast, and must be 
pulled off," or that " it has grow T n fast to the back or the 



148 TIIALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [ClTAP. 21. 

side." Understand that there is, of necessity, a vital con- 
nection, adhesion, or "growing fast" of the placenta to the 
walls of the uterus ; if this were not so, there could be no 
foetal growth. During parturition, the contractions of the 
uterus upon the inelastic placenta, separate the one from 
the other. It is hardly necessary to add that the placenta 
can adhere to nothing except the interior walls of the 
uterus. 

Of this class of doctors are they who are opposed to the 
study of physiology and practice of medicine by females. 
Their opposition arises mainly from threatened danger to 
their craft. 

14. Puerperal convulsions. This is of compara- 
tively rare occurrence. Obstetrical authorities give one 
case of convulsion in about six hundred labors. They 
may come on at any time, before, during, or after labor. 
The causes are almost any thing that may irritate the 
nervous system. Few cases arise unconnected with con- 
stipation and inactivity of the kidneys. If they occur 
before gestation is completed, miscarriage almost invari- 
ably results ; the expulsion of the foetus is a requisite to 
recovery. The attacks are generally preceded by symp- 
toms of deranged physiology, and those who would avoid 
the liability, should keep their systems free from obstruc- 
tions. Our practical knowledge is confined to one single 
case. We have, in a few instances, observed evident ten- 
dencies to convulsions, but, by the prompt use of remedies, 
have averted the spasms. 

15. In the case to which we refer, we were not present 
for some hours after the commencement. We were called 
at 4 o'clock in the morning, after the patient had been 
pronounced hopeless by two physicians. She was a young 
and generally healthy woman, on the verge of confinement 
with her first child. She had lived a too sedentary life 



VARIATIONS FROM NATURAL LABOR. 149 

for months previous; her bowels were constipated, and 
her general system rather clogged. She had been work- 
ing at her sewing machine, and on rising was seized with 
dizziness and the pains of labor. The nearest physician 
was called. She had a rapid delivery of child and pla- 
centa, and seemed doing well until a half hour after, when 
violent and continuous convulsions occurred. A second 
physician was called, and the two continued to treat her 
until after midnight, when they pronounced the case hope- 
less and left. They had bled her to the extent of three 
quarts, had given chloroform, camphor, opium, and other 
remedies. At this stage we took the case. 

We found her in continued convulsions, with brief in- 
tervals of rest and slight consciousness, but not in the least 
degree rational; the spasms lasted about fifteen minutes 
each, returning after intervals of three to five minutes. 
Our treatment consisted of tincture capsicum, one part ; 
tincture lobelia and cypripedium, of each two parts, given 
as freely as possible during the intervals ; enemas of asarum 
and lobelia, to retain. Tincture gelseminum, thirty drops, 
every hour, or as near that time as possible. These means 
were used through the entire treatment, diminishing in 
quantity and frequency as improvement went on. She 
showed signs of improvement in about an hour after w r e 
commenced; the spasms entirely ceased in twenty-four 
hoars. She was mildly delirious for three days, and was 
discharged well at the end of two weeks. She had no 
recollection of any thing that occurred after she rose from 
her sewing, until five days had elapsed. 

16. The proper treatment for convulsions consists, not 
in blood-letting, but in keeping the patient warm, and 
giving relaxants and stimulants to equalize the circulation 
and nervous action, and removing, as speedily as possible, 
the irritating cause. 



150 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 21. 

17. Prolapsus of cord. In very rare cases the 
umbilical cord descends during labor, and is compressed 
between the head of the child and the pelvic bones. 
Compression stops circulation and the child soon dies, 
unless relieved. Complete delay of labor, with vomiting, 
would probably effect the change desired. If labor is 
well advanced, hasten it, in order to save child's life. 
Mother is not endangered in the least by prolapsed cord. 
Various means have been devised to return the cord, but 
they are generally unsuccessful or injurious. 



TREATMENT AFTER CHILDBIRTH. 151 



CHAPTER XXII. 

CONDITION AND TREATMENT OF MOTHER AFTER CHILDBIRTH. 

1. When labor has been attended with no serious diffi- 
culty, and the woman is ordinarily healthy, the attendant 
physician has little more to do, except to watch that noth- 
ing goes on wrongly. Up to this point the woman has 
been performing a natural and physiological function, and 
equally normal are the remainder of the processes toward 
recovery of strength. The muscular fatigue, which fol- 
lows parturition^ simply requires repose. So long as there 
is no fever nor acceleration of pulse, there is no danger 
to be apprehended. 

2. The pulse. Immediately after delivery, the pulse 
should be frequently watched. A quick pulse is often in- 
dicative of hemorrhage. In the second stage of labor the 
pulse increases in rapidity, and diminishes after labor is 
ended. It again increases as the milk begins to be se- 
creted. A quick, weak, and irregular pulse occurs in 
prostration from nervous shocks and profuse flooding. If 
pulse runs to one hundred per minute, watch carefully. 
It may not be indicative of danger, for it may exist dur- 
ing severe after-pains, or with an unexpelled large clot in 
the uterus. We generally give our patients a few table- 
spoonfuls of hot ginger tea, as soon as the child is born; 
it aids in expulsion of placenta and speedy contraction of 

14 



152 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 22. 

the uterus. Active exertion of the mother, at this time, 
will increase the pulse ; quiet will lessen it. 

3. Nervous derangements frequently occur ; some- 
times so severe as to cause dimness of vision, loss of hear- 
ing, panting, sighing, an anxious countenance, and a quick, 
fluttering, or slow, laboring pulse. In such cases, perfect t 
quiet is essential, nervines are indicated. Avoid opium in 
all its forms. Give the antispasmodic drops, in small and 
frequent doses, keep the patient warm, shut out the light 
and visitors from the room. Such symptoms are not the 
necessary result of labor; they are dependent on disease, 
debility, accident, or mismanagement, or from fright and 
apprehension arising from tales of danger and accidents, 
that may have been unwisely gossiped in her hearing, by 
her neighbors. Calm, collected, resolute, and energetic 
attendants only should be allowed. The sympathy needed 
by the woman, at this period, is that of judgment, action, 
and cheerfulness ; not that of whining pity and foreboding 
of evil. The patient will take upon herself, largely, the 
mental condition of those around her. 

4. After-pains. These pains commence soon after 
the expulsion of the placenta. They are caused by the 
contraction of the uterus to its natural dimensions. A 
slow labor is generally followed by moderate after-pains; 
a quick labor by more severe ones. Clots, or small pieces 
of placental membranes, remaining in the uterus, are causes 
of severe pain until they are expelled. After-pains gen- 
erally occur in paroxysms, and continue from one to two 
days. They do not tend to suppress lochia or milk. 
Unless very severe, no special treatment is needed. If 
severe, apply a bag of hops, wet with hot vinegar, to 
the abdomen. Enemas of lobelia, asarum, and elm 
may also be given. To keep the hop fomentation warm, 
heat a plate in the oven, very hot, wrap it with a napkin 



TREATMENT AFTER CHILDBIRTH. 153 

and cover the hop-bag with it; renew as it becomes 
cool. 

5. The lochia. This is the name given to the flow 
from the female organs, after parturition. It proceeds 
from the uterus. At first, it is mixed with blood, chang- 
ing daily toward a light-colored secretion, and gradually 
lessening, until it ceases entirely, at the end of eight or ten 
days. If the lochia is as we have described, nothing is 
required in the way of treatment, except cleanliness and a 
vaginal injection of tepid water, or witch-hazel tea, two or 
three times a day. If it becomes excessive, it should be 
treated as hemorrhage of uterus, (see page 99.) If it 
ceases, and there is heat, dryness, and pain, it threatens 
puerperal fever, and prompt attention will be required. 
(See puerperal fever.) If the odor of the lochia is offensive, 
as it may be, from decomposition of clot or membranes, in 
summer, add tincture of myrrh to the injections. 

6. Conditions after parturition. By the time 
the lochia has ceased, the uterus will have generally con- 
tracted to nearly its unimpregnated size. The vagina 
soon assumes its normal dimensions, but is apt to be 
more or less sore for a few days. The abdomen remains 
loose, gradually contracting, and giving evidence of the 
great distention it has undergone, by permanent lines of 
lighter color than the skin. These linece albicantes, when 
present, are considered unmistakable evidences of a pre- 
vious childbirth. Though they almost invariably follow 
a full-time gestation, they may be produced by other 
causes. We have seen them frequently upon girls who 
have dysmenorrhcea, and on girls who have to labor hard. 
Spasms and cramps will also occasion them, and they are 
sometimes found on males. A six-months' miscarriage 
may leave none, and we have seen cases of full-time gesta- 
tion, that produced the least possible signs of this character. 



154 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 22. 

When progress is favorable, after parturition, the lochia 
continues uninterrupted, the secretion of milk soon com- 
mences, the skin remains soft and moist, the kidneys and 
bladder act freely, and there is no diarrhea. Usually the 
bowels remain constipated. If the mother is afflicted with 
piles, parturition usually aggravates them. 

7. Milk fever. The milk is frequently in the breasts, 
before delivery, and may require to be drawn, for several 
days, weeks, or even months. Labor usually "suspends 
its secretion, but it soon returns. That which is .first se- 
creted is of a laxative character, and will act upon the 
child's bowels. The reappearance of the milk is apt to 
be accompanied with more or less fever, which may not 
be distinguished from puerperal fever by the inexperi- 
enced. In milk fever the lochia continues, the breasts 
harden and become painful. In puerperal fever the 
breasts usually flatten, the lochia ceases, and the abdomen 
becomes tender under pressure. Milk fever will not hap- 
pen with properly-treated patients. The feverish excite- 
ment, during the so-called " return of the milk," can be 
relieved by the use of diaphoretic teas, and a mild cathar- 
tic, if the bowels are constipated. Hot infusion of aristo- 
lochia serpentaria (Virginia snakeroot), moderately strong, 
and drank freely, until the hands become rnoist, will gen- 
erally prevent or relieve the fever. A full emetic may be 
required in some cases. The breasts need careful watch- 
ing at this time. 

8. Attention to Breasts. Much suffering or per- 
manent injury may arise, if the breasts are neglected. 
Within a few hours after delivery, the breasts should be 
poulticed with elm and lobelia. This should be kept on 
long enough to soften the breasts, if they are hard and 
painful, and until the milk will flow uninterruptedly. If 
milk comes into the breasts at this, or any other time, 



TREATMENT AFTER CHILDBIRTH. 155 

it should never be permitted to accumulate, but must be 
drawn, either by the child, or other means. The too long 
retention of milk is a great cause of " caked breasts, bro- 
ken breasts, or bealed breasts." With a first child, par- 
ticular care of the breasts, for a few days, is of great 
importance. If more milk is secreted than the child 
needs, it should be drawn, not " backened." If the nip- 
ple is retracted, or draws in so that the child can not get 
hold of it, it should be drawn out with a breast pump. If 
none can be had, take a quart bottle, w T ith a perfectly 
smooth top, fill with hot water, pour it out, and after 
cooling the neck, apply it over the nipple; press moder- 
ately hard; repeat until the nipple projects. Tight dress- 
ing across the breasts is one cause of retracted nipples. 

9. Corded Nipple. A condition of obstinate retrac- 
tion, commonly termed " corded nipple," is occasionally 
found, in which the nipple seems as if held back by un- 
yielding cords. We can find no mention of this in any 
work on obstetrics which we have seen. Our proceeding 
has been to draw the nipple with a hot bottle, and w r e 
sometimes have been compelled to continue our efforts at 
intervals, for twenty-four hours. When the nipple yields, 
very fine, inelastic, white, fibrous cords appear at the open- 
ings in the end of the nipple, and may be drawn out. We 
have brought out a half dozen of these little cords, an inch 
in length, from one nipple. One or both breasts may be 
in this condition. Unless this obstruction can be removed, 
the milk will not flow, the breasts will fill up, become very 
painful, and finally harden and form abscesses, unless 
means are used, in advance, to prevent the secretion of the 
milk. Unless this " corded" condition is overcome, the 
breast is rendered completely unserviceable. Persistent 
and persevering efforts should be made. We are ac- 
quainted with a medical gentleman who resorted to a sur- 



156 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 22. 

gical operation, with success, to relieve his wife of a diffi- 
culty of this nature. 

10. Sore nipples — cause. To those who have not 
had any experience, this may appear but a minor diffi- 
culty. It is often productive of very serious consequences. 
It is a cause of acute suffering to the mother — often very 
difficult of relief — at times causing severe inflammation, 
or abscess of the breasts, and may be so severe that the 
nursing of the child must be suspended, and the milk 
dried up. It is of paramount importance, before a first 
childbirth, that the prospective mother shall thoroughly 
use such means as will prevent this liability to serious 
trouble. The principal cause of sore nipples is the neces- 
sary straining and stretching they must undergo when the 
child begins to nurse ; but, if by previous care, the nipple 
has been developed to a normal size, shape, and position, 
and the contiguous parts accustomed to pressure and dis- 
tension, the danger will be principally obviated, and if a 
necessary soreness does arise, it will rapidly yield to treat- 
ment. Even with the best preparation of the nipple, some 
women have such an enormous and sudden accumulation 
of milk, about the third day after confinement, that the 
breasts distend and cause retraction of the nipple, and the 
nursing of the child, or necessary drawing of the milk will 
produce soreness. As soon as the milk flows freely, the 
nipple assumes its natural projection, and the soreness may 
be soon relieved; but if such a distension of the breasts 
occurs with an unprepared nipple, the difficulty of relief 
is very great. 

11. Prevention. — During the last two months of ges- 
tation with a first child, the prospective mother should 
give daily attention to the nipples. If retracted, they 
should be drawn out by the use of a breast pump, hot 
bottle, or by the mouth of a child, servant, or other avail- 






TREATMENT AFTER CHILDBIRTH. 157 

able person, but not by one who uses tobacco, for in this 
event, if the woman has a scrofulous or cancerous liability^ 
tobacco saliva may prove an exciting cause of local disease 
of a most unfortunate or malignant character. When 
milk is in the breasts, the drawing should not be neglected, 
though it is of rare occurrence to an annoying extent. The 
means here mentioned should be continued until the nipple 
assumes the necessary prominence and size. 

12. When the nipple is not retracted, but merely unde- 
veloped, drawing may not be required. In its place the 
mother may apply, twice a day, a little flour paste to the 
nipple, and with her thumb and fingers gently rub and 
draw it out. This will soon cause it to develop into a 
proper size, shape, and position, and render it soft and 
pliable. This character of development is an absolute ne- 
cessity, and it is much better to have it done in advance. 
The paste should be removed with a soft napkin, and the 
nipple allowed to dry in the air and light; then apply a 
little glycerine. Avoid the use of washes and lotions that 
are recommended to " harden the nipples." They do not 
require to be hardened ; what they need is a normal de- 
velopment. 

13. Treatment. When the nipple becomes sore, it 
should be poulticed with lobelia and elm, to soften it, and 
allay inflammation; after this apply glycerine. Wash 
carefully with warm water just before and after the child 
nurses, and re-apply glycerine. We have seen the oil of 
the butternut very highly recommended. Heat the ker- 
nels of this nut and press out the oil. Tincture of myrrh 
is a very good article to use on the nipple. It should be 
washed off before the child nurses. We know of nothing 
better than the antispasmodic tincture; but it causes 
smarting of the nipple and of the child's mouth. This is 
of little consequence compared with the benefits it produces. 



158 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 22. 

Apply the tincture, and when the smarting ceases, apply a 
little glycerine. Leave until nursing time comes; then 
rub on sweet-oil, and wash off with Castile soap and warm 
water. This will save the child's mouth from the smart- 
ing. Re-apply after nursing. We repeat, that " pre- 
caution is better than cure." 

14. Retarded secretion of milk. Where the milk 
does not appear, poultices should be continued. Add a 
little ginger to the lobelia and elm, and use food of a 
nourishing character, but not rich. Gruel and broth are 
best, as they supply fluid. If the bowels are constipated, 
appetite poor, with fever and furred tongue, give enemas 
to relieve bowels, and then a mild, slow, and thorough 
emetic. Avoid the use of camphor. 

15. To prevent secretion op milk. When there 
is more milk than the child needs for the time, it is un- 
wise to use means, at first, to check it. The surplus 
should be drawn by bottle, breast-pump, or other means. 
It should never be permitted to accumulate and remain 
long enough for the breast to become hard and tender. 
If the supply remains superabundant after five or six 
weeks, camphor and sweet-oil may be used cautiously to 
repress it. 

16. When from the death of the infant, or other cause, 
it becomes necessary to "dry up the milk," it may be 
safely accomplished by dissolving, in sweet-oil, as much 
camphor as it will take up, and keeping the breasts con- 
tinually covered with cloths saturated in this. Cover with 
oil silk to prevent evaporation of the camphor. Continue 
this until all signs of swelling have disappeared. If the 
milk is already in the breasts, it must be drawn, gently 
and carefully, three or four times a day. Diet should be 
plain, avoiding fluids. Keep bowels open, and kidneys 
and skin active. 



TREATMENT AFTER CHILDBIRTH. 159 

17. Abscesses ; " caked " breasts, etc. The accumu- 
lation and retention of milk in the breasts is the principal 
cause of " caked breasts," and " broken or bealed breasts." 
Obstructions to secretions and excretions, impurities re- 
tained, or a scrofulous habit may give rise to this kind of 
difficulty. An increase of circulation of blood in the 
breasts precedes and accompanies the secretion of milk. 
Obstructions to circulation may result in extensive injury 
and disease of the organ. To prevent this, apply poul- 
tices, or warm fomentations, as soon as there are any signs 
of activity in the breasts. The accumulation and retention 
of milk may prove a powerful cause of obstruction, by the 
pressure it may occasion. Hence the breasts should never 
be allowed to become, or remain crowded with milk. The 
milk itself may undergo change — hardening or decompos- 
ing. Bruises, injuries, or compressions may be causes of 
obstruction. The effect of constipated bowels, and of in- 
active kidneys and skin upon the breasts at this time, may 
be quite injurious. From these various causes a breast 
may become swollen, hard, and inflamed, " caked, broken, 
or bealed." Serious and often irremediable as these con- 
ditions are, they may be easily prevented by very simple 
means, if attended to in proper time. When once estab- 
lished, the swelling, inflammation, and pain are very se- 
vere, suppuration follows, and the structure of the gland 
is injured and destroyed to a greater or less extent, the 
child is deprived of its rightful food, and the functional 
capacity of the gland may be forever prevented, or very 
much interfered with in after periods of nursing. 

18. The means of prevention are, to keep the system 
clear of obstruction, by promoting every excretion and 
secretion, by proper diet and habits. Special treatment to 
the breasts consists in keeping them soft and moist by 
warm poultices, and never permitting the milk to remain 

15 



160 THALEIA WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 22. 

long enough to distend the breasts beyond comfort. When 
the nipples are sore, mothers sometimes allow the milk to 
accumulate, rather than endure the pain that is produced 
by nursings or drawing. It may, and often does, prove a 
fatal mistake. 

19. Treatment. If the mother is unfortunate enough 
to have these difficulties, the treatment should consist, first, 
of attention to general conditions, and to the bowels, kid- 
neys, and skin. Thorough emetics should be given, and 
the breasts should be poulticed with lobelia, asarum, and 
elm, until suppuration has ensued, and then the swelling 
should be opened. Care should be taken not to injure 
any large blood-vessel or milk-vein. Poultices should be 
continued until the discharge ceases. Constitutional treat- 
ment is as necessary in these cases as local treatment. 

20. Oiling the breasts. For a month previous to 
parturition, the breasts should be daily rubbed with sweet- 
oil. The oil should be well rubbed in with the warm 
hand, and should be particularly done to the base of 
the breasts, and up nearly or quite under the arms. 
A table-spoonful of oil is enough for both breasts. In 
cold weather, it should be done before a good fire. The 
woman will be amply repaid for this extra labor when 
the time of nursing arrives. Whenever a poultice is re- 
moved, the breasts should be carefully washed with warm 
water and fine soap, and well rubbed with sweet-oil be- 
fore renewing the poultice. It is also well to apply oil 
with the first poultice. After parturition, the rubbing of 
the breasts with sweet-oil is very serviceable to soften, 
expand, and gently excite them. Fresh goose-grease or 
hen-oil will answer for the same purpose. 

21. Attention to bowels. If the mother has been 
constipated previous to confinement, an enema should be 
given, about twenty-four hours after labor ; if this does not 



TREATMENT AFTER CHILDBIRTH. 161 

move the bowels sufficiently, she should take a dose of the 
cathartic powder (see formula). If her bowels have pre- 
viously been regular, and the first enema is ineffectual, 
give another the next day, and if not sufficient, give the 
cathartic powder. If kidneys are inactive, give a mild 
diuretic, as parsely or hemp-seed tea, within a few hours 
after labor. 

22. Leaving the bed. After confinement, it is cus- 
tomary and proper for the mother to remain in bed for a 
few days. Some are able to be up in a day or two ; others 
are unable to support themselves, out of bed, at the end 
of a week. As a rule, we require five or six days to pass, 
before permitting our patients to walk about. The change 
from the bed to active life should be gradual, as sitting 
up in bed, then sitting in a chair, then walking a few 
steps. If the lochia continue profuse and red, and the 
uterus is not thoroughly contracted, rising will be injuri- 
ous. The condition and strength are the guides, rather 
than a specified number of days. It is better to remain 
longer than is really necessary, than to risk injury by too 
early leaving the bed. 

23. Diet after parturition. The food, at first, 
should be plain and simple. Tea and toast, soda-crackers, 
gruel, broths, eggs beaten in milk, sweetened and flavored 
to suit the palate, are admissible. Change after three or 
four days, gradually, to usual food. 

24. Puerperal fever. This has never occurred in 
any case where we have had the management from the 
commencement, and we believe that nearly every case 
might be prevented by proper care. We have, however, 
been consulted and called upon to treat this form of dis- 
ease, after it had arisen under the management of others, 
and in no instance has the patient died. The treatment 
should consist of, first, a slow, and thorough emetic, ene- 



162 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 22. 

mas to relieve any existing constipation, a mild cathartic, 
of which leptandrin should be the principal agent ; dia- 
phoretic drinks, none better than aristolochia serpentaria ; 
enemas of lobelia and asarum, to retain ; hop or bitter-herb 
fomentations to the entire abdomen, kept hot by necessary 
external heat ; mustard-water to the feet and legs if they 
are cold, or steaming bricks or other substitutes. The 
skin should be washed, after the emetic, with warm water 
and soap or soda, then wash the body and limbs with 
warm vinegar, and rub dry. Keep the surface and ex- 
tremities warm and moist. Avoid exposure to cold during 
the washing. Manage the fomentations so as not to wet 
the clothing or bed. With this kind of treatment, we 
believe few cases would fail to recover. It should be con- 
tinued with steadiness, and the emetic given daily, or twice 
daily, if needed. 



ATTENTION TO CHILD. 163 



CHAPTER XXIII. 

ATTENTION TO CHILD. 

1. Nursing. If the child is able to obtain any milk, 
when it is first placed to the breast, and the supply is contin- 
uous, no other food should be given it. Newly -born chil- 
dren are generally hungry, and ready to take nourishment, 
almost immediately. Usually they require to be fed, par- 
tially or entirely by the nurse, for three or four days, be- 
fore the supply of mother's milk is sufficient. A child 
should be placed to the breast frequently, to accustom it to 
the nipple. Do this just before other food is given. Chil- 
dren kept from the breast, and fed otherwise for several days, 
will sometimes obstinately refuse to nurse when the milk 
does come. They should be placed first to one breast, and 
next time to the other, changing each time. The mother 
should use both breasts alike, or otherwise the milk will 
be principally secreted in one, and be deficient in the 
other; or else the unused breast will be liable to "cake," 
and an abscess to form. 

2. Position during nursing. A child that has 
nursed from one breast only, for a few days, may obsti- 
nately refuse to nurse from the other ; and unless a child is 
nursed from both breasts alike, it is very likely to become 
" one-sided" as it grows older. The mother's symmetry 
of form will also be liable to injury, one shoulder becom- 
ing higher than the other. If the mother is so unfortu- 



164 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CllAP. 23. 

nate as to have a supply of milk in only one breast, she 
should be very watchful for the shape of the child's head. 
"We know a family of nine children whose heads are each 
very much fuller on one side than the other, caused by the 
continuous resting on one side while nursing. The lia- 
bility to this deformity may be obviated by carrying the 
child on the arm opposite to the nursing side, and by its 
position during sleeping. 

3. Frequency of nursing. About three hours 
should elapse between each nursing, during the day-time, 
if the mother has an abundance of milk. If milk is 
scanty, it should nurse oftener. It should be allowed all 
it will take at each time, but when it gives signs of being 
satisfied, it should be removed, and not tempted to over- 
feed by being nursed between the specified and regular 
times. At the mother's bed-time the child should be 
nursed, and once about the middle of the night. If this 
is systematically pursued by the mother, the child soon 
falls into the regular habit of night-waking about one 
o'clock, and after nursing, will sleep quietly until day- 
light, when it will need more food. By this course the 
mother will avoid much trouble. 

4. On overfeeding. The custom that some mothers 
have, of giving their infants all they can possibly take, un- 
til the overloaded stomach rejects it by vomiting, and then 
immediately giving it more, is a very bad one for the health 
and habits- of the child. The common saying, "a healthy 
child throws up its milk," should have " when overfed " 
added to it. Its ability to throw up its food, when it has 
been tempted into a surfeit, is what keeps it from being sick. 
A child whose stomach is over-distended with milk, will 
cry from discomfort or pain, and its mother may try to 
still its cries by nursing it ; its instinct of feeding is so 
great that it will hardly refuse, and it stuffs itself, and 



ATTENTION TO CHILD. 165 

perhaps finds relief by vomiting, and its anxious mother 
immediately repeats the process. 

5. Crying. A child may cry for other reasons than 
hunger or pain. It may cry because it wants company or 
amusement; it may cry for exercise, or from mere willful- 
ness, or because its mother has failed to pursue her usual 
routine with it; a pin may stick it, or its clothes be too 
tight, or w r et, or dry and stiff, after being wetted ; it may 
be too cold or too warm, or may be thirsty ; and for these 
and many others, the common panacea is nursing. Chil- 
dren have their wants, as well as their needs. An observ- 
ing mother can generally detect the latter, but the former 
may be as hard to guess as are the wants of older people. 
Children have no way of expressing many of their wants, 
but by crying, and as this is rarely understood, they may 
cry from disappointment, chagrin, or temper, or from the 
mere habit of crying, or from a naturally inharmonious 
disposition. The child who is hired to stop crying, will 
cry again, and insist on being paid for stopping ; a very 
bad habit in the child, and very foolish practice in the 
mother. 

6. Artificial, food. For the first two or three days 
the child generally will need more food than the mother 
can supply. Fresh milk from a new milch cow, a little 
sweetened with white sugar, will answer as a substitute 
for the mother's milk. If the family supply of milk 
comes from the city milk-wagon, cream should be added 
to it. We think it is better to feed the child with as rich 
milk as can be obtained, and give it water to drink be- 
tween its times of feeding, if it wants any, rather than to 
always dilute the milk, as is generally recommended. The 
milk brought to city houses should be boiled immediately 
if the weather is at all warm. 

7. Directions for preparation. If the mother is unable 



166 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 23. 

to furnish milk, and the child requires to be entirely fed 
by the nurse, we direct this method : Procure the best milk 
possible, and have it fresh, morning and evening.* Get 
some pearl-barley and boil it until it is completely fine, and 
strain it; set aside a portion of the morning's milk to rise 
cream, and skim it before the milk sours. Mix this cream 
with a portion of the evening's milk, some of the barley- 
water, and a little white sugar. This should be the child's 
food for the night. Set aside the balance of the evening's 
milk to rise cream for the next day's feeding. Skim the 
cream in the morning and add it to some of the fresh 
milk, with barley-water and sugar. Never feed the child 
with milk that has stood more than half a day. Some 
children are unable to digest farinaceous food. If what 
we have recommended should sour on the stomach, omit 
the barley-water, or use a little rennet wine (see formula). 
Never give a child sour milk. 

A careful observation of this mode of feeding, convinces 
us that it is superior to any other we have ever seen sug- 
gested or used, and we would prefer it to employing a 
wet-nurse. It should be fed from a nursing-bottle, which 
should be always kept sweet and clean. 

In some cases it may be better to use corn-starch, re- 
fined for table use, in place of the barley. Boil it, add 
the milk and cream, or cream only, and feed from the 
bottle. 



* The quality of the milk depends upon the health of the cow, and 
upon her food. If her food is largely fluid, her milk will be abund- 
ant in whey and deficient in cream and curd. When grazing is 
scarce in summer, cows will eat coarse, rank grass and bitter herbs, 
and their milk will partake of the qualities of such food, and be unfit 
for the infant. Cows confined in stables, deprived of exercise and 
fed on still-slop and kitchen refuse, are never healthy, and their 
milk is absolutely injurious to an infant. 



ATTENTION TO CHILD. 167 

8. Sleeping. A child should not, as a rule, sleep in 
the same bed with its mother. It should have its own cot 
or crib, without rockers. A cradle is a superfluity, if not 
an actual injury. For the first three months of an infant's 
life, it will naturally sleep two out of every three hours. 
It should be regularly fed, exercised, and put to sleep from 
the day of its birth, and it will very soon desire all these 
at its regular hours. Its night-clothes should be put on 
about sundown, and, after nursing, it will sleep until the 
mother's bed-time, when it should again be fed. It will 
then require but one nursing during the night. A child 
has no natural fear of darkness, and never will have, un- 
less scared into it by ghost stories. When the child is 
sleepy, immediately place it in its cot, that it may not ac- 
quire the habit of going to sleep in the arms. Never rock 
it to sleep, nor rock it during sleep. Turn the child from 
one side to the other occasionally while it is asleep. It 
will rest much better for it, and it will prevent one-sided- 
ness. 

9. Habits. Never let your child form habits of which 
you may need afterward to break it. Strive from the day 
of its birth, to form such habits as w r ill benefit the child, 
and save useless labor to yourself. A child w T ill expect 
the second day just w T hat it can remember of its first day's 
treatment. Begin the first day just as you intend to con- 
tinue. Be regular with its hours of feeding, dressing and 
undressing, sleeping and bathing, and it will soon come to 
desire these at the regular hours. 

10. Exercise. Young children desire and require ex- 
ercise. When very young, they may be carried around 
the room, but should never be jumped and bumped up 
and down. They should be frequently turned from one side 
to the other. while awake, as well as when asleep. Chil- 
dren, like grown people, dislike monotony, but take kindly 



168 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 23. 

to systematic treatment. They kick and toss arms, and 
jump their bodies, and cry, just because they can do all 
these things, and must do something for employment. 
These are their ways of exercising, and they are of real 
necessity in developing muscle and lung power. 

11. Clothing. The clothing should be always suffi- 
cient for warmth, and should cover the arms, neck, and 
shoulders, whatever may be the fashion. Nothing should 
be tight enough to impede perfect freedom of motion. 
Buttons, loops, and tapes should be used in place of pins. 
The warmth of the body and limbs should be continually 
kept up. A room abundantly warm for an adult, may be 
too cold for an infant. 

12. Evacuations. A child in health can be easily 
taught and induced to regularity in its evacuations. A 
wet diaper is a great annoyance to it, and if, at regular 
intervals, and always on waking and going to bed, its 
diaper be removed, and the child be held out toward the 
fire, it will usually pass water. In the commencement of 
this teaching, have some one pour water slowly from a 
pitcher into a basin, in the child's hearing. Its effect will 
soon be noticed upon the child by the flow of urine. Dia- 
pers that have been wetted by the child, should not be 
dried and used again. When dry they are stiff, irritating, 
and full of the elements of urine, simply deprived of water, 
and when wetted a second time by the child, they are 
doubly loaded with impurities, which may be absorbed by 
the child's skin. Nature has cast it out once; do not try 
and introduce it again into the system. 

13. Its napkins, when soiled by bowel evacuations, 
should be immediately removed. It soon learns the dif- 
ference between dry, clean napkins, and soiled, wet ones. 
This is of great importance in the formation of habits of 
cleanliness, so useful in after life, and the mother will re- 



ATTENTION TO CHILD. 169 

ceive the benefit, when the child gets older, in its observ- 
ance of the rules of personal decency. Children who are 
neglected, in this respect, have no shame for wetting or 
soiling the bed, or their own clothes, when they grow 
older. Most old ladies in the country, have some way of 
inducing evacuations, at regular times, and simple as they 
may appear, they prove effectual and of great use. Some 
hold the child out in the arms, making appropriate noises 
and motions. A few trials will serve the purpose with 
most children, and when thus held out, they will relieve 
themselves by bowels and bladder ; they will also make the 
accustomed noises to attract attention when they have de- 
sire for evacuations. 

14. Bathing and washing. An infant should have a 
complete washing once a day. This is best done in the 
morning, at the time it is dressed for the day. In warm 
weather, it should also be again washed at the time its 
clothing for the night is put on. It will sleep much bet- 
ter for it. Whenever a soiled or wet napkin is removed, 
the parts covered by it should be cleansed with tepid 
water, and dried before the clean napkin is put on. The 
washing should never be done in a draft. AYhen a 
child is old enough to sit up, it may be washed in a tub, 
but it should not be allowed to remain there any longer 
than is necessary for the washing process. AVet the top 
of its head with cool water when the bathing begins. 
Never wash or bathe a child immediately after nursing or 
eating. Xever put a child to bed with a dirty skin. Ac- 
cumulated perspiration is worse than visible dirt. If the 
child is delicate, and takes cold easily, rub the whole body, 
after washing, with a little pure sweet-oil. Use fine soap, 
and water that feels barely warm to your bared elbow, for 
summer, and a little warmer than this for winter. Give 
the child's body and limbs plenty of friction with your 



170 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 23. 

hand. Always manage the washing so as not to chill the 
child. 

15. Air, light, and breathing, etc. An infant 
should not be confined to a room in which the sun does 
not shine at some time of the day. It should have plenty 
of pure air to breathe. Its crib should be as high as its 
mother's bed. Trundle-beds are bad, because they place 
the child too near the floor. If there is a direct current 
of cold air into the room, the coldest portion is always at 
the bottom, and if the room is a close, tight one, the im- 
pure carbonic acid, being heavier, falls to the floor. Cur- 
tains around a bed or crib are positive injuries. Nets to 
keep off mosquitoes and flies should be arranged so as to 
hang as far as possible from the face. A veil is too close, 
and too small a covering for a child's face when sleeping. 
A bed should never be placed between two openings in a 
room, so that a direct current of air can blow over it. A 
child should never be taken from its warm bed and carried 
to an open window or door. Young children should not 
be allowed to sit upon the floor in the winter, because it 
is very likely to give them cold; they should be placed on 
a bed, crib, or chair. After six to eight months old, a baby- 
jumper is of great use to amuse and exercise a child. 
When it is old enough to stand, provide a walking chair 
for it. It will soon learn to walk, and be saved many a 
fall, by its use. 

16. Weaning. Unless there are reasons to the con- 
trary, a child should be nursed for twelve to eighteen 
months. Prom the eighth to twelfth month, artificial feed- 
ing may be commenced, such as milk thickened with 
wheat or rice flour, crackers, good bread, mutton, chicken, 
or beef broth. Whatever is given should be of the best 
quality. If meat is boiled until it leaves the bones, the 
nutritious juices will mostly be in the water, and the 



ATTENTION TO CHILD. 171 

fibrous portions will be unfit for an infant's food. A child 
that is gradually accustomed to other food will wean more 
easily than one who is entirely fed from the breast. 

Practical country mothers observe the signs of the zodiac, 
and never commence weaning a child until the sign is be- 
tween the hips and the knees. We have observed many 
strange coincidences in this relation. Every almanac for 
common use has the necessary diagram. 

17. Tongue-tie. The infant's tongue is sometimes con- 
fined by a thin membrane, on its under side, so that it 
can not be pushed forward beyond the tip of the lower 
teeth. If it interferes with nursing, clip it with a pair of 
blunt-pointed scissors, while the child is asleep, being 
careful not to cut beyond its thin part, as beyond this are 
important muscles and blood-vessels. 



172 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 24. 



CHAPTER XXIV. 

INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 

1. Aphthje, thrush, sore mouth. This is a comm 
and annoying complaint of infants, and sometimes of the 
mother. It commences with slight inflammation, followed 
in two or three days by minute white spots on the tongue 
and inside of the mouth. It is rarely suspected before 
these spots appear. They may increase in size and number, 
often running together, scaling off and leaving red in- 
flamed spots, upon which the same processes may again and 
again be repeated. The difficulty may involve the whole 
mouth, throat, stomach, and bowels. In bad cases, the 
patches on the tongue and mouth become brown, and, at 
times, dry, hard, and black, with fissures and serious ulcers. 

Prevention is easy, and preferable to cure. The mother 
should keep her own system in health, and use proper 
food, so that she can furnish her child with healthy milk. 
She should wash its mouth every time it leaves the breast, 
with water six parts, molasses one part. She should wash 
the nipples immediately after every nursing. If she will 
do these faithfully, the child will rarely have sore mouth. 

Treatment. If there are signs of soreness, rub the 
mouth with hen-oil, goose-oil, or glycerine, and give the 
child a little of the oil to swallow. If the mouth has be- 
come sore from neglect, apply the oil frequently, and give 
one-third to one-half tea-spoonful three or four times a 



INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 173 

day. We have seen cases, considered hopeless, cured by 
this means. Other remedies of value are borax, honey 
and water, alum-water, blackberry or dewberry roots, gol- 
den-seal, or marsh rosemary, each in decoction for washes. 
General attention to the child's health is required in this 
as in most other local affections. 

2. Colic. Few children escape colic entirely; with 
many it is of daily occurrence. Its principal causes are 
improper feeding, cold, and constipation. The latter is 
usually found in that kind commonly called " three-months' 
colic." This variety usually comes on at a particular hour 
of the day, and the child is said to "outgrow" it in three 
or four months. The pain is confined to the larger intes- 
tines, and appears to be consequent upon constipation, 
caused by deficient biliary secretion, either of mother or 
child. Rhubarb syrup, with leptandra (see formula), will 
usually relieve the child, or the mother may take the 
same, and it will reach the child through her milk. If 
the pain is very severe, enemas of asarum are very serv- 
iceable, as they immediately influence the region of the 
difficulty. 

3. The more common form is known as "wind colic" 
Cold and improper feeding are the principal causes. 
With this the child will often have diarrhea, with green- 
ish acid discharges, or of undigested food. Carminatives 
are useful to cause expulsion of the confined flatus, but 
they have little effect upon the main causes. The mother 
should be very careful of her own food, and be careful, 
also, not to overfeed the child, and always to keep its 
extremities and surface warm. Common and useful rem- 
edies are catnip and ginger tea, anise-seed tea, spearmint 
or peppermint, wood-soot tea, rubbing the abdomen with 
the hot hand, or hot flannels. Relief will come w T ith ex- 
pulsion of flatus, 



174 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 24. 

4. Constipation. If the child is dosed with paregoric 
or " soothing syrups/' constipation may be expected, as 
they usually contain opium in some form. Some articles 
of food have a tendency to constipate the bowels of some 
children, as boiled milk and rice. Cheese will often have 
a similar effect on the mother, and, through her, upon the 
child. A child may, when old enough, obviate constipa- 
tion by the use of fruits. The cure of constipation is not 
to be expected from cathartics. Much may be done by a 
proper selection of food. Enemas and suppositories are 
useful, because they directly excite the rectum, which is 
the usual seat of constipation, without unduly exciting 
ther other portions of the intestinal canal. Inactivity of 
the liver of the mother or child is usually found with 
costiveness. The mother may relieve herself and her 
nursing child by the use of a moderate sized pill of dan- 
delion, boneset, or butternut bark extract every night, 
and wild cherry bark infusion, freely, as a drink. Lep- 
tandra and rhubarb syrup may be given to a constipated 
child with benefit. The most obstinate case of constipa- 
tion in an infant, that ever came under our treatment, we 
treated with Formula No. 9, followed, after the bowels 
were moved, with rhubarb and leptandra. 

5. DlARRHEA, SUMMER-COMPLAINT, CHOLERA IN- 
FANTUM, dysentery. These forms of disease are, per- 
haps, the most serious of all against which children have 
to contend. They have their common causes; mostly in 
improper feeding, improper clothing and exposure, and 
hence are largely under the mother's control. It is esti- 
mated that nine-tenths of the deaths among children occur 
between June and October, and it is during this period 
that bowel complaints claim so many victims. A mild 
diarrhea may be the precursor of either of the others, 
and should be relieved before it becomes severe. Most 



INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 175 

cases may be cured in a day or two, by an emetic, fol- 
lowed by bayberry infusion, if the discharges are yellow, 
or by leptandra and rhubarb, if light colored, with the 
addition of magnesia or soda, if acid and greenish. If 
undigested food is passing the bowels, the diarrhea will 
not cease until it has all passed. A tea-spoonful of bay- 
berry infusion, every hour, is often all that is required in 
such a case. An ounce of crane's-bill (geranium maculatum) 
and w r ild cherry bark, ground, covered with a half pint 
of boiling water, as much milk added, and made to boil, 
settled, and sweetened with loaf-sugar, and given a tea- 
spoonful every hour to a young child, or doubled for an 
older one, will be found very efficacious, even in very seri- 
ous cases. Action and warmth of the skin should be pro- 
moted in every case, and great caution observed in diet. 

Dysenteric conditions, with bloody discharges, require 
enemas, to be retained, of witch-hazel, raspberry, black- 
berry, or crane's-bill infusion, in starch or elm-water, and 
mucilaginous drinks, as gum-arabic water, or elm mucil- 
age. Cholera infantum may require very small doses of 
lobelia infusion, camphor or spearmint tea, to allay nausea. 
Half tea-spoonful doses, very weak, will often relieve, when 
more would aggravate. Peach-leaf or bark infusion, strong 
but in small doses, or a drop of creosote to an ounce of 
water, in tea-spoonful doses; or a spiced poultice over the 
stomach are very good for the same purpose. When the 
stomach has remained quiet, lobelia and mint tea should 
be gradually given until the system has been brought 
under their influence ; they may be increased to produce 
, full vomiting, if the stomach is foul and tongue coated. 
What is required is action and warmth to the surface and 
extremities, quieting the irritable stomach, so that it will 
retain the emetic tea; allowing the irritating contents of 
the bowels to first pass off, then to soothe them by enemas 
16 



176 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 24. 

and external applications ; and, finally to bring on action 
of the liver by leptandra and rhubarb. If the stomach 
and bowels are acid, give a little soda, ash-tea, or wood- 
soot tea. The treatment of bowel complaints, on the prin- 
ciples here suggested, will be found abundantly superior to 
any astringent or anodyne (opium) treatment, and while it 
will relieve the difficulty, it will never produce any tend- 
ency to brain disease that so often follows the sudden 
stoppage of the evacuations by powerful astringents and 
opiates. The Rennet Wine will be a valuable adjunct in a 
majority of cases. (See Rennet Wine in Appendix.) 

6. Worms. Many anxious mothers imagine that their 
children have worms, when, perhaps, they have none. A 
remedy that is generally effectual, when worms are pres- 
ent, pleasant to take, and having no injurious effect on 
the child, is found in the bark of the root of the common 
mulberry tree. It may be given freely in decoction, and 
it will meet the requirements of most cases. For pin- 
worms in the rectum, use it by injection. From what we 
have observed of the effect of lard-oil upon insects and 
vermin, we think its use, as an injection, would be very 
serviceable where there are pin- worms. It certainly would 
not be injurious. An injection of aloes, or of very bitter 
herbs, will answer a good purpose in such cases. 

Strong sage-tea with molasses — and browned egg-shells 
pounded fine, given in molasses — are each approved rem- 
edies. Debility and a depraved state of the system, favor 
worms. Green fruits may be the means of introducing 
some kinds of worms into the system. Generally, when 
a healthy state of the body is brought about, all worm 
symptoms disappear. 

7. Hernia — rupture. The most common form of 
rupture in children is that of the umbilicus, or navel. It 
may be present at birth, or may occur at any time after- 



INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 177 

ward. It is caused by imperfect closing of the umbilicus. 
Its treatment is simple. Place the child on its back, and 
you can easily return the rupture ; then place over it a pad 
just large enough to cover it; confine this to its place by 
a bandage ; wet the pad every day with a strong decoction 
of oak bark. The proper adjustment of the child's band- 
age, at birth, will prevent any liability to rupture. If a 
rupture becomes strangulated, use no force, but apply a 
lobelia poultice and give an enema of lobelia and asarum 
to thoroughly relax the stricture, when it may be carefully 
returned, then apply compress or truss. Treat any other 
rupture on the same plan. 

8. Urinary difficulties. When the infant does not 
pass urine, within a short time after birth, it may take a 
few spoonfuls of parsley, pumpkin seed, or water-melon 
seed tea. Hemp-seed, cleavers (galium), elder flowers, or 
asparagus tea are also very good. If the bladder receives 
and retains the urine, as may be ascertained by its full- 
ness, give an enema of lobelia and asarum, and poultice 
of same over the lower part of the abdomen. It may be 
necessary to use a catheter. Treat an older child in the 
same way. 

Wetting the bed. Children who are allowed to remain 
long with wet diapers, may finally become indifferent to 
it, and will pass urine at any time or place. This has 
much to do with the habit of wetting the bed. When 
young, they should be taught, and when older required, 
to relieve the bladder just before going to bed. They 
should not be allowed to drink much after supper, and 
should be taught to sleep on their sides. If wetting the 
bed is a habit, these means may soon prevent it. If it 
is involuntary, the remedy is in another direction. An 
inactive skin may be the cause. Burdock seeds and white- 
root (asclepias tuberosa), equal parts; or burdock seeds, 



178 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 24. 

three parts, and prickly-ash, one part ; either of these com- 
pounds, in strong decoction, a table-spoonful several times 
a day, are our general remedies. The seeds must be 
pounded before steeping. 

9. Teething. There is no fixed period for the appear- 
ance of the teeth. Some children have them at birth; 
with others, they are very much delayed. The deciduous, 
or first teeth, are twenty in number, ten in each jaw. They 
appear at different periods. The following table gives the 
names, order, and usual time of appearance. The figures 
represent their order in either jaw. 

5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. 

1 and 1, central incisors, appear from 6th to 8th month. 

2 and 2, lateral incisors, " " 7th to 10th 

3 and 3, canine or eye-teeth, " " 14th to 20th 

4 and 4, first molars or grinders, " 12th to 16th 

5 and 5, second molars, " " 20th to 30th 

The lower teeth appear generally a little in advance of 
the upper. 

These finally fall out and are replaced by the permanent 
set of thirty-two teeth, sixteen in each jaw. The follow- 
ing is their order of arrangement and development : 

8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. 

2, 1, 1, 2, incisors, appear between 7th and 8th year. 

3, 3, cuspids or canines, " 10th and 12th " 

5, 4, 4, 5, bi-cuspids, " 9 th and 10th " 

6, 6, first molars, " 6th and 7th " 

7, 7, second molars, from the 12th to 15th " 

8, 8, wisdom teeth, " " 18th to 25th " 

1 and 1, central incisors, appear a little in advance of 



INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 179 

2 and 2, the lateral incisors; and 4 and 4, the first bi- 
cuspids, appear in advance of 5 and 5, the second bi-cus- 
pids, and the lower teeth generally a little sooner than 
the upper ones. 

10. Cutting teeth with children is, at times, a painful 
operation. Domestic animals frequently suffer much, and 
are even thrown into spasms by it. Diarrhea, and the 
more serious bowel affections, spasms, and brain disease, 
may result, in consequence of the irritation produced upon 
the nervous system. 

When a tooth is about to appear, the gum widens, flat- 
tens, swells at the top, and reddens; the child becomes 
restless and fretful ; saliva flows freely ; there may be fever, 
a hot head, general irritation, or even spasms. The child 
has a desire to bite any thing it can get in its mouth. 
Nothing gives such complete and instant relief as cutting 
the gums. Use a sharp, but thick-bladed penknife. Cut 
down on the top of the gum, until the blade reaches the 
tooth. We have had our little patients open their mouths 
to us, for the relief they remembered to have been pro- 
duced by former cutting, and not a cry would escape 
though three or four teeth were cut upon. Cut parallel 
with the edge of a front tooth ; for a back tooth make two 
cuts in the form of an X. For the irritation of the gums, 
or general system, before a tooth is ready for this opera- 
tion, give nervines. 

11. Ophthalmia — soke eyes. This is a rather com- 
mon difficulty among children who are neglected in the 
w r ay of cleanliness. In mild cases, hardly more is required 
than bathing the eyes with cold tea, witch-hazel infusion, 
or any other very mild astringent. If the case is more 
severe, use milk and water as a wash, and a poultice of 
elm and lobelia over the eyes when asleep. Tea leaves, 
or witch-hazel leaves, may be applied in the same way. 



180 



THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 24. 



Emetics for constitutional effect are required in bad cases 
We have found the above every way sufficient. 

12. Fever. We hold fever to be essentially an in- 
creased action of the vital force to remove obstruction 
The obstruction is the provoking cause of the exalted ac- 
tion of the system. Fever is known by inordinate heat, 
quick pulse, irritability, usually thirst, and frequently 
pain. The cure consists in removing the obstruction 
We have no other remedy so universally applicable for 
this purpose as lobelia. Where the fever results from 
"cold," that is, an obstructed skin, with the consequent 
retention of perspirable matter, a good emetic, followed by 
a bath, will usually open the surface, cause the casting out 
of the retained impurities, and the fever will subside with 
the establishment of perspiration. If the fever appea] 
merely in one portion — as the head — the surface of the 
body and the extremities should be warmed and relaxed, 
so that the blood can pass into and through them freely, 
and the head should be kept cool. The blood will be thus 
equalized in its circulation, and the fever will subside. 
The whole treatment of fever is contained in these few 
words : equalize circulation and nervous action, and remove 
obstructions. 

Many forms of disease in children — as measles, chicken- 
pox, small-pox — are accompanied with fever in their com- 
mencement; with quite young children, and often with 
older ones, it is impossible to tell what may be coming. 
Fortunately it makes no difference in our mode of treat- 
ment. The same principles apply where fever is provoked 
by any cause. Equalize the action of the system, promote 
the action of the excretory and secretory organs, and the 
system will soon rid itself of the obstructions. In the 
eruptive forms of disease just mentioned, the natural out- 
let of the obstructing material is the surface. Almost 



INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 181 

every mother or nurse knows the danger when the 
" measles strike in" and the necessity of bringing the 
eruption again to the surface. 

13. Measles, chickex-pox, small-pox, varioloid. 
These forms of disease are caused by some specific virus, 
which must be cast out by the surface. With the treat- 
ment indicated in the last paragraph, no healthy child 
should be considered in danger when attacked by either 
of these. An emetic, if the stomach is foul, tongue coated, 
and skin dry, repeated until the tongue clears, followed by 
a bath ; mildly-stimulating diaphoretic drinks, as ginger 
and mint, catnip, pennyroyal, or balm tea, in quantities 
sufficient to keep a soft and moist surface, with a mild 
aperient, if bowels are costive, with moderate and simple 
diet, will bring out successfully nearly every case. By 
attention to their own systems, mothers may save the ne- 
cessity of giving medicine to their nursing children. The 
irritation of the surface may be relieved by a little soda 
in the bathing water. Excessive perspiration is not bene- 
ficial, only just that active condition of the skin which 
favors the natural progress of the eruptions. The irrita- 
tion of small-pox eruption can be relieved by moistening 
the surface with an infusion of golden-seal (hydrastis), and 
then applying sweet-oil and prepared chalk (creta prepa- 
rata), mixed to the consistency of cream, with a soft brush, 
and allowing it to remain. It subdues itching, protects the 
surface from the air, and prevents pitting. Apply twice 
a day. Sponge off daily, removing the old accumulation, 
then apply again. Keep the room moderately cool, with 
abundance of fresh air, but no direct draught. 

14. ScAPvLET fever. This is to be treated upon the 
general principles as given in paragraph 13, but it is of a 
more dangerous character, even w T hen it attacks a healthy 
child. It is one of nature's severest tests of power, and 



182 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 24. 

the child who can pass through it safely may he considered 
to have a good constitution, for the time being. The 
weakly are obliged to yield to this and other forms of dis- 
ease common to children. In this view of the matter, we 
must consider them as conservators, instead of destroyers, 
of the race. They seem to be appointed by nature for the 
purpose of testing her work, and such as can not survive 
the ordeal, must suffer and be destroyed, that only the 
better and stronger may remain for parentage. These 
forms of disease cut off the feeble in infancy before they 
can perpetuate their weaknesses through progeny. How- 
ever hard it may be for a parent to lose a child, individual 
love and affection must be tortured for the benefit of the 
race. Nature never looks to individuals, except as parts 
of the whole, and in order that the whole may be as per- 
fect as possible, she destroys the imperfect individuals. 
The offspring of incompatible parents, though often ap- 
parently vigorous and healthy, are not possessed of tenacity 
of constitution sufficient to withstand this form of disease ; 
and organically feeble children of parents who, though 
compatible, were in poor health or temporarily enfeebled 
at the procreative moment, are particularly liable to be its 
victims. 

Treatment of scarlet fever. We consider frequent emet- 
ics as absolutely essential, from first to last. They should 
be mildly administered, but should be thorough, and not 
hurried. Between the emetics, enemas of asarum and lo- 
belia are required, to maintain their constitutional effect. 
Diaphoretic teas, to keep the surface soft and perspirable ; 
poultices of elm and lobelia, sprinkled with ginger or 
capsicum, to the neck and throat; gargles of bayberry or 
capsicum infusion, with vinegar and salt (see formulas), or 
bloodroot (sanguinaria), vinegar and sugar to be allowed 
to pass slowly down the throat, and gentle aperients to the 



INFANTILE FOKMS OF DISEASE. 183 

bowels ; sponging daily with soda and water, if the surface 
is bright red, or with vinegar and water if dark colored 
or purple ; a vapor-bath or a wet-sheet pack, if skin is hot 
and dry, may all be required. For young children who 
can not gargle, or raise phlegm, use the sanguinaria prep- 
aration. Their mouth and fauces should be frequently 
swabbed with the gargle mixture. Lemon juice and sugar 
may be freely used at every age. 

This is an outline of the treatment we adopt, and with 
it we have been uniformly successful. Much depends 
upon the care and nursing the child may receive. The 
influence of this affection remains a long time, and a relapse 
should be carefully guarded against. Even under favor- 
able conditions, it leaves the system enfeebled. Dropsy, 
various affections of the head, neck, throat, bowels, and 
skin are very apt to follow an apparent recovery, and 
great care and caution should be observed for many 
months. 

15. Hooping-cough. This form of disease is almost 
peculiar to children, and among young infants, is third in 
order of fatality ; yet most grandmothers and mothers 
profess to understand it, and to be able to treat it suc- 
cessfully. 

The first stage of hooping-cough manifests the usual 
\ symptoms of catarrh, or cold in the head and throat, and 
continues about two weeks, more or less. In the second, 
or spasmodic stage, the prolonged inspiration of air pro- 
duces the " hooping," which is followed by a succession of 
short, spasmodic coughs, until the lungs are completely ex- 
hausted of air. During a paroxysm, which may last from 
a half minute to a quarter of an hour, the face becomes 
| flushed, then purple or nearly black, the veins of the head 
\ and neck become distended, and the eyes project and fill 

with tears. The child, if able, throws its hands upward and 
17 



184 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 24. 

forward to support the body. The third stage commences 
with the mitigation of the paroxysms, gradually assumes 
the catarrhal character of the first stage, and finally ceases. 
It is rare, if ever, that a child is attacked a second time, 
and but few children escape a first attack. 

Hooping-cough is considered self-limited. Though its 
usual duration of from five to eight weeks is incapable of 
being much shortened, neglect or unfavorable circumstances 
may cause it to continue for months, or a year or more. 
Much may be done to diminish its severity. General at- 
tention to the whole system, with correct diet, warm cloth- 
ing, particularly to arms, legs, and feet, avoiding exposure 
to cold and damp, and to sudden changes, keeping the 
surface active by bathing and friction, an occasional emetic 
to cleanse the mucous membrane of the stomach, throat, 
and bronchial tubes, and mildly stimulating diaphoretic 
drinks should form the general care and treatment. 
The compound syrup of lobelia (see formula) should 
be given in small and frequent doses (every half hour 
to an hour) through the whole course of the complaint. 
With young infants it may constitute the only medi- 
cine, and, at the time of severest paroxysms, it should 
be given in quantities sufficient to nauseate and produce 
vomiting. 

As a single form of disease, we do not consider it neces- 
sarily dangerous. It is often so when complicated, as it 
frequently is, with teething, croup, convulsions, and brain, 
lung, or bowel affections. These will, when present, re- 
quire their appropriate treatment. 

The addition of a tea-spoonful of powdered alum to 
three ounces of lobelia syrup will be serviceable if there is 
thick, tenacious mucus in the throat and air passages; or 
add one-fourth part of tincture of sanguinaria to the lo- 
belia syrup. If the paroxysms are so severe as to cause 



INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 185 

entire suspension of breath for a few seconds, apply a 
stimulating liniment to the throat and chest. 

16. Croup. It is common to divide this form of disease 
into two varieties, viz., mild or catarrhal croup, and mem- 
braneous croup. With the vexed question of the patholog- 
ical distinctions between the two, we do not deem it proper 
to meddle, inasmuch as the treatment of either variety is 
the same. The mild form is not attended with formation 
of those pseudo-membranes which accompany the other 
variety. The ordinary colds and catarrhs of children are 
not accompanied with hoarseness; hence, whenever a child 
is noticed to have symptoms of cold or catarrh for a few 
hours or days, with hoarseness, an attack of croup may 
be apprehended, and prompt means should be used to re- 
pel it before it becomes established. The symptoms just 
mentioned may be suddenly (generally in the night-time, 
and during sleep) aggravated into those of impending 
suffocation. The face of the child becomes swollen, dark 
red, or violet colored, the eyes fill with moisture and pro- 
ject, breathing is hissing and extremely difficult, the voice 
is hoarse and low, not whispering, pulse rapid, skin hot, 
and at intervals there is a hoarse cough. The symptoms 
are those of strangulation. Such a paroxysm may pass 
off, followed by sleep, or, if not relieved, may increase in 
severity and end in death. It is not often that more than 
one paroxysm occurs the same night, but the next night 
may witness a repetition. In a favorable progress, the 
paroxysms are less and less severe, the breathing is freer, 
the cough looser and less hoarse, and the patient entirely 
recovers in from three to ten days. Every grade of vio- 
lence in the attacks is noticed, from a mild hoarseness to 
one that may pass only with the death of the child before 
the dawn of day. 

17. In membraneous croup, the early symptoms are the 



186 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 24. 

same as in the other variety. As it progresses the cough 
becomes husky ; the voice sinks to a whisper, above which 
it can not possibly be raised ; the inspirations, after cough- 
ing, are short and whistling. Soon the effort to speak 
produces low and smothered spasmodic cough, with pain in 
the throat and upper portion of the chest; the features are 
swollen and darkened; the breath is drawn with the ut- 
most labor; the extremities are cold, and the face has the 
anxious expression of impending suffocation. Sooner or 
later the spasm relaxes, and the exhausted patient sleeps, 
to be roused by a return of the symptoms, perhaps in a 
more aggravated form, with respiration three or four times 
the normal rapidity. 

A favorable progress is indicated by less violence of the 
symptoms, a freer and slower breathing, looser cough, 
in which tough mucus, or shreds, patches, or even tubes 
of the membraneous exudations are cast off and thrown 
up. If the progress is unfavorable, the difficulty of 
breathing increases, and its efforts are accompanied by 
wheezing that can be heard at considerable distance, and 
every effort that the system can possibly make is demanded 
to continue the breathing, and death ensues by direct suf- 
focation, or, more gradually, with stupor and coma, or 
convulsions. 

Febrile symptoms accompany this variety, and they are 
usually high in proportion to the violence of the other 
symptoms. A high fever is sometimes an attendant from 
the commencement. 

18. The treatment should consist of an emetic of positive 
and thorough effect, to be promptly repeated whenever 
the peculiar croupy breathing is heard. The emetic ma- 
terial should be used between times to keep up expecto- 
ration, or nausea; and diaphoretics, the vapor-bath, hot 
pack, or other means to loosen the surface and warm the 



INFANTILE FOKMS OF DISEASE. 187 

extremities; also hot, wet cloths, or capsicum and vinegar 
to the throat and neck. Where the ethereal oil of lobelia 
can be obtained, one to three drops may be placed on the 
tongue, repeated every ten to fifteen minutes, until the 
spasm is relieved. The value and efficacy of lobelia will 
be fully manifested when used in croup, and it may be 
given in any and every way, until the desired relaxation is 
produced. AVhen this is accomplished, the patient may be 
considered as beyond immediate danger, but the apparently 
improved and quiet condition of the patient during the 
following day should not be taken as positive improve- 
ment, for, if neglected, a worse return may take place in 
the ensuing night. In the first or catarrhal variety, anti- 
spasmodics, as asarum, mint, catnip, or balm should be 
used freely during the day, with more or less stimulus, 
as ginger, or even capsicum, if indicated by feebleness. 
In the membraneous variety, astringents and stimulants, 
for gargles to older children, or for swabbing for younger 
ones. The bowels will need no special attention, beyond 
the prevention of irritating accumulations. The use of 
strong bayberry and ginger infusion, with cream and 
sugar, should be continuous during the day, in small and 
frequent doses. This will aid much in removing the 
membraneous deposit upon the mucous lining of the fauces 
and bronchial tubes. It should be allowed to pass slowly 
down the throat. 

A drop of the oil of stillingia, placed upon the tongue, 
is highly recommended by competent authority, during the 
paroxysms, to be occasionally repeated as symptoms may 
require. A liniment of oil of stillingia, one ounce, oil of 
lobelia one-fourth ounce, alcohol three ounces, may be 
applied to the throat, neck, and upper part of the chest, 
three or four times a day, and covered with poultice of 
elm and lobelia, equal parts, sprinkled with capsicum ; or 



188 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 24. 

a fomentation of two parts hops, one part lobelia, sim- 
mered with vinegar and water, equal parts, enough to 
moisten. 

19. Diphtheria. In diphtheria the symptoms are usu- 
ally typhoid from the beginning, evidencing general ob- 
struction and vital depression. The throat becomes sore, 
with difficulty of swallowing and breathing. The mucous 
membrane of the tonsils, fauces, and pharynx, becomes of 
a bright red, or dark, livid color, or may sometimes be 
whiter than natural. Exudations of an ashy, gray color 
soon appear, spreading over the entire visible portions, and 
upward into the nares, and downward upon the pharynx. 
After about four days, the patches slough off, leaving the 
surfaces ulcerated, swollen, and secreting freely. Swal- 
lowing is sometimes impossible, and where the difficulty 
extends to the larynx, the exudations form false mem- 
branes similar to that of pseudo-membraneous croup, with 
all the symptoms and danger of the latter-named form of 
disease. 

The treatment must be thorough and prompt. Emetics 
to relieve mucous accumulations of stomach, throat, and 
lungs, and to equalize the action of the system. The va- 
por-bath, hot wet-sheet pack, or warmth and moisture in 
other ways to the surface, until the skin becomes soft and 
moist. Stimulating, astringent, and antiseptic gargles and 
washes for the throat, diaphoretic teas to promote perspi- 
ration; external stimulation to the neck, throat, and upper 
part of the chest. Establish secretion and excretion gen- 
erally, and keep up action by stimulants and tonics. The 
particular means are detailed under the directions for 
croup and scarlet fever. Diphtheria has strong analogies, 
in several respects, to these two forms of disease, and the 
treatment and remedies are of a similar character. The 
inhalation of the vapor of vinegar, with the use of vinegar 



INFANTILE FOEMS OF DISEASE. 189 

to the throat, internally and externally, should not be 
neglected. 

20. Convulsions — fits. The immediate or excitino- 
cause of convulsions is any thing that suddenly and vio- 
lently irritates the nervous system. Fright, blows upon 
the head, irritation of stomach or bowels from undigested 
or improper food, or worms, teething, recession of erup- 
tions, inflammation or congestion of the brain. Passion, 
anger, or violent emotion of the nursing mother may so 
affect her milk as to cause convulsions in the child. 

Children whose heads are largely developed in the 
upper, front, and side portions, and feebly developed in 
basilar region — that is, those with a full cerebrum and a 
feeble cerebellum — are most liable to convulsions. More 
danger is to be feared from such organizations than from 
convulsions, for though the latter may at times prove im- 
mediately fatal, they are but one of many dangers. Cere- 
bral and pulmonary congestions, in early childhood, or 
phthisis pulmonalis, on the approach of puberty, will re- 
move many who have escaped convulsions. 

A convulsive seizure may occur with no previous warn- 
ing symptom. Such are to be regarded as more dangerous 
than those whose advent is forewarned by slight muscular 
twitchings, wakefulness at night or disturbed sleep, rest- 
lessness, sudden expansion and contraction of the iris on 
the approach of a light, sudden and frequent motions of 
the fingers, limbs rigidly extended during sleep, face rap- 
idly varying in color and expression when awake, respi- 
ration alternating from full and slow to rapid, short, and 
interrupted. These symptoms, which are considered as 
indicative of approaching convulsions, are not liable to 
occur together in any one case. In sleep, the eyelids are 
sometimes partially open, and the eyeball turned upward 
and rolled about. These motions may occur involunta- 



190 THALEI A— WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 24. 

rily when the child is awake. The whole symptoms pre- 
vious to and during convulsions are of irritation and 
involuntary motion, or involuntary muscular contraction. 

Whether preceded or not by these or similar symp- 
toms, ihe convulsive seizure is very sudden. At times it 
may consist of a complete rigidity of the entire muscular 
system, or tetanus, but more generally of continued con- 
vulsive or spasmodic movements of the muscles, with 
mental unconsciousness and insensibility to pain. The 
attacks may last but a moment or two, or may be pro- 
longed a half hour or more. In mild cases, consciousness 
returns with cessation of convulsion ; in severe cases, stupor 
continues for a longer or shorter period. There may be 
but one attack, or many in rapid succession. 

The treatment during the convulsions consists of the free 
use of antispasmodics, as tincture of lobelia and capsicum, 
in doses of five to ten drops every two to five minutes, for 
a young child. It may be generally given by pouring it 
inside the mouth, allowing it to pass down gradually ; or 
it may be given by enema, a half tea-spoonful in a little 
milk or mucilage, or thin starch and water, repeated as 
often as every fifteen minutes, or less, until the spasm 
ceases. After the convulsion ceases, a stimulating emetic 
should be given. Common tincture of gelseminum may 
be given, five to fifteen drops every half hour between the 
paroxysms, and will obviate the necessity of giving lobelia 
to the stomach (see properties of gelseminum). It is now 
the duty of the physician to remove the exciting cause if 
possible. If it were in the stomach, the emetic will have 
already done it. If worms, proper means to expel them 
are required. In short, general treatment, to remove any 
and every cause of irritation or obstruction. 






INFANTILE FOKMS OF DISEASE. 191 



CHAPTER XXV. 

INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE-CoNTlNTJED. 

1. Encephalitis — Inflammation of the brain. Post- 
mortem examinations after encephalitis, generally reveal 
disease of the coverings of the brain, and of its surface, 
though it is probable that the substance of the brain is 
involved. 

The symptoms are strongly marked, at times commencing 
with convulsions; or these may follow after a few hours, 
or a day, of restlessness. In other cases, nausea and vom- 
iting are the first positive symptoms. These may soon 
cease, or continue a day or two, or through the whole at- 
tack. Nothing is retained upon the stomach in such cases. 
Constipation is usually present. Fever is present at the 
outset, or very soon after, and is continuous, until death or 
recovery. 

The indications are, to equalize the circulation by caus- 
ing its determination to every other part of the system ; to 
diminish arterial action by relaxation, and to remove any 
obstruction to secretion and excretion. This form of dis- 
ease is sometimes directly produced by the medical treat- 
ment given for affections of the bowels. The checking of 
abnormal intestinal discharges, as diarrhea, by the use of 
opiates or strong astringents, at the same time leaving the 
surface obstructed, is often followed by determination of 
blood to the head, and produces encephalitis. We have 



192 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 25. 

heard it said of certain patients, " that they had two dis- 
eases, one of the bowels and the other of the brain; that 
the doctor could cure either one of them, but not both, be- 
cause what was good for the disease of the bowels was bad 
for that of the brain." This means simply, that when the 
doctor stopped the bowels, brain-fever followed, and to re- 
lieve the latter he had to resort to cathartics, which re- 
newed the trouble in the bowels. Proper attention to 
opening the obstructed, shin would have relieved both bowels 
and brain. 

Treatment The scalp should be thoroughly cleansed of 
all dirt and dandruff by the use of vinegar and water, and 
be kept continually moist by evaporating lotions of vin- 
egar, water, and spirits of lavender or camphor. Relieve 
constipated bowels by a stimulating enema. Give enemas 
of asarum and lobelia, to be retained, to the extent of 
producing nausea, or even vomiting; a vapor-bath, or 
wet pack, with hot bricks to the feet; mustard draughts, 
or hot foot-baths ; mustard water, or infusion of capsicum 
to the body and extremities; stimulating poultices to the 
abdomen or lower portion of the spine, and a moderately 
active cathartic, if the bowels are not free. The entire 
efforts should be to remove excess of vital action from the 
brain and distribute it to the other parts of the system. 

We are fully convinced that the practice of applying 
ice to the head is more injurious than beneficial, and ob- 
ject to the use of several thicknesses of cloth wet with 
cold water and continuously applied. Evaporation from 
the surface is much better than confined cold. We can not 
call to mind a single case where the patient recovered 
when the scalp was blistered, or where the head was sur- 
rounded with ice. 

2. Scrofulous or tubercular meningitis. Chil- 
dren who have inherited a scrofulous or tuberculous dia- 



i 



INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 193 

thesis may manifest it in various ways, as through the 
general glandular system, in the form of swellings ; or in 
tuberculous depositions upon the mesentery; or in the 
lungs; or upon the meninges or coverings of the brain. 
Of the latter we shall here speak, premising that the tu- 
bercular diathesis, when developed, is almost necessarily 
certain to cause death. 

Symptoms. Tubercular depositions upon the coverings 
of the brain may be going on for some time without any 
external signs. It is only when an inflammatory action 
is set up that the symptoms become marked. These are 
restlessness; pain in the head, evinced by the child car- 
rying its hand to the head with a sharp cry ; unquiet 
sleep, with starting or screaming ; when awake, the child 
dislikes noises and being disturbed. The head is hot, the 
pupils contract, and the lids are closed to shut out the 
light; the tongue is white; breath foul; appetite little or 
none; urine scanty and highly colored; bowels inactive, 
with greenish or dark discharges; pulse quick and wiry; 
a special symptom is " the change of the stomach from a 
tumid and tender condition to one of flatness or apparent 
emptiness," without bowel evacuations. These symptoms 
may be present from a day to about a week, after which 
they become more intense; the child moans or screams, 
and desires to be entirely undisturbed ; is rational in day- 
time, and will answer questions very briefly if old enough. 
The symptoms are usually worse at night, when the child 
is noisy, talkative, and delirious. Vomiting is frequently 
very troublesome. Remissions of these symptoms are 
common, but any hope derived from them is usually fal- 
lacious. As disease progresses, drowsiness, stupor, and 
unconsciousness gradually come on, with convulsions, in- 
voluntary passages of scanty urine, and from the bowels; 
heat and dryness of one part of the body, with cold sweats 



194 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 25. 

of other parts; twitchings of one side and paralysis of the 
other; one cheek flushed and the other pale; sinking pulse, 
ending in death, either quietly or in convulsions. 

No two cases are likely to have the same order of 
symptoms, but the sum of the symptoms of any case leave 
no room for mistake as to the nature of the malady. But 
few if any recover. 

The treatment which is commonly pursued proves of 
little avail. The application of blisters is tormenting, in- 
jurious, and unwarranted. The course suggested for 
simple inflammation of the brain affords, to our mind, the 
benefits of palliation, with more prospect of cure than any 
other. 

3. Acute congestion of brain. Whatever may 
cause any rapid increase of arterial action, under condi- 
tions of obstructions in the general system, may cause such 
a rapid influx of blood upon the brain that the normal 
action of the veins is unequal to its removal, and active 
congestion is the result. This condition differs materially 
from passive congestion, in which there is only a normal 
supply of arterial blood, but owing to collapse or debility 
the veins are, for the time, incapable of its removal. 

Blows or injuries to the head, exposure to the hot sun, 
sudden suppression of excretions, receded eruptions, fright, 
mental excitement, and dental irritation are among the 
causes of active congestion of the brain. Its symptoms are, 
at first, restlessness or fretfulness, pain and heat in the 
head, avoidance of light, quick pulse, irregularly marked 
fever, frequent vomitings, disturbed sleep, twitchings of 
face, sudden starts. If the fontanelle is not closed, full- 
ness and strong pulsations of the brain may be noticed. 
These symptoms are not uncommon during teething, and 
may be relieved by cutting the gums and other appropriate 
treatment (see teething) .• Similar symptoms often accom- 



INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 195 

pany the eruptive forms of disease. Whatever may be 
the cause, the treatment can not be wrong, which is con- 
fined to the means for equalizing the circulation, as de- 
tailed in several previous places. The symptoms described, 
in addition to a full and flushed face, moist eyes, and 
vigorous pulse, clearly distinguish the active form from 
the passive. The second stage is marked by diminution 
of the heat in the head, the face becomes paler, there is a 
tendency to torpor and indifference to every thing, vomit- 
ing is less frequent, constipation still continues, convul- 
sions follow, with deep torpor, coma, and death. 

4. TJie passive form of cerebral congestion is incident to 
children immediately after birth. Many stillborn chil- 
dren show it, in the lividity of the face and swollen 
scalp. If living, there will be the same appearances, 
with very feeble and slow action of the heart, and perhaps 
death, with not a single effort at breathing. The passive 
form is the result of feebleness, while the active form 
arises from vigorous development 

The treatment, which, to be successful, should com- 
mence early, consists in inducing circulation from the 
brain into the other portions of the system, with diffusible 
stimulation, upon general principles, elsewhere indicated. 

5. Inflammation of lungs, bowels, or of any in- 
ternal organ require to be treated upon the general princi- 
ples previously detailed. Divert the excess of action, and 
remove obstructions, promote excretion and secretion, in- 
duce and maintain general equilibrium, and if there is vi- 
tality enough to carry on the operations of the system, the 
patient will recover. Avoid every destructive process, 
such as bleeding, blistering, or the use of narcotics and 
poisons. 

6. Parotitis — mumps. This is a painful swelling 
of the parotid glands, of both glands together, of first 



196 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 25. 

one and then the other, or of each at separate times. 
Generally it is not dangerous, rarely if ever fatal. The 
swelling is sometimes very great, extending from the ear 
to the chin, with severe pain, general irritation, and fever. 
The principal danger from mumps is its occasional change 
of place, from the parotid gland to the testes of the male, 
and the breasts of the female. Cases have occurred of a 
second change from these localities to the brain, proving 
fatal. 

When confined to the parotid glands, the treatment may- 
be an emetic, to relieve general irritation ; or, in its stead, 
enemas, with a poultice of elm and lobelia to the swell- 
ing; or a constant application of sweet-oil and camphor, 
or opodeldoc, with attention to diet; avoidance of cold and 
wet. 

Exposure to cold and wet is the principal cause of its 
change of locality. When it is transferred to the breasts, 
they should be poulticed with elm and lobelia, or covered 
with sweet-oil and camphor under oil silk. Stimulating 
applications should be made to the neck. General treat- 
ment to be same as before indicated. Nursing women 
should not use camphor to the breasts. The tar plaster 
(see formula) may be used in place of poultices or oil and 
camphor. 

With males, translated mumps requires complete rest, a 
horizontal position, poultices, stimulation of the parotid 
glands, and general treatment, with plain diet. 

7. Eruptions of the skin. A large majority of the 
various affections of the skin to which the human body is 
liable, arises from within the body. They result from im- 
purities of the system, which seek an outlet through the 
surface. Their cure is to be sought not in direct local 
treatment alone, but first, in general attention to the ex- 
cretions, secretions, character of food, and habits, so that 



INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 197 

the causes may be removed, or cease to operate from 
within, and with and after this, such local means as may- 
be required. The most of them will cease with the re- 
moval of the internal causes ; but few will yield to exter- 
nal treatment alone. 

The general and special treatment of such forms of dis- 
ease as manifest a direct tendency to the surface, and after 
running an acute and definite course, naturally disappear, 
^as small-pox, varioloid, measles, chicken-pox, have already 
been given. A class of skin affections is characterized 
by superficial inflammatory redness, which disappears on 
pressure by the fingers, covering the whole or only parts 
i of the body, continuous or in patches. Of these — 

8. Roseola, or rose-rash, is most frequently noticed 
among children between the ages of six and twelve months 
and during teething. It is not dangerous, but is very an- 

( noying, from the heat and itching it occasions. Its treat- 
ment may consist of mild diaphoretic teas, as ginger and 
prickly-ash, with spearmint, catnip, or pennyroyal. As it 
is generally associated with indigestion, acidity of stomach, 

i and derangements of bowels, and teething, these demand 
proper attention. 

It is very liable to be mistaken for measles or scarlet 

, fever. The eruption of measles is connected with fever, 

! cough, and redness of the eyes, which are absent with rose- 
ola. The great fever, heat, inflamed fauces, and deeper 
redness of scarlet fever are sufficient to distinguish it from 
this. 

9. Urticaria — Nettle-rash, This is common to chil- 
dren and adults. Like roseola, it is not dangerous, but 
very annoying, and produced by similar causes. It ap- 
pears in eruptions of raised red or white patches, which 
may or may not extend and run together. It may com- 
mence on one limb, and, as it were, travel up one side of 



198 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 25. 

the body and down the other, or may be variously dis- 
tributed. It resembles the marks of the stings of nettles, 
or that left by the blow of a whip, being raised a little 
above the natural surface. It is frequently very persistent 
in continuance. We have seen several cases where this 
rash was thrown to the surface, nearly over the whole 
body, within an hour after eating freely of peaches. 

Treatment Give thorough emetics, tepid bathing, atten- 
tion to bowels, and external application of soda or vinegar 
and water, or lobelia infusion. It may require several 
days to entirely relieve it. Care in diet is required. 

10. Ekythema. This is a red, smooth, slightly hard- 
ened fullness of the skin, with burning pam, ending in 
watery blisters and scabs. The eruption is superficial, and 
most generally about the thighs. It is probably largely 
caused by irritation from acrid bowel evacuation, and 
want of cleanliness. 

Treatment. Thorough cleanliness, regulation of bowels, 
bathing. Locally apply cream, olive- oil, glycerine, pars- 
ley salve, infusion of lobelia, or warm salt and water. 
When scabs are formed, parsley salve or tar ointment. 

11. Strophulus — Red-gum. This is an eruption of 
prominent, red pimples, in patches, on the back, arms, and 
cheeks, but may arise generally. They cause itching, and, 
on disappearing, leave small scales. Many nurses think 
this eruption favors the health of the child. No doubt it 
is better to have it out than in, but better still to avoid 
it altogether, by a proper diet and attention. It is not 
dangerous, but annoying. When the eruption is whiter 
than the natural skin, it is termed white-gum. The vari- 
ety termed tooth-rash is, at times, more severe than the 
two just mentioned, and the books describe two other 
varieties, with rather unimportant differences. 

Treatment. When mild, the general health and food 






INFANTILE FOKMS OF DISEASE. 199 

should receive attention. When severe, treat like nettle- 
rash. 

12. Lichen — Prickly heat. This belongs mostly to 
adults and older children. It is too well known to re- 
quire description. There are three varieties, neither of 
them dangerous, but often very tormenting and obstinate. 
General attention to excretion and secretion, and to diet; 
alkaline or acid washes (trial alone can determine which 
will relieve), or of hydrastis or lobelia infusion, and dia- 
phoretics are the usual remedial means. 

13. Scabies — Itch. This is referred to the burrowing 
of a minute insect, and is communicated from one person 
to another. It is known by small, separate, pointed, trans- 
parent vesicles, containing a thick serum. Its common 
name indicates the sensation it produces. When the 
vesicles are broken by scratching, larger, inflamed pus- 
tules, filled with yellowish matter, are formed, which are 
aggravated by intemperate habits. It usually appears on 
the hands and arms, from whence it may spread indefi- 
nitely. It selects the more thin and delicate portions of 
the skin, as between the fingers, the inner portions of the 
wrists and arms. It is hardly in the power of the human 
will for its possessor to abstain from scratching. 

It is stated that the insect may be detected in such of 
the vesicles as have appended to them a short line or sort 
of handle, and may be captured on the point of a needle. 
It is a small, white, turtle-shaped, eight-legged speck. 
Intemperate and uncleanly habits with improper food are 
favoring causes, but it may be communicated to any one. 

Sulphur is the universal remedy. The skin should be 
thoroughly cleaned and softened, and the whole body, 
and the affected parts, particularly, may be anointed with 
sulphur two ounces, mixed with lard three ounces, oil 
of bergamot a half drachm. Professor Powell states en- 
18 



200 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 25. 

tire success by the use of compound zinc ointment exter- 
nally, and sulphur internally. Children will take sulphur 
readily when mixed with molasses. A tea-spoonful of 
sulphur is a dose for a child of six to eight years old. 
Sulphur acts in large doses as a cathartic quite mildly, and 
as a diaphoretic. Avoid taking cold while using it. 

14. Hives. This term is sometimes used as a common 
name for croup. It is also more frequently, but vaguely, 
used for a variety of eruptions of the skin, for chicken-pox, 
nettle-rash, and others. We know of no dangerous erup- 
tion to which it is applied, nor of any which are not con- 
nected with derangements of the digestive apparatus. 

Treatment. A thorough emetic, repeated daily until 
cured. Bathing or washing after the emetic, and alkaline 
or acid washes to the surface to allay irritation — oil or 
glycerine is preferable in some cases. The bowels should 
receive proper attention. At times these eruptions are 
associated with deficient action of the kidneys ; when this 
is the case, give mild diuretics, as parsley, or watermelon 
seeds, in tea. 

15. Boils and pustular eruptions require the same 
character of general treatment. They are apt to arise 
during constipation. If severe or painful, poultice them, 
and open when matter is formed. 

16. Eruptions of the face. Quite extensive and serious 
spreading sores sometimes arise about the mouth and 
cheeks of children. We have found these to yield gen- 
erally to the application of parsley salve, glycerine, or oil. 
Brown sugar dissolved in cider vinegar will relieve many 
obstinate cases, when other local means seem to fail. The 
mild zinc ointment is also serviceable. The general 
health, habits, and diet need attention. 

17. Herpes — Tetter , ringworm. It 4s supposed by 
many that all the forms of herpes or tetter are caused by 



INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE. 201 

a small insect that burrows under the skin, and that the 
local use of astringents and escharotics will kill it. We 
have found most cases to be speedily curable by the use of 
strong vinegar and bloodroot, frequently applied. Zinc 
ointment and creosote are good remedies. The fresh juice 
of phytolacca (pokeroot), rubbed on two or three times a 
day, or a poultice of the same root, boiled soft, will cure 
many times. 

18. Tinea Capitis — Scalled, or Scald-head. No de- 
scription of this eruption is required. To cure it, cut the 
hair as closely as possible, and apply a poultice of elm and 
lobelia until the soreness and irritation are removed. Wash 
twice a day with strong soap-suds. We have sometimes 
used vinegar and water with benefit in place of soap-suds. 
Wash daily with tincture of bloodroot or pokeroot. If 
not decidedly better in three or four weeks, take tar plas- 
ter two ounces, powdered sulphate zinc fifty grains, creo- 
sote twenty drops ; mix completely, spread thin, and cover 
the affected parts; continue for several days. During the 
entire treatment, keep the hair closely cut, and poultice 
with lobelia, if there is much pain or irritation. If even 
this should fail on account of the hardened condition of 
the scalp, boil and mash bloodroot and mix with elm in 
a poultice and apply. The latter condition calls for escha- 
rotic or caustic application to an extent that will partially 
destroy the hardened scalp, and we would suggest a cover- 
ing of strong soft soap, or a strong lye and mush poul- 
tice, carefully watched that its action be not too extensive, 
followed by elm and lobelia poultice, to promote suppura- 
tion and the casting off of the diseased surface. With 
chronic cases, there is considerable room for variation in 
appliance of remedies. In every case give thorough con- 
stitutional treatment. 



202 



THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 25. 



ACCIDENTS AND INJURIES. 



d is 






19. Burns and scalds. A severe burn or scald 
liable to leave a disfiguration or contracted cicatrix if not 
properly healed. To prevent this, allow the injured part 
to heal under moisture and exclusion from the air. If 
the burn is a severe and deep one, first allay the pain with 
cold water until you can have time to apply lime-water 
and sweet-oil, or sweet-oil and chalk (seepage 279), which 
will permanently overcome the burning pain, then apply 
elm and lobelia poultice until the injury is entirely healed. 
For slight burns, heal with parsley salve or oil dressings. 
In cases that do not heal readily, constitutional treatment 
is required. 

20. Cuts. For a small cut that stops bleeding readily, 
bind up without washing. For a deeper one that does not 
stop bleeding, press the finger moderately upon the lips of 
the wound, or apply tannin, alum, flour, cob-webs, wood- 
soot, or brown sugar, and bind moderately tight with a 
rag. For deep cuts, with copious bleeding, with jets of 
bright red blood, apply pressure or a ligature between the 
wound and the heart; if it is a steady flow of dark pur- 
ple blood, apply the pressure or ligature on the side of 
the wound farthest from the heart. By these means you 
might prevent a loss of blood that would prove fatal be- 
fore a surgeon could be called. 

21. Sprains and bruises. Immerse a sprained wrist 
or ankle in hot water, as hot as can be borne, and keep up 
the heat for a half hour or longer ; then rub in opodeldoc 
with the hand. Repeat twice or three times a day. Keep 
the injured part as quiet as possible, until motion is no 
longer painful. This is much superior to cold water for 
immediate relief and rapid benefit. Lard and salt, or 



INFANTILE FORMS OF DISEASE, 203 

white of egg and salt, applied like a poultice, relieves the 
pain very quickly. 

For bruises dip cloths in hot water and cover the in- 
jured parts. Change before they get cold. "When pain 
is relieved, poultice with elm and lobelia and ginger, or ap- 
ply tincture of lobelia and capsicum to remove discolora- 
tion. Tincture of arnica is a very popular remedy. 

For abraded surfaces, apply poultice, then parsley salve, 
oil, or glycerine, 

22. For inflamed wounds apply a lobelia poultice until 
relieved, and heal with appropriate means. 

23. For blows or cuts upon the head, treat locally as if 
the injury were in any other part; and if fever, inflamma- 
tion, or congestion of brain follow the injury, treat on 
general principles as directed in other pages. 

24. Fainting. Loosen any tight clothing, place the 
head lower than the feet, apply camphor or ammonia 
(hartshorn), to the nostrils ; sprinkle cold water in the 
face; give internally tincture of lobelia and capsicum, 
camphor, carbonate of ammonia, tincture of ginger, or 
other good stimulant. Chafe the wrists, arms, ankles, and 
legs, rubbing toward the body. 

25. Spasms from injury. Antispasmodic tincture inter- 
nally, a warm bath, if child is feeble and cold ; if hot, 
feverish, and irritable, lobelia per stomach and enema. If 
insensible, antispasmodic tincture by enema, and same to 
wrists, ankles, and neck. 

26. For a bug in the ear. Lay the child on the oppo- 
site side, fill the ear with oil ; the bug will float out. 

For a bean or any small thing in the nose or ear, take 
a small, bent wire or a hair-pin, pass the loop beyond the 
substance, and draw it out; or close the mouth and the 
other nostril, and expel the air forcibly from the lungs. 
If the child is too young to understand how to do this, 



204 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 25. 

close one nostril with your finger and blow forcibly into 
its mouth. 

27. For any sudden and severe pain internally, give 
antispasmodic tincture, or lobelia enema. 

28. For fright, avoid strong light and noise; speak 
soothing words; take the child in your lap, brush the 
head and body gently, downward, with the hands ; stay 
with the child until fright is passed ; be every way gentle 
and calm; give internally some mild stimulating drink, as 
ginger and catnip, or weak antispasmodic tincture, in hot 
water. 

29. For frozen limbs. Great caution should be used in 
the restoration of circulation and warmth in a frozen limb. 
If the limb is " thawed out " by a warm fire or hot water, 
an irremediable injury may occur, and mortification and 
sloughing will follow. The parts of the body that are 
not frozen will not suffer if warmed quite rapidly, but the 
frozen parts should be placed in ice-water, or covered with 
snow, as soon as the patient is brought near afire. In this 
situation the circulation will very gradually return, and 
the thawing process will commence from within instead 
of from without. The use of the ice- water or snow should 
be kept up until the limb becomes thoroughly thawed and 
limber, after which the cold may be gradually withdrawn, 
but external heat beyond the temperature of a moderately 
warm room should not be permitted. The parts should 
be gently rubbed with castor-oil and wrapped lightly with 
raw cotton. If the skin is left purple, apply a stimulating 
poultice, or capsicum and vinegar. If sloughing occur, 
treat the sores as you would treat a burn or scald. While 
the flesh is frozen, be very careful in handling it, so as 
not to squeeze or bruise it. A small frost bite should be 
rubbed with snow or ice until circulation is restored. 



Appendix, 



EMETICS— BATHING, ENEMAS, POULTICES— 
MATEEIA MEDICA— MEDICAL FORMULAS AND DIREC- 
TIONS— DIET ABY FOEMULAS— THE 
CEREBELLUM— GLOSSARY. 



EMETICS. 207 



CHAPTER XXVI. 

EMETICS. 

1. Emetics exert a very extensive influence over all 
the secretions and excretions of the body. They are very 
efficient in equalizing the circulation and nervous action. 
Whenever a powerful constitutional impression is intended 
to be made, emetics may be used with confidence, as in 
violent attacks of disease or in obstinate chronic affections. 
Their application is almost universal; and as we have 
recommended them in several places, we here give general 
and specific directions for their preparation and use. 

2. For some time after the administration of an emetic, 
the stomach usually remains quiet. But, generally, within 
half an hour an uneasy sensation, with nausea, is experi- 
enced, which increases until vomiting ensues. After a 
quiet interval of less than a half hour, nausea and vomit- 
ing usually return again. In some cases vomiting may 
occur almost immediately, with very little previous nausea ; 
in other cases the nausea may exist for half an hour or 
more before vomiting begins. While the nausea is present 
the system is relaxed, countenance pale, the pulse lessened 
and often irregular, and the surface is cool or even chilly. 
As soon as vomiting begins, the circulation is increased, 
the face flushes, the skin becomes warm, and perspiration 
usually follows. During the intervals, and after the vom- 
iting is over, the patient often feels languid and inclined 

19 



208 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 26. 

to sleep. Eeaction soon comes on, the strength returns, 
the pulse is full, oppression has vanished, and the mind is 
more clear and free. The patient usually desires food im- 
mediately after vomiting, and also at times during the 
emetic process, if it is prolonged. We have had the ob- 
jection urged, that the patient was too weak to bear the 
prostrating effect of an emetic, but have invariably found 
that the temporary relaxation, or even exhaustion, is 
abundantly compensated for by the benefit produced. In 
extreme cases of typhoid fever, where the patient is deliri- 
ous and unable to sit up, we have known an appetite, 
clear brain, and increased strength to follow the adminis- 
tration of an emetic, and the cases are very rare where the 
patients deny an immediate benefit. An emetic of proper 
materials, and properly given, will do more toward reliev- 
ing the system of obstructions to vital action, to equalize 
circulation and nervous action, to relieve pain, cramps, 
spasms, and to universally and favorably influence every 
secretion and excretion, in a given space of time, than any 
other known remedial process, and it has the positive 
merits of not being injurious, of rarely requiring the 
presence of a physician to prescribe or administer, and of 
applicability under almost any condition of disease. In 
pregnancy, vomiting induced by proper medicines, will in 
every way favor the processes of nature, often prevent a 
threatened miscarriage or premature birth, and certainly 
never cause either. An emetic may be given at any stage 
of pregnancy, even when actual labor has commenced, and 
benefit will follow, if properly administered. 

3. In fevers, inflammation, or congestion of brain, lungs, 
bowels, liver, or any internal organ, emetics prove of 
almost absolute service. By their use the stomach is 
cleansed of morbific matter, so generally accumulated 
there in febrile affections, arterial excitement is remarka- 



EMETICS. 209 

bly diminished by the nausea produced, and the free per- 
spiration which usually follows, diminishes the heat of 
the system and relieves it of much irritating and injuri- 
ous or useless material, and the general relaxation of the 
entire circulatory vessels permits the free passage of blood 
and other fluids in every part of the system, and necessa- 
rily relieves overcrowded or congested organs. 

4. In intermittent forms of disease, emetics are specially 
serviceable. If given for the cure of fever and ague, they 
should be commenced two or .three hours before the time 
for a chill, and kept up for some time. Usually the chill 
w 7 ill not come on, and if, after the emetic, bathing and fric- 
tion are used, the bowels regulated, and tonics adminis- 
tered for several days, the cure of recent cases will be gen- 
erally complete. Cases of long standing may require a 
repetition several times. 

Emetics are very serviceable in the first stages of scar- 
latina, measles, and small-pox, in ulcerations of throat, in 
croup, acute lung affections, in asthma (if bowels are con- 
stipated, relieve them), in spasmodic affections, hysteria, 
colic, strangury, dysentery, indigestion, and sick head- 
ache. Generally, when the stomach is nauseated from any 
undigested food, or other causes, an emetic is indicated, 
though a contrary opinion is often held by the uninformed. 
They imagine that, as they are already nauseated or have 
been vomiting, an emetic would be out of place. The 
nausea and vomiting are indications of a natural effort to 
relieve the stomach of a load of offending material, and a 
full emetic will remove the whole cause of the nausea. In 
sick headache, with nausea and vomiting, the first indica- 
tion for treatment is an emetic. If the headache arises 
from constipation, an enema, followed by a mild cathartic 
(see formula 16), is necessary. 

5. In acute febrile affections, vomiting is generally 



210 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 26. 

easily induced, and also in cases of abnormal mental ac- 
tion, dependent on, or caused by derangements of stomach ; 
but where the mental derangement is from other causes, 
as in mania, hypochondria, and in narcotic poisoning, it is 
very often quite difficult to produce vomiting. The sus- 
ceptibility of individuals to emetic impressions, varies 
much under different states of the system. In low, feeble, 
and cold conditions, with general obstructions to vital ac- 
tion, several hours may elapse before free vomiting can 
he judiciously produced. 

6. Emetics are given for two general purposes: 1st, to 
relieve the stomach of what it may contain ; and 2d, for 
general constitutional effects. In the first case it is gen- 
erally desirable to produce the effect as rapidly as possible, 
as in cases where poisons may have been taken. 

7. The two most common articles used for immediate 
effect, are mustard and common salt. A tea-spoonful of 
ground mustard in a glass of warm water, repeated if 
necessary in a short time, will usually produce very prompt 
vomiting. A table-spoonful or more of common salt, dis- 
solved in a tumbler of warm water, will usually and 
speedily produce a similar effect. Warm water drank 
very plentifully will generally operate, in a short time, if 
the stomach is already nauseated. A tea-spoonful, each, 
of powdered lobelia, herb or seed, and bay berry, in a tum- 
bler of hot water, will also act quite promptly and power- 
fully in producing vomiting. Bayberry alone is often a 
very prompt agent where the stomach is already nau- 
seated. 

8. Of all the articles used to produce a constitutional 
effect, we know of none equal to lobelia inflata. As much 
prejudice exists against the use of this remedy, with some 
people, we feel impelled to speak positively. From an 
actual and extensive experience and observation of the effects 



EMETICS. 211 

of lobelia inflata, under almost every variety of circumstances, 
we are convinced that any thing like a judicious use of it 
will never produce any injury; that it has no poisonous 
properties or effects ; that its action is perfectly in harmony 
with physiological action; and that while it will, when 
given in large doses, produce very powerful effects, it never 
poisons or produces any actual injury. Its action is purely 
and solely relaxing to every portion of the system. It 
never produces inflammation, irritation, or lesion ; may be 
applied to any delicate organ, without producing injury, 
and nothing but unfounded prejudice, intention to misrep- 
resent, or ignorance of its uses and benefits, would ever 
lead to its defamation. We have produced with it a re- 
laxation so complete that the patient had no power to 
move even a finger, have given it (thankful for our knowl- 
edge and confidence) in cases of the extremest emergency, 
and to the most frail and delicate patients. To illustrate 
the mode of its employment in our hands, we will cite a 
few cases from our note-book. 

9. Case 1. — Hip complaint. A boy, ten years of age, 
had been affected over three years. Symptoms — General 
emaciation, feebleness, very little desire or relish for food, 
great irritability of nervous system, suffering constantly, 
could move about room but little on crutches, generally 
sat propped up with pillows on a lounge, could sleep but 
little on account of pain, except under the influence of 
opiates, five sinus ulcers on upper third of right thigh, 
from which urine was frequently discharged. Had been 
under best medical and surgical treatment, and was given 
up as incurable, by physicians of this and eastern cities. 
Diagnosis — Hip complaint, partial destruction of acetabu- 
lum, and head of femur, caries of os innominatum, adhe- 
sion of bladder, with sinus opening communicating with 



212 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 26. 

sinuses in thigh. Prognosis — very doubtful, can probably 
relieve. 

The previous history of this case is as follows : He was • 
attacked with hip complaint over three years previous to 
the time we first were called to see him, and had been 
constantly under medical treatment by physicians of high 
reputation, and was pronounced beyond hope of cure. 
The destruction of the bones of the pelvis had been quite 
extensive ; how far it is impossible to say ; but there had 
been a continual discharge through the five openings which 
had formed below in the thigh. Internally, the destruc- 
tion had extended to the bladder, and through its walls ; 
adhesions had taken place to the pelvic bones at some 
point; urine frequently was discharged through the open- 
ings in the thigh, and several pieces of bone were passed 
from the bladder through the natural urinary passage. 
We have never heard of a case similar in this respect. 
The escape of urine through the openings in the thigh is 
proof of an opening through the bladder ; bone could not 
get into the bladder except through some opening; and 
unless adhesion around the edges of the opening to the 
pelvic bones had existed, the urine would have passed 
into the abdominal cavity and soon caused death. The 
pieces of bone were spongy, jagged, and pointed, of vari- 
ous shapes and sizes — one as large as the bone of the first 
joint of the little finger. 

In the treatment of this case, extending through full 
three months, we used sixteen pounds of lobelia, half of 
which was the powdered seed, double in strength to the 
leaf. He took an emetic every other day for about four 
weeks, after that not so often. Each time relaxation was 
carried far enough to relieve the pain and induce sleep. 
Lobelia was used as an emetic, by enemas, and for poul- 
tices, and he was never permitted to be free from its influ- 



EMETICS. 213 

ence. The improvement was very marked at the end of 
three weeks; appetite was almost ravenous and unceasing. 
Within three months he walked several squares to see the 
former family physician, who had given him up to die ; 
and could not resist the opportunity of boasting of his new 
" woman doctor." He required no cane at the end of a 
year. He is now the head of a family. 

10. Case 2. — A brother of his was subsequently at- 
tacked with the same form of disease. Under a similar 
lobelia saturation, he was cured in six weeks. The abscess 
which formed at the hip-joint, was not permitted to work 
its way between the muscles, but after thirty days, was 
opened by lancing, and discharged over a half gallon in 
twenty-four hours. He has had no return of the disease. 
Was able to walk in one week after the abscess was 
opened. 

11. Case 3. — A gentleman of forty-nine years of age; 
acute congestion of brain, threatening apoplexy; had 
come in from a club supper and fallen insensible on his 
chamber floor ; when called, had him raised to sitting pos- 
ture, hot water applied to feet, cold water to head ; face 
nearly black with congestion, veins of head swelled out 
like large cords; ordered an enema of lobelia seed and 
water; consciousness with delirium returned, but left in a 
few moments ; succeeded in rousing him enough to give a 
heaped tea-spoonful of powdered lobelia seed in a tea-cup 
of water; maintained him in a sitting posture ; he lapsed into 
insensibility for about ten minutes, when he suddenly roused 
and vomited; immediately gave another spoonful of lobelia 
seed in a cup of water; he became insensible again, but 
soon roused and vomited again; quite delirious and vio- 
lent ; gave a third spoonful of lobelia seed, and, after more 
delirium, with a few minutes' loss of consciousness, vom- 
iting again ensued. The same treatment and symptoms 



214 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 26. 

were kept up for some time, until he had taken six full 
tea-spoonfuls of powdered lobelia seed, when he ceased to 
become unconscious, but remained delirious ; continued lo- 
belia for a full hour in smaller quantities until he became 
quiet; face became pale, and after a copious vomiting he 
went to sleep. He had no recollection of any thing that 
occurred from the time he left the club until he waked 
the next day. He went to his place of business about 
three o'clock in the afternoon. 

12. Case 4. — A girl, nine years old, feeble and delicate; 
extreme prostration of nervous system with excitement ; 
a loud tone, a heavy step, or any sudden noise or jar 
brings on spasm; great restlessness, cerebral excitement, 
clairvoyant and clair-audiant ; pulse one hundred and ten 
to one hundred and twenty per minute; breathing short 
and hurried; had been under homoeopathic treatment for 
typhoid fever for five weeks, and was given up to die. 
After much objection to our proposed treatment, the father 
consented to leave the case in our hands; gave a slow, 
gentle, but thorough lobelia emetic, occupying ten hours. 
The next morning she was propped up in bed and ate her 
breakfast with a relish; repeated the emetic twice within 
a week, and discharged her as having more need of a cook 
than a doctor. 

13. Case 5. — A married lady, twenty-three years old, 
healthy and vigorous, pregnant with first child, within 
three weeks of full time; had fallen down stairs, injuring 
herself severely, and inducing premature labor; called 
thirty-six hours after accident ; patient exhausted from in- 
effectual labor and suffering; no previous physician; foetus 
lying crosswise in the uterus, head to the left; gave her 
enemas of lobelia and asarum, also same medicine in small 
doses until vomiting and considerable relaxation ensued; 
general pain much diminished; labor pains nearly sus- 



EMETICS. 215 

pended; turned foetus by external manipulation; continued 
lobelia and asarum per stomach and by enema ; patient be- 
came very much relaxed ; slept eight hours ; on waking de- 
livery was naturally and easily accomplished ; child alive, 
six and a half pounds weight ; mother had a speedy re- 
covery. First saw patient at 8 A. M., delivery in twenty 
hours afterward ; very little hemorrhage ; child lived and 
did well; mother severely bruised, had rolled from top to 
bottom of a long flight of stairs. 

14. Case 6. — A gentleman, thirty-five years of age; 
trismus (lockjaw), had run a rusty nail in his foot, jaws 
immovably set, sufferings intense ; ordered enemas of lobe- 
lia seed, and poultice of same to injured foot, throat, and 
jaws; one tea-spoonful, each, of lobelia and asarum pow- 
dered, every half hour, as enema, to retain. Jaws loosened 
in two hours, full vomiting followed ; attended to business 
next day. 

One of my little patients met me in the street one day, 
and told me that a valuable horse had run a nail in his 
foot, had lockjaw, and was supposed to be dying. Told 
him to give a quarter pound of lobelia seed, by injection. 
He reported that the horse got well, but that the lobelia 
made him very sick. 

15. Case 7. — A youth, fourteen years of age; severe 
cold, high fever, bowels constipated, throat swollen inter- 
nally, utterly unable to swallow for thirty hours; lungs 
congested, breathing extremely difficult, face purple. Two 
physicians had been called; each had said he could do 
nothing unless the patient could swallow. Ordered enema 
to move bowels, then enemas of lobelia and asarum, a tea- 
spoonful of each, to be retained and repeated every hour ; 
lobelia poultice to throat ; was able to swallow a tea-spoon- 
ful of lobelia and asarum tea in about three hours; abil- 
ity to swallow gradually increased, fever lessened, face 






216 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 26. 

became more natural; gave ginger tea; slight vomiting en- 
sued at the end of fifth hour ; continued treatment, lessened 
in quantity; copious vomiting in about three hours after; 
slept at intervals during the night; took nourishment in 
evening and morning; continued medicine while he was 
awake; gave emetic daily, for three days, with* occasional 
enemas of lobelia and asarum. Discharged cured in two 
weeks ; treatment active for about a week. 

16. In these and other cases, where lobelia is given so free- 
ly, we use other articles in combination. Asarum is added 
at times, on account of permanency of action, to hold and 
continue the relaxation which the lobelia produces, which 
otherwise would pass off sooner than is desirable; we gen- 
erally combine the two. Stimulants, as ginger, cayenne, 
or prickly-ash, are sometimes added, in cases of inactivity, 
feebleness, debility, or coldness. Astringents (bayberry 
being our favorite) are required in cases of inactivity, of 
relaxation from disease, or where the stomach is loaded 
with undigested food or phlegm, to bring on vomiting 
in tardy cases. In all cases plenty of warm fluid is desir- 
able. The effects of lobelia are quickly manifested, and 
are not of long continuance. When the desired amount 
of relaxation has been produced, a little ginger, bayberry, 
or cayenne, will soon bring the system to a natural stand- 
ard of tonicity. A few hours' sleep is usually sufficient 
for full recovery from complete relaxation produced by 
lobelia. 

17. We have introduced these cases to show that lobelia 
is applicable in a great variety of conditions and for a 
variety of purposes, and to refute the slander that has 
been uttered against it. If it were poisonous, we should, 
at some point in our practice, have discovered it. 

18. For the purposes of an emetic, or an enema, we 
never use it in form of tincture. In the anti-spasmodio 



EMETICS. 217 

drops (hot drops), in liniments, and for some external pur- 
poses, we use the tincture; for emetics, enemas, poultices, 
cough syrup, pills, and powders, we much prefer the pow- 
dered seed or leaf. The seed is about double the strength 
of the leaf; the latter is the mildest in action. 

19. Directions for preparing an emetic: 

Take a heaped tea-spoonful of powdered lobelia herb, 
pour over it a tea-cupful of boiling water , cover it, and 
let it stand to cool ; the powder will soon settle. 

Take a tea-spoonful of pure ginger, one of asarum, and 
one of bayberry, all powdered, and a handful of spear- 
mint herb, put in a half gallon pitcher, and fill it with 
boiling icater, cover and let it stand five or ten minutes. 
Prickly-ash may be used instead of ginger, if preferred. 

20. Give the patient of this tea, a cupful, as hot as can 
be drank, every ten minutes ; in the fourth cupful put in 
one tea-spoonful from the lobelia infusion, tw^o tea-spoon- 
fuls in the next, and three in the next two or three cups. 
After this omit the lobelia but continue the tea, at reg- 
ular intervals, until there is considerable nausea, when the 
tea may be diluted very much with hot water, and drank 
as rapidly and hot as possible, until vomiting comes on. 
What may be thrown up may be but very little, or may 
consist of nearly all that has been drank, with the addi- 
tion, usually, of undigested food, acid, and phlegm. In 
either case, the process should be repeated over and over, 
until what is thrown up is clear of impurities; three or 
four full vomitings are frequently required, and sometimes 
more. When the tea grows low in the pitcher, fill up 
with boiling water, and, if necessary, the same with the 
lobelia infusion. Those who have never given or taken 
an emetic of the character we here describe, may think 
the quantity of tea to be enormous. There is no danger 
from its use, and its benefits are decided and wonderful, 



218 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 26. 

and can only be appreciated by those who have experi- 
enced them. Patients sometimes become very much nau- 
seated, but do not vomit readily; in such cases, give a 
half tea-spoonful of powdered bayberry in a cup of hot 
water ; this may be repeated in four or five minutes if the 
first has not been followed by vomiting. If the patient 
have sour stomach, dissolve a tea-spoonful of soda in a cup 
of hot water, and give a tea-spoonful of it in each cup 
of tea. Patients, when they become nauseated, are disin- 
clined to drink; this is the very time when a little resolute 
action is required, and frequently it is but a single cupful 
that is required to bring on the vomiting that produces so 
much relief. 

The foregoing is, as near as we can give, the general 
method of administering an emetic. It will answer in a 
majority of cases. There are so many variations, however, 
in the conditions of patients, that we add some directions 
for special cases. 

21. "When there is severe headache and constipated 
bowels, the latter should be relieved by an enema at the 
commencement of the emetic. The headache that fre- 
quently accompanies constipation can not be permanently 
relieved by an emetic. Directions for enemas will be found 
elsewhere. 

22. Where the body is cold, the tea should be drank as 
hot as possible, until the ivhole system is well warmed up, 
before commencing with the lobelia. Where the feet alone 
are cold, they should be placed in hot water until they are 
well warmed, a blanket being spread over the knees to 
confine the warmth that arises from the water. 

23. Where there is much fever, the tea should be used 
quite weak ; or it may be made from spearmint and asa- 
rum only, or from spearmint alone, or asarum alone. 

24. Where the patient is quite weak or debilitated, the 



EMETICS. 219 

quantity of lobelia should not be more than half or one- 
third of what has been directed, and the whole process 
should be very gently conducted. 

25. The more fever, headache, or pain there may be, 
the less should be the proportion of stimulus (as ginger, 
prickly-ash, or cayenne) in the tea. The more cold, in- 
active, or insensible the system in general is, the more 
should be the proportion of the stimulus in the drink. In 
such cases cayenne is a very valuable addition. 

Undigested food in the stomach is sometimes quite diffi- 
cult to be thrown up, and sometimes there may be consid- 
erable pain or cramping for the moment. We generally 
add a tea-spoonful of bayberry to a cup of tea in such 
cases. We have never known this pain to last any length 
of time where an emetic has been given as we have di- 
rected. The emetic should be continued until the stomach 
is cleared of undigested food. 

26. At the end of an emetic, if the patient feels very 
much exhausted, give a few tea- spoonfuls of hot ginger 
tea. Where nausea and faintness are felt, as may happen 
with weak patients, give a few drops of diluted camphor, 
or essence of peppermint, or place a flannel cloth, wrung 
out of hot water, over the pit of the stomach. If the 
patient has been without food for a long time, give at the 
close of the emetic a little corn gruel or plain broth. 
If the patient is decidedly hungry, as he or she will gen- 
erally be, give a cup of weak black tea and a piece of dry 
toast at first, to be followed by a more hearty meal in an 
hour or two, if judicious, but always of plain and simple 
food. 

27. If the patient is prostrated on the sick bed, feeble 
and cold, place hot bricks or a jug of hot water to the feet, 
or use other similar things to help to warm up the sys- 
tem; give the tea hot, and delay the lobelia until the sys- 



220 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 26. 

tern is well warmed. If the stomach and abdomen are 
cold, apply hot flannels, hot irons, or steaming bricks.* 

28. If there is colic or cramping of the stomach before 
you begin, commence with tea-spoonful doses of the lobe- 
lia infusion, every two to five minutes, until some re- 
lief is obtained. If this inclines to produce vomiting, 
give rapidly of the tea, hot, and much diluted, and con- 
tinue the lobelia, as just directed, until the pain subsides; 
then continue the emetic as first directed. 

29. If the colic is of the bilious character, and is not 
speedily relieved by the rapid use of the lobelia as men- 
tioned in last paragraph, give an enema of lobelia, asarum, 
and slippery-elm, per rectum, to be retained. If bowels 
are loaded or constipated, they should be first moved by 
an enema. This alone will at times relieve a colic. For 
flatulent colic give a few tea-spoonfuls of strong ginger tea, 
hot, or a few drops of essence of peppermint or anise. Our 
mode of treating bilious colic is strongly illustrated by the 
following case: 

30. Case 8. — A gentleman, about twenty-four years of 
age, subject to what his physicians termed bilious colic, 
had an attack while on business down town ; could not get 
home, and came to our house. The pain was so severe 
that his usual dignity gave way, and he threw himself on 
the carpet as he entered the room, with his knees drawn 
up to his chin. We ordered half tea-spoonful powdered 
lobelia herb in a cup of hot ginger tea, an enema of lobe- 
lia, ginger, and slippery-elm, to relieve constipated bowels, 
and one to be retained of a tea-spoonful each of powdered 

* Heat bricks quite hot, put them in a small quantity of water 
until they cease to hiss, then wrap up in two or three newspapers, 
leaving one end open for the hot vapor to escape; place the open 
end toward the body. The inner paper may be dampened, as this 
will afford more vapor. 



EMETICS. 221 

lobelia seed and asarum ; by this time a warm bath had 
been made ready, patient had vomited an ounce or two 
only of clear fluid. He was placed in the bath, and in five 
minutes became completely relaxed. He was then re- 
moved to a lounge, and warmly covered. His condition, 
when thus completely under the relaxation of lobelia, was 
as follows: Muscles completely relaxed; skin moderately 
cool, perspirable; pulse about sixty per minute, very soft 
and full ; face and lips pale ; breathing slow and uniform ; 
feet and ankles as warm as the rest of body. ]STo pain ; 
not able to converse ; went to sleep immediately. In two 
hours was roused, and rode home in his buggy. Saw him 
next day; no pain w r hen still, some pain on pressure or 
on moving. Gave moderate cathartic of jalap and senna. 
He went to his usual business the day following. Said 
that he had never lost less than two weeks' time in any 
previous attack. Remarks. — There was no nausea or vom- 
iting during or after the bath. The influence of the hot 
water favored the rapid absorption of the medicine, and 
its general distribution through the system, causing rapid 
and complete relaxation. The pain subsided as soon as 
prostration ensued. During his two hours' sleep, the sys- 
tem gradually recovered its tonicity without any of the 
irregular muscular and nervous movements frequently 
noticed, called "alarming symptoms." 

31. It is generally best to permit patients who are 
feeble, or who have lost much sleep previously, to take a 
short nap between the periods of vomiting. Most patients 
incline to sleep after the emetic is finished ; they should 
be allowed to do so. Where there has been great tension 
of the nervous system, drowsiness is sure to follow relax- 
ation. We have frequently extended an emetic through 
ten or twelve hours, the patient dropping to sleep at in- 



222 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 26. 

tervals of perhaps every half hour, and occupying half of 
the time in sleeping. 

32. Where the influence of lobelia is carried so far as 
to completely relax the whole system, reaction may come 
on quietly during sleep, as in Case 8. In other instances 
reaction comes on irregularly, the patients throw them- 
selves about on the bed, and toss their limbs, almost in- 
voluntarily. Symptoms like these are not unfrequent, 
and are not in the least degree evidences of danger. We 
wish this to be particularly comprehended. Physicians, 
who have used lobelia extensively, are very apt to smile 
at the alarm manifested on the faces of by-standers in 
such cases, knowing full well that nothing is required 
but a few spoonfuls of ginger, bayberry, or cayenne tea 
to speedily relieve these so-called " alarming symptoms." 
The paleness of face, free perspiration, slow, full pulse, 
sobbing but deep respiration, and thorough relaxation pro- 
duced by lobelia, are also classed among " alarming symp- 
toms," but they give no alarm to the physician, or any 
one who knows by experience and observation what will 
be their termination. He knows that the most extrava- 
gant movements of a patient can be speedily quieted by 
a cupful or two of stimulating tea, which will usually 
bring on vomiting and be followed by ease and refreshing 
sleep, from which the patient will quietly wake after a 
longer or shorter time, and demand something to eat. 

33. It is always best to give abundance of hot fluids, so 
that the stomach may be well distended, and have some- 
thing to contract upon during vomiting. If the stomach 
be nearly empty, or partially full of undigested food, the 
contractions of the stomach and abdominal muscles are 
liable to cause pain and cramping. The mode we have 
directed is the best we have found to avoid " cramps." 



EMETICS. 223 

"We aim to produce the emetic impression gradually, and 
to give plenty of fluids. 

34. Where a patient is very much relaxed by disease, or 
the system is cold, inactive, and feeble, stimulation is de- 
manded. Strong ginger or cayenne tea, with a little lobelia 
added, will generally answer. The relaxing effect of the 
lobelia being first in order, prepares the way for the ac- 
tion of the stimulus more rapidly than when the latter 
is given alone. Hence, lobelia is indicated with stimulus 
in even the most reduced patients. There is no better 
anti-spasmodic known to us than the compound tincture 
of cayenne and lobelia. 

35. It may appear strange to those who have not 
studied our mode of practice and the principles upon which 
it is based, when we say that we have never met with a 
patient who did not require, in some portion of the treat- 
ment, the effects of lobelia. The principles involved may 
be summed up in a few words : Lobelia is a pure relaxant, 
operating on every portion of the system^ relaxing muscular 
fiber through the medium of the nervous system; can be de- 
pended upon whenever it is needed ; and is as innocent as 
it is powerful. A fundamental principle of our practice 
is to relax constricted organs, vessels, and tissues, in order 
that the circulation and nervous action may be free in and 
through them, and that obstructions may thereby be re- 
moved, and we have never seen a case where contraction 
or obstruction did not exist, to a greater or lesser degree, 
either general or local. 

36. In cases of long continued pain in a vigorous con- 
stitution, the effects of lobelia may be induced powerfully 
by injections of the medicine, and the drinking of the tea 
may follow. As it operates through the medium of the 

I nervous system as well as by being absorbed into the cir- 
culation, its nauseating effect will be felt upon the nerves 
20 



224 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. CHAP. 26. 

of the stomach, the same as if it had been swallowed, but 
more slowly. The following will illustrate : 

37. Case 9. — A former patient, aged about forty, 
bilious temperament, good constitution, came to our house 
about 2 P. M., nearly exhausted from pain and loss of 
sleep ; rheumatism of hip and knee ; said he had come 
300 miles to get the benefit of lobelia, as no one in his 
region knew how to use it. His sufferings had been in- 
tense and unrelieved, night and day, for three weeks; 
ordered enema to relieve constipated bowels, followed by 
a heaped tea-spoonful, each of lobelia seed and asarum, 
as enema, to retain. Had him placed in warm bath im- 
mediately after ; he became quite relaxed in fifteen minutes, 
and had hardly strength to dress. Laid down on lounge ; 
said he felt very sick ; gave him freely of hot ginger tea ; 
copious vomiting rapidly ensued. Went to sleep in a few 
minutes, at 3J o'clock, just an hour and a half from the 
time he first came. Woke next morning at nine o'clock, 
having slept nearly eighteen hours; said he felt better; 
could walk with ease ; pain nearly gone, ate a hearty break- 
fast, took some medicine and directions with him, and 
started for home in the afternoon. He reported himself 
cured in a few weeks. 

38. A lobelia emetic ought to be recognized as an in- 
dispensable part of the preparation of a patient for any 
important surgical operation; much less chloroform will 
be required, and the healing of the wound made by the 
surgeon will be greatly promoted. We have arrested ex- 
tensive sloughing, after amputation, by the thorough use 
of lobelia. The patient was seventy -six years old, and 
fully recovered. He died at ninety-two, of old age. In 
our treatment of chronic, indolent, and ill-conditioned 
ulcers, we always use emetics freely ; and many of such 
cases that have refused to heal under the ordinary treat- 



EMETICS. 225 

ment will show improvement within twenty-four hours, 
after a thorough course of lobelia has been given. The 
constitutional effect of this invaluable remedy is required 
in all such cases. By emetics and poultices of lobelia we 
have cured many of the worst cases of scrofulous ophthal- 
mia (sore eyes). 

39. We never hesitate to apply lobelia to any charac- 
ter of sore. If irritable and inflamed, we use it in poul- 
tice, with slippery-elm; if indolent, we add cayenne or 
ginger; if relaxed, we add an astringent — as bayberry. 
For painful swellings — as boils, felons — we use lobelia 
and elm poultices; for carbuncles, we add bayberry and 
cayenne, and give emetics. 

40. The liability to contraction and disfiguration that 
accompany the healing of an extensive burn or scald is 
well understood by most people. If such injury is kept 
covered by a lobelia poultice until entirely healed, there will 
rarely be either contraction or scar. A wound of the soft 
parts healed under warmth, moisture, and relaxation, and 
kept from the air, will not contract or leave a bad scar. 
Pale, flabby granulations, often miscalled " proud-flesh," 
should never be destroyed by caustic. It is only neces- 
sary to add a little astringent, as bayberry, to the poul- 
tice, and a healthy change will very soon occur. The 
common horror of " proud-flesh " arises from a misunder- 
standing of the healing process. 

41. Delirium and temporary insanity can be speedily- 
relieved by the free use of lobelia, in many cases. We 
firmly believe that it would relieve and cure a majority 
of the inmates of any insane asylum if judiciously and 
perse veringly applied. 

Some years since we offered to take charge, gratuitously, 
of a female ward of confirmed lunatics in an insane asy- 
lum, that we might have an opportunity of demonstrating 



226 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 26. 

the idea contained in the last paragraph. The physician 
in charge, every way a gentleman and old friend of our 
family, informed us that he would "be glad to permit, 
if he had the power; but if he were to do so, it would 
result in the loss of his position ; that the medical code 
of ethics would not permit any such innovation upon the 
established order of practice. He did not doubt the pos- 
sibility of an improvement in the medical treatment of 
the insane, but it would never be accepted if coming from 
any irregular source, and, above all, a woman." 

42. Asarum canadensis, given alone, in hot infusion, 
and freely, will produce vomiting. It acts more slowly 
than lobelia, and its effects are continued longer. It is 
mildly stimulating, as well as relaxing, and its value as 
an agent to produce emesis is hardly less than lobelia in 
cases where slow and powerful relaxation is required ; but 
it has the disadvantage of requiring so much time. In 
connection with lobelia, for the purpose of maintaining 
the effect of the latter, it is not excelled by any thing 
within our knowledge. It may be used in any case where 
lobelia is indicated — with it, or as a substitute. For 
emetic purposes, use a heaped table-spoonful to two quarts 
of boiling water; give hot, and continue freely until vom- 
iting ensues, and repeat until full effect is produced. Add 
boiling water, as may be needed, to the pitcher. 

43. Eupatorium perfoliatum (boneset, thoroughwort), in 
hot infusion, drank plentifully, operates very well as an 
emetic. It is not as pleasant as asarum, and less effica- 
cious. In weak, warm infusion it promotes perspiration ; 
in cold infusion it proves diuretic; and in extract, or con- 
centrated decoction, it operates as a mild cathartic. Its 
action is promoted by the addition of ginger, or capsicum. 

44. We have never treated a case of hydrophobia, but 
from what we have learned, from reliable sources, of the 



EMETICS. 227 

effects of lobelia in several instances, we should rely with 
more confidence upon the use of this remedy, joined to the 
vapor bath, than upon any other we have ever heard of. 
We fully believe that lobelia, given by enema, would en- 
tirely control the spasms, and cause a rapid elimination of 
the hydrophobic virus from the system. 

45. Poisoning by rhus (poison ivy), can be rapidly re- 
lieved by a thorough lobelia emetic, followed by a vapor 
bath, and washing the affected portions with vinegar tinc- 
ture of lobelia — one thorough course of this character 
being generally enough to overcome the worst symptoms 
of a very severe case. 

46. At the conclusion of an emetic, it will sometimes 
happen that there will be retching after the stomach is 
entirely empty. It is owing to irritation from some 
cause. A few drops of weak lobelia tea, given at very 
short intervals, will usually check and soon stop it. 
When vomiting follows too rapidly the drinking of tea, 
the quantity should be lessened. We have frequently 
found our patients with great irritation of the stomach, 
arising from local, or distant cause, and have been obliged 
to begin with doses of not over a tea-spoonful of very weak 
lobelia infusion, gradually increasing the quantity until, 
finally, the patient could drink a cupful and retain it. 

47. In cases of great nervous excitement and pain, after 
an emetic has been given, lobelia should be continued, in 
tea-spoonful doses, of mild infusion, until the nervous ten- 
sion or pain is subdued. Fevers require this mode of 
procedure. If plain corn-meal gruel is used, a table- 
spoonful of it to a tea-spoonful of the infusion, the taste 
of the lobelia is not noticeable, nourishment is afforded, 
and the effect of the lobelia is gradually and pleasantly 
obtained. 



228 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 27. 



CHAPTEE XXVII. 

BATHING— ENEMAS-POULTICES. 

I. 

BATHING. 

1. The importance of bathing, as a means of preventing 
and curing disease, is admitted by all. The skin should 
always be kept clean, soft, and capable, except in quite 
cold weather, of gentle perspiration from moderate exer- 
cise, or the drinking of a cup of warm tea. The skin is 
a great outlet of the impurities of the circulation. Ob- 
structions to its action, by dirt and other matter, from 
without, and by the drying of the impurities of perspira- 
tion cast out from within, call for frequent bathing. 

Sudden or great changes from heat to cold — unequal or 
rapid cooling after inordinate heating — going from hot 
sunshine into deep shade — from a hot room into a cold 
one, or into damp, cold cellars — sitting on cold, damp 
ground or stones — insufficient clothing in the cool even- 
ings of hot days, or exposure to drafts of air when too 
warm, and many other causes will induce contraction of 
the skin, which will check perspiration, prevent the escape 
of impurities, and cause their retention within the system, 
compel other depurative organs to excessive and unnatural 
action for their removal, prevent full circulation of blood 
to the surface, sending it to the internal organs, over- 
crowding them, and causing inflammation, congestion, 



BATHING. 229 

abscesses, hemorrhages, diarrhea, diabetes, rheumatism, 
fevers, agues, and many other forms of disease. A per- 
son can not long remain healthy whose perspiration is 
obstructed. 

2. Moisture, with varying degrees of warmth, affords 
the most prompt and positive means of cleansing, relax- 
ing, stimulating, and toning the surface. Water absorbs 
and gives off heat readily, hence cool water applied to a 
hot surface rapidly reduces its heat, and warm or hot 
water or vapor to a cold surface, will rapidly warm it. 
Dry heat is stimulating to the surface, and at the same 
time contracting. Moist heat may be made to stimulate 
(and thereby cause more blood to flow to the surface), and 
also at the same time to expand and relax the skin, open 
its pores, cleanse its surface, and favor the free escape of 
perspiration. 

3. The warm or tepid-bath, the sponge-bath, the sitz- 
bath, the wet-sheet pack, the cold-bath, and the shower- 
bath are the principal ones. The dry hot-air bath and 
medicated baths are also applicable in some cases. 

4. The cold and shower-bath should not be used by in- 
valids, except under the advice of a competent physician. 
The shock and chill of these baths cause sudden and gen- 
eral recession of blood, and leave the surface contracted ; 
reaction can only be accomplished by a powerful effort 
of the system, which is difficult or sometimes almost im- 
possible with feeble individuals. If headache and con- 
tinued chilliness are felt, after one of these baths, it has 
done more harm than good. 

5. The vapor-bath is the most effective of all baths for 
removing obstructions to perspiration. Vapor may be 
applied by placing the patient in a comfortable cane-seat 
chair ; clothing all removed ; a thick towel to sit upon ; a 
bucket of hot water to put the feet in ; a thick blanket or 



230 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 27. 

quilt, closed around the neck and lapped behind and 
dropping to the floor outside the chair ; a shallow tin basin 
of hot water, supported by two bricks, under which a two- 
tubed alcohol lamp is burned to evaporate the water. Or 
the vapor may be raised by placing a small tub or bucket 
with water under the chair, and heated half bricks or por- 
ous stones of same size gradually lowered unto it, with 
tongs, from behind. Or the vapor may be conducted from 
a tea-kettle on a stove, by means of a small pipe. A tin- 
ner or coppersmith can readily make the necessary fix- 
tures. The latter mode will serve to conduct vapor to the 
bed of a patient, if too feeble to sit up. Vapor may be 
applied under bed-clothing by steaming bricks (see page 
220), or by hot, well boiled ears of corn. 

6. Vapor, warm or hot, is particularly beneficial in cases 
of long-continued or obstinate obstructions of perspiration, 
as in typhoid fever, chronic affections, inflammations and 
congestion of internal organs, fevers, congestive chills 
dropsy, diabetes, rheumatism, deep-seated pains, debility 
with chilliness, general irritability of nervous system, de- 
lirium, dysmenorrhoea, dysentery, diarrhea, cholera, retro- 
cession of measles or other eruptive forms of disease, severe 
cold, cramps, spasmodic affections, severe bruisings from 
falls or other accidents, internal hemorrhages, to aid the 
relaxing effects of lobelia, and in any other condition 
where circulation and nervous action require to be equal- 
ized. 

7. Vapor should be employed at a moderate temperature 
in fevers, inflammation, and excitement, and continued 
until perspiration becomes free. To cold and feeble pa- 
tients, it should be commenced comfortably warm, and the 
heat gradually increased until the patient is thoroughly 
warmed all through. Stimulating, diaphoretic teas, mild 
or strong, should be drank freely from the beginning. 



BATHING. 231 

Cool water may be applied to the face and head, if faint- 
ness is felt. If the stomach is foul, an emetic should be 
given before the vapor is applied. If bowels are consti- 
pated or loaded, they should first be relieved by enemas. 

8. After a vapor-bath, the whole body should be washed 
off clean with tepid or cool water, and wiped dry ; expos- 
ure to cold should be avoided for a few hours. Vigorous 
patients may drink a cup of hot ginger-tea, and go out of 
doors within a half hour, without danger, if they wrap up 
well and are careful to keep in active motion. By the use 
of vapor under the bed-clothing, warmth and moisture can 
be kept up for any desirable length of time. In typhoid 
cases, it may require several hours before there will be the 
least appearance of perspiration. 

In dysmenorrhea the vapor may be applied from the 
waist downward. Vapor will often give relief when other 
means fail. 

Warm-baths are less powerful in degree, but their ef- 
fects are similar in kind to those of vapor. 

9. Medicated vapor-baths combine the additional bene- 
fits of medicine. The medicines employed should be such 
as can be evaporated, or taken up by the vapor. Aro- 
matic herbs, as peppermint, lobelia ; or aromatic roots, as 
ginger and asarum, are examples. Breathing of vapor, 
medicated or not, often gives great relief in constriction 
or congestion of the lungs, or in other cases of difficult 
respiration, and in pleurisy. It is not likely to ever prove 
injurious. 

10. The tepid sitz-bath, followed by vigorous friction, 
proves invigorating to the organs of the pelvis and abdomen. 
To produce this effect, they should not be of long dura- 
tion, but may be repeated daily. Three to five minutes 
is a sufficient length of time. They are taken by sitting 
in a tub of water with the feet out. For relaxation and 
21 



232 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 27. 

relief of pain, they should be made quite warm or hot, 
and may be continued for a half hour, hot water being 
occasionally added. 

11. The salt sitz-bath is very stimulating to the pelvic 
organs. For weakness of the special female organs, we 
highly recommend it. Take a wooden tub, large enough 
for a sitz-bath, ascertain how much water will fill it 
nearly to the top while the sitter is in it; dissolve in this 
as much common salt as the water will take up when hot. 
Have this salt water hot when the bath is taken, and re- 
main in it as long as it feels comfortably warm. Rub dry 
on rising. The salt water may be heated the next time 
it is needed. As it wastes, more water and salt can be 
added. 

12. The sponge-bath, in sickness, is principally applica- 
ble for purposes of cleanliness, or for supplying moisture 
to a feverish and dry skin. A little alkali, as soda or 
saleratus, is a good addition to the water in such cases. 
Care should be taken not to expose the patient's body too 
much to cold air during the process of washing. Wash- 
ing with vinegar stimulates without contracting the sur- 
face, and produces a very agreeable sensation to a sick 
person. 

13. Next to the vapor-bath, the wet-sheet pack has the 
most extensive and positive influence in promoting the 
action of the skin. Have a mattress spread over with 
three or four large, thick comfortables, and over these one 
or two soft flannel blankets ; wring a large sheet lightly 
out of water, so as not to drip, and spread it smoothly 
over the flannels; on this place the patient, entirely di- 
vested of clothing, on his or her back, with the head 
elevated on a pillow; the sides of the wet sheet are now 
to be drawn over the body and limbs, the blankets 
and comfortables next, and all snugly tucked in round 



BATHING. 233 

the neck and feet. More covering may be added if 
needed. 

14. If the patient is feverish, tepid or cold water may 
be used to wet the sheet; if cold, feeble, and inactive, it 
should be as hot as the hands can bear in wringing, and 
the operation of packing should be rapid. Cold, wet 
cloths may be applied to the head if it aches, or becomes 
flushed and hot. If the feet do not become warm, place 
a hot iron to them. Warming drinks, as ginger and 
mint teas, should be given while the patient is in the sheet, 
and if drowsiness comes on, sleep may be permitted. The 
time of remaining in the pack should vary according to 
the effect produced. A cold patient should remain until 
at least comfortably warm and in a perspiration. A 
feverish person may so absorb the moisture of the sheet 
as to require its re-wetting, and its use should be continued 
until the skin becomes soft and of agreeable instead of 
feverish warmth. 

The stomach should be cleansed by an emetic, if neces- 
sary, and the bowels and bladder evacuated before going 
into a pack. 

15. When cold water is used, the wet pack causes, for 
the first few minutes, a disagreeable feeling of chilliness, 
which is soon followed by a pleasant warmth, a very sooth- 
ing influence to the nerves, and generally free perspiration. 
Where the system is loaded with impurity, the sheet will 
sometimes be of extremely unpleasant odor, and stained 
yellow or brown. 

On coming out of the pack, the patient should be washed 
off, rubbed dry, and, if languid or prostrated, some stimu- 
lants should be used. Sheet packing requires careful at- 
tention from the assistant, for the patient is so closed in by 
the covering as to be incapable of self-assistance. 

16. No character of bath should be taken within two or 



234 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 27. 

three hours after a hearty meal. A bath that leaves a 
permanent feeling of chilliness has not been sufficiently 
warm, or has been improperly managed. 

A relaxed condition of the surface, which permits too 
free perspiration, followed by a feeling of exhaustion, as 
in night-sweats, requires stimulation, and sometimes as- 
tringing. The use of Formula No. 15 will immediately 
relieve even the night-sweats of consumptives. 

17. PicMed towels. For local debility, amenorrhea, 
leucorrhoea, weakness of back and pelvic regions, benefit 
may be obtained by dipping towels in strong, hot salt and 
water, wringing them as dry as possible, and wearing 
them around the debilitated parts until the towel is com- 
pletely dry, and for some time after. Its effect is similar 
to the hot salt-bath, strengthening and stimulating. It is 
serviceable for weakness of the urinary organs, of males 
as well as females. 



II. 

ENEMAS-INJECTIONS. 

1. Enemas are often of great service in medical treat- 
ment. When given for the relief of constipation, they 
immediately reach a portion of the obstruction and cause 
its rapid removal, and their influence extends much be- 
yond. The application of medicine to the rectum, vagina, 
and urinary passages, for local effects, is usually accom- 
plished by the 4ise of a syringe. General stimulation 
and relaxation of the whole system can be produced by 
enemas, per rectum, as readily and powerfully as when 
the medicine is taken into the stomach. Enemas often 



ENEMAS. 235 

prove the best mode of administering medicine, and in 
some cases, as in lock-jaw, fainting, or where, from any 
cause, swallowing is impossible, they prove the only ef- 
fectual mode. Affections of the bowels, as dysentery, 
constipation, colic, inflammation, strangulated hernia, 
hemorrhage, piles, protrusion, worms, and most of the 
affections of the abdominal and pelvic organs are more di- 
rectly influenced by enemas than through the stomach. 
Affections of the nervous system generally afford a large 
field for the display of medical skill in the use of enemas. 
Through the absorbents of the lower bowels, medicines 
will find their way into the circulation, and impressions 
upon the nerves of the abdominal and pelvic organs can 
be more directly made by enemas than through the 
stomach. 

2. The same medicines that are given by the stomach 
may, in most cases, be given by enema, but the quantity 
should be increased to double or treble, as a general rule. 
The quantity directed in this section is for adults. Much 
less should be given for children. 

3. Where the object of an enema is to produce immediate 
evacuation of the bowels, as much fluid should be thrown 
up, moderately and steadily, as the bowels will hold ; the 
fluid should be retained for a short time, if possible, and 
on being expelled by the natural efforts of the patient, it 
will generally be accompanied with fecal matter. An in- 
jection of this character may be repeated immediately, if 
the first proves ineffectual. 

Formula — Slippery-elm, powdered. 
Ginger, " 

Brown sugar — of each one tea-spoonful. 

Mix, and add hot water one quart. A table-spoonful of 
molasses may be used instead of the sugar. Use a little 



236 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 27. 

warmer than blood-heat. Oil the pipe of the syringe, in- 
troduce it carefully into the rectum. The syringe should 
be either large enough to hold all the fluid required for 
one injection, say a pint, or should be capable of throwing 
a continuous stream. The latter is by far the best. In- 
ject the fluid slowly, until the bowels are filled; retain 
from two to five minutes, if possible, and then expel. Re- 
peat if necessary. 

4. If there is obstinate and long-continued constipation, 
the enema should be more stimulating. 

Formula — One heaped tea-spoonful ginger. 

One " " common salt. 

One " " slippery-elm. 

Three " " brown sugar. 

Or in place of the latter, three table-spoonfuls of molasses. 
Mix completely, and add three pints of hot water. Use 
as directed above, and quite warm. 

5. For dysentery, the enema should be soothing, 
nervine, and mildly astringent, should be given in small 
quantities, and retained, and may be frequently repeated. 

Formula — Hamamelis (witch-hazel). 

Asclepias (pleurisy -root, white-root). 

Of each, pulverized, a tea-spoonful. Mix, and add boiling 
water one gill. Divide in two portions, to be given one 
every half hour, nearly cold, and retained. The patient 
will be able to retain this better by lying on the bed with 
the face downward. It may require a considerable effort 
for a few seconds to prevent its expulsion. 

Asarum is an excellent addition to the above. A little 
ginger may sometimes be added with benefit. 

Most of the mild vegetable astringents will answer as 
a substitute in the place of witch-hazel. Geranium macu- 



ENEMAS. 237 

latum (crane's-bill) and catnip, with a little starch; su- 
mach leaves, red raspberry leaves, blackberry root, straw- 
berry leaves and roots. Make of any of these a tea of 
good strength, thicken a little with starch, and give in 
quantities of a gill, more or less, to have retained. The 
addition of some aromatic, as spearmint or pennyroyal, is 
of good service. Enemas of this character will generally 
relieve immediately the " bearing down" pains of dys- 
entery. 

Where the dysenteric pain is very severe, a small quan- 
tity of lobelia and asarum should be added to each enema. 

Formula — Hamamelis (witch-hazel), ....one tea-spoonful. 

Lobelia seed and asarum, each, \ u 

Hot water, one gill. 

Mix, thicken a little with starch, and use as previously 
directed. 

For diarrhea, the enemas should be similar to those for 
dysentery, with the addition of some stimulus, as ginger. 
Where the lower bowels are irritated, the enemas should 
be soothing. 

6. Enemas for colic. For flatulent (wind) colic of 
the bowels, the enemas should contain the same character 
of remedies that are useful when given to the stomach, as 
anise, ginger, spearmint, pennyroyal, catnip, capsicum, and 
with each one of these a little lobelia or asarum. If the 
accumulations of gas is in the stomach, sit up, and rub 
the abdomen and stomach upwardly with the hand. If 
the gas is confined to the bowels, aid its expulsion down- 
wardly, by rabbing the bowels, back and forth over the 
center, from top downward, then up the right side, across 
the top, then down the left side of the abdomen, thus fol- 
lowing the natural course of the intestines. A few minutes 
spent in this movement with a colicy infant will usually 
relieve its pain. Elevate its hips at the same time. 



238 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 27. 

For bilious or spasmodic colic, a powerful and continued 
relaxing influence is demanded. In such cases, use — 

Formula — Powdered lobelia seed, one tea-spoonful. 

Powdered asarum, one 

Starch to thicken fluid. 

Relieve bowels, if necessary, by the use of first or second 
formula, and give this, to be retained. When it sickens 
the stomach, give warm teas to aid vomiting. Repeat in 
an hour or two, if pain is severe; or continue in quanti- 
ties of one-half to one-fourth, if pain is lessened. Con- 
tinue until relief is obtained, even if patient becomes com- 
pletely relaxed. (See report of case No. 8.) 

7. Inflammation of bowels, or of any of the 
abdominal or pelvic organs. In cases of this character, 
lobelia, asarum, and elm are indicated, in moderate quan- 
tities, continually repeated, so as to keep the system re- 
laxed. The judgment of the nurse or attendant must be 
relied upon in the absence of the physician. If an emetic 
has already been given to clean the stomach, the enemas 
should be of such strength as to keep up relaxation, to 
keep down pain, and to moderate the rapidity and tension 
of the pulse, and these effects should be maintained. Mod- 
erate nausea is evidence of proper action of the remedies 
in such cases. If, after the enemas, there should be in- 
clination to vomiting, give mild hot teas, or hot water. 
Peritonitis, or child-bed fever, requires this kind of 
enemas. 

8. In acute rheumatism the enemas should be of 
similar character, quantity, and application, as described 
in last paragraph. They should be continuously applied. 

In chronic rheumatism, they should be of a positively 
relaxing character ; and if pushed to the complete relaxa- 
tion and prostration of the patient, and this condition kept 
up for twenty-four hours, many a patient would be able 



ENEMAS. 239 

to walk after it, who, perhaps, had not walked for months. 
Establish the condition of relaxation and maintain it until 
your patient is relieved. Have no fears of failure or ill 
effects. 

9. Nervous irritation and pain. These condi- 
tions are remarkably relieved by the use of enemas. 
The treatment should vary, according to the strength or 
debility of the patient. If there is some fever, general 
restlessness, and pain, the enemas should be mostly relax- 
ing, as of lobelia and asarum. If the patient is debili- 
tated and reduced, stimulus, as ginger, prickly-ash, or 
capsicum should be added. 

10. Cramps, spasms, lock-jaw and convulsions. 
In cases of this character, lobelia, asarum, and ginger 
or capsicum, are required. If the stimulus should prove 
too exciting to the bowels, so that the enema can not be 
retained, diminish it. Enemas of the antispasmodic tinc- 
ture, a tea-spoonful, more or less, to a gill of water, with 
a little starch added, are very efficacious. The previous 
strength of the patient should be considered in forming 
your judgment of the amount of stimulus to be used — 
debility always requiring more stimulus in connection 
with the relaxants. 

11. Enemas in fevers. Those who appreciate the 
benefits of lobelia, asarum, and kindred agents in fever, 
will readily understand that their application to the sys- 
tem, by way of enemas, will produce effects equal to what 
are produced when given by the stomach. The quantity 
is usually to be considerably increased. In our practice, 
we never stipulate for a definitely weighed or measured 
quantity, but for that quantity which will produce a desired 
effect. 

In typhoid fever, enemas afford a valuable means of 
keeping the system under the continued influence of med- 



240 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 27. 

icine, relieving the attendants of the necessity of frequently 
giving it by the mouth. 

12. In cases of great prostration, the use of medicine by 
enemas should be resorted to, in order to save the frequent 
rousing and voluntary efforts of the patient, which, in such 
cases, may prove quite injurious. An enema may some- 
times be administered to a very feeble and exhausted pa- 
tient without disturbing his or her sleep. 

13. In comatose conditions, in asphyxia, partial drown- 
ing, or insensibility from accidents or any other cause, 
enemas afford a prompt means of producing remedial im- 
pressions upon the nervous system. 

14. We have given considerable space to this subject, 
both from our estimate of its general applicability, and a 
desire to impress upon the minds of our readers the fact 
that a patient need not necessarily die because he is inca- 
pable of swallowing, as was supposed by the physicians 
who were called to the boy mentioned in case No. 7. 

15. In cases of extreme irritability of the stomach, or 
inflammation or other disease of that organ, nourishment 
has been given by enemas, and life prolonged and saved. 
The food should be fluid, as milk, meat broths, beef-tea, 
gruel, and rice-water. No salt should be added. 

With enemas of lobelia and asarum, extreme relaxation 
may be produced, followed by what are sometimes called 
" alarming symptoms." Our remarks on this condition, in 
the chapter on Emetics, will explain their cause, nature, 
and management. 



POULTICES. 241 

III. 

POULTICES. 

1. Poultices afford a means of locally affecting any part 
of the body to which they may be applied, in a variety of 
ways, depending upon the qualities of the substances em- 
ployed. When made of porous material, as corn-meal or 
bread, they serve as absorbents, to take up and remove 
from the surface of a diseased part any unhealthy exuda- 
tions; they serve to moisten the parts to which they are 
applied and to protect them from the air, and prevent the 
formation of dry scabs, which, by confining the exuding 
virus, would lead to further and deeper ulceration. 

2. Where the injury is recent, and upon a healthy por- 
tion of the body, as from a burn or abrasion, and the part 
simply needs protection, mucilaginous articles, as slippery- 
elm, flaxseed, mallows, or hollyhock leaves may be em- 
ployed. The tenacity and density of mucilage greatly 
prevents evaporation of moisture, except from its surface. 
Such poultices will retain moisture for a long time. 

3. When there is much inflammation, heat, and pain in 
a wound or ulcer, poultices should contain articles of a 
relaxing nature. Lobelia is the best and most powerful 
known to us, and may be applied to any extent with ben- 
efit. Relaxation and moisture are always required in 
such cases. The increased circulation in inflamed parts 
supplies the necessary warmth, and the tissues of the in- 
jured part will thus have the three requisites of warmth, 
moisture, and expansion necessary for free circulation in 
and through them, without which the healing process can 
not be well performed. 

4. Poultices afford a means for bringing astringent ar- 
ticles in contact with surfaces which are too relaxed ; or 



242 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 27. 

for applying stimulating articles to parts requiring an in- 
crease of vital action, as in cases of threatened mortifica- 
tion, or gangrene, or where the parts are cold and in- 
active. 

5. In ill-conditioned or putrescent ulcers and cancers, 
it is generally necessary to apply some chemical agent to 
neutralize the corrosive properties and unpleasant odors 
of the exudations and decomposing tissues. Antiseptics 
and neutralizing agents can be favorably employed in 
poultices for these purposes. 

6. Where a general effect is desired, the medicines may 
be combined in a poultice and applied over a large surface, 
as the entire chest and abdomen, or to cover the whole 
length of the spine. Absorption may be thus induced 
from the entire surface thus covered, with extensive stim- 
ulation or relaxation to the nervous system. 

A very important principle involved in the use of poul- 
tices is their permanency of action. The inconvenience 
of their presence is amply overbalanced by the ease they 
often afford, by the benefits produced, and by their obvi- 
ating the necessity of continual application of other means 
of relief. 

7. How to make a poultice. As we consider powdered 
slippery-elm bark to be the best material, in most cases, 
for the body of a poultice, we will here give our mode of 
using it for that purpose. The body of the poultice may 
be made of this, and any additional article may be spread 
thinly over its surface, or the whole articles may be mixed. 

Take powdered slippery-elm bark, a sufficient quantity ; 
mix with it any other powders that may be deemed neces- 
sary, add hot water, and stir it until completely mixed. 
Take a piece of cotton cloth, and a piece of old mosquito 
net, tarlatan, or other thin, open fabric, each of a size two 
or three inches every way larger than you intend the poul- 



POULTICES. 243 

tice to be; spread the poultice on the cotton cloth the 
desired size, and about a half inch in thickness, cover with 
the netting; gently pat it into the surface of the poultice; 
roll the edges of the two cloths together, all around, up to 
the edges of the poultice, and confine them by a few stitches. 
Your poultice is thus inclosed completely, and can not 
spread or escape. A few drops of sweet-oil may be applied 
to the skin or to the surface of the poultice, to prevent 
sticking. A poultice made in this way can be used two 
or three days in cold weather, or until it ^becomes sour or 
unfit for use. If it is to cover a bruise or a sprain, it may, 
when its edges become dry, be removed, moistened with 
hot water and re-applied. If it is for a running sore, of a 
foul character, it is unfit for use a second time. 

The poultice should be quite soft and moist, not lumpy, 
and spread of uniform thickness. 

8. Simple poultices. Slippery-elm bark, ground, with 
water; flaxseed, ground, with bo iling water; corn-meal; 
bread and milk; comfrey-roots ; carrots; purslane; Solo- 
inonVseal roots ; potatoes. 

The roots should be finely bruised, the vegetables should 
be boiled or grated. Good judgment will supply many 
other articles of similar qualities. 

9. For inflamed sores, or parts. Add to any simple 
poultice material, more or less of powdered lobelia herb or 
seed. Elm or flaxseed are preferable, as with them a small 
quantity is sufficient to give consistency to the poultice. 
One part of elm to three or four of lobelia, may be used 
where the pain, swelling, heat, and redness are very con- 
siderable. Applicable to boils, felons, recent sprains, and 
bruises, acute inflammation of any part, inflamed sores or 
wounds, and glandular swellings. 

10. Where there is congestion of any part, with dark or 
purple color, use the above, with the addition of powdered 



244 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 27. 

ginger, prickly-ash, or capsicum. The redness which ac- 
companies inflammation is indicative of circulation through 
the capillaries of the tissues; the dark color of congestion 
is indicative of stoppage of circulation within the capilla- 
ries. In the former case, relaxation alone is needed; in 
the latter, relaxation, with stimulation, is required. Car- 
buncles furnish a good illustration of the necessity of 
stimulation, with relaxation. They usually need the 
powerful stimulus of capsicum, to an extent sufficient to 
produce a positive smarting. In common boils, the cir- 
culation in the immediately contiguous tissues is sufficient 
to preserve them, and to confine the destruction to a very 
limited space. In carbuncles the line of division between 
the diseased and sound parts is not thus distinctly main- 
tained ; the system is generally feeble, depraved, or loaded 
with impurity; the blood is impure, and the inflammatory 
effort is poorly accomplished.* Vitality can offer only a 
feeble resistance to chemical affinity within the diseased 
tissues. Stimulation brings more blood to the parts, and 
thus acts in harmony with vitality. Such cases require 
constitutional as well as local treatment, and this is equally 
true in regard to boils, felons, sores, ulcers, abscesses, can- 
cers, and all affections of a local character. 

11. Pain or acute sensibility of a diseased part is evi- 
dence of vitality within it. Insensibility, where sensibility 
should naturally be, is evidence of feeble vitality. An 

* Inflammation is the natural and necessary result of the accumu- 
lation of vital action in any part, for its preservation or restoration 
after injury. Congestion is the stoppage of circulation within the 
capillaries. Suppuration, gangrene, and mortification occur only in 
those parts from which vitality is partially or wholly excluded, and 
are the result of chemical decomposition. Sloughing is the separa- 
tion of a dead portion of tissue from .a living portion. The destruc- 
tive processes are not the result of vital action ; they occur in oppo- 
sition to it. 



POULTICES. 245 

ulcer which is not sensitive needs powerful local stimula- 
tion. We have at times filled an ulcerous opening with 
powdered capsicum, and many hours and sometimes days 
would elapse before any smarting would be felt. After 
this a perceptible improvement would commence. , 

Sprains are often improperly treated by the excessive 
use of cold applications, and the parts left feeble and cold. 
Warmth, moisture, and stimulation are required to bring 
back the circulation into the parts. A poultice of elm, 
lobelia, and capsicum afford a good mode of permanent 
application. Inflammation or congestion of internal or- 
gans, as of lungs, liver, bowels, pleura, and peritoneum, 
which require external stimulation or counter-irritation, 
furnish a wide field for the use of a similar poultice. 
Deep-seated pains may often be promptly relieved by such 
means. They often prove far more serviceable than lini- 
ments, and answer every indication of a blister, without 
any of the injurious effects of the latter. 

12. Astringent and antiseptic poultice. 

Formula — Take charcoal, red-hot from the fire, and pulverize it 
Elm (or flax-seed), of each, equal parts. 
Water, a sufficient quantity ; to which add — 
Tincture of myrrh, according to judgment. 

This poultice is absorbent, mildly astringent, and stim- 
ulating in proportion to the quantity of myrrh employed, 
and antiseptic. It is applicable to open sores of a foul or 
degenerate character. Capsicum will be a desirable addi- 
tion if the parts are feebly sensitive or inactive. 

By the action of fire upon charcoal, any gases it -may 
have previously absorbed are driven off. It is then in its 
best condition for absorbing the impurities and unpleasant 
odors from the diseased surfaces to which it may be ap- 
plied. Freshly -burned charcoal will absorb many times 
its own bulk of gases. 



246 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 27. 

13. Antiseptic poultice. Yeast, thickened with wheat- 
flour and kept warm until it begins to rise, is a good 
poultice to promote suppuration and to correct the fetor 
of old sores. Powdered charcoal, fresh from the fire, is a 
desirable addition in some cases. 

14. Washing of sores. It is injurious to disturb the 
surface of a healing ulcer. If it secretes freely, and has 
no unpleasant odor, the poultice should contain some 
stimulating astringent, as myrrh, bayberry, crane's-bill, 
with ginger. Tincture of Balm of Gilead buds is especially 
applicable in such cases. Camphor is also a good addi- 
tion to the poultice. When the poultice is removed, the 
utmost that should be done to the ulcerated surface is to 
allow a little tepid water to flow over it, or to lay a moist 
fine linen rag on it, and remove it again very carefully 
after it has absorbed the secretion. The poultice should 
then be re-applied. In this connection, see paragraph 40 
in chapter on Emetics. 






MATERIA MEDICA. 247 



CHAPTER XXVIII. 

MATERIA MEDICA. 

1. In Chapter VI, we enumerated the principal causes 
of disease, their modes of attack, and the effects they pro- 
duce, with the indications for treatment. 

2. The object of the physician should be to aid nature 
in restoring the various organs and tissues to a physiolog- 
ical condition, so that the vital force can have full and 
free action in, upon, and through them. Its normal action 
is prevented whenever any portion of the body is unduly 
relaxed, contracted, weakened, or injured. In such cases, 
there will be obstructions to circulation and nervous action, 
and accumulation of improper or injurious material. 

3. Relaxants, stimulants, and astringents constitute the 
three principal classes of medicines, to which should be 
added such chemical agents as are sometimes required to 
neutralize poisons, and also those substances which have 
merely a mechanical influence. 

The neutralization of a poison is an illustration of the 
benefit that may result from the use of the motive power 
of chemical affinity. Other motive powers are useful, as 
caloric, to warm, expand, or stimulate the body, and elec- 
tricity to excite its action, etc. 

4. Comparatively few of the medicinal agents employed 
are possessed of only one single property. Lobelia, gel- 
seminum, and eupatorium perfoliatum appear to be very 

22 



248 THALEIA— WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

nearly pure relaxants, though their qualities of action are 
very different. Capsicum is very nearly a pure stimulant. 
Tannin and alum are probably pure astringents. Asa- 
rum combines a minor degree of stimulation, with positive 
relaxing properties. Ginger is quite stimulating and 
mildly relaxing. Bayberry is astringent and stimulating, 
and most other medicinal agents are compound in their 
properties. 

5. The physician should employ only those agents that 
operate in harmony with vital action. Such only are 
sanative — health-producing. Nature has provided these 
so abundantly that no one can be justified in using any 
others. 

6. When any organ of the body becomes incapable of 
performing its proper function, it is necessary to admin- 
ister a remedy that will influence it to normal action, and 
medicines are classified according to the effects which fol- 
low their administration. Those which promote the ac- 
tion of the bowels are termed cathartics. The influence 
of diuretics is manifested upon the urinary organs ; of di- 
aphoretics, upon the skin; of expectorants, upon the mu- 
cous membrane of the throat and lungs; of emenagogues, 
upon the special female organs ; of nervines and antispas- 
modics, upon the muscular and nervous tissues. But 
whatever may be the term used to signify their various 
actions, the effects are produced either by relaxation, stim- 
ulation, or contraction. 



CATHARTICS. 

7. Cathartics are medicines used to induce increased 
action of the bowels. They are arranged into classes ac- 
cording to their modes or qualities of action. One class, 



MATERIA MEDICA. 249 

of more merit than is usually assigned to it, consists of such 
articles of food as are known to produce an increase of 
alvine evacuations. A second class, of which rhubarb is 
an illustration, seems to augment the peristaltic movements 
of the bowels, by stimulating their muscular coats, causing 
forward movements of their contents, without any especial 
change in consistency. 

8. A third class influences the exhalants of the bowels, 
causing a large increase of mucous and serous fluids, and 
producing copious, thin, and watery discharges. They are 
termed hydragogues. A fourth class manifests less action 
directly upon the intestines, but more upon the neighbor- 
ing viscera, as the liver and pancreas, causing more flow 
of their secretions into the bowels, thereby increasing 
peristaltic action. These are termed cholagogues. 

9. Much mischief is produced by the continuous and 
indiscriminate use of strong cathartics, in the vain hope 
of thereby overcoming a constipated habit. A proper 
cathartic is one that will influence the bowels to action, 
without producing its effects at the expense of their normal 
irritability.* Constipation is a condition of deficient irri- 
tability ; and the forcing of an action by strong cathartics, 
and, after their effects have passed, permitting the bowels 
to lapse into their former inactive state until a repetition 
is required, only aggravates the difficulty they were in- 
tended to cure. 

Many cases of constipation are best treated by enemas 
and esculent laxatives. Others may be cured by the 
milder bitter laxatives, in connection with stimulants o£ 
a permanent character. Others may require a more posi- 
tive cathartic action in the beginning, but should be im- 

* Irritability, in the sense here used, means the capacity of an 
organ or tissue to manifest increased action under the influence of 
a proper stimulus. 



250 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

mediately followed by the treatment last indicated. In 
either case the normal action of the other organs should 
be maintained. 

It is frequently the case that old persons, who have been 
habitually constipated, and have pursued the erroneous 
course just mentioned, will find their bowels alternating 
in action between an obstinate constipation and an ex- 
hausting diarrhea, both of which are almost beyond the 
reach of cure. 

We here give the properties and modes of employment 
of a few of the more useful cathartics : 

10. Esculent laxatives, or those articles of food 
which have a tendency to open the bowels, are often very 
serviceable. Among these are sugar, honey, the dried 
pulp of various fruits, figs, tamarinds, boiled wheat, rye 
mush, bread made from unbolted flour, and stewed onions. 
By their use the necessity of strong cathartics may often 
be obviated. 

11. Bitter laxatives constitute another division of 
cathartic medicines. They are mild in their action, and 
most of them are more or less tonic. They are service- 
able in dyspepsia, debility, and nervous prostration. 

12. Menispermum canadensis — Yellow-parilla> vine- 
maple. In small doses this article produces very little 
effect. In large ones it produces a slight increase to the 
volume of the pulse, improved appetite, and digestion. 
The dose of the extract is three to five grains ; of the de- 
coction, a wine-glass full. 

13. Apocynttm andros^emifolium— Bitter-root, wan- 
dering milk-weed. This article is very similar in qualities 
and effects to the preceding one, and may be given in the 
same manner. The tincture is quite diuretic and emena- 
gogue. 

14. Taraxacum (dandelion) and eupatorium per- 



MATERIA MEDICA. 251 

FOLIATUM (boneset) are mildly laxative and tonic. They 
are used in extract and decoction. In cold infusion they 
are diuretic. 

15. Common cathartics. This class includes the 
articles most generally used in domestic and ordinary 
medical' practice. 

16. Rheum — Rhubarb. Many varieties from various 
sources are sold in the shops. Care should be used to 
obtain a pure article and from reliable dealers. 

In small doses, rhubarb acts as a mild astringent tonic, 
promoting digestion and the appetite. In doses of one 
scruple to one drachm, it proves gently and slowly ca- 
thartic. It is perfectly innocent in its effects on the sys- 
tem when properly given. Dose for an adult for cathartic 
action, twenty to thirty grains. In dysentery and diar- 
rhea the dose should be much smaller, four to eight 
grains every hour, until a favorable change is produced. 

.Rhubarb proves one of the most valuable remedies in 
diarrhea and dysentery. It possesses a mild astringent 
property, which is developed after its cathartic action has 
passed, so that the bowels are first cleansed of their irri- 
tating contents, and then gently astringed. It seldom 
fails to relieve any form of dysentery. 

17. Oleum ricini — Castor-oil. This is regarded as 
one of the mildest of purgatives, seldom causing griping, 
operating usually in from three to six hours, never pro- 
ducing very thin discharges, nor causing much debility. 

Dose for a child, from one tea-spoonful to one table- 
spoonful ; for an adult, about three times that quantity. 
It may be beaten up with the yelk of an egg and flavored 
a little; or may be mixed with three to four times its 
quantity of boiling milk, stirred until cool, and drank 
before the fluids separate ; or it may be drank floating on 
coffee or milk. 



252 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

18. Juglans cinerea — White walnut, butternut The 
bark of the root. We class this as one of the mildest 
and best of common cathartics. For our special mode of 
preparation and use, see Formula No. 10. 

19. Cholagogues. The cathartic effect of the articles 
of this class seems to be primarily upon the liver, as the 
evacuations which follow their use are mixed with a more 
than ordinary amount of bile. 

20. Leptandra virginica — Blackroot. We esteem 
this remedy very highly, for it has invariably met our 
expectations in practice. It operates with mildness and 
certainty, but not rapidly, and produces very little de- 
pression. The evacuations following its action are of 
moderate consistency, mixed with bile, showing that it has 
influenced the organ upon whose proper functional action 
the health of the bowels is so largely dependent. When 
used in connection with rhubarb, it has been very rare 
that any other article of a cathartic nature has been re- 
quired in our professional treatment of the various bowel 
complaints of children. 

The dose of the powdered root for an adult is one tea- 
spoonful; a very small amount of capsicum should be 
added. The fluid extract, the solid extract, and the resi- 
noid leptandrin, are the preparations most commonly used. 
Dose of the fluid extract, from fifteen to thirty drops; 
of the solid extract, three to five grains; of leptandrin, 
one to three grains. 

When administered for diarrhea or dysentery, the dose 
of either preparation should be reduced to one-fourth or 
one-fifth, and given at short intervals, until the desired 
change is produced. 

21. Podophyllum peltatum — Mandrake, May-apple. 
The crude root is seldom used, it having given place to 
the resinoid, podophyllin, which is prepared from it. 



MATERIA MEDICA. 253 

Thp latter is a medicine of very positive character. In 
very small and continuous doses its action is what is called 
alterative, producing a general increase of secretion and 
excretion, with no powerful action in any one direction. 
In doses of about one-fourth of a grain, it produces a very 
gentle cathartic and diuretic effect. In half-grain doses 
its cathartic power is increased to the production, after 
from six to ten hours, of two or three evacuations, fol- 
lowing each other at considerable intervals, of thin, fcecal 
matter, mixed with bile. In doses of one grain, its action 
is more speedy and of a decidedly hydragogue character, its 
effects continuing to be manifested for perhaps two days. 

With such doses there is little pain or griping, and 
there is not the usual tendency, after its action, to the 
constipation commonly attendant upon the use of most 
cathartics. In two-grain doses its effects are positively 
severe, such as nausea or vomiting, pain in stomach and 
bowels, and other symptoms very similar to dysentery. 
An increased dose will produce still more unfavorable 
effects, even upon the most robust adults, while doses 
much smaller would prove injurious to children. 

An article of such positive character should be used with 
careful discretion, particularly upon infants and children. 
We notice this remedy more in the way of caution than 
recommendation. In small proportions, and in combina- 
tion with stimulants and milder cathartics, we favor its 
use, but have ever avoided giving it to children. 

22. Jalap and senna are classed among the hydra- 
gogue cathartics. They are both quite mild in that respect 
when given in moderate doses, and when combined with 
an aromatic stimulant, as in the "antibilious powders," 
formula No. 11, they prove a safe, mild, and very prompt 
cathartic. They are used in dropsy to an extent sufficient 
to obtain their full hydragogue effect. 



254 THALEIA— WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

DIURETICS. 

23. No excretion of the body is subject to so many visible 
variations as that of the urinary organs. The almost daily 
changes in quantity and appearance of the urine, are not 
necessarily evidence of disease. In warm weather, when 
perspiration is free, the kidneys excrete much less than in 
cool or cold weather. A warm and dry atmosphere favors 
evaporation from the surface of the body, and thereby 
diminishes the fluid elements of urine, while a cool and 
moist atmosphere checks surface evaporation, and pro- 
portionally causes increase in the quantity of fluid removed 
by the kidneys. Variations in diet, and in the quantity 
and quality of fluid taken into the stomach, cause im- 
mediate variations in the quantity and appearance of the 
urinary excretion. Thus the odors of asparagus, onions, 
parsley, cabbage, and radishes are noticeable upon the urine. 
Many articles of food impart a color to it. Melons and 
many kinds of fruits cause its copious increase. Mineral 
elements in food and drink find their principal exit through 
this channel, and will frequently be deposited in consid- 
erable quantities in the vessel. These are but a portion 
of the causes of the almost daily variations to which we 
have referred, and their effects are evidences of a physio- 
logical action instead of being causes of alarm. 

24. Inactivity of the kidneys, with inflammation, scanty 
but frequent urination, and, in general, those derangements 
of the urinary organs which are accompanied by inflam- 
mation, heat, pain, and irritation, are best relieved by 
diuretics of a very mild relaxant or mucilaginous character. 

25. Common hemp-seed. This seed forms an excel- 
lent diuretic in such cases as are mentioned in the last 
paragraph. It is prepared for use by pouring a pint of 
boiling water upon three table-spoonfuls of the crushed or 



MATERIA MEDICA. 255 

ground seed, and allowing it to stand until it is cool. The 
dose is one table-spoonful for a child, or three for an adult, 
every half hour or more until relieved. 

26. Onions. This vegetable, when stewed and eaten, 
proves an excellent remedy in the cases just mentioned. 
It is particularly soothing to the inflamed or irritated 
urethra. Asparagus is also good. 

27. Lobelia and asarum. A w T eak tea of these two 
articles, well sweetened and taken in tea-spoonful doses 
every ten to fifteen minutes, will seldom fail to speedily 
relieve in similar cases. 

28. A tea of the leaves or roots of common parsley, or 
of the grated roots of carrots, are very good diuretics in 
mild cases like the foregoing. Lemonade, well sweetened, 
will frequently answer the same purpose. 

29. Stimulating diuretics. These are indicated in 
dropsical conditions, in gravel, in chronic cases of inac- 
tivity, or suppression of urine, w T ith but little inflammation 
or irritation. 

30. Eupatorium purpureum — Queen of the meadow. 
This is one of the most efficient diuretics of its class. It 
is prepared for use by steeping an ounce of the coarsely 
powdered root in a pint of boiling water for half an hour. 
Dose, from one to three fluid ounces, three times a day. 

31. Juniper — Berries and twigs. Prepare by infusing 
i an ounce of the berries or tops in a pint of boiling water. 

Dose, one gill every four to six hours. 

, 32. Apocynum cannabinum — Indian hemp. As 

| usually furnished by the druggists, this article is mixed 

with the apocynum androscemifolium, which it very closely 

resembles both in appearance and properties. Both these 

plants are diuretic and stimulating. They may be taken 

in moderate doses of mild decoction, or a tea-spoonful of 

tincture, diluted with water, three times a day. 
23 



256 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 



DIAPHORETICS. 

33. To maintain the health of the body, the skin should 
be in a condition that permits insensible perspiration to 
go on at all times, and should also be capable of visible 
perspiration during moderate physical exertion, if the 
weather is not too cold. We have given, in a previous 
chapter, some of the effects which follow when the skin 
fails to perform its proper office. 

34. Diaphoretics, or sudor ijics, are medicines which 
increase the action of the skin. Their use is particularly 
called for in febrile and inflammatory forms of disease of 
every character. They promote the evacuation of the 
waste material of the system, and lessen the temperature 
of the body through the evaporation of the moisture. 
Dropsy may often be greatly relieved by means of full 
perspiration. In all forms of acute eruptive disease, as 
measles, scarlatina, etc., it is of absolute benefit to keep 
the skin active. 

35. Sulphur, asclepias tuberosa, and a number of other 
articles seem to possess a direct property of influencing the 
secretion of the skin without producing any other marked 
effects upon the system. Other articles, as lobelia, eu- 
patorium (boneset), and anthemis (May-weed), promote 
perspiration through their relaxing and nauseating effects; 
a third class, which includes capsicum, ginger and aristolo- 
chia, increase the circulation and warmth of the body, and 
induce perspiration through the excitement they produce. 

36. It may be readily inferred that proper discrimi- 
nation is required in selecting from these three classes. 
Where there is fever and excitement already present, it 
would be proper to use such articles as will relax the 
tension of the system, and at the same time promote the 



MATERIA MEDICA. 257 

action of the skin. Hence the articles of the second class 
should be selected. In cases of obstructed skin, with no 
fever or excitement/ the third class should furnish the 
remedy; and the first class may afford us the proper 
means when active stimulation, decided relaxation and 
nausea, or the application of moisture and warmth to the 
surface are undesirable or inconvenient. 

37. Asclepias TUBEROSA — Pleurisy or white-root. The 
use of this article is followed by increased action of the 
skin without nausea or excitement. It may be given 
freely in hot infusion of a pint of boiling water to an 
ounce of the crushed or powdered root. In this form its 
best effects are most speedily manifested. The addition 
of ginger in quantity sufficient to impart its taste to the 
infusion will aid the action very considerably. 

The quantity above directed may be boiled down to a 
half pint, strained and sweetened with honey, and given 
in table-spoonful doses every two or three hours as an 
expectorant. A little ginger will improve it in most 
cases. 

38. Pterospora Andromeda — Crawley. This rem- 
edy operates very similar to asclepias, and may be pre- 
pared in same manner. It is generally given in powder 
in doses of twenty to thirty grains. 

39. Lobelia inflata, through its invaluable property 
of relaxation, is, in our mind, the best known diaphoretic 
in cases of high fever and inflammation, with a hot and 
dry skin. We prefer the infusion to any other form for 
administration. Take a tea-spoonful of the powdered 
herb, pour over it a tea-cup full of boiling water, and let 
stand to cool. Give this in doses of a tea-spoonful, more or 
less, every ten to twenty minutes until nausea is produced, 
after which the quantity and frequency may be diminished 
to the extent necessary to maintain the nausea. 



258 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

40. Asakum canadensis, alone or in connection with 
lobelia, may be given in infusion, made from a table- 
spoonful of the powder to a pint of boiling water, as 
directed for lobelia. Dose, from a tea to a table-spoonful 
every fifteen minutes until the desired effect is produced. 
Valuable in all cases where lobelia is indicated. 

41. Eupatomum pekfoliatum — Boneset. In hot in- 
fusion, in quantities sufficient to nauseate, will prove an 
excellent diaphoretic in fever and inflammation. 

42. Xanthoxylum (prickly-ash) is a stimulating diapho- 
retic of very superior efficacy. Its best effects are most 
speedily obtained when it is given in hot infusion. A tea- 
spoonful of the powdered bark to a pint of boiling water. 
Drink hot and freely. 

Ginger is also one of the best stimulating diaphoretics. 
Every housekeeper knows how to make a cup of ginger 
tea. Drink hot and freely. 

43. Spearmint, peppermint, pennyroyal, balm y sage, cat- 
nip, lavender and spice-bush are each very pleasant and 
mildly stimulating diaphoretics. Tliey should be pre- 
pared with boiling water, and drank hot. Our preference 
is for spearmint herb, with the addition of ginger, when 
needed to increase the stimulating effect. Catnip and 
ginger form a compound equally good for the same pur- 
pose, and very desirable for infants on account of its mild 
and soothing action. 

44. The action of diaphoretics may be much favored by 
the application of moisture and heat to the surface, as by 
the warm-bath, vapor-bath, by placing hot bricks or irons 
under the bed-clothing, and by soaking the feet and ankles 
in hot water. 



MATERIA MEDICA. 259 



EXPECTORANTS. 

45. Acute bronchial and lung affections, with dryness, 
irritation, inflammation, and husky cough, demand the re- 
laxants and nauseants. Chronic affections of the same 
organs, with collections of cold, tough phlegm, require 
stimulation — the object of treatment in either case being 
to bring about a normal action of the mucous membrane 
of those organs. 

As a rule, the patient should use quite small quantities, 
frequently repeated, rather than large doses at considera- 
ble intervals. The medicines should be allowed to pass 
slowly down, so as to spread all about the throat, as its 
close proximity to the bronchia will affect the latter more 
rapidly and continuously than when passed rapidly into 
the stomach. Such remedies as have aromatic and vola- 
tile properties may be applied directly in a state of vapor 
by inhalation. A closed vessel, to contain the medicine, 
with a tin or rubber tube leading from it to conduct the 
vapor to the mouth, may be placed on a hot stove, or in 
a vessel of hot water. In dry asthma, the vapor of vine- 
gar and water is often an excellent remedy ; in spasmodic 
asthma, use vapor from boiling water, as in the vapor-bath. 
The smoke from burned lobelia leaves will frequently be 
of benefit in similar cases. Tar, pitch, and the various 
balsams may be dropped on hot coals, and the vapors in- 
haled for the relief of chronic bronchitis and consumption. 

46. Lobelia inflata is the best known expectorant, 
i The formulas for cough syrups will show its mode of 
i preparation and use. Ipecac is also a good expectorant. 

Bloodroot is esteemed for this purpose by many, but 

both are inferior to lobelia. The latter-named article 

imay be added to most other expectorants, in greater or 

1 less quantities, to very good purpose. An emetic of lo- 



260 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

belia, properly given, is the most powerful expectorant that 
we know of. 

ANTISPASMODICS. 

47. These are remedies given for the prevention or re- 
lief of spasm. As spasm may arise from various causes, 
such as intestinal irritation from undigested food or worms, 
or the reflex nervous action from injuries at distant parts, 
as lock-jaw; from obstruction to the action of various or- 
gans, as in colic; from injuries or blows upon the head, 
from fright, great mental shocks or emotions, from severe 
pain, hysteria, or from mere debility with excitement, the 
permanent relief requires the removal of the cause by ap- 
propriate means as effectually and speedily as possible. 
Except in mere debility, we consider lobelia as the most 
powerful and safest antispasmodic within the reach of the 
medical profession, and we can not imagine a case of spasm 
where its administration, in greater or less quantity, would 
be injudicious. The greater the tonicity or excitement, 
the more freely should lobelia be administered. It should 
be combined with stimulus in proportion to the weakness 
or depression of the system. 

48. Asafetida, though not reliable in violent spasms, 
convulsions, and apoplexy, is a very valuable agent in the 
milder forms of nervous affections, as hysteria, general 
nervousness, and in hooping-cough. It is best v given in 
pills. One or two of ordinary size is a dose. 

49. Scutellaria lateriflora. Skull-cap has some- 
how secured a reputation as a prophylactic for hydro- 
phobia. We should prefer lobelia. The skull-cap is, 
nevertheless, a valuable antispasmodic in minor affec- 
tions. The dose of the powder is from fifteen to forty 
grains; of the tincture, one to three drachms; of the 
extract, five to ten grains. 



MATERIA MEDICA. 261 

50. Gelseminum semper virens — Yellow jessamine. 
This article, as far as a somewhat extensive use of it in 
our professional career may warrant us in speaking, is a 
very positive and powerful relaxant. In excessive doses 
it is said to prostrate, or completely and quite perma- 
nently to relax the entire system. In whatever quantity 
it may be used it produces little or no result beyond that 
of relaxation, with no nausea or excitement at any period. 
It is quite slow in producing its effects, and equally slow 
in passing off. We consider it a very valuable agent in 
maintaining the relaxation produced by lobelia and 
kindred agents, for the reason that much annoyance from 
repeated doses is avoided. 

In doses of five drops of the tincture every hour, until 
its effect becomes manifest, and continued in less quantity, 
or at greater intervals, or given in doses of fifteen drops 
every four to six hours, we consider it an entirely safe and 
reliable remedy. It should be preceded by an emetic of 
lobelia where there is any indication for the same. 

On its first introduction to the notice of the medical 
profession, it met with what we honestly believe to have 
been a prejudiced condemnation from some, and its use 
w r as avoided by others from a laudable desire to avoid 
every thing that might by any possibility be productive 
of mischief, and we confess to have been to a considerable 
extent upon the latter ground. We have, from actual use — 
very cautiously at first — been led to adopt the opinion 
herein expressed, and can recommend its use within the 
limits we have detailed. We have never noticed an un- 
favorable symptom in any way traceable to its adminis- 
tration, and we have given it (in one case of great cerebral 
excitement) in doses of thirty drops of the saturated al- 
coholic tincture every half hour for four hours, with the 
happiest result. 



262 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 



STIMULANTS. 



51. Stimulants are articles which excite the circulation 
of the blood and nervous action, and through them cause 
increase of functional performance of the various organs. 
A judicious practice admits only such as are not followed 
by an injurious depression, as is the case with alcoholic 
stimulants generally. 

52. Stimulants are indicated in cases of general depres- 
sion, and in many such conditions they rapidly relieve 
the accompanying irritability, excitement, or spasmodic 
action. They are called for in those forms of disease 
characterized by a marked and rapid tendency to decom- 
position of the fluids and destruction of portions of the 
more solid tissues and organs, with great suspension of 
all secretion and excretion — as in scarlet fever, yellow 
fever, putrid sore throat, typhoid fever, gangrene, and 
mortification — and in general where there is an evident 
tardiness of action in the system, in debility and exhaust- 
ion. 

The general idea of stimulation is instinctive in the 
human race in every portion of the world, but it is 
usually produced by alcoholic or other injurious excitants, 
and is productive of more injury than benefit. 

53. Many articles termed stimulants are only so in ap- 
pearance and for the time. Tobacco is so classed, but its 
true quality is the opposite, for when given in full doses 
it completely relaxes and prostrates. Opium deadens the 
power to feel and to act, and such effects result from the 
intrinsic properties or qualities of these articles, and these 
are not in the least altered by increasing or diminishing 
the quantity. The stimulation which is observed to fol- 
low their use in small quantities results from the effort 
made by the vital force to repel or resist the attacks of 



MATEEIA MEDICA. 263 

these injurious agents, and it is a trial of strength in 
which the vital force is often obliged to yield. Hence it 
is said that such articles are stimulating in small doses 
and otherwise in large ones. A proper and sanative 
stimulant is one that will increase the action of the sys- 
tem in proportion to the quantity used, that is followed 
by no other effect than increase of functional perform- 
ance, and that produces no secondary depression, lesion, 
or injury. 

54. Capsicum anntjum — Cayenne, or African pepper. 
This is the most perfect and powerful stimulant known 
to the medical profession. It possesses, in the highest 
degree, the characteristics of a prompt and general ex- 
citant. When applied to the surface, it causes a rapid 
increase of circulation, with redness, a feeling of warmth 
and smarting, the capillaries become crowded with red 
blood, and the temperature is slightly increased. There is 
no stoppage of circulation in the tissues thus influenced, 
no dryness nor effusion as in inflammation. These effects 
diminish in the course of a few hours, even though the 
application is continued. It may be applied for any 
length of time to the most sensitive portions of the body, 
even to denuded surfaces, and it will only produce its 
characteristics in a more marked degree. It simply stim- 
ulates the tissues to an increase of natural action, often to 
a very high degree, without the least assault upon their 
integrity. On the contrary, circulation, nervous action, 
and functional capacity are all promoted. 

55. To the mouth it imparts an immediate sensation 
of warmth, with increase of mucous and salivary secre- 
tion. To the stomach, in moderate quantities, it produces 
a local impression of warmth, which soon spreads over 
the entirfe system, the circulation is increased, and all the 
functions of the body are more actively performed. Di- 



264 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

gestion is particularly promoted, and an increased vigor 
of body and mind is experienced. 

56. It is always best to commence its use in small quan- 
tities, much diluted, in order to avoid the unpleasant burn- 
ing in the stomach, which is sometimes produced by large 
and concentrated doses. The burning may be relieved by 
cream, milk, bread and butter, or most kinds of ordinary 
food. Beyond the inconvenience of the pain, no unpleas- 
ant results have ever been noticed, even from very large 
doses. 

The uses of capsicum, in disease, are very extensive. 
As it is a pure and simple excitant, it may be given in 
any case where such action is required in any portion of 
the system. Its power to promote the equilibrium of 
circulation and nervous action is of the highest value. 

57. The only cases in which capsicum is particularly 
contra-indicated, are those of high grades of fever or in- 
flammation, with a dry, husky skin and severe headache. 
Such cases call for relaxation of the contracted tissues be- 
fore any remedy of a stimulating nature is administered. 

58. For external application, the alcoholic or the vin- 
egar tincture are the most convenient preparations; 
where only a small surface is to be covered, the pow- 
dered capsicum may be sprinkled over a poultice, or a 
strong decoction may be made, and flannel saturated with 
it and applied; or a strong decoction may be added to 
sweet-oil or lard, and simmered until the water has evap- 
orated, to form an ointment ; or the powder may be incor- 
porated with lard for the same purpose. 

59. Internally, for immediate effect, use the tincture or 
infusion, more or less diluted, and sweetened in most 
cases. For chronic cases, where its use is to be kept up 
for a considerable time, the powder may be mixed with 
thick molasses, and made into pills ; or a tea-spoonful of 



MATERIA MEDICA. 265 

the powder may be stirred into a tea-cupful of molasses, 
and taken in tea-spoonful doses. In the latter form, and 
in pills, it will be found very serviceable in many cases 
of dyspepsia, and in cold or inactive conditions generally. 
The powder may be combined with the extracts of the 
milder laxatives, as dandelion and boneset, or with a more 
active cathartic extract, as butternut or leptandra, for con- 
stipation. In such cases, its moderate use should be kept 
up until the constipation is removed. Its use as a stim- 
ulant in a " common cold," in the form of pepper tea, 
needs no especial mention beyond a recommendation. In 
combination with lobelia and cyprepedium, it forms the 
best general antispasmodic within our knowledge. 

60. Ginger. This article is a most excellent and 
prompt diffusive stimulant, principally used in tincture, 
infusion, and syrup. As a simple stimulant, in ordinary 
cases, it will answer very well as a substitute for capsicum. 
As a carminative, it may be used to superior advantage 
with catnip, for the minor colicky, febrile, and nervous 
affections of children. With rhubarb, it is of excellent 
service in diarrhea, dysentery, cholera morbus, and cholera 
infantum. Its universality of employment in households 
has undoubtedly prevented its use by physicians to the 
extent it merits, because the simplicity of such a remedy 
is beneath the dignity conferred by the diploma. For 
medical purposes, care should be taken to obtain a pure 
article of Jamaica or African ginger, as what is sold for 
domestic purposes is usually largely adulterated. 

61. Xanthoxylum fraxineum — Prickly-ash. This 
is a very positive general stimulant, quite slow and per- 
manent in action. It may be used to advantage in cases 
where capsicum or ginger are required. It is commonly 
administered in tincture or infusion. It is particularly 
serviceable, in combination with asclepias (white-root), in 



266 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

cases of feeble circulation, with cold, inactive surface and 
extremities. It should be given for such conditions, in 
moderately strong and hot infusion, frequently and con- 
tinuously. It is highly recommended in cases of rheu- 
matism. 

62. Spicy stimulants. Cinnamon, cloves, alspice, and 
black pepper are each excellent stimulants, generally ap- 
plicable in bowel complaints, and as carminatives. For 
children, the better form of use is in tea or infusion. The 
oils prepared from them are powerfully pungent, and are 
much used in liniments, and in some of the popular " pain- 
killers, balms, and cholera mixtures." In such prepara- 
tions they are not out of place. 

63. Camphor. Physicians of all schools have agreed 
in the extensive use of this medicine, though they differ 
widely in their explanation of its properties and effects. 
To the nervous system, it is antispasmodic and anodyne ; 
to the circulation, it is directly stimulating. Upon the 
glandular system, when externally applied, its influence is 
somewhat peculiar. When used upon the lacteal glands (the 
breasts), it lessens their activity, diminishes or arrests en- 
tirely the secretion of milk, and, if too long continued, will 
cause* them to greatly diminish in size. In this connec- 
tion, see paragraphs 15 and 16, Chapter XXII. Its ap- 
plication should be lessened as soon as the first effects are 
produced. For scrofulous swellings of the glands, particu- 
larly those of the neck, it will be found very serviceable. 
Effects similar in character to these are noticed upon other 
glands, when applied locally, but its internal administra- 
tion is not known to produce them. In large doses it 
over excites the brain. Its rapidity of action renders it a 
valuable agent in many emergencies, as in suspended an- 
imation, fainting, vertigo, hemorrhages (more especially 
of the uterus), etc. It is a valuable stimulant in cholera 



MATERIA MEDICA. 267 

and other excessive discharges from the bowels, and in 
sinking conditions generally. Small doses, often repeated, 
are much better than large ones. One drop of the tinc- 
ture is the average dose we employ, repeated more or less 
frequently, as the case may require. 

64. Acorus calamus — Sweet-flag. This is a some- 
what aromatic stimulant, and is used mostly in dyspepsia, 
flatulency, and the colicky affections of children. It is 
quite pleasant to the taste, and is often used to perfume 
the breath. For children, it is best given in moderately 
strong infusion, sweetened. 

65. Myrrh. This is a gum-resin, brought to us from 
Arabia and adjacent provinces. It is classed as a stimu- 
lating tonic, emenagogue, and expectorant. It is prin- 
cipally employed in the form of tincture. 

Tincture of myrrh, when taken internally, imparts 
a pleasant feeling of warmth to the stomach, and if suffi- 
cient quantity is taken, the influence extends to the whole 
system. It is useful in dyspepsia, in bowel complaints 
generally, and particularly in cases of feeble vital reaction, 
as in malignant, putrid, and pestilential disorders — in 
I dysentery, malignant scarlatina, and cholera. It is valu- 
able as a stimulating expectorant in consumption and in 
humid asthma. 

In combination with tincture of capsicum, it forms a 
most excellent remedy for debility accompanied with night- 
sweats. 

The tincture is very useful in ulcerations of the mouth 
and throat, and of mucous surfaces generally, (see direc- 
tions for its use in Leucorrhoea) ; for ill-conditioned sores, 
chronic and indolent ulcers, for mucous or ulcerated sur- 
faces, the secretions of which are of unpleasant odor, for 
sores with loose, feeble, flabby, and pale granulations, and 
for carbuncles. It may be applied in full strength to such 



268 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

as are inactive, or diluted for such as are quite sensitive. 
It is valuable as a wash for the gums in scurvy, and may 
also be used internally with benefit. 

The dregs which remain after the resinous portion has 
been dissolved by alcohol, in making the tincture, are a 
very useful addition to a poultice, for the cases indicated 
in last paragraph. 

66. Tincture of Balm of Gilead buds (populus 
candicans), or the tincture of the buds of the balsam pop- 
lav (P. Balsamifera), will answer in place of the tinc- 
ture of myrrh for nearly all purposes mentioned in last 
section, and particularly in cases where suppuration is 
very free, and for all fresh bruises and cuts. For the lat- 
ter, bind up the injured part properly, and saturate the 
bandage with the tincture. It causes considerable smart- 
ing for a short time only, but this is amply compensated 
for by the rapidity of the healing. 

ASTRINGENTS. 

67. Astringents are medicinal agents which directly 
contract the living tissues, more especially the muscular 
fiber. They are applicable in cases of general relaxation 
and debility, especially in those that are accompanied with 
exhausting discharges, as in dysentery, cholera, diabetes, 
hemorrhages ; also in cases of circumscribed relaxation, as 
of the uvula and tonsils, prolapsus uteri, piles, prolapsus 
ani, etc. They combine favorably with stimulants and 
tonics, giving more permanency to the effects produced by 
these two classes of remedies. 

The vegetable astringents derive much of their power, 
in this respect, from the tannic acid which they contain. 
This organic acid will combine with albumen and gelatine, 
hardening them and rendering them insoluble, thus pre- 






MATERIA MEDICA. 269 

venting decomposition, as is well illustrated in the tanning 
of animal skins to form leather. This property is found 
very serviceable in arresting the putrefaction of fluids, or 
soft solids that have lost their vitality, as in mortification, 
gangrene, and in suppurating wounds and sores, and viti- 
ated mucous secretions. The power of astringents to pro- 
mote vomiting, should be borne in mind whenever an oc- 
casion for a prompt emetic may arise. 

68. Geranium maculatum — Crane's-bill. The root of 
this plant is probably unsurpassed as a pure astringent. 
It may be used in any case or for any purpose indicated in 
the preliminary remarks. Water, either cold or hot, is 
the best solvent for its medicinal properties. 

A syrup may be made by boiling two pounds of the 
coarsely-crushed root, three or four hours, in six quarts 
of water, then strain and evaporate to one quart, in which 
dissolve three pounds of white sugar. The dose may be 
from one to three tea-spoonfuls. It will be found a pleas- 
ant and useful remedy for diarrhea and dysentery. The 
addition of four ounces each of rhubarb and cinnamon 
bark to the geranium will improve it for most cases. A 
strong decoction of it may be used in making a poultice, or 
the powdered root may be used on the surface. 

69. Hamamelis virginica — Witch-hazel. The leaves 
of this plant contain a mild but quite effective astringent 
property, with some nervine or diffusive principle. The 
combination renders it an article of superior value in dys- 
entery, or hemorrhage of any internal organ, for relaxed, 
debilitated, and irritated mucous surfaces, and for general 
debility with excitement. It may be depended upon, if 
used with equal parts of asclepias (white-root), by enema, 
and retained, to relieve the bearing-down pains of dysen- 
tery. In this respect, we know of no superior remedy. 
It fQrms an excellent, mild astringent poultice, for irrita- 



270 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

ble sores, and its strong infusion has a happy effect as a 
vaginal injection for leucorrhoea with ulceration and ex- 
coriation. 

Its power of almost instantly arresting hemorrhage of 
the uterus has been abundantly proven. For this pur- 
pose, it is best given in connection with ginger, in infu- 
sion. 

70. Ceanothtjs Americantjs — New Jersey tea, red- 
root. The bark of the root of this plant is decidedly as- 
tringent, and may be used in cases that require a moderate 
degree of astringent influence. We are mostly familiar 
with its virtues as a remedy in ulcerations of the mouth 
and throat, in which it is of decided value. It is used in 
infusion and decoction. 

71. Myrica cerifera — Bayberry. The bark of the 
root is the part here spoken of. This is a very powerful 
and prompt stimulating astringent. It imparts to the 
mouth an acrid, bitterish, and astringent sensation, fol- 
lowed by a free secretion of saliva and mucus. Its ac- 
tion upon the mucous surface of the stomach and bowels is 
of a similar character. Its long-continued administration 
is not productive of any constipation. A very small por- 
tion of the powder is sufficient to excite sneezing, if taken 
as a snuff, with increase of expectoration and mucous se- 
cretion from the nose and throat. Those who desire a 
cephalic snuff to relieve catarrh or a " cold in the head," 
will find in powdered bayberry a very efficient article. 

An infusion of a tea-spoonful each of bayberry and 
witch-hazel in a half-pint of boiling water, sweetened, and 
given in tea-spoonful doses frequently, will be found val- 
uable in the ordinary diarrheas of infants and children. 

72. Quercus — Oak The bark of most of the oak- 
trees, and particularly the white oak, is an excellent as- 
tringent. Its power in this respect is derived from the 



MATEKIA MEDICA. 271 

tannic and gallic acids which it contains. Hot water will 
extract these from the bark, and the decoction may then 
be evaporated to a proper consistency, and the resulting 
extract used for any purposes requiring a powerful and 
purely astringent action. This extract may be spread t>n 
stiff leather, and applied over a recent rupture, and if its 
use is kept up for a considerable time, it will accomplish a 
radical cure in many cases. As a simple astringent, it is 
applicable for internal use in doses of three to ten grains. 

73. Galls. These are produced upon oak-trees, and 
are imported from Asia Minor. They are not the fruit 
of the tree, but excrescences resulting from injuries to it 
made by insects. They are in the form of roundish, 
marble-sized bodies, with blunt points on their otherwise 
smooth surfaces. They are easily powdered, and contain, 
when of the best quality, about one-fourth of their weight 
of pure tannin, or tannic acid, or in some cases as much 
as one-half, or even more. They also contain a consid- 
erable quantity of gallic acid, another powerful astringent. 

An article containing so great a proportion of the pecu- 
liar astringent principle must necessarily be found espe- 
cially useful as a styptic, for the purpose of arresting hem- 
orrhage, when it can be applied locally, as well as for any 
other needed astringent effect. For all local purposes, 
'powdered galls may be used, or be given internally, if re- 
quired, in doses of from five to twenty grains. A power- 
fully astringent extract may be made by evaporating -a 
decoction to proper consistency, which may be used for 
ulcerations, gangrene, or relaxed organs and tissues, etc., 
or given internally in doses of from three to ten grains. 
Combined with tonics, where the condition of the bowels 
will permit, this article, in powder or extract, will greatly 
increase their efficiency and permanency of action. 

74. Tannic acid — Tannin. The isolated or pure as- 

24 



272 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

tringent principle. Applicable in all cases, and may be 
used in any compound to increase its astringent quality. 
Particularly valuable as a styptic. Tannin is so abun- 
dantly interspersed among the vegetable medicines that 
there is no difficulty in obtaining astringent remedies in 
any part of the inhabitable world. 

75. Alum. Too well known to require description. 
Valuable as a local astringent, particularly upon mucous 
surfaces. A table-spoonful of strong alum-water, three 
times a day, will usually cheek the excessive flow in 
inenorrhagia. It is particularly applicable in this condi- 
tion at the change of life. 

A piece of alum may be put on a hot stove and kept 
there until its water of crystallization is entirely driven off. 
It may then be powdered, and will be found an excellent 
application for ulcerations of the mouth and throat. It 
should be applied dry, and may be blown through a quill 
so as to reach the fauces. It is very good to astringe the 
relaxed tonsils or uvula, but for this purpose not as good 
as tannin or bayberry. 

TONICS. 

76. Tonics are medicinal substances which serve to tone 
up the system and increase its strength and vigor. Most 
vegetable bitters are tonic in their effect. Some, however, 
contain other principles. Thus, boneset and dandelion are 
laxative or mildly cathartic as well as tonic. Others, 
like the aristolochia (Virginia snakeroot) and the Jeffer- 
sonia (hoin-leaf), are stimulating and diaphoretic. Often 
the tonic or bitter principle is found combined with a va- 
riety of other principles, and good judgment can select 
from these natural compound remedies a single article that 
will answer a variety of desired remedial purposes. 



MATERIA MEDICA. 273 

77. Common or simple bitter tonics. Populus 
tremuloides (quaking poplar), populus balsamifera (balsam 
poplar), populus candicans (balm of Gilead), Hriodendron 
tulipifera (tulip tree or yellow poplar) , hydrastis (golden- 
seal), coptis (gold-thread), cerasus serotina (wild cherry.) 
These possess nearly a pure tonic property, and might be 
used instead of the articles mentioned in Formula No. 17. 

78. Stimulants and mild astringents should generally be 
combined with the simple tonics where there is any ten- 
dency toward diarrhea. Where constipation is present, the 
laxative bitters are needed, as dandelion, boneset, menis- 
permum (yellow-parilla), apocynum (bitter-root). A very 
good laxative tonic preparation is given in Formula 
No. 18. 

79. But little benefit is to be expected from the use of 
tonics where the stomach is foul, bowels long inactive, and 
system generally obstructed. It would be contrary to 
good medical practice to attempt to tone up the system 
while in such a condition. Emetics should be first given 
to cleanse the stomach; the bowels, kidneys, and skin 
should be rendered active, and, after general excretion has 
somewhat purified the system, tonics will be of avail. 

Quinine, which is deemed by many the best tonic and 
antiperiodic, should not be given to one whose stomach is 
foul and bowels constipated. It should never be given to 
persons of sanguine temperament, nor to those in whom 
the sanguine element predominates. With such it is very 
liable to produce permanent deafness, or "ringing in the 
* ears." 

It is thought by many that quinine and arsenic are the 
best, and, perhaps, only specifics for fever and ague. In 
our treatment of that form of disease, we use neither of 
them. 

80. If we are called twenty-four hours before the usual 



274 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

time for the chill, we give a cathartic sufficient to free the 
bowels if they are constipated. We generally use Formula 
Nos. 16 or 31. About three hours before the time for the 
chill, we commence with an emetic (see directions), con- 
tinuing it until the stomach is well cleansed, the system 
well warmed, and perspiration established. This is fol- 
lowed by warm bathing or washing, and rubbing the 
body and limbs with vinegar and capsicum (Formula 
No. 15). There will usually be no signs of a chill that 
day. We then give Formula No. 20, according to direc- 
tions, for a week; then twice a day for ten days. In 
nine cases out of ten, this treatment will entirely cure, 
and there will be no chill, and consequently no fever, after 
the first emetic. Occasional cases may require, on the 
days for the chill, several repetitions of the first day's 
treatment. 

81. We attribute fever and ague not to miasma, but to 
the effects upon the system of heat, cold, and moisture. 
In those sections where this form of disease is most prev- 
alent, the ground is generally low, and the soil deep, 
porous, and full of moisture, from which rapid evaporation 
is continually going on. A moist atmosphere is an ex- 
cellent conductor of caloric. During the day the atmos- 
phere receives a large amount of heat from the sun, and 
the body is thus in a species of vapor-baths, the continued 
effect of which is to relax and debilitate the system. The 
heated ground continues to give off its vapor during the 
evening and night, which is condensed in the cool atmos- 
phere in form of fog, and upon vegetation in form of 
heavy dew, a condition very favorable to the abstraction 
of the heat of the body. The night air rapidly chills the 
body and drives circulation inwardly, crowding and de- 
ranging the internal organs. The extreme of this condi- 
tion is congestion, and the congestive chill, which is so 



MATEBIA MEDICA. 2/0 

frequently fatal, is but an extreme case of chill and fever, 
in which vitality is unable to restore the equilibrium of 
the system. 

82. The phenomena of a paroxysm of fever and ague 
are easily comprehended when we consider the conditions 
produced by the causes just mentioned. Fever is an in- 
creased vital effort for the removal of obstruction, and for 
restoring equilibrium of circulatory and nervous action, 
and it operates from the centers to the surfaces. For 
some hours previous to a chill, there is usually a feeling 
of languor and debility. As reaction commences, nervous 
action advances more rapidly than the circulation, and the 
surface lacking that supply of blood necessary to impart 
a feeling of warmth to the nerves, a continued sensation 
of chilliness is produced. The continuance of the vital 
effort is manifested in the increased circulation and heat, 
or fever y until it succeeds in restoring the lost equilibrium, 
and perspiration ensues. The action then subsides, hav- 
ing accomplished its work. If the equilibrium could be 
maintained there would be no subsequent chill, but com- 
monly the blood recedes again, under the influence of the 
first causes, and a repetition of the vital effort is required. 

In our treatment, we aim to remove obstructions, to 
equalize the action of the system, and to maintain it by the 
use of tonics. The latter should be continued for some 
time to prevent relapse. 

83. In fever and ague districts, the inmates of houses 
which are situated in the midst of a grove of forest trees 
enjoy almost an immunity from this form of disease. The 
extreme heat of the sun does not penetrate there; fogs and 
heavy dews do not reach them; the atmosphere is cooler 
by day and warmer by night, and there are few sudden 
changes of temperature, all of which are conditions favor- 
able to health. We have observed these facts in the 



276 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

prairies and low grounds of the West ; and Prof. Powell's 
observations in the South show that similar situations 
aiford nearly a complete protection against the various 
fevers of the most sickly sections, even where swamps 
nearly surround the timbered land. 

In several cases he advised planters to remove their 
negro houses from the open field to the forest. Those who 
followed his advice realized immediate and permanent 
benefit, in the uniform health of their negroes, while sick- 
ness and death ravaged the neighboring plantations. 
One gentleman, supposing his negroes to be acclimated 
after a seven years' residence in the shade, felled the trees 
up to the fence that skirted one side of his negro settle- 
ment, and planted the ground. The first season every negro 
but one was taken sick with what is termed miasmatic 
disease, and, in consequence, half of his crop of cotton was 
lost. 






84. There is great difficulty in arranging remedies into 
classes, so as to express, under a general head, their prop- 
erties, effects, and modes of action. We have already 
mentioned that medicines produce their effects either by 
relaxing, stimulating, or astringing the whole system or 
some portion of it. It can, therefore, be readily under- 
stood why a stimulant will prove diaphoretic, diuretic, 
expectorant, antispasmodic, etc., under different circum- 
stances, or even at the same time, and similar and addi- 
tional effects may follow the use of a relaxant. The mode 
of administration may be varied so as to produce differ- 
ent effects. Thus, a good stimulant will prove diapho- 
retic when given in hot infusion, or diuretic if given in 
cold infusion and sweetened. We can only classify ac- 



MATERIA MEDICA. 277 

cording to the leading quality of the various remedies. 
The following list is only intended to comprise some that 
are generally known and easily obtained. 

85. Stimulants: 

Capsicum — A powerful general stimulant. 

Prickly-ash — Quite permanent and diffusive. 

Ginger — Stimulating and diffusive. 

Black pepper — Stimulating and astringent. 

Cloves, cinnamon, and other spices — Stimulating, aro- 
matic, and astringent. 

Camphor — Stimulant, antispasmodic. 

At^istolochia serpentaria (Virginia snakeroot) — Stim- 
ulating; diaphoretic. Very valuable. 

Pennyroyal, peppermint, spearmint, sage, balm, rose- 
mary, lavender — Mildly stimulating, volatile, aro- 
matic, diffusive; all good diaphoretics in hot in- 
fusion, or will prove diuretic if given in cold in- 
fusion, sweetened. 

Calamus, anise, fennel, dill, caraway, coriander, sweet- 
cicely — All mildly stimulating and aromatic; classed 
among the carminatives. Used particularly in flat- 
ulency and wind colic. 

Gum myrrh — Stimulant, astringent, tonic, emena- 
gogue, when given internally ; antiseptic and cleans- 
ing to sores. 

Polygonum punctatum (smart-weed) — Pungent, diu- 
retic, and emenagogue. 

86. Eelaxants, antispasmodics: 

Lobelia, boneset, gelseminum, asafetida, Scutellaria, the 
vapor-bath — All of the diffusive stimulants are 
more or less antispasmodic. Their relaxing effects 
are first manifested through the medium of the 



278 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 28. 

nerves, and the tension which abstracts circulation 
and nervous action is thereby overcome. The sys- 
tem is thus in a better condition to receive the 
action of the stimulant. 

87. Nee vines: 

Cypripedium, asarum, valerian, catnip, ginseng — All 
relaxants are necessarily quieting to nervous ex- 
citement. They need the addition of stimulants in 
cases of debility. 

88. Astringents: 

Crane's-bill, blackberry-root, New Jersey tea, white 
pond lily, witch-hazel, red raspberry leaves, su- 
mach leaves — These are nearly pure astringents. 

Oak bark, galls, tannin, hemlock bark — All very pos- 
itive astringents. 

Bayberry — Astringent and stimulating. 

Trillium (beth-root) — Astringent and somewhat acrid ; 
useful in internal hemorrhages; used in decoction. 

Geum (Evan's-root), marsh rosemary — Good for ulce- 
rations of mouth and throat. 

Alum, in powder or dissolved in water — Good for 
bleeding at the nose. 

Oil of erigeron and oil of fire-weed — These are classed 
as astringents by some on account of their power in 
arresting uterine and other internal hemorrhages. 
Dose, one or two drops, on sugar. 

89. Diaphoretics: 

To avoid needless repetition, we refer the reader to 
pages 256 and 257, and to the list of diffusible 
stimulants, page 277. 



MATERIA MEDICA. 279 



90. Diuretics: 



Flax-seed, hemp-seed, watermelon- seed, pumpkin-seed, 
galium (clivers), dandelion, boneset, asparagus, and 
parsely-root are each mild diuretics; they should 
be prepared with boiling water and sweetened. 

Queen of the meadow, juniper, the two apocynums, 
uva ursi, erigeron, pipsissewa are stimulating diu- 
uretics, applicable in non-inflammatory conditions. 

91. Emenagogues — Black cohosh. Break the dried 
roots with a hammer; put two ounces in a pint of cold 
water ; let it stand twelve hours. Drink this quantity dur- 
ing each day. The roots will answer for three days' renewal 
of the water. If heated by grinding, or if prepared with 
hot water, it is very apt to cause headache, which will 
not be the case if prepared as above directed. The blue 
cohosh may be prepared with boiling water, in above pro- 
portions. Dose, about the same. Both are very good 
emenagogues. 

Hot tansy tea, a tea- cupful three times a day on an 
empty stomach, will operate very favorably. All the stim- 
ulating diffusive diaphoretics in hot infusions are service- 
able. Other directions and formulas will be found in 
other portions of the book. 

92. For Burns. — Take finely-pulverized, pure chalk 
(creta preparata), and mix it with sweet-oil to the consist- 
ency of cream. Apply this to the surface of a burn or 
scald. It relieves the smarting very speedily. 

Lime-water and linseed-oil, equal parts, make an excel- 
lent application. 
25 



280 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 29. 



CHAPTER XXIX. 

MEDICAL FORMULAS AND DIRECTIONS. 

1. Antispasmodic tincture. 

R Lobelia inflata, herb one ounce. 

Cypripedium, 
Asarum, 

Capsicum, of each J ounce. 

Diluted alcohol one quart. 

Tincture for ten days. Dose, any quantity that may 
be required for a desired effect For an adult, from a half 
tea-spoonful to two, in a tumbler of hot water, sweet- 
ened, to be drank slowly. In cases of emergency take 
from a half to a whole tea-spoonful in a little water, from 
five minutes to a half hour apart. For very feeble pa- 
tients diminish the dose very much to begin with, and 
increase more or less rapidly. 

We know of no antispasmodic equal to this prepara- 
tion. It equalizes the action of the system, stimulates 
and warms the whole body, promotes perspiration, and 
relieves severe pain. It is very useful for external ap- 
plication. In large doses, in hot water, it will operate 
as an emetic. 

2. Cough syrup. No. 1. 

Jfc Lobelia herb, 

Asarum, of each, equal parts. 



MEDICAL FORMULAS AND DIRECTIONS. 281 

Pour over these boiling water enough to make a strong 
infusion; keep nearly to boiling point for two hours; 
pour off and press out the water, and add to it, with 
moderate heat, as much light brown or white sugar as it 
will dissolve. Bottle tight while hot, and keep in cool 
cellar, or add an ounce of alcohol to a quart of the syrup 
if it is to be kept in a warm place. 

Dose, from a few drops to a tea-spoonful, frequently re- 
peated. For a dry and troublesome cough, take three to 
five drops every two to five minutes, swallowing slowly, 
until relieved. For croup, give very freely during the 
paroxysms, and moderately during the intervals. For 
hooping-cough, give small doses frequently during the 
whole period. If the lungs are sore, add a half ounce of 
tincture of balsam of Tolu to a pint of the syrup. If ex- 
pectoration is profuse and of a creamy consistency and color, 

^ add an ounce of tincture of Balm of Gilead buds (populus 
candicans) to a pint of the syrup. If mucus in throat and 

.lungs is thick and tenacious, as in membraneous croup and 

I diphtheria, add an ounce of tincture of sanguinaria (blood- 

jroot) to a pint of syrup. 



' 3. Cough syrup. No. 2. 

Ifc Inula helenium (elecampane), 

Geranium maculatum (crane's-bill), 
Aralia racemosa (spikenard), 
Symphytum officinale (eomfrey), 
Marrubium vulgare (hoarhound), 
Sanguinaria canadensis (bloodroot). 



Of each, equal parts, by weight. Make strong decoction, 
strain and add white sugar, with moderate heat, as much 
as it will take up. Bottle tightly while hot. Adapted 
|for chronic lung affections, w T ith debility. 

Dose, a tea-spoonful every hour for an adult. 



282 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 29. 

4. Cough syrup. No. 3. 

Jl Aqua picis (tar-water) four ounces. 

Tincture polygonum punctatum (smart-weed), 

Tincture cubebs, of each £ drachm. 

Syrup squills, 

Syrup ipecac, of each $ ounce. 

Mix. Dose for an adult, a table-spoonful every two 
hours, or same after severe coughing. Useful in colds, 
hoarseness, and dryness of throat. If given to a child as 
soon as the first symptoms of croup are noticed, it will, 
in most cases, speedily and permanently relieve. 

5. Compound lobelia syrup. 

Tjc Lobelia herb, 

Polygala senega (Seneka snakeroot), 

Asarum, 

Sanguinaria (bloodroot), 

Xanthoxylum (prickly-ash bark), 

Of each, equal parts. Prepare as directed for Formula 
No. 3. Directions same as in No. 3. 

6. Aromatic syrup qf rhubarb. Spiced syrup of rhu- 
barb. 

]£ Turkey rhubarb, bruised ,.2J ounces. 

Cloves and cinnamon, of each J ounce. 

Nutmegs \ ounce. 

Diluted alcohol one quart. 

Macerate for two weeks. Strain, evaporate in a water- 
bath to one pint. Add, while hot, six pints of simple 
syrup, made in the proportion of two and a half pounds 
of clarified sugar to a pint of water. Bottle while hot, 
and keep in a cool place. 

A water-bath is a vessel containing water, kept hot or 



MEDICAL FORMULAS AND DIRECTIONS. 283 

boiling, inside of which is placed another vessel contain- 
ing the fluid to be evaporated. 

This forms a mild preparation, very useful in the bowel 
complaints of infants, but is not active enough for adults. 
The dose for an infant is a tea-spoonful every two hours 
until it operates. 

In our practice we rarely give it alone. If the stomach 
or bowel evacuations are acid, we add about a fourth part 
of calcined magnesia. In almost every case we add a 
little leptandra (blackroot), either in form of fluid ex- 
tract or tincture, or the resinoid leptandrin, and give the 
mixture in doses of five to twenty drops frequently. The 
spiced syrup of rhubarb may be obtained at almost any 
drug store. 

7. Bayberry and ginger infusion for diarrhea. 

]£ Bayberry, witch-hazel, and 

Best ginger, of each, powdered... one tea-spoonful. 
Boiling water one pint. 

Pour the water over the powders, and simmer for five 
minutes ; when cool, pour off and sweeten. 

Dose for a child, a tea-spoonful, or more, every half 
hour to two hours. It may be alternated with the rhu- 
barb preparation to advantage. Where the discharges 
are thin, fluid, and yellow, it may be given alone. In bad 
cases increase the dose, and give more frequently. 

8. Cinnamon syrup for diarrhea and dysentery. 

Take of thin, unground bark of cinnamon, an ounce; 
add one pint of boiling water, simmer an hour in a closed 
vessel, strain, and add clarified sugar enough to make a 
thick syrup. Bottle while hot and keep in a cool place. 

Dose, a tea-spoonful in a half tea-cup of boiled milk 
for an adult, taken about once an hour. For a child give 
! the same mixture, in tea-spoonful doses, frequently. 



284 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 29. 

Valuable in chronic diarrhea. For dysentery or bloody- 
flux, give a tea-spoonful of the syrup in a half tea-cup of 
strong hamamelis (witch-hazel) tea, in tea or table-spoon- 
ful doses, frequently repeated. 

9. For constipation of infants. 

]£ Castor-oil one ounce. 

Linseed-oil or olive-oil two ounces. 

Gum-arabic, 

White sugar, of each, powdered one tea-spoonful. 

Mix. Dose for an infant a tea-spoonful three times a 
day. This preparation acts very mildly, and will be found 
very serviceable in obstinate constipation, and in cases 
where infants swallow phlegm and mucus from the throat 
and lungs, as in bad colds. It should usually be followed 
by or given in alternation with Formula No. 6, with lep- 
tandra added. 

10. Alterative syrup. 

Ijfc White walnut (butternut) bark, of the root, six pounds. 

Wild cherry bark £ pound. 

Elecampane root two ounces. 

Dandelion root one pound. 

Burdock seeds \ pound. 

Bruise and cut small the barks and roots, and crush the 
seeds. Put in a proper vessel, cover with water, and boil 
slowly for six hours. Pour off the water, cover with 
more, and boil six hours longer. Pour off, mix the two 
decoctions, and evaporate slowly to one-third. Add to 
this, with moderate heat, brown sugar enough to make a 
thick syrup; bottle it while it is hot, and keep it in a 
cool place. 

Dose, for an adult, a table-spoonful two or three times a 
day, or more or less, as may be required to cause moderate 
action on the bowels. 



MEDICAL FORMULAS AND DIRECTIONS. 285 

Adapted for general alterative purposes, for scrofula, 
inactive liver, constipation, and to remove impurities of 
the system. Its continued use is not followed by consti- 
pation, as is the case with many cathartics. To realize its 
best remedial effects it should be taken regularly and for 
a considerable length of time. We can recommend it 
very highly for the relief of habitual constipation and 
scrofula. 

The butternut bark should be gathered late in the fall, 
in the winter, or in the spring before the sap starts up- 
ward — never later than March. The bark should be 
dried full six months before using. If gathered at other 
seasons, or used too soon, it proves drastic and griping. 

11. Compound cathartic powder (Antibilious powders). 

]jfc Jalap, powdered one ounce. 

Senna, u two ouDces. 

Cloves, " J drachm. 

Mix. Dose for an adult, a rounded tea-spoonful, with 
half as much in four to six hours if first dose does not 
produce action of the bowels. Take in a third tea-cup- 
ful of water. 

This is a mild, safe, and efficient cathartic for ordinary 
use. We generally prescribe it for the mother two or 
three days after child-birth, if the bowels are inactive. 

12. Emenagogue p>ills. 

]£ Pure sulphate of iron four drachms. 

Socotrine aloes (best) four drachms. 

White pine turpentine five drachms. 

Powder the iron and aloes separately, and mix with 
the turpentine in a mortar. Add carefully, a few drops 
at a time, of spirits of turpentine, mixing until the mass 
will adhere together. Form into four hundred pills. 



286 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 29. 

The mass should be kept quite warm while being mixed 
and formed into pills, and when cold the pills will keep 
in shape. 

Dose, one or two pills at night and one in the morn- 
ing, or more or less, as may be required to keep the 
bowels open. 

This preparation is nearly a certain specific for the cure 
of amenorrhcea and tardy or suppressed menstruation. In 
such cases it should be used continuously, in quantity 
sufficient to cause a noticeable action on the bowels, until 
the menses appear. For dysmenorrhcea (painful menstru- 
ation) it should be used for ten days previous to each 
period. 

It will answer the purposes of an ordinary cathartic for 
males or females. Its use is contra-indicated in excessive 
menstruation. 

13. Emenagogue tincture. 

J£ Apocynum (bitter-root) two ounces. 

Xanthoxylum (prickly-ash) one ounce. 

Juniper berries one ounce. 

Diluted alcohol 1J pints. 

Crush or grind the articles, add the alcohol, and let 
stand ten days. 

Dose, a tea-spoonful three times a day. Continue until 
menses appear. Then discontinue until nearly the next 
period. This preparation is very effective in amenorrhoea 
and suppressed menstruation. It is also an excellent stim- 
ulating diuretic in doses as directed. 

14. Liniment for dysmenorrhcea. 

T}c Oil pennyroyal one ounce. 

Oil rosemary one ounce. 

Oil tansy two drachms. 

Tincture of lobelia four ounces. 









MEDICAL FORMULAS AND DIRECTIONS. 287 

Mix. Use with considerable friction over the regions of 
pain. The tincture of lobelia should be prepared with 
ninety-six per cent, alcohol. 

15. Vinegar tincture of capsicum. 

]£ Capsicum (African cayenne) one ounce. 

Cider vinegar one quart. 

Moisten the capsicum with boiling water and add the 
vinegar. It will be ready for use in a few hours, or as 
soon as it settles. 

Apply with brisk rubbing to the entire body and limbs, 
avoiding the most sensitive parts. A cold inactive sur- 
face may require it to be used in full strength. A thin, 
delicate, and sensitive skin may not require more than a 
table-spoonful to a tea-cupful of warm water. Enough 
should be used to cause a moderate warmth or even a 
slight smarting. If it should burn too severely, rub on 
sweet-oil or cream. Have the body well washed or 
bathed before applying this preparation. As much sweet- 
oil as the skin will absorb should afterward be used. Or 
the tincture may be mixed with an equal quantity of the 
oil, and both applied together. 

It is permanently stimulating to the surface, and will 
relieve chilliness and prevent " taking cold." It tones up 
the skin, and will immediately arrest night-sweats even 
in advanced stages of consumption. When used for the 
latter-named purpose, sweet-oil should be applied to the 
shoulders, neck, and breast, and well rubbed in before a 
warm fire. 

16. Alterative pills. 

Ifc Extract taraxacum (dandelion), 
11 juglans (butternut), 

Leptandrin, of each. one drachm. 

Powdered capsicum ten grains. 



288 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 29. 

Mix, and make into ninety pills. 

Dose, for mild alterative effect, one pill every night at 
bed-time. Increase the dose, or its frequency, if required, 
so as to obtain a mild action of the bowels. 

17. Tonic infusion. 

"ft Columbo, 

Gentian, of each one ounce. 

Hydrastis (golden-seal).... J ounce. 

Mix. Take of this a tea-spoonful to a tea-cupful of 
boiling water. Simmer five to ten minutes. 

Dose, a table-spoonful of the infusion just before each 
meal. 

18. Laxative tonic. 

5; Menispermum (yellow-parilla, vine-maple). 

Apocynum (bitter-root, wandering milk-weed). 

Take of these, equal parts, any quantity, and make from 
it a strong decoction by boiling slowly for several hours ; 
then strain and add sugar to make a thick syrup. This 
preparation is useful in cases of debility, dyspepsia, and 
amenorrhoea that are accompanied by inactivity of the 
bowels. 

Dose, a table-spoonful twice a day. It may be made 
from the extracts of the articles. 

19. Spice bitters. (Tonic and stimulant.) 

# Yellow poplar and golden-seal, of each four parts. 

Prickly-ash and cloves, of each two parts. 

Cypripedium (lady's-slipper) and ginger, of each.. one part. 

Mix in fine powders, and add equal part, by weight, of 
powdered white sugar. 

Dose, a tea-spoonful before each meal. Useful for dys- 
pepsia, debility, loss of appetite, etc. 



MEDICAL FORMULAS AND DIRECTIONS. 289 

20. Fever and ague powders. 

Jfc Salacin four drachms. 

Capsicum, powdered... .one drachm. 

Mix, and divide into sixty powders. 

Dose for an adult, one every four hours. 

If these powders produce a burning sensation in the 
stomach immediately after being taken, it can be pre- 
vented or relieved by eating a little plain food, as bread 
or crackers. 

These powders may be made into pills with extract of 
dandelion or boneset. In this form they will dissolve 
more slowly in the stomach and be less liable to produce 
burning. 

21. For Menorrhagia (profuse menstruation). No. 1. 

]jfc Hamamelis (witch-hazel) two ounces. 

Asclepias tuberosa (white-root, pleurisy-root)... one ounce. 
Ginger three ounces. 

Mix. Take of this a table-spoonful to a pint of boil- 
ing water. Steep ten minutes. Drink hot and freely. 

Useful for hemorrhage of lungs, stomach, bowels, and 
bladder. Use as above directed. 

22. For menorrhagia. No. 2. 

Ijfc Oil of erechthites (fire-weed).- 

Dose, two or three drops well mixed in a tea-spoonful of 
powdered w r hite sugar, to be repeated in half an hour if 
necessary. The oil of erigeron canadensis (flea-bane), used 
in same manner and same doses, is equally efficacious. 
Both are very useful for hemorrhage from any internal 
organ. 

23. For menorrhagia. No. 3. 

Jfc Mitchella repens (partridge-berry vine).... two ounces. 

Hamamelis (witch-hazel) two ounces. 

Xanthoxylum (prickly-ash), powdered one ounce. 



290 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 29. 

Rub the mitchella fine, and mix. Take of the mixture 
a table-spoonful. Steep ten minutes in a pint of boiling 
water. Divide in four portions, to be drank hot, one 
every two hours, or more frequently, until hemorrhage is 
relieved. 

The mitchella vine grows in sandy woods, and may be 
purchased at most botanic and eclectic drug stores, as well 
as from the Shakers. When properly cured, it is of 
pale, green color, with a mild and pleasant odor, and 
does not crumble readily between the hands. If not 
properly cured, it is black or brown, brittle and dusty, 
and is worthless. 

It is particularly applicable for profuse lochia, and for 
uterine hemorrhage at the " turn of life." It should be 
used occasionally between the " periods," and freely when 
specially required. It is a principal article in several 
medical preparations for female use, but we prefer to give 
it in the manner here directed to any other. 

24. Pile ointment No. 1. 

Jfc Extract stramonium, 

Tannin, of each, one drachm. 

Simple cerate or lard... two ounces. 

Mix in a mortar. Apply a piece the size of a pea, night 
and morning. 

25. Pile ointment No. 2. 

]jfc Oil erechthites (fire-weed) two drachms. 

Tannin one drachm. 

Simple cerate or lard four ounces. 

Mix, and use same as directed in Formula No. 24. 

26. Parsley salve. 

Take of parsley roots and leaves, and the leaves or inner 
green bark of sweet-elder (sambucus canadensis), of each 






MEDICAL FOKMULAS AND DIRECTIONS. 291 

a half pound. Bruise them, and boil with water enough 
to cover them a half hour. Then add mutton suet and 
unsalted butter (or sweet-oil), a half pound of each. Sim- 
mer until the water evaporates, and the materials are dry 
and crispy. Strain and put in jars. Valuable for burns, 
inflamed sores, ulcers, and for the ordinary purposes of 
an ointment. The addition of a table-spoonful of balsam 
of fir renders the salve more stimulating. 

27. Eye lotion. 

Jjc Borax one drachm. 

Gum-arabic J ounce. 

Rose-water one pint. 

Mix, and dissolve. Useful in all ordinary inflamma- 
tions of the eyes. Apply one or two drops several times 
a day. If inflammation is chronic, add a few drops of 
antispasmodic tincture. (Formula No. 1.) 

28. Tar plaster. 

T}c Burgundy pitch, 
Common resin, 
Bees-wax, 

Mutton tallow, of each.... one ounce. 
Carolina tar two ounces. 

Mix, with moderate heat; strain and stir in, just before 
it hardens — 

Pulverized camphor two drachms. 

The camphor may be made fine by adding to it a few 
drops of alcohol and rubbing it in a mortar. 

The plaster may be made softer, if desired, by the ad- 
dition of sweet-oil, before the camphor is put in. 

An excellent plaster for pain in the side, chest, back, 
or elsewhere ; also for almost any kind of sore. 

It may be spread upon canton flannel or sheep-skin, 



292 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 29. 



and applied as an ordinary plaster. Re-spread as it di- 
minishes. Remove every second day; wash, rub with hot 
vinegar, and re-apply the plaster. 

29. Tetter wash. 

ft Sanguinaria (bloodroot), powdered... one ounce. 

Phytolacca (pokeroot), powdered % ounce. 

Cider vinegar one pint. 

Mix in a bottle, and let stand a few days. Apply full 
strength three times a day. 

30. Remedy for jaundice. 

T)c Wild cherry bark three parts. 

Black cohosh root one part. 

Of these make a strong decoction. Dose, a wine-glass 
full, sweetened, three times a day. If it acts freely on the 
bowels diminish the dose. 



full 



31. Cathartic pills. 

ft Podophyllin one drachm. 

Leptandrin two drachms. 

Apocynin one drachm. 

Capsicum twenty grains. 

Sanguinaria (bloodroot) one drachm. 

Mix in dandelion extract or molasses, and make into 
three hundred pills. 

Dose for an adult, one pill at night and one in the 
morning, or two at night, if necessary. 

This preparation is quite actively cathartic, and is indi- 
cated in the commencement of the treatment of obstinate 
constipation. 

32. Nervine pills. 

ft Gum asafetida twenty grains. 

Gum camphor, 

Extract lactucarium, of each... five grains. 

Mix, and make into twenty pills. 



MEDICAL FORMULAS AND DIRECTIONS. 293 

Dose, two pills every two hours in cases of great 
nervousness or excitement, or two every night for mild 
cases, with restlessness. 

This preparation is anodyne, but in no way narcotic. 
It may be used as a substitute for mild preparations of 
opium. It also acts slightly on the bowels. 

33. Fever powders. 

T}c Ipecac, 

Asclepias (white-root), 

Jamaica ginger, of each.. ..one scruple. 

Camphor two scruples. 

Pulverize the camphor in a mortar with a few drops 
of alcohol, and add the other powders. Divide into twenty 
powders, of five grains each. Given in fevers in doses of 
three to five grains every four hours, or in doses of ten 
grains three times a day. For children, half the quantity, 
or less. 

Its action is promoted by diaphoretic drinks, but these 
should not be taken freely immediately after the powders, 
as they will probably produce vomiting. In cases where 
mild vomiting is needed, it may be produced by the use 
of these powders in connection with hot teas. 

Valuable in fevers, pleurisy, and inflammation of in- 
, ternal organs — particularly in brain or lung fever of in- 
fants. 

34. Hollyhock conserve. Take fresh hollyhock blossoms, 
| a half pound ; beat them to a jelly in a mortar, and add 

one pound of powdered loaf-sugar ; beat again until com- 
pletely mixed ; add an ounce of cinnamon, an ounce of hy- 
drastis (golden-seal), a half ounce of cloves, and a drachm 
of capsicum (African cayenne), each finely pow T dered. Mix 
1 thoroughly, and roll into thin cakes and dry them. 

This is an excellent preparation for colds and sore 



294 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 29. 

throats. When used, a small piece is to be held in the 
mouth until dissolved, and slowly swallowed. 

If four ounces of powdered slippery-elm is used instead 
of the hollyhock leaves, the mixture will be fully as good 
and more easily made. Water enough to moisten the mass 
is required. 

35. Sumach berries in fever. The berries of the sumach 
(rhus glabra) contain a very pleasant acid, and may be 
used as a substitute for lemonade. 

The drink is prepared by pouring boiling water over 
the berries and allowing it to stand until cool. It may 
be drank freely. It is generally proper to give acids to 
feverish patients, if they desire them. The berries may 
be dried and kept, for any length of time, in close jars. 

36. Remedy for chilblains and frost bites. Saturate raw 
cotton with castor-oil, and bind it on the affected part. 

37. To hasten suppuration. 

T}c Bloodroot, powdered, 
Brown sugar, 
Soft soap about equal parts. 

Mix, and apply as a poultice. 

Where suppuration has commenced beneath the surface 
as in boils and glandular swellings, it will be rapid!) 
favored by the application of this compound. Such swell- 
ings will be ready for opening in half the usual time, if 
this course is pursued. 

38. Alterative syrup for scrofula, etc. 

Tjc Boneset, 

Yellow-dock, of each four ounces. 

Pokeroot, 

Bloodroot, of each.... two ounces. 

Mandrake (podophyllum)... £ ounce. 
Water two quarts. 



MEDICAL FOBMULAS AND DIRECTIONS. 295 

Mix. Boil gently for a half day. Strain and add sugar 
to make a moderately thick syrup. Add a small quantity 
of alcohol to prevent fermentation. Bottle while hot. 

Dose, a table-spoonful three times a day. Useful as an 
alterative in scrofula, constipation, and other obstructed 
conditions. 

39. Rennet wine. 

]J Calves' rennet, cut fine twelve ounces. 

Common salt two ounces. 

Sherry wine two pints. 

Macerate two weeks and strain off. 

This is a solution of pepsin, the active element of the 
gastric juice, without which digestion can not be per- 
formed. It will be found serviceable in cases of dyspepsia 
and chronic diarrhea, and for almost any difficulty result- 
ing from feeble digestive capacity. 

Dose, a table-spoonful at each meal-time. It may be 
given to infants who are fed upon cow's milk. In such 
cases it is best to mix a table-spoonful of the solution 
with a half pint of the milk, allowing it to stand for two 
hours to form a curd, which may then be fed to the 
child. Infants will thrive remarkably well upon this food. 

40. Gargle mixtures. 

]jt Capsicum, vinegar, and salt. 

Capsicum, vinegar, and bloodroot. 

Capsicum and bayberry, in infusion. 

Tincture of myrrh and capsicum diluted with vinegar. 

Strong decoction of bayberry or oak bark. 

Strong infusion of golden-seal. 

These are merely given as samples. Any good astrin- 
gent may be combined, if needed, with capsicum, or may 
be used alone. An acid, as vinegar or lemon -juice, is 
26 



296 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [ClIAP. 29 



" 



usually a good addition. Our readers can combine these 
and similar articles according to the needs of the case be- 
fore them. 

41. For gravel or stone in the bladder. Take fresh 
turnip radishes, slice them very thin, cover the bottom 
of a pint bowl with a thin layer of these; cover them 
with a layer of equal thickness of powdered white sugar ; 
repeat the layers of radish and sugar until the bowl is 
nearly full; let stand until the sugar is dissolved. 

Give of the syrup thus obtained a table-spoonful every 
half hour, or more or less frequently according to the 
severity of the case. 

When radishes can not be obtained, turnips may be used 
in their stead, prepared in same manner. 

This preparation is a good diuretic, and a good remedy 
for some forms of gravel. It dissolves the concretions, 
so that they pass away with the urine. 

42. Syrup for consumption. 

# Butternut bark (of the root), 

Spikenard root, of each one pound. 

Elecampane root two ounces. 

Wild cherry bark, 

Dandelion, 

Burdock, of each J pound. 

Put these in ten gallons of water and boil down to one 
gallon. Strain, and add eighteen pounds of light brown 
sugar, or enough to make a thick syrup. Bottle while 
hot, and keep in a cool place. 

Valuable as a general alterative, and very good in con- 
sumption. 

Dose, for an adult, from two to three table-spoonfuls 
three times a day. Enough should be taken to produce 
two free evacuations each day. If it produces griping, 






MEDICAL FORMULAS AND DIRECTIONS. 297 

mix a heaped tea-spoonful of pure ginger with each tea- 
cupful of the syrup. 

43. Consumption beer. The same quantity of materials 
and water may be taken, and boiled down to three gallons, 
to which add one quart of honey, and set aside, in a jug 
qy keg, to ferment. It will be ready for use in a few 
days. The patient may drink two or three cupfuls each 
day, or enough to keep the bowels a little free. More 
honey or sugar and a little ginger should be added at 
time of taking the medicine. 

This forms a tonic and mildly cathartic drink, which is 
rendered stimulating by the ginger. Useful in consump- 
tion, scrofula, liver complaint, and general obstructed and 
debilitated conditions. 



In the early stages of consumption we advise the use 
of the syrup (Formula No. 3), one tea-spoonful, night and 
morning, on an empty stomach, followed immediately by 
the drinking of a cupful of new milk, fresh from the cow. 
If the milk is cold, warm it a little. Eat plentifully of 
cream, fresh sweet butter, maple syrup or honey. Mix 
equal parts of pure slippery-elm, gum-arabic, and white 
sugar, all powdered ; stir a tea-spoonful of this into a half- 
pint of water, and take a table-spoonful at a time, fre- 
quently, during the day. The above, with the use of 
Formula No. 42, will greatly relieve confirmed consump- 
tion, and often cure in the early stages. Get all the air 
you can into the lungs. Walk every day up a steep hill, 
or up and down stairs, or even on a level surface, with 
the head erect, shoulders thrown back, and chest expanded. 
Breathe deep and full. Exercise the muscles in every 
direction, but not to fatigue. 



298 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [ClIAP. 30. 



CHAPTER XXX. 

DIRECTIONS FOR PREPARING SUITABLE DRINKS AND FOOD 
FOR THE SICK AND CONVALESCENT. 

General remark. There are certain dyspeptic and 
other conditions, in which spices disagree with the stomach. 
For all such, the spices which are directed in the follow 
ing receipts should be omitted. As a rule, spirits or win 
should not be used by invalids, except by the advice of 
physician. 

Barley water. Take of pearl barley two ounces, 
water two quarts. First wash the barley well with som« 
cold water, then pour on about half a pint of water ; boil 
it a little while. This water, which will be colored, must 
be thrown away. Bring the two quarts of water to a boil- 
ing heat, and then add the barley; continue the boiling 
till the whole is reduced to one quart, then strain off the 
liquor. This may be sweetened or seasoned as directed 
by the medical attendant. 

Toast water (No. 1). Take of wheat bread (stale) 
piece the size of the hand of an adult. Place it before live 
coals, or near a red-hot stove-plate, till it is toasted brown 
on each side, taking care not to burn it. 

Put the bread in a bowl, and pour over it a pint of 
boiling water. Cover it and let it stand till cold. Sweeten 
it with molasses. If lemon-juice be allowed, it should be 
added while the water is at boiling heat. Strain off with 
slight pressure, and use as a drink. 



DIETARY FORMULAS. 299 

A very palatable drink may be made as above, by throw- 
ing the pulp of one or two oranges into the bowl w r ith the 
toast, and then pressing out the juice when straining off 
the water. 

Toast water (No* 2). Cut a slice of stale bread, half 
an inch thick, a finger length long; cut off the crust and 
toast it quite brown, but not scorched ; while hot put it 
into a half-pint pitcher; pour upon it half a pint of boiling 
water; cover it tightly, and when cool remove the bread. 

Gum-arabic water. Take of clear white gum-arabic 
one ounce, boiling water one pint. Stir the gum into the 
w T ater till dissolved ; set it by to cool. It may be sweet- 
ened with pure sugar. 

Almond water. Take of thin-shelled sweet almonds 
an ounce ; clear, white gum-arabic half an ounce ; refined 
sugar one-quarter of an ounce. First break the shell from 
the almonds, then throw them into a little boiling water to 
loosen the skins; remove these also. Put the blanched 
almonds, gum-arabic, and sugar into a stone mortar; beat 
them to a fine paste. Then add gradually a pint of water. 
Strain off the liquor for use. 

Apple water. Take one large lively apple ; pare and 
core it; slice it into small pieces. Pour on it a pint of 
boiling water ; let it stand in a covered vessel till cold ; 
strain off, and add as much loaf-sugar as will be palatable. 

Tamarind water. Take of tamarinds (fresh) one 
ounce, boiling water one pint. Put the tamarinds into 
a bowl, and pour on them the boiling water ; allow them 
to stand covered until cold, then strain off with slight 
pressure, and add sugar, if desirable. 

Cream of tartar water. Take of cream of tartar 
one drachm ; loaf-sugar one ounce; boiling water one quart. 
! Let them stand in a white stone or porcelain vessel ten 
1 minutes, then strain off the liquor. 



300 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 30, 

If the outer rind of fresh lemon or orange-peel be added 
with the cream of tartar and sugar, it will render it much 
more palatable to some persons. 

Oatmeal, gruel. Take of oatmeal two large spoon- 
fuls, water one quart. Add a small quantity of water 
to the oatmeal, mixing them well together till every par- 
ticle of the meal is thoroughly moistened, then stir this 
mixture into the balance of the quart of water at boiling 
heat, continue the boiling for a quarter of an hour, stir- 
ring it often ; strain the gruel through a sieve or open 
cloth, and add sugar enough to make it agreeable to the 
taste — nutmeg or other spices to be added or omitted ac- 
cording to directions. 

Corn or oatmeal gruel. Take one pint of boiling 
water, two large table-spoonfuls of oatmeal, mixed in half 
a pint of milk, seasoned with a little salt ; stir this in the 
boiling water and simmer for half an hour ; sweeten, and 
spice it with nutmeg, if desirable. For cornmeal gruel, 
stir the dry meal into the boiling water, then add the 
milk and seasoning. 

Rice gruel. Take of ground rice two ounces, cin- 
namon a quarter of an ounce, water two quarts ; boil the 
rice about half an hour, then put in the cinnamon; con- 
tinue the boiling ten minutes longer ; strain off the gruel 
through a sieve or cloth, sweeten it with loaf-sugar to suit 
the palate of the patient. 

Rice jelly or gruel. Having picked and washed 
a quarter of a pound of rice, mix it with half a pound of 
loaf-sugar, and just sufficient water to cover it. Boil it 
till it becomes a glutinous mass, then strain it ; season it 
with whatever may be thought proper, and let it stand to 
cool. 

Panada. Take of bread (stale) one ounce, water one 
pint. Break the bread into small pieces and boil it in the 



DIETAKY FORMULAS. 301 

water till it is perfectly soft. If spices are directed by the 
physician they can be added just before the boiling is 
completed. 

Sago. Take of sago one large spoonful, water one 
pint. Boil gently, stirring almost constantly, till the par- 
ticles are perfectly softened and separated. Strain it off 
through a sieve or cloth, sweeten and season with spices 
as directed. 

Salep. Take of salep (finely powdered) a tea-spoon- 
ful, water half a pint. Mix the salep well in a small 
quantity of the water, gradually adding the rest till it is 
thoroughly diffused through it ; put the whole over to boil, 
stirring well till it becomes like a jelly. Sugar and spices, 
and even wine, may be added if directed. 

Arrowroot. Take of powdered arrowroot, one large 
table-spoonful, water one pint. First mix the arrow- 
root well into a paste with a little of the cold water ; 
bring the balance of the pint of water to a boiling heat, 
then stir in the paste ; let it continue to boil a few min- 
utes, then remove it from the fire. Sweeten it with loaf- 
sugar, and add nutmeg, or cinnamon, or lemon-juice, if 
directed. 

It is sometimes admissible to have the powdered arrow- 
root beaten up with a gill of milk instead of the cold 
water, before it is stirred into the boiling water; of the 
propriety of this the physician should be the judge. 

Oatmeal flummery. Take of oatmeal (or grits) any 
convenient quantity ; put it into a broad, deep pan ; cover 
it over with water, stir them well together, then let them 
stand twelve hours ; pour off the clear water, and after- 
ward add a larger quantity ; stir up, then let them stand 
as before for twelve hours; repeat the same process a third 
|time. When the oatmeal has been thus macerating about 
thirty-six hours, and all the water poured off from it, the 



302 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 30. 

thick part of it is to be strained through a hair-sieve, and 
put into a well-tinned or porcelain saucepan; this being 
done, let it be well stirred while it boils, till it becomes 
quite thick. It is then to be poured out into dishes or 
forms, and when cold may be eaten with milk and sugar, 
wine and sugar, or cider and sugar, as prescribed. 

Potato flummery. Take of potatoes (common or 
round) one pound ; boil *them gently in a sufficient quan- 
tity of water till they are brittle or tender ; then take them 
out of the water and peel off the skin. Then mash them 
well, adding salt enough to season them; put them into 
a saucepan, with a quarter of a pint of milk and two 
ounces of butter; warm them a little, mixing them well 
together at the same time by beating them with a spoon 
till they are quite smooth. The flummery thus made, may 
be served up in any neat form and eaten alone, or with 
some bread. 

Rice flummery. Take of fresh milk, any convenient 
quantity ; add to it a little salt, and put it over a fire to 
boil. As soon as the boiling commences, stir in rice flour 
till it is quite thick ; add to this a small portion of butter 
and nutmeg or cinnamon, as may be directed or preferred. 
It is ready for use as soon as quite cold. 

Tapioca jelly. Take of tapioca, one table-spoonful 
or half an ounce. Mix it with a pint of water, let it stand 
an hour; then boil it during another hour over a gentle 
fire, stirring it well till it is dissolved and clear. Sugar 
and salt, to render it palatable, may be added before it 
becomes cold. If lemon-juice be directed, a tea-spoonful 
of it and a little of the peel should be put in just before 
the boiling is completed. The whole should then be 
strained off through a sieve or cloth, and a little finely- 
grated nutmeg added. 

Tapioca pudding. Soak a tea-cupful of tapioca, well 






DIETAKY FORMULAS. 303 

picked, in a quart of cold water over night ; in the morn- 
ing add a little salt, and sweeten to the taste; boil until 
quite soft. Prepare a pan with nicely-peeled fruit ; pour 
the tapioca over them, aud bake until done. 

Apple jelly. Take of apples (juicy and slightly- 
tart) any convenient number; pare, core, and slice them; 
then put them into a well-tinned saucepan or kettle, with 
water enough to cover them ; boil them till they are quite 
tender; strain the liquor through a colander, and after- 
ward through a flannel bag. To one pint of the juice 
add a pound of pure sugar and the juice of two lemons. 
Place them again over the fire and boil very fast, skim- 
ming off the scum till reduced to a jelly, which may then 
be turned out into a dish, or any fancy form. 

Rice jelly. Take of rice one-quarter of a pound; 
sugar (white) one-half of a pound; water one quart. 
Boil these well together, carefully stirring them, till the 
whole becomes a glutinous mass. Strain off by forcible 
pressure through a cloth, into a dish or form. When cool 
it is fit for use. This preparation may be flavored with 
rose-water, orange-flower- water, lemon-juice, etc., as may 
best suit the palate of the patient, or as directed by the 
physician. 

Slippery-elm jelly. Take of slippery-elm bark 
(powdered or finely chipped) two ounces, water one pint. 
1 Boil these slowly, till they become a thick mass; then 
strain off by forcible expression into a dish or form. 
Sugar, lemon-juice, orange or lemon-peel, may be added 
just before the boiling is completed. 

Iceland moss jelly. Take of Iceland moss (clean) 

two ounces, water one quart. First wash the moss in 

some cold water; then put it into the water, and boil 

, slowly till very thick, adding white sugar till sufficiently 

• sweet, then strain by pressure through a cloth into a dish 

27 



304 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 30. 

or form. When cold it will be fit for use, and may be 
eaten with spices, if directed. 

Irish moss or carrageen jelly. Take two ounces 
of Irish moss, wash it well in cold water, then put it into 
a quart of water, boil slowly until the moss is dissolved ; 
add sugar sufficient, then strain through a cloth; when 
cold it will be fit for use, and may be eaten with spice, 
if allowed. 

Gloucester jelly. Rice, sago, pearl barley, hartshorn 
shavings, eryngium root (eryngium maritimum), each one 
ounce ; boil in three pints of water to one pint, and strain. 
This is very nutritive, dissolved in broth, milk, or wine. 

Calves' feet jelly (No. 1). Boil two calves' feet 
in one gallon of water, down to a quart, then strain it, 
and when cold skim off all the fat ; take up all the clear 
jelly, leaving behind the sediment, if there be any. Put 
the jelly into a saucepan with a pint of wine, half a pound 
of loaf-sugar, the juice of four lemons, the white of six or 
eight eggs beaten into a froth. Mix all well together. 
Set the saucepan upon a clear fire, and stir the jelly till it 
boils. When it has boiled ten minutes, pour it through a 
flannel bag till it runs clear. Have now ready a large 
China basin, with some lemon-peel in it cut as thin as 
possible; let the clear jelly run upon them while warm, 
and from these it will acquire both an amber color and an 
agreeable flavor. Afterward it may be poured into glasses. 

Calves' feet jelly (No. 2). Take two feet of a 
calf, and add to them one gallon of water, and boil down 
to one quart; strain, and when cold, remove all the fat; 
then add the white of six or eight eggs, well beaten ; half 
a pound of white sugar, and the juice of three or four 
lemons, and mix well ; boil for a few minutes, constantly 
stirring; then strain through a flannel bag. Wine may 
be added, if desirable, to suit the taste, 



DIETARY FORMULAS. 305 

Rye meal mush. Take of water half a pint ; put it 
over a fire in a saucepan, and when it boils, shake into it 
slowly from a dredging-box rye flour, stirring well all the 
time till it is thick, then remove it from the fire, having 
dissolved in the water a sufficient quantity of salt to ren- 
der it palatable. 

When cold it may be eaten with sugar, molasses, or 
milk, as directed. 

Unless the flour is dredged into the water very slowly, 
and the stirring kept up almost constantly, the mush will 
be very lumpy and unpleasant, whereas if the above direc- 
tions be attended to, it may be formed into a very pala- 
table and pleasant article of diet. 

Vegetable soup. Take two middling-sized white 
potatoes, one onion (if agreeable to the taste of the patient, 
or, instead of this, a turnip, carrot, or parsnip, size of a 
large egg), a piece of well-baked bread size of an adult 
hand. Put these into a clean stew-pan in one quart of 
water, boil them (frequently stirring) down to a pint; 
throw into the vessel some parsley or celery; cover the 
vessel closely; remove it from the fire, and allow the 
herbs to steep while the liquor is cooling under cover. 
Toast a thin piece of bread, size of the hand, carefully, 
put it in the bottom of a dish, then strain off, by slight 
pressure, the soup from the stew-pan. Season it to the 
order of the physician or the palate of the patient. 

Chicken broth (No. 1). Take half of a middling-sized 
chicken, strip off the skin and fat, put it into a saucepan, 
with a quart of water, seasoned with a little salt; skim off 
any fat which may arise to the surface; remove the pan 
from the fire when the water has boiled thirty minutes. 
Strain off the liquor for use. 

ilf spices are ordered, they should be put in a few min- 
utes before the boiling is completed. 



. 



306 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 30. . 

Chicken broth (No. 2). Clean half a chicken ; pour 
on it a quart of water, put in a spoonful of rice ; boil 
two hours slowly ; skim oif the fat, and season with salt 
and parsley. 

Mutton tea (No. 1). Take of loin of mutton one 
pound. Put it into a saucepan containing three pints of 
water; add a little salt; skim off the fat as it arises to the 
surface. Boil the meat till it is very tender, then pour 
off the liquor. If an onion or a little spice be allowed, 
they should be put in awhile before the boiling is com- 
pleted. 

Mutton tea (No. 2) is prepared in the same manner 
as beef-tea, substituting mutton for beef, and boiling half 
an hour, instead of fifteen or twenty minutes. 

If the invalid desires the addition of barley, an ounc 
of clean pearl barley, washed, and macerated in boiling 
water for an hour, may be boiled with the mutton tea, and 
the undissolved barley separated by straining. 

Beef-tea. Take of lean beef, one quarter of a pound; 
water, a pint and a half; salt, sufficient to season it. When 
it begins to boil skim it five minutes; then add a couple 
blades of mace; continue the boiling ten minutes longer; 
then pour the tea into a bowl for use. 

If rice, barley, or bread crust be ordered, as an addition 
to either of the last three preparations, they should be 
boiled till they are soft before the animal substance is 
added. 

Whenever aromatic, or pot herbs are to be added, 
they should be put in the vessel near the end of the 
process of boiling; and the vessel should then be kept 
covered as much as possible till the liquor is cool. No 
patient should be allowed to take these herbs into the 
stomach. 

Essence of beef (No. 1). Take of fresh beef, cut 



DIETARY FORMULAS. 307 

into small pieces, one tea-cnpful; salt, one tea-spoonful; 
mace, three blades; alspice, six whole grains; cloves, four 
heads; water, one tea-cupful. Put these into a clean 
porter bottle ; bore a hole through the center of the cork, 
and through this pass a quill to keep the hole open ; or 
cut a deep notch from one side of the cork to let out the 
steam. Put the bottle into the kettle of water; tie up the 
neck of the bottle to the bale of the kettle, to prevent it 
from dipping into the water or laying over the side of the 
vessel. Boil the water in which the bottle is thus sus- 
pended one hour and a half; then draw out the cork, 
empty the bottle, and strain off the essence with forcible 
pressure through a cloth. Good in diarrhea. 

Essence of beef (jSTo. 2). Take of lean beef, sliced, 
a sufficient quantity to fill the body of a porter bottle, cork 
it tightly, and place it in a pot of cold water, attaching 
the neck, by means of a string, to the handle of the pot ; 
boil for an hour and a half or two hours, then decant the 
: liquor and skim it. 

Flaxseed tea. Take of flaxseed (whole grained), one 

: ounce; refined sugar, one ounce and a half; lemon-juice, 

two ounces; boiling water, one quart. Let them stand 

together in an earthen vessel two hours; then strain off 

the liquor. 

The lemon-juice, if objectionable, may be omitted ; and, 
when desirable, an ounce of liquorice root, shaved, may be 
used instead of the sugar. 

Slippery-elm tea. Take of slippery-elm bark, 
shaved fine or powdered, one ounce; boiling water, one 
pint. Let them stand an hour in a covered vessel ; then 
strain. Sweeten and acidulate if ordered. 

Lemonade. Take of the outer rind of fresh lemon- 
peel, one drachm; pure lemon-juice, one ounce; double 
: refined sugar, two ounces; boiling water, a pint and a 



308 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 30. 

half. Let them stand together in an earthen vessel ten 
minutes ; then strain off the liquor. 

Orangeade may be made in the same way of Seville 
oranges — using, however, much less sugar. 

Corn starch pudding. Take six table-spoonfuls of 
pure corn starch, and sufficient new milk just to dissolve 
it ; then add five eggs, and beat thoroughly together ; now 
have one quart of new milk, a little salted, and heated to 
boiling ; then pour in the mixture of starch and eggs ; stir 
briskly, and boil for three minutes, and it is ready for the 
table. For sauce, use cream and loaf-sugar, beaten to- 
gether, or any other that may be preferred. 

Veal tea. This is to be made in the same manner 
as beef-tea, using a pound of the fillet of veal, free from 
fat, and sliced, and a pint and a half of boiling water ; 
boil for half an hour. 

It may also be made with the same quantity of the fleshy 
part of a knuckle of veal. By boiling the latter down to 
one-half, and straining, the decoction will gelatinize, and, 
if poured into small cups, will keep good for several 
days. 

By the addition of an equal quantity of boiling water 
to this jelly, it is fit for use in a few minutes. 

Blanc mange from corn starch. Boil one quart 
of milk, salting and flavoring it to your taste, with peach 
leaves, lemon-peel, or any thing you prefer, and sweeten it 
with six even table-spoonfuls of loaf-sugar. Then take 
one tea-cupful of corn starch, wet it with sufficient cold 
milk to make a half pint when smoothly mixed, and add 
this to the boiling milk. Stir it thoroughly, and allow it 
to boil for a few moments longer, then pour it into your 
mold. Eat, when cold, with cream sweetened and flavored 
with extract of vanilla or lemon. If it is not sufficiently 
done, it will be sticky; a little experience, however, will 



DIETARY FORMULAS. 309 

determine the length of time required to cook it. The 
starch is measured and mixed without pulverizing. 

Chicken jelly. Cut a chicken into small pieces, 
bruise all the bones, and put the whole into a stone jar, 
with a cover that fits water-tight ; set the jar in a large 
kettle of boiling water, and keep it boiling for three hours. 
Then strain, and season with salt, pepper, and mace, or 
with loaf-sugar and lemon -juice. 

Isinglass blanc mange. Isinglass, a quarter of a 
pound ; rosewater, half a pint ; milk, two quarts ; milk of 
almonds, half a pint. Boil to a proper consistence, and 
permit to cool. 

Gems. Mix unbolted or Graham flour with cold milk, 
' or milk and water, to the consistency of corn-bread batter. 
Mix with the greatest possible rapidity, and put instantly 
into small tin-pans and bake in a very hot oven twenty- 
five minutes. 

The success will depend upon the speed with which the 
whole process is conducted. Those who are disinclined to 
rapid muscular movements can add a tea-spoonful of bak- 
ing powder to each quart of flour, but an active and en- 
ergetic cook can make light gems without it. To be eaten 
hot or cold. They are generally baked in pans of about 
two inches square and an inch deep, wired together on sets 
of eight or twelve. 

Minced beef. Take a piece of fresh, lean, tender 
beef, and chop it perfectly fine, season with a little salt, if 
desired. 

This preparation of raw beef is applicable to any case 
of sickness or debility in which beef-tea would be of 
service, and is preferable in cases where fluids disagree 
with the debilitated or irritable stomach. From a tea-* 
spoonful to a table-spoonful, two or three times a. day, 
may be given, or more or less according to the age and 



310 THALEIA— WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 30. 

condition of" the invalid. It is particularly beneficial to 
younig children during teething, in cholera infantum, and 
summer complaint, or when other artificial food, or even 
the mother's milk, disagrees. 

Beef essence, to prepare rapidly. Take about a pound 
of fresh, lean, juicy and tender beefsteak, cut fully an inch 
in thickness. Broil over live coals, turning frequently, 
until it is well warmed through. Remove and prick it 
thoroughly with the point of a knife, and press out the 
juices. Season to taste, and put over the fire until the 
red color of the juice disappears. If the stomach of the 
patient is very weak, this may be diluted with water at 
time of second cooking. In this manner an excellent beef 
essence or beef-tea may be prepared in a very few min- 
utes. 

Any of the broths, or meat essences or teas, which we 
have mentioned, may be thickened with flour, scorched 
to a light chestnut brown color and boiled a few minutes. 
This will answer a very good purpose in many cases of 
dysentery and bloody-flux. 

Sweet Curd. Take a pint of perfectly sweet and pure 
milk, sweeten and flavor to the taste, bring it to blood-heat, 
stir in rapidly one table-spoonful of rennet wine, and place 
it where it will not be disturbed until it is cold and the 
curd is formed. 

This is quite nutritious, and easily digestible, and is a 
very excellent food for invalids, and for children troubled 
with dysentery and summer complaint. It is also a very 
nice article for dessert. 



THE CEREBELLUM. 311 



CHAPTER XXXI. 

THE CEREBELLUM: ITS ORGANS, THEIR FUNCTIONS, THE IM- 
PORTANCE OF THEIR HARMONIOUS DEVELOPMENT, AND 
THE EFFECTS OF THEIR UNBALANCED CONDITION ; ITS IN- 
FLUENCE IN CONNECTION WITH PHYSICAL CULTURE, AND 
THE RELATIONS IT SUSTAINS TO THE BALANCE OF THE 
ORGANIZATION -SUGGESTIONS AS TO PROPER MODES OF 
EDUCATION AND CORRECTION OF CHILDREN 

Our work has already reached beyond the limits at 
first contemplated, but we can not take leave of our read- 
ers without adding something upon a subject which has 
occupied our thoughts for years — one which demands the 
attention of every parent and educator of the young. 

Our subject is the Cerebellum — its functions, its rela- 
tions with the balance of the system, and its influence 
upon the character and actions of the individual. 

There is no lack of excellent admonitions and advice 
concerning the moral influences and intellectual training 
to which children should be subjected, and we are glad 
to observe that the necessity of physical culture is being 
recognized and provided for. In these divisions of human 
education, the teacher seeks to properly develop the body 
and the mind, and to direct their action, so that the power 
which is expended through their workings may operate to 
the highest usefulness and happiness of the indvidual and 
of the race. 

Our subject goes back of these, and embraces the source 
and nature of the power by virtue of which the voluntary 



312 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

physical and mental operations are performed ; and we con- 
sider it of the utmost importance that they who have the 
education and guidance of children should understand its 
nature, so as to be enabled to direct it in proper channels. 

Power is requisite in the performance of any and every 
action of the system. The various physical and mental 
organs through which voluntary actions are accomplished 
are not the originators of power. As far as we apprehend 
the subject, the power which is expended through their 
workings originates in and proceeds from the cerebellum, 
which sustains toward the rest of the system a relation 
similar to that which a steam-engine holds toward the 
machinery which it operates.* 

It is to this power as a whole, and to its subdivisions, 
to that part of the human structure in which it originates, 
to its character and operations, to its modes and avenues 
of expenditure, and to its normal and misdirected action, 
that we ask the attention of our readers, and especially of 
mothers and teachers of the young. We feel that this 
power lies at the very foundation of human action, and 
that while the quality and direction of the actions are 
dependent upon the development and activity of the re- 
spective executive organs, modified by internal motives 
and external influences, the quantity of action is entirely 
dependent upon the quantity of power derived from the 
cerebellum. 

Of itself, this elementary power operates only as a 
propelling force. Its similitude to the steam-engine is 
strongly marked. There is no difference in the essential 

* The inferior portion of the lateral lobes of the cerebrum are 
very clearly demonstrated to be the organic centers of the instincts 
or desires for food, drink, and air. A full or large development of this 
portion of the cerebrum, as far as we have observed, is always associ- 
ated with a correspondingly full or large development of the cerebellum. 



THE CEREBELLUM. 313 

quality of the latter, though, applied to different kinds of 
machinery. It may be used to propel a boat, to draw a 
train of cars, to operate a loom, or to drive a machine to 
make pins. The difference in the results depends upon 
the differences in the machinery, but the propelling influ- 
ence is unchanged. And thus it is that the strength of 
human action depends upon the amount of power; and 
the difference of action upon the different avenues through 
which power is manifested; and also that the varying 
qualities of any one kind of action result from the vary- 
ing degrees of development of the organs through which it 
is performed, modified by the influences of other sustain- 
ing or opposing organs, and by external circumstances. 

Considerable differences of opinion prevail among phys- 
iologists as to the functions which are performed by the 
cerebellum. The first approach toward the solution of 
the problem was made by Gall, who, with undoubted cor- 
rectness, located therein the organic center of the procre- 
ative instinct, named by him the organ of amativeness. 

No further discoveries having been made by Gall in 
this region of the brain, it w r as supposed by him, and 
accepted by the generality of his followers, that this or- 
gan occupied the entire cerebellum. If this were true, it 
should follow, on the self-evident principle of " size being 
the measure of power, other things being equal," that the 
manifestations of different animals and of human individ- 
uals in this relation should be in direct proportion to the 
size of the cerebellum. This is far from the fact, and the 
argument drawn from it by the opponents of phrenology 
has been hard to overcome. No difficulty of this kind 
exists when we bring to our aid the discoveries of Prof. 
Powell. 

Our space will not permit a detail of the evidences of 
1 the existence of the additional organs discovered by him, 



314 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 



and we must ask our readers to consider them as demon- 
strated, and to follow us to the conclusion of our remarks 

The nervous mass within the cranium is termed the 
encephalon, or brain, and is divided into the cerebrum, 
cerebellum, pons Varolii, and medulla oblongata. The tw< 
latter-named divisions are situated near the center and 
base of the cranial cavity, and their functions are but 
partially comprehended. 

The cerebrum, or superior brain, is by far the large: 
portion of the entire brain, and occupies the space sur- 
rounded by the bones of the forehead, temples, and top, 
sides, and back of the head, as low as the middle of th 
ears. It gives shape to these portions of the cranium 
and, by reason of the large number of its faculties, forms 
the principal field for the observations of the phrenologist. 
It is the region of the propensities, the sentiments, and the 
intellect. 

The cerebellum, or inferior or little brain, occupies the 
lower and back portions of the skull, and is separated from 
the cerebrum by a thin membrane, called the tentorium 
cerebelli, which stretches over the former like a roof, 
line drawn from the upper and outer angle of the orbi 
of the eye, across the ear, to the occipital protuberanci 
(a small projection in males, but generally a depression i 
females), will indicate very nearly, and sufficiently close 
for all practical purposes, the division between the cere- 
brum and the cerebellum, the latter being situated below 
it. (See line and its terminations in cut on page 324, and 
also on page 326.) 

The cerebellum, as far as we now understand it, con- 
tains the organs of three faculties, viz. : amativeness, dis- 
covered by Gall, and accepted by nearly all phrenologists; 
muscular motion and animal sensibility — the latter two 
discovered and fully demonstrated by Prof. Powell, and 



! 
1 






THE CEREBELLUM. 315 

accepted as established by those who have paid proper 
attention to his teachings. Upon the action of these fac- 
ulties the race is dependent for its perpetuation, energy, 
and desire and capacity for motion and physical sensation. 

The organs of the cerebellum, as also those of the cer- 
ebrum, exist in pairs. If these portions of the brain are 
divided by a line running from the center of the forehead, 
upward, backward, and downward, to the base of the brain, 
the parts on either side of this line, which is termed the 
mesial line, will be exact counterparts. 

One entire side of the brain, or any portion, may be 
rendered incapable of action by paralysis or injury and, 
remain so permanently, without affecting the functional 
capacity of the whple or any portion of the other side. 




The above cut represents the location of the organs of the Cerebellum : 1, Animal 
Sensibility; 2, Muscular Motion ; 3, Amativeness. The organs which give desire for 
air (4), for food (5), for drink (6), and for health (7), are situated in the Cerebrum, in 
front of and above the ear. The broad line divides the Cerebrum from the Cerebellum. 

If the cerebellum be divided, perpendicularly, into six 
nearly equal portions, the two central parts will include 
the organs of amativeness ; the two parts outside of these, 
muscular motion; and the two extreme parts, next the 
ears, animal sensibility. 



316 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

The Function of the Organ of Animal Sen- 
sibility. — We consider this organ as the source of ani- 
mal sensation or feeling to the whole body. The nerves 
tributary to it are distributed throughout the entire sys- 
tem, and through their agency we become acquainted with 
whatever comes in contact with the surface. This organ 
presides over the sense of touch. It gives us a perception 
of atmospheric conditions of heat, cold, dryness, or moist- 
ure. It is the principal agency through which the blind 
ascertain the nature of any substance. The ability to 
perceive pain is derived from this faculty. Its nervous 
connections are variously distributed — abundantly in those 
regions where feeling is acute, as in the ends of the fin- 
gers — considerably, but somewhat less, to the general sur- 
face — and in a minor degree to the interior of the body, 
In the latter case they are of essential importance as sen- 
tinels, to give notice of internal departures from health 
conditions, as in inflammation. They also give notice of 
need for evacuations from the excretory receptacles. 

In the human species this center is more largely devel- 
oped than in the lower animal creation. It is compara- 
tively feeble among the North American Indians, and 
their assumed bravery under torture is largely owing to 
their feeble capacity for feeling pain. As a class, males 
of the human species, and also of the lower animals, have 
a larger endowment of this faculty than is possessed by 
females. Some horses manifest this faculty in a high 
degree. Such are restive in very cold weather, will jump 
at the slightest touch of the whip, and suffer severely from 
the attack of insects. Such horses are unsafe for saddle or 
carriage purposes. In the above-mentioned illustrations, 
the development of the cerebellum in the portion devoted 
to this organ is in strict proportion to the manifestation 
. of the faculty. 



• 



THE CEREBELLUM. 



317 



Among the human species, those who possess this organ 
in a high degree are very strongly inclined to the use of 
stimulating food and drink, and to whatever will minister 
to the pleasures of sense. They furnish few illustrations 
of high morality. A large endowment of this organ is 
particularly noticeable in the sanguine-lymphatic temper- 
ament. It is also well marked in the sanguine-bilious 
lymphatic. With a fullness of this organ, there is usu- 
ally a tendency to fullness or grossness of body. 




In figure A all the organs of the Cerebellum are.indicated as being small, but partic- 
ularly sensation and motion ; in figure B they are all indicated as being fully developed, 
as shown by the space and fullness between the lower portions of the ears. 

"While its over-endowment leads to sensuality, and to 
the crimes that spring from it, its feeble endowment is 
productive of a different but very serious evil. It is rare 
to find a youth of either sex, who habitually practices the 
solitary vice, who is even respectably endowed with this 
organ. Children who are fairly developed in the whole 
cerebellum may acquire this habit, but they will spontan- 
eously abandon it before it works a serious injury; while 
those with feeble sensory and motory centers, and large 



318 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

arnativeness, become the permanent victims of its tyr- 
anny, and soon pass into imbecility, insanity, or an early 
grave. It is the disproportion or want of balance in the 
organs of the cerebellum that give rise to this proclivity. 
Where the entire cerebellum is well balanced, but small 
throughout, there is no natural tendency in that direction. 

This organ is located in the extreme right and left por- 
tions of the cerebellum, immediately behind the lower por- 
tions of each ear. (See figure 1, in cut on page 315.) When 
large, it gives prominence to that portion of the skull, 
and adds to its width ; it also gives fullness to the neck. 
When small, the base of the skull is contracted at this 
point, and the neck appears narrow and pinched. 

The Function of the Organ of Muscular Mo- 
tion. — The nature of this faculty is to give, in proportion 
to the development of its organ, an instinct and desire for 
voluntary motion. It is not considered as in any way 
giving ability to control muscular movements, for this is 
referable to Weight or Momentum — an intellectual faculty. 
With a fullness of the organ of muscular motion, there 
is a corresponding fullness of muscular development, and 
proportionate muscular power. In the formation of an 
opinion on this point, the influence of temperament should 
be regarded. The muscles in bilious and sanguine-bilious 
persons are stronger, in proportion to their size, than those 
of any other temperament, owing to their density of fiber. 

When this organ is large, its possessor manifests a con- 
tinued desire for muscular action, and is unhappy or be- 
comes diseased if confined to an in-door and sedentary life. 
In coarse organizations there is a tendency to the exercise 
of physical strength and pugilism, and in finer organiza- 
tions to displays of gymnastic ability. Even as an idler 
of time, with no motive to action, its possessor is never 
long in one place. Motion is a prime necessity for comfort. 



THE CEREBELLUM. 319 

When the organ is small, it produces a disinclination 
to physical labor, leads to the selection of some light 
employment, and to a preference for a quiet, sedentary 
life. The muscles are feeble and small, the chest is con- 
tracted and flat, the shoulders and spine incline forward, 
and the bodily movements are dragging. 

Horses which have this organ quite large are very heavy 
and powerful in muscle, and are adapted for the drawing of 
heavy loads. They make poor saddle-horses, as their step is 
rough and jolting, and their speed only moderate. Horses 
that have this organ small have little ambition, are poor 
in speed and endurance, and will balk at a trifle. These 
remarks are generally applicable to human individuals. 

Prof. Powell, the highest authority in this relation, 
considers that "the essential function of this organ is 
the generation and renovation of that power which gives 
to the muscular system its ability to act, and, when fully 
charged with the stimulus which this organ generates, 
animals are impelled by it to muscular action for its 
expenditure." 

Muscular development and power are in direct ratio 
with the fullness of this portion of the cerebellum, and 
both are found to be greater in males than in females, 
both in the human species and the lower animals. An 
ability to recover rapidly from bodily fatigue with a 
small amount of sleep is possessed by those who have 
this organ large. When small, the powers of endurance 
are less, and more sleep is required. 

A man who has this organ large may prove essentially 
lazy, for want of motives to induce action; yet he will 
never remain long in one place, being impelled to motion 
by this organ. On the other hand, a person in whom it 
is small may prove quite active under the influence of 
sufficient motives. 
28 



320 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

This organ is located in, either side of the cerebellum, 
midway between the organs of animal sensibility and 
amativeness. The location is shown by figure 2, in the 
cut on page 315. It is represented as large in figure jB, 
and small in figure A, in cuts on page 317. It gives 
prominence to that portion of the cerebellum, and adds 
to the width of the head and neck between the ears. 
The neck is also full and muscular in every direction. 

The Function of Amativeness. — From a careful 
consideration of this faculty, with a view to arrive at a 
knowledge of its essential nature, we feel convinced that 
it has not received justice from those who have under- 
taken to represent it. It has been customary, among 
phrenologists, to treat of it mainly as the source of ama- 
tory desire, and an apology has been considered necessary 
whenever any allusion to it is made before a public audi- 
ence. This has given an improper direction to natural 
delicacy of feeling, and done much to prevent a proper 
investigation* In a properly conducted scientifical exam- 
ination of any subject that pertains to the nature of hu- 
manity, and to its welfare, there is no indelicacy. Had 
the nature of this faculty, its true language, and the effects 
which follow the misdirection of the power which it fur- 
nishes, been correctly understood and taught in the past, 
and the knowledge properly applied, the present genera- 
tion would have less crime, insanity, and misery. 

As an organic center, it is probable that it performs more 
than one office. From a comparison of several crania of 
persons who have been led to crime and positive immo- 
rality by the influence of this faculty — and also those of 
many savages — with those of persons of power, intellect, 
and morality, we have noticed evidences of marked ac- 
tivity of the lower portion, and of inactivity in the upper 
portion, of the organ in the former, while in the latter the 



THE CEREBELLUM. 321 

marks indicate an activity of the upper portion equal and 
often superior to that of the lower portions. 

We consider this faculty to be the great source of that 
natural and mutual attraction which exists between the 
sexes. Without it, there would be none of those atten- 
tions which all true-minded men show toward women, 
nor of those sympathies which the latter manifest to the 
former. It is the source of that chivalry which instinct- 
ively springs up in all honorable men toward women, and 
of that feeling of confidence and respect w T hich such men 
inspire in the opposite sex. Without it, there would be 
no appreciation of sex, either in its higher mental char- 
acteristics or in its physical relations — no interchange of 
social sentiment — none of those sympathies, courtesies, 
I and kindnesses in the thousand ways, aside from the 
merely physical, in which each sex ministers to the 
wants, necessities, and happiness of the other — and there 
would be an end of all those family and societary condi- 
tions from which so much of human happiness is derived. 
From this explanation of the nature of this faculty, 
j its important influence upon the character and actions 
; of each individual can be easily comprehended. When 
viewed also in the light in which it is usually repre- 
sented, viz., as merely the source of amatory desire, its 
. office is of paramount importance, for without it there 
would be no perpetuation of the species.* We have spoken 
thus fully upon this faculty with a view to direct the 
reader's attention to the higher avenues through which 
" ( the power it furnishes can be expended, and to the mis- 
i eries which follow its misdirection upon the physical and 
passional plane. 

* The faculty under consideration is the source of amatory desire, 
| but does not furnish functional capacity. The latter is mainly de- 
1 pendent upon the action of the remaining portions of the cerebellum. 



322 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

When fully developed, and its action sustained by that 
of the other cerebellar faculties, it leads to a high display 
of energy and power. The records of the world give 
many examples in this relation, where men for women, 
and women for men, under the influence of strong mo- 
tives, have proved capable of the highest virtues and of 
the deepest crimes. It is through the use of the power 
derived from a well-developed and properly-balanced cer- 
ebellum, under the prompting of proper motives, and 
guided by a superior intellect, that the noblest acts of hu- 
manity are accomplished; while its misuse upon the lower 
passional and physical plane is degrading to the higher 
nature and feelings, exhausting to physical and mental 
energy, and productive of untold misery and disease. It 
is not necessary to restrain the power it furnishes: what 
is required is that it shall be properly directed. 

The influence of this faculty upon human action may 
be estimated from an observation of those occasional cases 
which are found where that portion of the cerebellum 
devoted to this organ is nearly absent at birth and re- 
mains undeveloped, and consequently there is no mani- 
festation of the faculty in the actions of the individual. 
Such persons are totally indifferent, and sometimes show 
a positive aversion, to the opposite sex, are lacking in 
power, energy, enthusiasm, and genial feeling, and are 
indifferent to the common interests of society and of hu- 
manity, even though the remaining organs of the cere- 
bellum and those of the cerebrum are favorably developed. 

Our knowledge of the functions performed by the cer- 
ebellum is mainly limited to that of the three organs 
already mentioned, and our remarks are based upon these 
only, though we think it quite probable that it performs 
other offices. 

Other things being equal, the measure of this portion 



THE CEREBELLUM. 323 

of the brain is the measure of the power and endurance 
of the individual. Vital vigor, or capacity for present 
vigorous action, exists in proportion to the width and 
backward development of the cerebellum, while vital te- 
nacity, or power for prolonged action, depends upon its 
depth or perpendicular development. When it is full in 
these three directions, both vigor and tenacity are present 
in a corresponding degree. 

Vital vigor alone does not insure a prolonged life. Per- 
sons thus organized may, and usually do, appear healthy 
and capable of great power, but they often surprise a 
community by an unwarned and sudden death. Children 
with a similar endowment appear to be models of health, 
but are incapable of resisting the attacks of ordinary dis- 
ease, and a fatal result that is simply owing to a defect 
in organization is often attributed to a mysterious prov- 
idence. 

The vitally tenacious, with little vigor, will equally sur- 
prise the observer by more than a half-century's life, while 
their appearance would, the whole time, seem to indicate 
an inability to survive more than a year or two at the 
most. Children thus organized appear puny and feeble, 
but rarely die. The line indicating the division between 
the cerebrum and cerebellum is described on page 314, and 
shown in the cuts on pages 324 and 326. An estimate of 
the amount of vital vigor possessed by any person may be 
readily made by applying the line, and noticing the width 
and fullness of that part of the back of the head and neck 
which is below it. If wide and full throughout, it indi- 
cates a full degree of vital vigor; if prominent only in 
the central portion, and thin and pinched at the sides, it 
indicates large amativeness, with feeble motory and sensory 
capacity — a lamentably defective condition, and extremely 
liable to produce the results mentioned on page 317. 



J 



324 



THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CfiAP. 31. 



To determine the amount of vital tenacity, apply the 
line as before directed : the distance from the opening of 
the ear to the line indicates the depth of the cerebellum, 
on which duration of life depends. 




This cut represents the skull of Loper, executed in Mississippi', for murder. The 
distance on the skull from the line to the opening of the ear is one inch— showing a 
capacity for many years of life. 




This cut represents the skull of a man who died of consumption. The distance on 
the skull from the line to the opening of the ear is one-sixteenth of an inch— showing 
great deficiency in the depth of the Cerebellum, and consequent inability to sustain 
life. 

The first of these skulls is an excellent illustration of 
a very deep cerebellum ; and such an endowment is almost 
a perfect guarantee against death from any cause, except 
accident, violence, or highly improper medication. The 
original bearer of this skull was hung for murder, in the 



THE CEREBELLUM. 325 

prime of life ; and from the amount of vital brain lie pos- 
sessed at that time, we believe he was organized for many 
years more of life. It is rare to find among the living a 
greater depth, and it is only when age, excess, or long-con- 
tinued indolence has reduced the power and, with it, the 
depth of the cerebellum, that death can rightfully claim 
them. A person who measures three-fourths of an inch is 
in little danger of dying from any disease. In Prof. Pow- 
ell's cabinet of over four hundred crania, the few in which 
this measurement is three-fourths of an inch or more were 
of persons who had died by mechanical violence (but not 
by suicide), while in the skulls of those who had died from 
disease, old age, or suicide, it is reduced to half an inch or 
less. 

The second illustration, the one in which the death 
occurred by consumption, shows an extreme reduction 
in depth. In persons of dense fibrous organization, life 
may be prolonged until the depth is reduced as low as 
it was in this case; but consumptives generally show 
about three-eighths of an inch, and suicides about the 
same. We never entertain a doubt of the recovery of 
a patient from any form of disease we have ever wit- 
nessed, when the measurement shows the depth of the 
cerebellum to be three-fourths of an inch; and, on the 
other hand, where the depth is only half an inch or less, 
we entertain serious doubts as to the ability for recovery 
from any severe attack of disease. 

With a high degree of vigor, disease is generally acute, 
and runs its course rapidly, either to recovery or death. 
With feeble vigor, the changes in the system occur slowly, 
and disease is usually chronic. When the depth of the 
cerebellum is reduced as low as half an inch, the former 
class are extremely liable to die suddenly of acute disease, 
while, in the latter, death comes more slow T ly, through 



, 



326 



THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 



some chronic malady, and the certainly-fatal termination 
is foreshadowed by the continued decrease of the depth 
of vital brain. 

These remarks apply to the heads of adults. A half- 
inch in a child under seven years of age may be consid- 
ered as equivalent to three-fourths of an inch in an adult. 




Prof. W. BYRD POWELL, M. D. 



We introduce this profile view of Prof. Powell, for the purpose of showing the appli- 
cation of the line to the living subject : A represents the external angle of the eye-bone, 
B the occipital protuberance, and the perpendicular distance from the line to the open- 
ing of the ear indicates the depth of the Cerebellum. It shows a full development in 
the backward and perpendicular directions, and is indicative of decided power and 
endurance. It is not sufficiently wide between the point B and the ear to indicate a 
proportionate degree of vigor, though it is by no means deficient. 



THE CEREBELLUM. 327 

The organs of the cerebellum are common to man and 
the lower animals. In savage life there are but few vari- 
ations from the general standard of development, but the 
artificial conditions of civilization produce great extremes 
in the size of the cerebellum as a whole, and in the rela- 
tive proportions of its different parts. Similar effects are 
produced upon some classes of animals by domestication. 
We have just resumed our writing, after an examination 
Df fifty crania of American Indians : we found in them 
a. remarkable uniformity of development in the base of 
the skull. In forty-seven of these, the organ of muscu- 
lar motion has been prominently large and active, and 
the other organs, though well developed, have left no 
evidences of special activity. In the remaining three, 
the entire cerebellum had been largely developed. Prof. 
Powell remarks : "As much as we have been among many 
of our savage tribes, we never saw a case of phthisis pul- 
monalis, and, in harmony with this fact, we find their cer- 
ebelli largely developed, and their cerebral hemispheres 
peculiarly feeble or undeveloped." In addition to this, 
and arising from it, the savages possess a full and active 
muscular system, and capacious lungs — the whole con- 
stituting a complete defense against phthisis pulmonalis 
(tubercular consumption). The nearer we reverse these 
conditions the more do we invite this form of disease. 

It is commonly believed that this form of consumption 
is inherited. We do not consider it so, in the sense of 
a direct conveyance from parent to child. A child may 
receive a constitution so organically defective as to be 
liable, under ordinary circumstances, to tubercular depos- 
its in the lungs or elsewhere; and these may appear at a 
very early period; yet many of such constitutions might 
be so improved, by early training and an active life, as 

to entirely ward off the disease, and the person might die 
29 



328 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

of some other and entirely different malady, or of old age. 
As consumption would never appear in such cases, it could 
not have been actually inherited; and this we believe to 
be the true explanation of a " consumptive inheritance." 
The children of highly incompatible parents may be born 
with tubercles already developed, while there will be no 
evidence of any such condition in either of the parents, 
or in their ancestors. 

Where the vital measurement is fully half an inch, the 
organization dense, and the meridian of life not passed, 
we are satisfied that, in many cases where tubercles are 
already formed, their further development may be pre- 
vented, and life and health prolonged for many years, by 
attention to the principles involved in the last two para- 
graphs. Our medical experience is sufficient to warrant 
this statement. Medicine alone is incompetent to cure, 
but it has its direct and immediate uses in such cases. 

An inactive life, physically and mentally, or dissipa- 
tion, are particularly favorable to the development of 
tubercles in a constitution organically liable to it; while 
physical activity, joined to business responsibility, affords 
the best preventive. 

A cerebellum, well developed and full in every direc- 
tion, gives to its possessor a full degree of power. The 
direction the power may take depends very much upon 
internal motives, and also upon external circumstances. 
Desire for gain (acquisitiveness) may so overrule as to 
force every other faculty to do its bidding, and every act 
and thought will be concentrated upon money and how 
to get it. Benevolence may be the superior faculty, and 
every act that is performed will be with a view to ben- 
efit others. Intellectual pursuits may engross the entire 
energies; appetite and passion may so control as to pre- 
vent action in a higher direction; or a life may be spent 



THE CEREBELLUM. 329 

in the laborious effort of doing nothing, and in finding 
lexcuses for it. But, with a full cerebellum, any of these 
(various actions will be performed with a full degree of 
power. Even these " natural do-nothings" are always 
busy — moving from place to place, planning how to 
obtain a living out of somebody without rendering an 
equivalent, and never accomplishing any thing useful to 
any one. Many of them end their days in the public 
alms-house or hospital, or are kept from it only by the 
.charities of their long-suffering friends. 

Without a fair development of this portion of the brain, 
.the individual is comparatively a cipher in society. Even 
7 with a good intellect and pure motives, he will rarely rise 
.above a subordinate position, though he may be esteemed 
for goodness and mildness of character. Such persons 
feel no instinctive ability to accomplish any considera- 
ble action, and will always wait for the orders of others. 
They are, nevertheless, often very useful in executive po- 
sitions that require little responsibility of thought and 
.action. "With unfavorable surroundings, they are very 
apt to become criminal, because they lack power to resist 
the stronger will of their associates. They may steal, 
[because they have not power enough to support them- 
, : selves by an energetic and honest industry. They take 
.upon themselves the character of their surroundings, either 
for good or bad, but never powerfully for either, of their 
own volition. The minor criminals, the petty thieves, 
the contemptibly vicious, are mostly thus organized. They 
would be greater in crime and vice if they had power to 
be so. 

The portion of the brain under consideration is de- 
nominated by Prof. Powell the region of the animo-vital 
powers. Upon it, not only is individual existence de- 
pendent, but also the perpetuation of the race. Though 



330 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

its faculties are indispensable to the performance of every 
voluntary physical and mental act, they are least under- 
stood and most neglected in the educational provisions 
of human society. To the ignorance of our teachers, and 
of parents concerning themselves and the conditions they 
transmit to and confer upon their offspring, through tem- 
peramental incompatibility in themselves, and through the 
violation of physiological law in their progenital capaci- 
ties, and to the neglect in the education of children, we 
attribute a large share of the vice, crime, misery, and 
premature death so abundant in civilized society. 

The evil lies not in a high or low development of the 
cerebellum as a whole, but in the relative disproportion 
of its several parts. Something may be done to lessen 
the disproportion in existing cases, but the great remedy 
consists in preventing it in those who are yet to come 
upon the stage of human existence. Organizations al- 
ready in existence are established facts, and only partially 
capable of being modified or improved. Many of these 
have had their origin and gestation under unfavorable 
parental conditions, and their infantile development un- 
der neglect and improper influences, and they must carry 
through life the effects of these conditions and influences. 
It is time that parents should understand that providence 
works by law; that results follow the action of causes with 
absolute certainty; and that when they find bad results in 
progeny — diseased, defective, feeble, unbalanced, mischiev- 
ous, or useless specimens of humanity — that they, through 
disobedience of natural law, are the responsible causes. They 
should learn that, through obedience to the laws that gov- 
ern the re-production of the species, such unfortunate re- 
sults would be prevented, and in their stead, healthy, moral, 
and useful progeny would arise " to call them blessed." They 
should so take the lesson home to their understandings and 



THE CEKEBELLUM. 331 

their consciences as to be induced to avoid progenital action, 
when only unfavorable progeny can, by any known possi- 
bility, result. 

That maternal love which binds the mother to her sickly 
or unfortunately defective child more strongly than to her 
healthy one must receive a less severe shock from its death 
than from the necessity of witnessing its gradual and cer- 
tain loss of all that is manly or womanly through indul- 
gence in what is commonly termed the secret vice; of 
witnessing the slow decay of intellect and physical power 
and beauty, as inevitable as the progress of time, until it 
ends in a somewhat prolonged life of utter uselessness, 
imbecility, or insanity, or, what is far less unfortunate, 
an early death. 

However humble their station in life may be, parents 
may justly be proud of healthy, vigorous, and w r ell-bal- 
anced offspring; and however high or affluent the posi- 
tion they may hold, their lives must be embittered by 
the sight of such unfortunate results as we have hinted 
at. The alarming prevalence of this vice has awakened 
. the attention of the philanthropist, and books have been 
published, lectures delivered, and appeals made, but, to a 
large extent, they fail of their object, because they present 
no adequate remedy. It is a sin of the physical, more 
than of the moral nature. It arises, not from a willful 
intent to do wrong, but mainly through ignorance of 
its consequences, and from organic inability of resistance. 
There is, in most of such cases, a feeble endowment of 
the sensory and motory centers — particularly the latter — 
while amativeness is large, and especially so when com- 
pared with the other two organs, and is also abnormally 
active. Such organizations are feeble in power and en- 
durance, and strong in desire. Moral influences fall upon 
barren ground when applied to those who, by such organic 



I 



332 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

defects, are impelled to this vice. They have neither power 
for general uses, nor power to resist their organic tenden- 
cies. The proclivity and indulgence are as natural to their 
defective organizations as health and proper action are to 
more favorable ones; and it would be as rational to expect 
purity of physical life from them as full health from the 
scrofulous and consumptive, or high intellect from the im 
becile. 

Disobedience of organic law, on the part of the parents, 
is the direct cause of such defective conditions in children, 
They have come together, in their progenital capacities, i 
many cases, with physical systems enfeebled from inactiv- 
ity, disease, or dissipation, or exhausted by overwork, and 
often temporarily stimulated to passional desire. Not un- 
frequently it is the husband who manifests all the passion, 
while the wife is the exhausted recipient. Such acts often 
follow a late supper of highly-seasoned food and stimulat- 
ing drink. In many cases, the mother leads an inactive 
and absolutely lazy life previous to and during gestation; 
and, in others, her entire system is overtaxed and exhausted. 
What can such parents expect in their progeny except their 
own conditions, viz., importunate desire and feeble physical 
power ? To these causes should be added the feeding of the 
children upon an improper diet of highly-seasoned food and 
stimulating drink, which tends directly to produce an ab- 
normal precocity of the sexual capacity — and the neglect of 
physical training during infancy and childhood — the results 
of all which are finally manifested in the degrading and 
destroying habit to which we have referred. 

As the causes are so largely of a physical character, we 
must look for the remedy in the same direction. Not every 
case will be as marked as the one we have described. There 
will be all grades — from those where the habit arises spon- 
taneously, and almost inevitably — up through those where 



THE CEREBELLUM. 333 

there is a strong organic liability, but which may, in most 
cases, be prevented by proper physical development and 
training — to those who may be taught the practice by 
others, but who will voluntarily abandon it. Of the first 
class there is little hope ; of the last there is little danger, 
if they be properly cautioned. It is the second class, which 
is by far the most numerous, that offers the most hopeful 
field for the labor of prevention and cure. 

Laziness and intemperance among parents in the lower 
walks of life, and ease and indulgence in the higher — and 
these are mere distinctions in words, with no difference in 
meaning — are powerful producing causes of such unbal- 
anced organizations in children. They who would avoid 
the results, must avoid parentage when under such condi- 
tions. In Chapter X, the reader will find some remarks 
directly applicable to this portion of our subject. Without 
such a development of the motory center as will impel 
naturally to those movements which place the person in • 
relation with things outside of the body — without that 
development of the sensory center that will give capacity 
and desire for sensations beyond those that the youth can 
personally produce upon him or herself — without a harmoni- 
ous development of the various physical and mental organs 
of voluntary action, and motives and capacity for their 
general employment — if amativeness be large and active, 
the individual will be specially liable, from organization, 
to fall into the habit to which we have referred. 

The utmost cultivation of the capacity and desire for 
muscular motion is absolutely necessary as a means of 
establishing a balance of power and action between the 
organs of the cerebellum, which alone can prevent the oc- 
currence of the habit in those who, by organization, are 
liable to it.* It is equally necessary for the cure of con- 

* The cerebellum may be quite feeble, as is the case generally with 



334 THALEIA— WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

sumption when tubercles are developed, and to prevent the 
disease in constitutions organically liable to it. 

We can not more forcibly impress upon the mind of the 
reader the importance and benefit of physical action for the 
purposes previously mentioned than by a brief detail of the 
following incident, related to us by Prof. Powell : 

Some years since, while on a visit to a lunatic asylum 
in one of the Southern States, he found several youths, of 
both sexes, who had been placed there by their parents, 
more as a relief from a mortifying burden than in the 
hope of cure. They were all the children of rich parents, 
and had been reared in ease and luxury, in a state of so- 
ciety where physical labor was deemed a disgrace, but had 
not lacked for mental cultivation, and had contracted hab- 
its which were rapidly reducing them to imbecility and 
insanity. He inquired what was being done in the way of 
treatment, and was informed that medicine, moral influ- 

those who are largely of the encephalic temperament ; and yet, when 
its organs are harmoniously balanced, it indicates no such proclivity. 
According to our observation, most of the class who are ruined by 
this vice are of the bilious or bilious-sanguine temperaments. 

The encephalic temperament may be known by a marked fullness 
of that portion of the cerebrum occupied by the organs of the fac- 
ulties which distinguish man from the lower animals, with a com- 
parative deficiency in the vegeto-vital and animo-vital regions of the 
brain. The upper third of the cerebrum is large, projecting in front 
and at the sides, and the entire cerebellum and the lower portions of 
the cerebrum are small. There is a general feeble physical develop- 
ment and capacity, and the intellectual tendencies are more toward 
the abstract or metaphysical than the practical. All the operations 
of the system are tardily performed. There is little wear and waste, 
and the hold on life, though apparently feeble, is quite tenacious — 
and often surprisingly so with those whose business requires contin- 
uous muscular movements. There is no special organic liability to 
consumption. It is never found alone, but most frequently in com- 
bination with the bilious or bilious-sanguine temperaments, to which 
it imparts additional intellectual capacity. 



THE CEEEBELLUM. 335 

ences, and bodily restraint had all been tried to no good 
effect, and the attempts had been abandoned. He said, 
" Put them to work." The reply was : " They have rich 
parents, who would deem themselves and their children 
disgraced if it were done, even if it would do any good." 
"They are placed here, sir, to be restored to society and 
usefulness, if possible, and it is your imperative duty to use 
every means in your power to accomplish it." " But how 
to do it, is the question." " Put the girls to sweeping, 
scrubbing, and general housework, and the boys to work 
in the garden and cutting wood. Make them work every 
day until they are completely tired, so that when they go 
to bed they will fall asleep immediately. Start them to 
work in the morning as soon as they awake; give them 
no minute to idle away, either in bed or out ; feed them 
on nourishing diet. Pursue this course systematically 
for six months, and then do me the favor to report the 
result to me." The suggestion was acted upon, and the 
physician in charge reported at the time requested that 
great benefits had been produced; and, within one year, 
the majority were returned to their parents, cured and 
fitted for usefulness. 

We have frequently been consulted in our professional 
capacity by mothers whose children had contracted the 
habit, and have the pleasure of knowing that when our 
advice, which was similar in principle to the preceding, 
has been acted upon, the children have been saved from 
physical and mental ruin. 

So great is our confidence in the wisdom and goodness 
of the Author of all natural law that we can not believe 
that the gift of human existence, unattended by a capacity 
for health, longevity and happiness, is any part of His 
design, and wherever we find these capacities denied to 
any, we refer such conditions to violations of organic law 



336 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

— either on the part of the parents who have conferred 
defective organ izations, physical or mental, on their off- 
spring, or on" the part of the individual who has neg- 
lected to obey the laws which govern his own existence. 
Whether ignorantly or knowingly — by design, or by ac- 
cident — through parental or personal disobedience — a vi- 
olation of natural law invariably brings a penalty, from 
which there is no escape, and obedience equally brings a 
due reward. 

We assume that happiness and usefulness are the two 
great ends of human life, and these are dependent upon 
the health, strength, and harmonious action of the vari- 
ous organs of the system. If the laws of parentage have 
been obeyed, the infant, at birth, will have received the 
first elements necessary to the fulfillment of these ends. 
Whether they will ever be realized or not in its after-life, 
depends largely upon the care which is bestowed upon its 
entire organization during its period of growth and devel- 
opment. 

The first needs of an infant are mostly of a physical 
character, but its mental education should commence and 
be continuous with its physical development. While the 
mother or the nurse is supplying its bodily needs in the 
way of food and protection, it is capable of receiving fa- 
vorable or unfavorable impressions of a mental character 
which will influence it in after-life. The first mental fac- 
ulties which fall under the mother's care are those which 
preside over voluntary motion (muscular motion) and the 
sensibility of the body (animal sensibility). Upon a proper 
cultivation of these, depend, in a great measure, the fu- 
ture usefulness and happiness of the man or woman. An 
idle, lounging person is neither useful nor happy, and can 
not possess sufficient flexibility and power of muscle or 
expansibility of the lungs for immediate and continued 



THE CEREBELLUM. 337 

action in emergencies. With such, life is mostly vege- 
tative; and such a woman is especially unfitted for the 
proper performance of gestation and the other duties of 
maternity. 

When idleness is condemned in a man or woman, why 
should it be encouraged or permitted in a child ? Accord- 
ing as we indulge the body, so do we develop the mental 
faculties which hold a relation to such indulgences. By 
active movement of the muscles, we stimulate the organ 
which presides over voluntary motion, and, by indulging 
in idleness, we necessarily restrict the influence of the fac- 
ulty. The activity of this faculty and the capacity for mo- 
tion are so closely related that whatever retards the one 
diminishes the other. 

A child who will sleep a large portion of the time, who 
nurses frequently, and grows fat, who will lie still and not 
cry when awake, is considered a model of "goodness" by 
most mothers and nurses; but this goodness is too much of 
that negative vegetative character, that promises very little 
in the way of making an active and useful man or woman ; 
while the child whose desire for motion is so instinctively 
great that it will cry for exercise until it has brought on 
the fatigue that is necessary to its comfort — and without 
w T hich it can not sleep — is termed " cross." We can not 
admire manifestations of bad temper in infants any more 
than in older people, but many a child cries itself into 
vigor and strength. A vigorous cry tends to inflate the 
lungs, to develop the muscles of the chest, and to send 
the blood more freely on its round of circulation. If you 
will give your children more exercise, many of them will 
cry much less. It is a hundred fold better for the child 
to let it cry, if you have not time to give it other exercise, 
than to render it sluggish and indisposed to motion by 
overfeeding. 



338 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

We consider the cradle as an invention of some unin- 
tentional enemy of children, for its lulling influence dis- 
courages that voluntary action which should be encouraged 
in most children, and subdued in none. A child should 
never be trained to rest, nor to an indisposition to motion ; 
for, if so, its other faculties become adapted to this state 
of things, and the whole system of voluntary action sinks 
into a condition of inertia that can only be overcome by 
a stronger motive than a child can appreciate. Those who 
show a natural aptitude for motion, by continual movements 
of the limbs and muscles generally, require less special at- 
tention ; but their natural desire in this direction should 
never be disregarded. 

Where parents are so unfortunate as to have children 
defectively organized in regard to the motory center, their 
first and continuous duty toward their offspring, in the way 
of education, is to induce, in every possible way, the action 
of the muscular system. Much may be done, while the in- 
fant is in arms, by frequently taking it up and carrying it 
around ; by always requiring it to reach for what it wants, 
instead of placing it in its hands. Little as the latter may 
appear, it is of much importance, for it furnishes a motive 
for a muscular movement ; and children, like older people, 
act best when impelled by a motive. As soon as it begins 
to creep, it should be encouraged to do so by putting the 
objects of its admiration and desire beyond its immediate 
reach, and placing the child upon its own resources — to go 
for it, or not have it. When it begins to walk, the same 
principle should be enlarged upon by sending it on er- 
rands to distant parts of the room ; and as it grows older, 
take every possible occasion to send it all over and around 
the house. Children have a natural desire to be useful to 
the extent of their capacities, and if they can be made to 
think that these little services are of value to their parents, 



THE CEREBELLUM. 339 

a double benefit will be produced — an action prompted by 
a good motive. 

Such children as naturally take to running are not the 
ones that require this mode of training; it is the very good 
and quiet ones — those with large, top-heavy heads, slim 
necks, flat chests, and feeble muscles, and also the fat and 
lazy ones — all who will sit in one place quietly by the hour. 

As soon as they are old enough, encourage declamation. 
There are few things better for the development of lung- 
power than singing and loud and continuous speaking. 
Teach them light gymnastics, and require its performance 
every day in your presence. Encourage running and active 
play, and give them plenty of time for out-door sports in 
suitable weather. Teach them early to dance, and give them 
frequent opportunities to do it; it cultivates precision of 
muscular movements, removes awkwardness, gives an easy 
and graceful carriage of the body, and encourages ideality 
and refinement of manners, and, when practiced in season- 
able hours, is not open to an objection founded on any law 
of physiology or morality. Under all circumstances, have 
the clothing so loose that it will not impede the action of 
a single muscle nor prevent full expansion of the lungs. 
Swimming is a good exercise, and a very important part 
of a child's education — for girls as well as for boys — and 
a knowledge of it may save a life that might otherwise be 
lost.* 

Our object is to impress upon parents the benefits and 
necessity of cultivating the desire and capacity for muscular 
motion in their children rather than to lay down any spe- 
cific rules for them to follow. We have given merely an 

*In an account of a steamboat accident (we think, on the Ohio 
River), published some years since, it was stated that a woman, 
through her ability to swim, saved the lives of her entire family 
(a husband and several children). 



340 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD, [CHAP. 31. 

outline of what we deem necessary, and good judgment will 
suggest many other modes by which the principle can be 
extended. In all these exercises, as in any other action of 
life, whatever is worth doing is worthy of being done well, 
both for the sake of the present benefit, and for the culti- 
vation of the habit of perfectiveness.* 

There is another feature in the training of an infant which 
should receive early and constant attention from mothers 
and nurses: we refer to the cultivation of Animal Sensibil- 
ity, the faculty which, when properly developed, prompts 
to personal purity and cleanliness in all things. The deli- 
cate and healthful sensibility of the skin is greatly obstructed 
when any impurity is allowed to remain on its surface, and 
if the training is commenced by keeping the child's skin 
and clothing clean, it will soon come to desire the cleansing 
process, on account of the comfort and pleasure it affords. 
By this attention, the faculty will be improved, and the 
child will give evidence in after-life that it has received 
its education under the direct influences of a refined civili- 
zation. 

Muscular action, abundant breathing, personal cleanli- 
ness, and regular habits in children are the best prevent- 

* We have frequently recommended what we term the " chair-back 
exercise" as a means of bringing a very considerable number of mus- 
cles into action at one time, and also of promoting full expansion of 
the lungs. It is performed by standing at the back of a chair, with 
the heels about three inches apart, the toes turned well outwardly, 
the body erect, and the shoulders thrown backward. With the hands 
resting the whole time upon the chair-top, drop the body downward, 
nearly to the floor, and then rise again, without bending the body or 
stooping the shoulders. Continue these motions, breathing full and 
deep, until moderately tired. Repeat it three or four times a day. 
A feeble person, who can not go down and up more than two or three 
times at the first trial, may be able to do it from one to two hundred 
times, after a few months' practice. We recommend it to consump- 
tives, and to those who are thus inclined. 



THE CEREBELLUM. 341 

ives of disease.' They should also be particularly observed 
by the mother from the time she anticipates maternity up 
to the period when the child ceases to require her direct 
care, both for her own health and capacity for maternal du- 
ties, and that the child may receive from her a vital system 
that will be adequate to health, longevity, and usefulness. 

The physical training, upon the principles we have indi- 
cated, should begin in early infancy, and continue through 
childhood and youth ; for only upon a well-developed and 
sound physical foundation can we reasonably expect to build 
a serviceable mental superstructure. Every muscular move- 
ment, and every deep breath, bring their mite to aid in the 
former. We have given, in Chapter III, the natural order 
of development of the system. In brief, it is, first, the vege- 
tative growth of the body, in utero ; then its atmospheric life, 
with its instincts for the first necessities of animal existence 
— food and protection — and its capacity for motion and sen- 
sation ; then the commencement of its powers of perception 
of things and their properties; then its ability to perceive 
the relations between things; and, lastly, its powers of re- 
flection and reason. The procreative instinct and capacity, 
under normal conditions, are considerably delayed. If, in 
our order of education, we depart from the lesson w T hich na- 
ture has thus placed before us, we act most unwisely. Our 
proper course is to bestow educational care first upon those 
faculties which are naturally developed first, and to check 
any precocity of development of any organ or capacity by 
diverting the power in other directions. The human or- 
ganization is a self-developing and self-acting apparatus, 
originating its own power in one department, and expend- 
ing it in others ; and that it may act harmoniously through 
the period that Nature designs it should — its allotted three- 
score and ten years, more or less — it is necessary that the 
supply of power should always be equal to any normal de- 



342 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

mand; and also that no faculty should come into action 
prematurely so as to exhaust the power or rob other por- 
tions of the system of their legitimate supply. Precocity, 
which is development and activity of any faculty in advance 
of its proper period, is invariably injurious. 

We have shown the tendency to specific vice that arises 
from a want of development of the motory and sensory cen- 
ters in connection with a precocity of amativeness ; and also 
the liability to disease and premature death that springs 
from a feeble endowment of the animo-vital region of the 
brain. We will now turn our thoughts in another direction. 

There is danger in the cultivation of a precocious intellect 
Parents are too often foolishly vain of mental precocity in 
their progeny, and will ask a visitor's admiration of the 
fine intellectual development of their children's heads, little 
thinking that it is often the index of the early death of 
their loved ones ; or that, if they should survive, their fu- 
ture years will fail to fulfill the promise of their infancy. 
Precocity of intellect in a child is of no earthly avail ; it 
accomplishes nothing useful; it is merely something to be 
admired by those who do not realize that it is abnormal, 
and out of place, and regretted by those who can appreci- 
ate the condition of organization that gives rise to it. It 
may please the vanity of parents, but it gives pain to the 
observer who knows what it means. Furthermore, it is 
only by comparison that it seems to be of any value. It 
has no mark of adult judgment, nor capacity for business. 
It is simply because it appears in a child, and is in advance 
of most other children, that it creates surprise or admira- 
tion — not that it is of any real use to the child, the parents, 
or the world. It carries off, in a wrong and valueless di- 
rection, the power which is absolutely needed elsewhere, 
and proves the ruin of its possessor. It is the precursor of 
brain disease, of insanity, or of early death. 



THE CEREBELLUM. 343 

The intellectual, to be of permanent service, must be 
supported by the physical, and can never be of much use 
if stimulated into action before the physical system is de- 
veloped and consolidated so as to be capable of furnishing 
an abundant and continuous supply of power. It is this 
disproportion between the supply furnished in early and in 
later years that makes a precocious intellect fail when put 
to the test of real life-work. The mental fire is often spark- 
ling and brilliant, but its supply of fuel is small, and soon 
exhausted. 

Precocity of intellect is, in most cases, the result of or- 
ganization; and parents are so far from appreciating the 
misfortune that they strive, by their modes of education, to 
increase it, and to induce it in those of their children who do 
not naturally possess it. Instead of allowing them time and 
opportunity for natural development, they treat them as if 
they were hot-house plants that could not survive exposure 
to the elements — as if they could not bloom without an ex- 
cess of artificial care. They shut their eyes to the fact that 
every-where in nature premature decay follows closely upon 
premature development They send their children to school, 
and crowd them with study, at an age when nature and in- 
clination demand full, free, and enlarged outdoor physical 
exercise to give the growing twig strength to become the 
full-grown tree, and thus enable it to bear good fruit in due 
season. They seem to be impressed with the idea that their 
boys must be presidents of railroads, or managers of some 
business that goes by steam, by the time they reach twenty 
years, and their girls, with a finished education, at the head 
of a house at seventeen. 

They strive to build mental superstructures upon such 
feeble physical foundations that the edifices often fall to ruin 
before completion, or are shaken to pieces by the workings 
of their own machinery. 
30 



344 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

Our great men and women are not from among those 
whose childhood promised us geniuses. Many of them took 
their first lessons in the old log school-houses, and esteemed 
it a great privilege to attend school in the winter months 
when nothing else could be done. In whatever way they 
passed their early years, physical action was a continuous 
necessity, and books occupied only their spare time. 

We do not advocate a return to the primitive system of 
schooling, but would suggest to parents that while they give 
their children the benefits of the present most excellent mode 
of education, with its hundred fold advantages over the old 
one, that they combine with it an equal and proportionate 
cultivation of the physical systems of their children out- 
side of the school-room. 

We have too few school-houses and too few teachers in 
our cities for the number of scholars. Our school system 
demands a certain routine, through which the pupil must 
pass, and the teachers in the various grades are compelled 
by the necessities of their position to hurry the scholars from 
first to last. No matter how complete may be the teachers' 
knowledge of the laws of physiology and hygiene, they have 
little opportunity to exercise it, for parents expect them, with 
primary grammars, to make of the child a Murray ; with 
primary geographies and histories, a Humboldt; and, with 
primary astronomies and philosophies, a Newton. If our 
men and women who are just entering upon the stage of 
active life will look back to their school- days, they will, we 
think, realize how much they were required to memorize, 
how few principles they acquired, and how large a portion 
of that for which they labored so hard has passed from their 
memory. If children could have more of the book of na- 
ture, more of principles, less of printed books of dry de- 
tails, dates, and abstractions, and more of physical training, 
though they would have learned less, they would know more 



THE CEREBELLUM. 345 

at eighteen, and be better qualified to apply their knowl- 
edge in the practical business of life. 

Teachers are too apt to single out their best memorizers 
and set them up as models for imitation ; and these are the 
ones who, with little exertion carry off the prizes, while 
the majority, who have labored hard to reach these stand- 
ards of impossibility, hardly get the credit of an energetic 
effort; and yet in after-life the prizes of success fall mostly 
to the latter. 

It is the duty of parents to study the peculiarities and 
capacities of their children, and be governed accordingly, 
for the teacher has neither time nor permission to depart 
from the general rule for the benefit of any one pupil. The 
same task is set out for each, and required of each. The dull 
scholars with good physical systems are in no danger of hurt- 
ing themselves, no matter how hard they may be pressed, 
but the ambitious ones with active brains and feeble bodies 
are sure to suffer, for books must be carried home and studied 
at night, and heads must ache and bodies grow more feeble 
for want of sleep and proper exercise, because the parents 
expect them to pass a creditable examination at the end of 
the session, and their room will be needed for those who are 
being hurried up from the grades below; and often brain 
disease, typhoid fever, or nervous prostration intervene to 
stop this intellectual race, and the obituaries written by 
sympathizing friends tell us of " Mysterious Providences." 

The education of a child should be conducted with a view 
to its future occupation ; and if a girl at eighteen, or a boy 
at twenty-one, with fair intellect and health, is not quali- 
fied, so far as education is concerned, to earn an honest liv- 
ing in some legitimate employment, it is proof of neglect 
on the part of his or her parents or guardians. No station 
in life can excuse the want of a practical knowledge of how 
to do it. Much of the success in life depends on the proper 



346 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

selection of an occupation. Many a third-rate doctor, lawyer, 
or minister, would have succeeded well in some physical 
employment, and many a good farmer is lost in an unsuc- 
cessful tradesman. Parents frequently select a profession 
for their boys, because they imagine they are not strong 
enough for mechanical labor or farming, and with the idea 
that a professional life is an easy one. Such children are 
the very ones who need exactly the line of action they avoid, 
and they either fail of professional success for want of phys- 
ical power to supply its intellectual demands, or the intel- 
lectual overwork soon exhausts the physical system, and 
they sink into any early grave. The child who is too del- 
icate to labor with its muscles has a very poor prospect for 
successful brain labor. 

Parents should study the capacities of their children, and 
not force upon them an occupation for which they have no 
natural fitness or inclination. Most children manifest some 
capacities much stronger than others, and they are most 
likely to succeed in occupations that require the use of their 
prominent capabilities. The great tendency of the age is 
toward some business that will make money rapidly; and 
yet there are very few of our business men who do not be- 
come bankrupt at some period of life, and still fewer who 
retire from business with a fortune, or even a competency. 
There is probably more certainty of success in an agricul- 
tural life than in any other, and our farmers' sons would 
do well to consider the risks and uncertainties of mercantile 
life before leaving the less brilliant but more sure and in- 
dependent occupation of their fathers. 

The business of agriculture affords abundant room for 
the use of even a collegiate education — much more than is 
afforded by most other kinds of business ; and when a rea- 
sonable amount of energy and intellect are brought to bear 
upon it, it yields a sure and large return for the capital in- 



THE CEREBELLUM. 347 

vested. Science has done much, and will do still more, for 
the farmer, and the farmer will find a wide field for the 
display and cultivation of his scientifical attainments. 

In the moral training of a child, punishment is often 
required; and this is inflicted for two purposes: first, as a 
penalty for disobedience of authority — and, in such cases, 
the account is balanced as soon as the penalty is paid ; and, 
secondly, as a means of preventing a repetition of the of- 
fense, and with a view to reform the offender. In this 
broader and more benevolent sense we term it correction. 

The natural right and duty of parents to correct the fol- 
lies and faults of their children is admitted by all, but there 
is much difference of opinion as to the best plan to accom- 
plish the desired ends. The general idea, which appears 
to have governed parents, teachers — in fact, nearly all who 
hold authority over others, whether in the family, the school, 
or over an entire nation — is that their subjects shall submit 
to the laws which are laid down before them, or, if they 
disobey, they shall be punished. The motive held out for 
obedience is the fear of suffering, and the principal faculty 
to which it appeals is that of caution, and the fact is uni- 
versal that it has proved ineffectual, with energetic minds, 
as a preventive of crime. Many of our w T orst criminals 
possess great energy, and succeed in accomplishing great 
crimes. Many of them have already paid the legal pen- 
alties of fine and imprisonment, and still live under the 
constant danger of arrest and further and severer penalties ; 
yet this is not sufficient to deter them from the continued 
employment of their faculties in a criminal direction. Cau- 
tiousness, watchfulness, and secretiveness — each animal fac- 
ulties — are stimulated into increased action, both to avoid 
detection and to escape punishment, but no moral or spe- 
cially human sentiment is influenced; neither is there in 
the nature of the punishment, nor in its mode of applica- 



348 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

tion, any thing of a reformatory or elevating character, 
that would lead to the employment of the energies through 
the higher and more humanizing faculties. 

Many of the faults of children are committed through 
though tlessness, and many through ignorance. Of the latter 
class, punishment would be unjust until after proper in- 
struction has been given ; of the former, very mild correc- 
tions will usually suffice to prevent much repetition. 

No parent, when under the influence of anger, should 
ever punish a child. Children are very keen observers, 
and will readily detect the motives which prompt the par- 
ents. Anger in the parent will rouse resentfulness, com- 
bativeness, destructiveness, and stubbornness in the child, 
and will often directly prompt a repetition of the offense, 
or of some other one, for spite or revenge. 

Every punishment should be given with a view to the 
reformation of the child. The nature and consequences of 
the fault should be fully explained. He should be taught 
how to avoid it in the future, and how to expend his power 
in a right direction ; and also that the same faculties whose 
action, under improper motives, had led him into error, 
would also be highly useful when directed properly. Cor- 
rect motives for proper action should be set before him, and 
his powers of perception and reason brought to bear upon 
them, until he can perceive the right from the wrong. The 
penalty should be as mild as the nature of the case will per- 
mit, particularly for early offenses. Errors of judgment and 
faults of ignorance (no matter how great) should receive 
only reprimands, with instructions, counsel, and warning. 
Accidents and faults that could not have been avoided 
should never be punished. 

No unduly severe punishment should ever be inflicted. 
Children are pretty well aware when a punishment is too 
great for an offense, and severe penalties tend to harden a 



THE CEREBELLUM. 349 

child, to outrage its sense of justice, and to provoke retal- 
iation. 

Promises of punishment for the repetition of any offense, 
or for a fault that has been expressly forbidden, should be 
faithfully performed. Why should a parent lie to a child, 
or encourage a repetition of faults, by failure to punish when 
the child knows it is deserved? 

The credulity of children should never be imposed upon, 
nor attempts made to frighten them into obedience by tales 
of ghosts, " black men in the dark," etc. Some children 
are brave enough to try and find the " black man" in the 
dark closet or cellar, and they soon come to understand the 
deception, and to have a contempt for it ; others are made 
cowardly and fearful, and the dark will have terrors for 
them that even the mature judgment of older years can not 
entirely overcome. The discovery of the untruth by a child 
produces a lack of confidence in its parents' word that may 
extend to any other subject. It has a particularly unfavor- 
able effect upon the religious element of a child's character, 
and is productive of skepticism in older years.* 

Parents and teachers should always be consistent in their 
punishments — never excusing nor permitting at one time a 

* Children who have had their ears filled and their fears excited 
with ghost stories, have been frightened into convulsions, loss of 
reason, or even to death, by being shut up in dark places for the 
purpose of punishment, and told that some terrible imaginary object 
of fear that was in there would seize them ; or by some scarey im- 
age placed where the child would suddenly come upon it, etc. It 
is not enough that parents should refrain from telling such foolish 
and injurious tales, or prohibit the nurse or others from doing so. 
As the children will almost certainly hear them from some source, 
parents should make it a special point to inform them in advance 
of the falsehoods and deceptions of this character that will probably 
be attempted upon them, so that, when they do hear the tales, they 
will know they are fictions, and will not be injured by them. 



350 THALEIA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

fault that they would punish at another ; and should never 
encourage nor allow in young children a disobedience that 
they would punish at a more advanced age. It is certainly 
very inconsistent in parents to induce wrong actions in chil- 
dren by a bad example, and afterward punish them for fol- 
lowing it. 

We have frequently seen parents and nurses teach a child 
to strike a chair or other inanimate object against which it 
may have hurt itself. This is a first step in the cultivation 
of the spirit of retaliation — a fault that will certainly re- 
quire correction when the child becomes a little older. 

The really best course that we can suggest is for parents 
to correct the faults of their children in advance, by cor- 
recting themselves before they become parents. They should 
remember that, when they are correcting their children, they 
are very frequently punishing that which represents their 
own secret conditions. A large majority of the faults in 
young children spring directly from organic defects, lia- 
bilities and proclivities for which parents are morally re- 
sponsible, and it is their duty to treat them with leniency, 
forbearance, mildness, patience, and perseverance, and yet 
with consistent firmness. 

A very effectual mode of correction is restriction of priv- 
ileges, particularly those which the child values most, such 
as setting a task for it upon a play-day, keeping it from 
its usual playmates, and stinting its pleasures or its food, 
etc. We have known standing in the corner, with the face 
to the wall for an hour, to have a better effect than a dozen 
whippings. 

Parents should be very cautious that any mode of cor- 
rection they may adopt for the prevention or cure of one 
fault does not result in establishing others — as by causing 
feelings of revenge, hate, duplicity, retaliation, contempt, 
loss of confidence in the justice, kindness, or truthfulness 



THE CEREBELLUM. 351 

of their parent, and a withdrawal of the love and affection 
of the child. 

The mode of correction should be adapted to the organ- 
ization of the child, or the parents may, by an injudicious 
course, confirm the faults they strive to overcome. Some 
children may be shamed into good behavior, others can be 
most readily influenced through their ambitious faculties; 
some through their consciences, some through their love 
of their parents, some through their appetites and love for 
pleasure or enjoyments, some through pure selfishness, and 
occasionally there is one on whom nothing but actual pain 
will suffice. If parents will fully comprehend that it re- 
quires a display of power to perform a bad action as well 
as a good one, that bad actions result from a misdirection 
of power which would be useful if properly directed, and 
then teach their children how to act properly, and place be- 
fore them proper motives for good actions, they will rarely 
fail of accomplishing a good result. 

Every correction should be accompanied with a reason 
why it is given; and it should be one that the child can 
comprehend and the calm reflection of the parent approve. 
In this way only can the true end of correction, the refor- 
mation of the offender, be attained. 

We are not in favor of a strictly literal rendering of the 
"spare-the-rod-spoil-the-child" maxim. There are other 
and more efficient rods for most cases than those which 
grow on the bushes, and the too free use of the literal rod 
has done more injury than benefit to many children. It 
should be the last resort in the majority of cases. One 
whipping may spoil some children, and a thousand may 
not really improve some others. There is now and then a 
child who can only be reached through its nerves of phys- 
ical sensation, while the mere sight of a rod is sufficient 
for others. We knew one case where a whole school was 
31 



352 THALETA — WOMANHOOD. [CHAP. 31. 

wonderfully benefited by a sound flogging inflicted upon 
the most incorrigible offender. A new teacher had taken 
the place of one who was unable to maintain order, and 
he very wisely took hold of the leader with a suddenness 
and energy that astonished him and the balance of the 
school. 

There are some in whom a whipping or other punish- 
ment in the presence of others will destroy every feeling 
of pride, ambition, and self-respect, and produce in them 
a feeling of " I-do nVcare-what-becomes-of-me-now ; " and 
there are others who will come up for their daily chastise- 
ment with a smile of indifference. They feel that the whip- 
ping pays the debt, and will resume their mischief as soon 
as they take their seat. We once heard a mother say, " I 
know my boy won't lie, for I have whipped him more 
than a hundred times for it." There was no doubt that 
the mother told the truth in regard to the whippings, but 
she knew that the child had told a very considerable lie at 
that time, and he knew that his mother would sustain him 
in it. We strongly suspect that she has not yet cured him 
of his habit of falsifying the truth. 

Punishment by whipping is an appeal only to the ani- 
mal nature, and not to the moral, intellectual, or affectional, 
and we hope to see it abandoned as a rule, and resorted to 
only in those exceptional cases where neither the intellect 
can perceive, nor the sentiments appreciate, a punishment 
founded on enlightened justice, benevolence, and love. 

There are few children who have not some strings in 
their nature that will respond to a gentle influence and 
give out sweet music; and there are very many on whom 
the rude force of severe coporeal punishment will produce 
only harsh discord or injury to the strings which would 
sound full harmony if properly attuned and touched by 
the gentle hand of love. 



GLOSSARY 



MEDICAL TERMS USED IN THIS WORK. 



ABNORMAL— Unnatural. 

ABSCESS— An internal ulcer. 

ABSORBENTS— Mrnute vessels that take 
up fluids. 

ACCOUCHEUR— One who presides at 
childbirth. 

ACETABULUM— The socket on the hip- 
bone that receives the head of the 
thigh-bone. 

ACRID— Corroding ; destroying. 

ACUTE DISEASE-Severe, and of short 
continuance. 

ADJUNCTIVE-Joined to. 

ADULT— A grown person. 

ALBUMEN— A substance like the white 
of egg. 

ALKALI— A substance of the nature of 
soda or potash. 

ALIMENTARY— Pertaining to food. 

ALVINE— Pertaining to the bowels. 

AMAUROSIS— A form of blindness. 

AMENORRHEA. (See page 95.) 

ANASTOMOSIS — Communication be- 
tween vessels. 

ANATOMY— The science of the organs ■■ 
of the body; their positions, relations, 
etc. 

ANEURISM— A local enlargement of an j 
artery. 

ANODYNE— Soothing ; Quieting. 

ANTISEPTIC — Preventing decomposi 
tion. 

ANTISPASMODIC. (See page 260.) 

AORTA— The great artery. 



APERIENT— Mildly cathartic. 
APHTHA. (See page 172.) 
AROMATIC-Giving off odors. 
ASPHYXIA— Suspended animation, 
ASSIMILATION. (See page 48.) 
ASTHENIC- Weak ; debilitated. 
ASTRINGENT. (See page 268.) 
ATOM. (See page 13.) 
ATROPHY-Wasting of flesh. 
AURICLE. (See page 49.) 

BALLOTEMENT-The pushing of the fin- 
gers against the os uteri, to ascertain 
if a fetus is in the uterus. The fetus 
floats upward, and its descent can be 
felt by the finger. 

BILE— The'flr.id secreted by the liver. 

BILIARY— Pertaining to bile, or to the 
liver. 

BILIOUS— A name given to one of the 
temperaments ; also to derangements 
of the liver. 

BRONCHIA— Air tubes leading to the 
lungs. 

CALCULI- -Stones in the bladder. 
CAPILLARIES. (See page 49.) 
CARDIALGIA— Pain in the region of the 

heart. 
CARIES— Decomposition of bone. 
CARMINATIVE— A medicine to relieve 

wind-colic and griping. 
CATARRH— Discharge of fluid from a 

mucous membrane. 



(353) 



354 



GLOSSABY. 



CATHARTIC. (See page 248.) 

CATHETER— A small tube used in draw- 
ing urine from the bladder. 

CELLS— Minute sacs filled with fluid. All 
organic structures are cellular at first. 

CELLULAR— Composed of cells. 

CEREBELLUM. (See page 314.) 

CEREBRAL— Pertaining to the brain. 

CEREBRUM. (See page 314.) 

CHOLAGOGUE. (See page 249.) 

CHRONIC— Of long continuance. 

CHYLE. (See page 48.) 

CHYME. (See page 48.) 

CICATRIX— A scar. 

CLAIR-AUDIANT — Abnormally acute 
hearing. 

CLAIRVOYANT— Seeing things that the 
ordinary vision can not perceive. 

COLL APSE— Falling together ; sinking. 

COLON— The large intestine. 

COMA— A deep, heavy sleep, from which 
it is extremely difficult to arouse a 
person. 

COMATOSE— Resembling coma. 

CONCEPTION— The beginning of the for- 
mation of a human being in utero. 

CONCRETIONS— Stones in the bladder. 

CONGENITAL— That which one has at 
birth. 

CONGESTION. (See note, page 244.) 

CONSTIPATION— Inactivity of the bow- 
els, with slow or difficult evacuations. 

OONVULSIONS-Spasms; fits. 

CORROSIVE— Gradually eating or wear- 
ing away. 

COSTIVENESS. (See Constipation.) 

DEBILITY— Weakness; feebleness. 

DECIDUOUS— Falling out or off. 

DECOCTION— Medicine prepared by boil- 
ing in water. 

DELIRIUM— Wandering of the mind. 

DEMULCENT— Soft mucilaginous sub- 
stances, like elm, comfrey, and flax- 
seed. 

DEPLETING— Weakening ; exhausting. 

DETERMINATION— A crowding, as of 
blood to the brain, etc. 

DEVELOPMENT— Growth; increase. 

DIAGNOSIS— An opinion or decision re- 
specting the present state or character 
of disease. 

DIAPHORETIC. (See page 256.) 

DIAPHRAGM— A partition between the 
chest and abdomen. 

DIATHESIS— A constitutional liability 
or predisposition. 

DIGESTION — Conversion of food into 
chyme and chyle. 



DILATATION— Expansion. 

DIURETIC. (See page 254.) 

DRASTIC— Severely purging. 

DUODENUM — The first six to twelve 
inches of the intestines. 

DYSMENORRCEA — Painful menstrua- 
tion. 

DYSPEPSIA— A deranged, weakened, or 
diseased condition of the organs of di- 
gestion. 

EM ANATION— That which is given off by 
the body. 

EMENAGOGUE— A medicine that will aid 
menstruation. 

EMESIS— Vomiting. 

ENCEPHALIC— Pertaining to the brain ; 
also a name given to one of the tem- 
peraments. (See page 334.) 

ENCEPHALON— The entire brain. 

ENEMA— An injection; a clyster. 

EPIDEMIC— Any form of disease arising 
from a wide-spread cause and affecting 
a number of people at one time. 

ESCHAROTIC— Caustic; destroying to 
the flesh. 

ESCULENT-Good for food. 

EXCORIATION— A partial destruction 
of the skin. 

EXCREMENTITIOUS-Pertaining to the 
evacuations of the bowels. 

EXCRETIONS. (See page 47.) 

EXCRETORY. (See page 47.) 

EXHALANTS— Vessels that cast out flu- 
ids. 

EXPANSIBILITY - Capacity of exten- 
sion. 

EXPECTORANT. (See page 259.) 

EXUDATIONS— Fluids cast off from a 
surface. 

FARINACEOUS-Starchy. 

FAUCES— The back part of the mouth, at 

the root of the tongue. 
FEBRILE— Feverish. 
FECAL— Pertaining to feces. 
FECES, or FAECES— Evacuations of the 

bowels. 
FEMUR— The thigh bone. 
FETAL— Pertaining to the fetus. 
FETOR— An unpleasant odor. 
FETUS, or FCETUS— The unborn child. 
FISTULA— A tubular opening in any soft 

part of the body, with a constant dis- 

chai*ge. 
FLATUS— Wind or gas in the bowels. 
FLEXIBILITY— Suppleness ; limberness. 
FOMENTATION— Moistened herbs, etc., 

applied hot to the surface. 



GLOSSARY. 



355 



EONTANELLE— The "soft spot" on the 

top of an infant's head. 
FORAMEN OVALE. (See page 137.) 
FUNCTION— The natural action of an 

organ. 

GANGRENE. (See note, page 244.) 

GASTRIC— Pertaining to the stomach. 

GELATINE— Jelly. 

GESTATION— The period of pregnancy. 

GLANDS— Organs which separate from 
the blood any fluid to be used in the 
system. 

GLOTTIS— The upper end of the wind- 
pipe. 

GRANULATION — Small, grain-like 

points of newly-forming tissue that 
appear on the surface of a healing sore 
or wound. 

GREGARIOUS— In herds, flocks, or com- 
panies. 

HEMORRHAGE— Bleeding. 

HEMORRHOIDS-Piles. 

HERMAPHRODITISM-Two sexes, male 
and female, in one person. 

HETEROGENEOUS— Made of various ar- 
ticles ; mixed. 

HYDATIDS-Sniall sacs of watery fluid, 
usually in clusters. 

HYDRAGOGUE. (See page 249. ) 

HYDRO-CARBON - A chemical com- 
pound of hydrogen and carbon. 

HYDROGEN— The lightest known gas. 

H YPERTROPH Y - Abnormal enlarge- 
ment. 

HYPOCHONDRIA-Melancholy. 

HYPOTHESIS — A supposition, from 
which to reason. 

HYSTERIA— A nervous affection; hys- 
terics. 

IDIOCY— A great lack of intellect. 

IDIOT— One almost without intellect. 

IMBECILITY-Feebleness of intellect. 

IMMUNITY-Protection ; safety. 

IMPORTUNATE— That which is hard to 
be resisted ; forcing. 

IMPOTEXCY— Loss of power or ability. 

INCOMPATIBILITY. (See page 62.) 

INDICATIONS-Signs. 

INERTIA— Inaction ; sluggishness. 

INFLAMMATION. (See note, page 244.) 

INFLUX— A flowing in. 

INFUSION— Medicine prepared with boil- 
ing water, as common tea is for the 
table. 

INHERENT— Naturally belonging to. 



INJECTION— Something thrown in; an 

enema. 
INORDINATE-More than common. 
INSALIVATION-Mixing with saliva. 

LACTEAL. (See page 48.) 

LASSITUDE— Debility ; weakness. 

LAXATIVE— Loosening to the bowels. 

LESION— Injury— a wound ; a hurt. 

LEUCORRHGEA. (See page 104.) 

LIGAMENT— The tissue that connects 
the bones at their joints. 

LOCHIA. (See page 153.) 

LUBRICATE— To moisten or oil, so as to 
prevent friction. 

LYMPHATIC-A name applied to a tem- 
perament; also to the vessels of the 
body that convey a colorless fluid 
called lymph. 

MACERATE— To let stand in water until 
dissolved. 

MANIA— Insanity ; madness. 

MANIPULATE -To operate with the 
hands. 

MASTICATE— To chew. 

MEMBRANES— Thin, expanded tissues 
covering the body and its separate 
organs, and lining its internal cavi- 
ties and passages. 

3IENINGES— The membranes that cover 
the brain. 

MENSES— The monthly evacuations. 

MESENTERY— The membrane that in- 
cludes the bowels and fastens them to 
the spine. 

MIASMA— Invisible poisonous matter in 
the atmosphere. 

MONOMANIA— Insanity on a single sub- 
ject. 

MORBID— Literally meaning dead ; com- 
monly used for diseased ; unhealthy ; 
unnatural. 

MORBIFIC— Producing disease or death. 

MORTIFICATION— The death of a part 
of a living body. 

MUCILAGE— Gum dissolved in water. 

MUCOUS MEMBRANE. (See page 44.) 

MUCUS — The secretion of the mucous 
membrane. 

NARCOTIC— A poison that deadens the 
power of feeling and action, and, when 
given in sufficient quantities, will pro- 
duce death. 

NARES— The nostrils. 

NAUSEA— Sickness at the stomach. 

NEURALGIA— Pain in the nerves. 

NORMAL— Natural. 



356 



GLOSSARY. 



OPIATES— Medicines containing opinin. 

ORGANIC. (See page 19.) 

ORGANIZED. (See page 19.) 

OS— A mouth ; also a bone. 

OS INNOMINATUM— The hip bone; a 

part of the pelvis. 
OS UTERI— The mouth or lower opening 

of the uterus. 

PANCREAS— One of the abdominal or- 
gans. In animals it is called the 
sweet-bread. 

PARALYSIS — Palsy; loss of nervous 
power. 

PAROTID GLAND-One of the glands 
which secrete saliva. It is situated 
under the ear. 

PAROXYSM— Periodical intervals in an 
attack of disease, during which the 
symptoms are more severe than ordi- 
nary. 

PARTURITION-Childbirth. 

PATHOLOGY— The science of disease. 

PEDICLE— A supporting stem. 

PELVIS— The bony basin which encloses 
the bladder, rectum, and internal sex- 
ual organs. 

PERINEUM— The space between the va- 
gina and the anus. 

PERISTALTIC MOVEMENTS - Those 
contractions of the muscular coats of 
the bowels by which their contents are 
moved onward. 

PERITONEUM — The membrane that 
lines the internal walls of the abdo- 
men, and is the external covering of 
all the organs within it. 

PER SE— Of itself. 

PHARYNX— The upper part of the aesoph- 
agus or gullet. 

PHLEGM— Mucus, etc., cast out from the 
throat and lungs. 

PHYSIOLOGY-The laws of nature or 
health. 

PLACENTA— The after-birth. 

PLEURA — The internal lining of the 
chest and the external covering of 
the lungs. 

PLEURISY— Inflammation of the pleura. 

POLARITY. (See page 16.) 

POST MORTEM— After death. 

PRECOCITY. (See page 342.) 

PREMATURE— Before the proper time; 
too soon. 

PREMONITORY— Warning. 

PRESENTATION— Appearance. 

PROCLIVITY— Tendency ; natural incli- 
nation. 



PROCREATION — Generation and pro- 
duction of young. 

PROGENITAL — Pertaining to progeny 
or offspring. 

PROGNOSIS— A prediction as to what 
will be the termination of any case 
of disease. 

PROLAPSUS ANI— Protrusion or falling, 
of the lower bowel. 

PROLAPSUS UTERI - Falling of th< 
womb. 

PROLIFIC— Fruitful. 

PROPHYLACTIC— A preventive of dis- 
ease. 

PSEUDO-MEMBRANEOUS-False mem- 
branes. 

PUBES— The lower and front portion of 
the pelvis, between the hips. 

PUBIC— Pertaining to the pubes. 

PULMONARY— Pertaining to the lungs. 

PUSTULE — Small swellings containing 
matter; pimples. 

PUTRESCENT-Decomposing ; decaying. 

RECIPIENT — One who receives any 
thing. 

RECTUM— The lower bowel. 

RECUPERATE — To renew; to gain 
strength. 

RETRACT— To draw in. 

RETROCESSION — Disappearing in- 
wardly. 

SALIVA— Spittle ; the secretion of the 

salivary gland for moistening the food. 
SANGUINEOUS-Bloody. 
SECRETORY. (See page 47.) 
SEDENTARY— Quiet ; inactive; sitting. 
SERUM— The thin, transparent part of 

the blood. 
SIMULTANEOUSLY-A11 at the same 

time. 
SINUS— A narrow, deep cavity leading to* 

an abscess. 
SLOUGHING. (See note, page 244.) 
SOLUTION— A substance dissolved in a 

liquid. 
SPLEEN— One of the abdominal organs ; 

the milt. 
STIMULANT. (See page 262.) 
STRANGULATED HERNIA-A rupture 

of the bowels, in which the circulation 

is stopped by compression. 
STRANGURY— Pain at the neck of the 

bladder, with difficulty or inability 

of passing urine. 
STUPOR— A condition bordering on in- 
sensibility. 



GLOSSAKY. 



357 



SUBSIDENCE— A decreasing, or disap- 
pearing gradually. 

SUPPOSITO.RY— A large pill or bolus to 
be introduced into the rectum. 

SUPPURATION— Turning to pus or mat- 
ter and passing off. 

TANGIBLE— That which can be touched. 

TEMPERAMENT— A peculiar but strict- 
ly physiological order of organization, 
that may be known by its form and 
mode of action. 

TEMPERAMENTAL COMPATIBILI- 
TY. (See page 62.) 

TENSION— Tightness. 

TEPID— About blood-heat, or lukewarm. 

THORACIC DUCT. (See page 48.) 

TINCTURE— Spirit containing medical 
substances in solution. 

TISSUE— The texture of any organ or 
portion of the body. 

TONICS. (See page 272.) 

TONSILS— The little almond-shaped bod- 
ies in the throat. 

TUMID— Swollen ; enlarged. 

TUMOR-A swelling. 

TYPHOID FEYER-A weak, low grade 
of fever, with great obstructions to 
Tital action. 



ULCERATION— A running sore. 
UMBILICUS-The navel. 
URETHRA-The urinary canal. 
UTERINE— Pertaining to the womb. 
UTERUS— The womb. 
UVULA— The projecting portion of tho 
soft palate. 

VAGINA — The canal leading from the 
vulva, or external opening, to the 
uterus. 

VARICOSE VEINS— Enlarged veins. 

VENA CAVA. (See pages 48 and 118.) 

VENESECTION -Blood-letting as per- 
formed by the physician. 

VENOUS— Pertaining to the veins. 

VENTRICLE. (See page 49.) 

VESICLE— Small watery blisters or sacs. 

VIABLE— Capable of living. 

VICARIOUS — Acting for another: as 
where one organ performs the office 
which pertains to another. 

VIRUS— Poisonous matter. 

VISCERA— Internal organs. 

VITIATED -Rendered unhealthy. 

VOLITION-The will. 

VOLUNTARY-Under the control of tha 
will. 



THE NATURAL HISTORY 

OF THE 

1UMAN TEMPERAMENTS: 

THEIR LAWS IN RELATION TO MARRIAGE, 

AND THE FATAL CONSEQUENCES OF THEIR VIOLATION TO PROGENY ; 
WITH THE INDICATIONS OF VIGOROUS LIFE AND LONGEVITY: 



FOLLOWED BY A 



FUGITIVE ESSAY 






PROTECTION OF SOCIETY AGAINST CRIME. 



By the Late PROF. W. BYRD POWELL, M. D. 



SECOND EDITION. 

EDITED AND PUBLISHED BY HIS SUCCESSORS, 

PROFS. A. T. & T. H, KECKELER, 
CINCINNATI, OHIO. 



246 rages; Price, $2.50. 

SENT, ACCOKDING TO OKDEK, ON HECEIPT OP PB.ICE. 



PROFS. A. T. & T. H. KECKELER, 

SUCCESSORS OF THE LATE PROF. W. BYRD POWELL, AND POSSESSORS, BY HIS WILL, OF HIS 
PHRENOLOGICAL CABINET OF CRANIA, ILLUSTRATIONS, ETC., 

Are engaged in Lecturing upon and teaching the Science of the Human Tempera- 
ments, the Laws of Physiological Marriage, Physiology, Phrenology, Pathognomy,. 
and kindred sciences, and will give instruction to ladies and gentlemen, singly or in 
classes, upon the above-named subjects, at No. 152 Broadway, Cincinnati, 0. 



3 47 7 



Ii 




H gn 

MO— H 

HH mMmm WSSSl 

H U H 



H 



faflflrgjgt 



BBBHHififlRlHI^HB 

HnSHHHH H 









mm HH SHI ?% 







H 



BIB 



P 



■ 

■ h r 

mi HH I 




HH 



